Faculty 0F Science

THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

HANDBOOK 1973

PUBLISHED By THE UNIVERSITY In exceptional circumstances the Council is empowered to suspend subjects and to vary the syllabus of a subject. Any such alteration to the details of subjects will be announced on departmental notice-boards by the beginning of Orientation Week, 1973. TABLE OF CONTENTS

Officers of the University 5 Faculty of Science Administration 5 Faculty of Science 6 Teaching and Research Staff 8

CHAPTER 1 General Information Dates 17 Application for Selection 17 Approval of Course 17 Enrolment 18 Courses 18 Policies Governing Admission 1973 20 University Principles of Selection 21 Matriculation Roll 24 Credit for Work Done at Technical Colleges 24 Attendance at the University 28 External Studies 28 Evening Lectures 28 Fees 28 Examinations 29 Graduation 29 Student Counselling and Housing 29 Appointments Board 30 Student Facilities 30 Science Studentá Society 31 Colleges of the University 31 University Halls of Residence 32

CHAPTER 2 Financial Assistance Undergraduate Awards 33 Grants from Research Funds 34 Summary of Awards 35

CHAPTER 3 Regulations for Degrees in Science Degree of Bachelor of Science 44 Unit Courses 45 Approval of Course 83 Degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours 84 Degree of Master of Science 84 Degree of Doctor of Science 87

CHAPTER 4 Degree of Bachelor of Science: Details 88 CHAPTER 5 Degree of Bachelor of Science (Honours) 238 CHAPTER 6 Degree of Master of Science 250 CHAPTER 7 Degree of Bachelor of Science (Education) 257

CHAPTER 8 Science Degrees li Forestry 295

CHAPTER 9 Science Degrees in Optometry 314 Summary of Fees 329

OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY•

Chancellor, L. W. WEICKHARDT. Vice-Chancellor, PROFESSOR D. P. DERHAM.

Deputy Vice-Chancellor, PROFESSOR D. E. CARO.

Vice-Principal, R. D. MARGINSON.

Registrar, A. T. J. BELL. Librarian, K. A. LODEWYCKS.

Offiсег-(n-Charge, Students' Records, E. FINN. Fees Officer, R. H. SHUREY. Director, Student Health Service, DR H. D. G. HETHERINGTON.

Student Counsellor, J. W. FREDERICK.

Secretary, Appointments Board, K. GRAVELL.

Sports Union Secretary, W. K. TICKNER.

FACULTY OF SCIENCE ADMINISTRATION

Dean, PROFESSOR C. A. RAMM

Associate Deans, PROFESSOR G. BURNSTOCK PROFESSOR D. W. CAMERON PROFESSOR F. J. R. HIRD ACTING PROFESSOR R. J. W. McLAUGHLIN PROFESSOR B. M. SPICER PROFESSOR E. J. WILLIAMS

Assistant to the Dean, DR VALDA M. McRAE. Seconded Assistants to the Dean, W. RYE DR J. W. G. WIGNALL.

Secretary, Science, R. BURNET.

Assistant Secretary, P. G. MORGAN.

в A Complete list of Administrativв Officera may b. found 1п he Unlveraity Свlвпди FACULTY OF SCIENCE Dean—PROFESSOR RAMM Associate Dean—PROFESSOR BURNSTOCK Associate Dean—PROFESSOR CAMERON Associate Dean—PROFESSOR HIRD Associate Dean—ACTING PROFESSOR McLAUGHLIN Associate Dean—PROFESSOR SPICER Associate Dean—PROFESSOR WILLIAMS THE VICE-CHANCELLOR THE DEPUTY VICE-CHANCELLOR

Representative of the Standing Committee of Convocation: MR R. E. PAUL

Members Ex Ofticlo:

Members of Council who are graduates in Science: Mr L. W. WEICKHARDT (Chancellor) EMERITUS PROFESSOR WRIGHT (Deputy Chancellor) DR J. G. CAMPBELL MRS MARY-JANE GETHING DR P. G. LAW DR N. B. LEWIS

Professors and non-professorial heads of departments: PROFESSOR ANDREWS PROFESSOR AUSTIN PROFESSOR SOLOTIN PROFESSOR BRADLEY PROFESSOR BREARLEY PROFESSORBUCHANAN PROFESSOR BURNSTOCK PROFESSOR CAMERON PROFESSOR CHAMBERS MR J. H. CHINNER PROFESSOR CHRISTIE DR B. L. COLE ACTING PROFESSOR CRAVEN PROFESSOR DARIAN-SMITH PROFESSOR DAY ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR DUNKIN MISS DIANA J. DYASON MR W. FLOWER (Acting) PROFESSOR HAMMOND PROFESSOR HARGREAVES PROFESSOR HERON PROFESSOR HIRD PROFESSOR HOPPER MR E. K. HORWOOD PROFESSOR LEACH PROFESSOR LOVE PROFESSOR LOVERING

6 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

PROFESSOR McKELLAR PROFESSOR MOORHOUSE MR B. T. MURPHY ACTING PROFESSOR O'DONNELL PROFESSOR PITTARD DR U. RADOK PROFESSOR RAND PROFESSOR RAY PROFESSOR ROSENBLAT PROFESSOR SPICER PROFESSOR THOMPSON PROFESSOR TURNER PROFESSOR WEARING PROFESSOR D. O. WHITE PROFESSOR M. J. D. WHITE PROFESSOR WHITTON PROFESSOR WILLIAMS ACTING PROFESSOR WOOD PROFESSOR WORNER

Members of the stall of departments nominated by Faculty DR C. G. BARRACLOUGH DR G. D. CAMPBELL DR D. J. DEWHURST DR F. H. DRUMMOND DR S. L. DUIGAN MR I. A. EVANS DR В. F. HOSKINS MR C. KERR GRANT DR W. J. LANG DR J. M. LAWLOR DR B. T. O. LEE DR G. J. F. LEGGE DR C. D. McKENZIE DR MARY T. MCQUILLAN DR P. T. McTIGUE DR NANCY F. MILLIS MR R. T. MATHEWS DR T. F. NEALES DR J. P. RYAN DR O. P. SINGLETON MR J. K. STRACHAN DR M. N. THOMPSON MR E. L. UNTHANK DR J. W. G. WIGNALL DR G. F. W. YEO

Other members nominated annually: DR W. G. CREWTHER DR K. T. H. FARRER MR J. KOLM MR D. M. McDONELL DR P. F. NELSON PROFESSOR STUBES

7 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

TEACHING AND RESEARCH STAFF Staff are listed alphabetically within categories, not according to seniority. Indicates part-time staff. t Indicates associated staff. Botany Full-time Officers: Professors JOHN STEWART TURNER, MA PhD Cantab. MSc FAA THOMAS CARRICK CHAMBERS, MSc N.Z. & Molb. PhD syd. Readers TOM FINNIS NEALES, MA Oxon. PhD Lind. КINGSLEY SPENCER ROWAN, PhD Cantab. M.Sc Senior Lecturers DAVID HUNGERFORD ASHTON, BSc PhD PETER MUECKE ATTIWILL, BScF PhD AssocDipFor Cres. MARGARET BLACKWOOD, MBE PhD Cantab. MSc DONALD MALCOLM CALDER, BSc Cant. MSc N.Z. PhD Wales SOPHIE CHARLOTTE DUCKER, MSc SUZANNE LAWLESS DUIGAN, PhD Cantab. MSc HARING JOHANNES SWART, DSc Utrecht Lecturer GRETNA MARGARET WESTE, MSc PhD Senior Demonstrators ROBERT JOHN KING, BSc DipEd OLIVE BESSIE LAWSON, BSc PhD Aberd. ILMA GRACE STONE, MSc PhD Demonstrator JOY MARGARET RUSSELL, BSc R'dg MSc Birm. Associated Staff: Keeper of the Herbarium VACANT

Chemistry Full-time Officers: Professor of Physical Chemistry ALAN STUART BUCHANAN, BSc PhD FRAC' Professor of Organic Chemistry DONALD WILLIAM CAMERON. MA ScD Cantab. MSc Old PhD Manc. FRAC' Professor of Inorganic Chemistry VACANT Reader In Organic Chemistry RAYMOND GREAYER COOKE, DSc Adel. MSc FRAC' Readers in Inorganic Chemistry THOMAS ALOYSIUS O'DONNELL, MSc PhD DSc FRAC' RAY COLTON, PhD Lind. ARCS DIC DSc Senior Lecturers in Physical Chemistry COLIN GRANT BARRACLOUGH, PhD Lind. MSc AMTC ARACI RONALD COOPER, BSc PhD Leeds ROBERT ARROL CRAIG, DPhil Oxon. MSc RICHARD DAVID HARCOURT, PhD Mon. BSc THOMAS WILLIAM HEALY, PhD Col. MSc ARACI FACULTY OF SCIENCE

ALAN ARTHUR HUMFFRAY, BSc Syd. PhD PETER TREMBATH McTiGUE, DPhil Oxon. MSc ARACI NORMAN HENRY OLVER, MSc ARACI FRANCIS EDWARD TRELOAR, BSc PhD Adel. Senior Lecturers in Organic Chemistry REGINALD BASIL JOHNS, MSc N.Z. & Melb. PhD Cantab. ARACI JOHN MICHAEL LAWLOR, BSc PhD Lind. QUENTIN NOEL PORTER, MSc PhD ARACI EMILY FAY MORRISON STEPHENSON, PhD Glas. MSc ARACI Senior Lecturers in Inorganic Chemistry ALLAN TERENCE CASEY, BSc Manit. MSc Br.Col. & Melb. PhD Cantab. BERNARD FOSTER HOSKINS, BSc PhD N.S.W. ASTC ARACI RICHARD ROBSON, BA DPhil Oxon. Lecturers in Physical Chemistry JOAN TREASURE RADFORD, BSc PETER JAMES THISTLEWAITE, MSc PhD Lecturer in Inorganic Chemistry WARREN WILLIAM FEE, BSc PhD Adel. Lecturers in Organic Chemistry IAN CAMPBELL CALDER, BSc PhD Adel. ARACI DAVID PATTERSON KELLY, BSc DipAppChem. N.S.W. PhD ARACI Assistant Lecturer in Physical Chemistry HEATHER MARGARET SANDERS, BSc Syd. Assistant Lecturer in Organic Chemistry MARGARITA MINGIN, MSc PhD ARACI Senior Demonstrators ALAN MAXWELL BOND, BSC PhD JOAN ALICE CHONG, MSc ARACI JOHN GEOFFREY DOWN, Inc PhD JANICE ELIZABETH GARRARD, BSc RAYMOND KWONG YAN HO, BSc Syd. MSc PhD N.S.W. KAMALAKAR RAGHUNATH JOSH1, MSc Poona PhD W.A. ARACI BARRY THOMAS PRATT, BSc JOHN ALBERT BOWDEN, BSc

Associated Staff: Research Fellows MICHAEL DAVID SIDELL, BSc Calif. PhD М.I. Т. TERENCE EDWARD PEEL, BSc Sir G Wms PhD Mcl PATRICK JAMES WILLIAMS, BSc PhD N.S.W. Honorary Research Fellows GEORGE WINTER, MSc N.S.W. PhD DSc JOHN STALS, BSc PhD DipAppChem Footscray I. Т.

Forestry Full-time Officers: Reader-in-Charge JOHN HARDING CHINNER, BSc Oxon. BSc DipFor Vic. 9 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

Reader in Photo-Interpretation and Forest Inventory JOHN ANTONY HOWARD, BSc Wales MF Мinn. PhD DipFor Bangor FLS AMAIC Senior Lecturer in Forest Resource Management AHI BHUSAN RUDRA, BSc Calc. AIFC Dehra Dun MISTF A.P.M. Lecturer in Forestry ANTHONY BLAIR MOUNT, BScF Adel. DipFor Canb. MSc Tas. B.H.P. Research Fellow WILFRED GUY TUDDENHAM, BSc DipEd MSc Syd.

Genetics Full-time Officers: Professor MICHAEL JAMES DENHAM WHITE, DSc Lind. MSc FAA FRS Reader in Human Genetics DAVID MILES DANKS, MD BS FRACP Reader in Biochemical Genetics JOHN ALEXANDER THOMSON, MSc PhD Senior Lecturer BARRY THOMAS OWEN LEE, MSc PhD Lecturer JON MARTIN, MSc PhD Senior Demonstrators GRAHAM CHARLES WEBB, BSc DipEd MARGARET MRONGOVIUS, BSc E. Anglia Senior Research Fellow JOHN MICHAEL CONNELLAN, MSc ß'id PhD A.N.U. Research Fellow PATRICIA TIPPETT, BSc

Geology

Full-time Officers: Professor JOIN FRANCIS LOVERING, MSc Syd. PhD Cal. Tech. Reader in Geophysics COLIN KERR GRANT, BA Cantab. BSc Adel. MSc FRAS Reader in Geology ROBERT JOSEPH WILLIAM McLAUGHLIN, MSc N.Z. PhD Cantab. Senior Lecturers FRANCIS CLIFFORD BEAVIS, BSc PhD ROGER WALTER LeMAITRE, MA PhD Cantab. MARCUS ALDRIDGE HUDSON MARSDEN, BSc REGINALD TERRENCE MATHEWS, MSc Q'Id OWEN PEMBER SINGLETON, PhD Cantab. 'Sc GEORGE ANTHONY THOMAS, BSc PhD Lecturers REID RODERICK KEAYS, BSc lu. PhD Mcl. LINDSAY THOMAS, BSc PhD Adel. Assistant Lecturers ALDO CUNDARI, DPhil Rome EDMUND BERNARD JOYCE, BSc 10 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Senior Demonstrators CORNELIUS FRICK, DSc Pret. CLIFFORD WILLIAM MALLETT, MSc l'Id BERNARD THOMAS O'CONNOR, MSc Liv. Demonstrator CHRISTOPHER JOHN CLARK, Inc DipEd Demonstrator/Curator MICHAEL FRANCIS COOPER, BSc Research Officer DAVID KENNETH BLACKWOOD SEWELL, BSc W.A. Research Assistant (Administrative) CECILY JUNE FINLAP, Inc Syd.

Information Science Senior Lecturers WILLIAM ROY FLOWER, BA BSc REX PHILIP HARRIS, MSc N.Z. PETER GEORGE THORNE, BSc PhD Lecturer IAN GEORGE ANDREW ROSINBON, BSc Part-time Visiting Fellow TREVOR PEARCEY, BSc Lend. ARCS Lend. FRCS FRCS

Mathematics Full-time Officers: Professor of Pure Mathematics ERIC RUSSELL LOVE, BA Cantab. & Meib. PhD Cantab. Professor of Mathematics SIMON ROSENBLAT, MSc PhD Syd. Professor of Mathematics COLIN JOHN THOMPSON, BSc PhD N.S.W. Acting Professor of Pure Mathematics BRUCE DESMOND CRAVEN, BA MSc Readers WILLIAM WILSON WOOD, PhD Cantab. BA BSc ROGER HAMILTON JAMES GRIMSHAW, MSc Auck. PhD Cantab, Senior Lecturers JOHN COLIN BARTON, BA MSc IAN ANDREWS EVANS, MSc Q'id MA Cantab. DESMOND JOHNS MEMORY, MSc Lind. ELIZABETH POWNALL, MSc DipEd ALLAN MAURICE RUSSELL, BSc Tas. MSc JOHN PHILIP RYAN, BA BSc JAMES KENNY STRACHAN, BA Inc BRIAN WILLIAM THOMPSON, PhD Lind. BA MSc DipEd CHRISTOPHER JOHN FINNS UPTON, MA Oxon. & Melb. PhD RAYMOND TREVOR WAECHTER, BE 'Sc Adel. PhD Cantab. Lecturers FRANCIS RAYMOND BARRINGTON, BSc MA DipEd JAMES JOSEPH CROSS, MEngSc Johns H. PhD Rice BA BSc DEREK ALLAN HILTON, PhD McG BSc MA DipEd JAROMIR JOSEPH KOLIHA JOHN ANTHONY RICKARD, BSc PhD Lend.

11 FACULTY of SCIENCE

Principal Tutor DAPHNE JESSIE MORLEM, BSc W.A. Senior Tutors JOYCE WINIFRED BARTON, BSc HOWARD JOHN CONNELL, Inc O'Id DAVID WILLIAM HAWKINS GILLAM, BSc Mon. MARGARET LESTER, BA REULAN WARDROP, BSc Q'id Tutors PAUL ANTHONY ANDREW, BSc Syd. GEORGE DONALD HANDLEY, BE BSc ANN MAREE KENNEDY, BScEd HOWARD RAYMOND LISTON, BSc Flinders PETER JULIAN SYMONDS, BSc A.N.U. JOHN RAYMOND TAFFE, BA Mon.

Meteorology Full-time Officers: Reader-in-Charge UWE RADOK, Diping Munich PhD Senior Lecturer MARTIN JAMES DITMAR JENSSEN, MSc PhD Lecturers TIMOTHY TRAVERS GIBBON, BSc Tas. MA Tor. JAMES TEMPLETON GETHING, BSc(Hons) Part-time Lecturers: Glaciology FRITZ LOEWE, Polar Medal DrPhil Berlin DSc Ohio State MSc WILLIAM FRANCIS BUDD, Polar Medal BSc DipEd Syd. MSc PhD (Antarctic Division, Department of Supply) Turbulence ROBERT RENK BROOK, BSc Adel. (Bureau of Meteorology) Numerical Weather Prediction DOUGLAS GAUNTLETT, BSc W.A. (Commonwealth Meteoro- logy Research Centre) Tropical Meteorology FRANCE ALBERT LAJOIE, BSc Lind. MSc (Bureau of Meteoro- logy) Glacial Geomorphology JAMES ANDREW PETERSON, BA Tas. MSc McG. PhD Mon. (Monash University)

Microscopy Laboratory Officer-in-Charge and Part-time Lecturer VACANT

Physics Professor and Head of School BRIAN MILTON SPIGER, PhD DSc FlnstP FAIP' *Personal Chair in the School of Physics.

12 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Chamber of Manufactures Professor HERBERT BOLOTIN, BS C.U. N.Y. MS PhD Indiana FAIP Professor of Theoretical Physics BRUCE HAROLD JOHN McKELLAR, BSc PhD Syd. MlnistP AAIР Professor of Experimental Physics VACANT Readers KENNETH CHARLES HINES, MSc PhD FAIP EDMUND GERARD MUIRHEAD, MSc PhD AAIP JOHN LAYTON ROUSE, BA MSc PhD MlnistP FAIP Senior Lecturers KENNETH ALBERT AMOS, BSc PhD Adel. NORMAN EDWARD FRANKEL, BSc М.I.Т. PhD ANTHONY GEORGE KLEIN, BEE FAIP GEORGE JAMES FERGUSON LEGGE, MSc PhD FAIP COLIN DOUGLAS McKENZIE, PhD Birm. MSc GEOFFREY IVAN OPAL MSc PhD FAIP DENIS GRAHAM SARGODD, MSc PhD DipEd AlnstP AAIP GEOFFREY GAY SHUTS, PhD Birm. MSc GradAIP ALAN EDWIN CHARLES SPARGO, BSc PhD W.A. GradAIP MAXWELL NORMAN THOMPSON, MSc PhD FAIP JOHN WILLIAM GRAYDON WIGNALL, PhD Canteb. BA MSc AAIP ROBERT HARVEY WILKINSON, BSc FAIP MACE Lecturers RAYMOND LUDDINGTON ABBEY, MSc AAIP ZWI BARNEA, MS Brooklyn AAIP MELCHIOR JOHANN FEHLMANN, PhD Zurich GIRISH CHANDRA JOSH, BSc Agra 'Sc Allahabad PhD Delhi SHU1-YIN LO, BSc ill. PhD Chic. VICTOR CHARLES OFFICER, 'Sc N.Z. PhD Assistant Lecturers ADA PHYLLIS BOOTH, BA BSc Grad AlP EUNICE DELL McKENZIE, MSc DipEd Senior Demonstrator HILARY JANET STEPHEN, BSc St. And. GradAIP Demonstrators KINGSLEY JOHN FRASER ALLEN, MSc AAIP FREDERICK GRENVILLE ARMITAGE, Inc HOWARD SILVER, BSc Associated Staff: Research Professor COURTNEY BALTHAZAR OPPENHEIM MOHR, PhD Centeb. BA MSC FlnstP FAIP Post-doctoral Fellows ROSS FREDERICK BARRETT, BSc PhD W. Aust. KEITH RICHARD LASSEY, MSc Auck. PhD McM

RAAF Academy, Point Cook Chemistry: Senior Lecturer BERNARD ARTHUR SCHAEFER, BSc Syd. DipEd ARACI 13 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Lecturer DONALD MARDER DOUGLAS, BSc W.A. ARACI Mathematics: Professor MAURICE NORMAN BREARLEY, BE W.A. BSc Syd. MA Cantab. PhD Adel. MSc Senior Lecturers DONALD ROSS WATSON, BSc DipEd Syd. MA MICHAEL JOHN CHRISTOPHER BAKER, MA Gentab. PhD Physics: Professor VICTOR DAVID HOPPER, DSc FInstP FAIP (Dean of University Studies, R.A.A.F. Academy) Reader JOHN ANGAS THOMAS, BSc Adel. PhD Q'Id MSc Alnst P AAI Р Senior Lecturers IAN ARTHUR BOURNE, MSc PhD U.N.E. AlnstP IPPS JOHN FRANCIS GEORGE DARBY, 'Sc PhD FInstP FAIP JEAN ELIZABETH LABY, MSc PhD AlnstP AA1P DONALD GORDON Mc1NTYRE, BA BSc ERIC LEONARD UNTHANK, Inc BEd Lecturers JOHN VICTOR DENHOLM, MSc JOLEROY GAUGER, MS PhD Calif. OWEN MACE, BE

Statistics Full-time Officers: Professor EVAN JAMES WILLIAMS, ECom Tas. DSc FIMS MIST Senior Lecturers NORMAN MALCOLM HAMILTON SMITH, PhD A.N.U. BEE GEOFFREY FRANCIS WALDIE YEO. MSc W.A. PhD A.N.U. Lecturers KENNETH SHARPE, MSc RAYMOND KEITH WATSON, MSc Research Assistant BETTY LABY Part-time Officers: BRUCE MAXWELL BROWN, MSc PhD Purdue CLEMENS WILLIAM PRATT, BSc MEngSc Q'ld PhD Lend. DAVID SCOTT, PhD A.N.U.

Zoology

Full-time Officers:

Professor GEOFFREY BURNSTOCK, PhD Lend. DSc FAA Reader in Zoology FRANK HARVEY DRUMMOND, BSc W.A. PhD Lind. MSc Reader in Ecology MURRAY JOHN LITTLEJOHN, PhD W.A. MSc Senior Lecturers GRAEME DUBRELLE CAMPBELL, BSc PhD DONALD CAMPBELL ROGERS, MSc PhD ALASTAIR GRAEME WILLIS, MSc Wales & Molb. 14 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

Lecturers ROBERT OWEN JONES, BSc Wales PhD Edin. ANGUS ANDERSON MARTIN, BSc Rand PhD RALPH HERBERT MILLER, BSc DAVID GEOFFREY SATCHELL, MSc PhD Assistant Lecturer JOHN REGINALD McLEAN, Inc PhD Senior Demonstrators BRENDAN JOHN GANNON, BSc PhD GRAEME FIELD WATSON, BSc Demonstrator BARBARA KAY EVANS, BSc TSTC DipPhysEd Temporary Demonstrator BRIAN DUMSDAY, MSc Part-time Officer: Lecturer GERDA MARK, MSc Associated Staff: National Heart Foundation Overseas Research Fellow CHRISTOPHER BELL, MSc PhD A.R.G.C. Research Fellow MARCELLO COSTA, MD Turin Senior Research Fellow NIKOLAI DO В ROTWORSKY, MSc Leningrad & Meib. PhD University of Melbourne Senior Research Fellow, Professor OLAVI ERÄNKÖ, MD PhD Helsinki Sunshine & Rowden White Research Fellow LIISA ERÄNKÖ, MA CM Phi Helsinki National Heart Foundation of Australia Research Fellows TAKASHI IWAYAMA, MD Kyushu TAKESHI YOHRO, MD DMеdSc Tokyo Honorary Research Fellow BOBBI LOW, PhD Texas University of Melbourne Research Fellow YASUO UEHARA, MD Osaka Guggenheim Senior Fellow, Professor BETTY TWAROG, MS Tufts PhD Radcliffe National Heart Foundation of Australia Medical Research Scholar ROBERT PURVES, MB ChB ВМ edSc Otago

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION DATES FOR 19731 Lecture Terms: 1st—From 5 March to 12 May (10 weeks)2 2nd—From 11 June to 4 August (8 weeks)2 3rd—From 27 August to 20 October (8 weeks) Examination Terms: —From 14 May to 19 May —From 8 August to 11 August —From 29 October Clinical dates for Optometry (fourth year) are shown In Chapter 9. APPLICATION FOR SELECTION Students Enrolled In 1972 All students enrolled in 1972 are required to attend for approval of course (and also to make application for selection in all subjects for 1973) during third term 1972. No further application for selection is required after the publication of results except from: (a) those students who have any failure at the annual examination; (b) any students who wish to alter their approved courses. These students are required to attend the faculty office for interview, In the period following the publication of results and 22 December, 1972. Enrolment at the Students Records Office cannot be made until students are notified by the faculty of their selection and receive an authorization to enrol. New Students Application for selection as undergraduates must be lodged with the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 450 St K1Ida Road, Ме1- bourne 3004, by the date specified on the V.U.A.C. application form. Students will not be permitted to enrol until they have been notified of their selection in the course. New students wishing to apply for later year subjects In 1973 must make an appointment for an interview at the faculty office before 22 December, 1972. APPROVAL OF COURSE New students must have their first year course approved by the Dean before enrolment. Courses for all students will be re-approved by faculty course advisers during third term. The courses for new students entering Science Education must be submitted to Mr W. Pye, assistant to the dean, for approval. Students undertaking the course of BSc (Forestry) must consult Mr J. H. Chimer, Head of the School, before enrolling, and students undertaking the course of BSc (Optometry) must consult Dr B. L. Cole, Director of Studies, College of Optometry, before enrolling.

1 Provisional, pending Council's approval, at the time of going to press. 2 No lectures or practical classes offered in Science subjects during the lest week of these terms. Courses in other faculties ere offered throughout the first two terms.

17 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

Admission into honours courses in Mathematics and advanced level units of all Physics and Psychology courses will be approved by the head of the relevant department. ENROLMENT After students have been notified of their selection, they will be required to lodge at Students Records Office an enrolment card for lectures, and a bank slip for the correct fees and such other details as may be required. An assessment of fees may be obtained from the Fee Section of Students' Records Office. All new students admitted to the faculty of Science in 1973 will be required to be photographed for the purpose of records. Directions for having photographs taken (free of charge) will be given to students. TERMINAL RE-ENROLMENT In order to maintain the accuracy of the University's records, every student will be required to lodge a re-enrolment slip at the end of first term, showing the subjects which he proposes to study for the remainder of the year. A student who does not wish to proceed with his course must report to the faculty office and also notify the Students' Records Office In writing immediately. A new enrolment must also be lodged at the beginning of each year. CHANGE OF COURSE (a) Withdrawals from units are permitted but students withdrawing during the last week of a unit or during the third term of a three- terms course will be marked absent. (b) Changes. No changes are permitted from any authorized course without approval, so that students wishing to change courses must first call at the Dean's office for an interview to obtain the necessary approval and change of authorization. Please note that changes of course will only be approved during the following periods: 1. Changes in units examined in the second term examination period, and in 3 term units examined in November, will be approved (quotas permitting) up to April 6. 2. Changes in other units may be made during the second week of term 11 (i.e. the week after the examination period). DISCONTINUATION Persons wishing to discontinue their courses should refer to Regulation 2.2, sections 7 and 8. GUIDE TO SCIENCE COURSES For general information on courses, prospective students are referred to the publication of the faculty called Guide to Science Courses. Copies of this booklet are distributed to Victorian secondary schools and are available at the University Bookroom or the faculty office. All new students are expected to be familiar with this publication. COURSES IN SCIENCE Bachelor of Science Undergraduates entering the faculty of Science to qualify for the degree of B.Sc. undertake a three years' full-time course. The degree is completed by accumulating 100 points as credit for subjects passed. 18 GENERAL INFORMATION

The majority of students undertake a course which includes a progressive study to third year level of a major branch of Science, together with other supporting subjects. This prepares the graduate to undertake research, industrial development or teaching in his particular specialization. It is also the normal preparation for further study leading to higher degrees. However, considerable flexibility is possible in course planning, and a very wide variety of courses can be planned to meet a student's individual needs and Interests. Combined Courses A candidate who, having completed or being enrolled in a course for any other degree or diploma, is selected into the course for the degree of Bachelor of Science may with the approval of the faculty of Science be given credit for not more than forty points for subjects the equivalent of which have been passed by him in such other course. Bachelor of Science (Honours) This is a degree which Includes a greater depth of study in the student's chosen specialization. This may take the form of formal advanced study and/or investigation within the University during the fourth year. This course is the normal method of commencing higher degree study. There is also a foreign language requirement. (See Regulation 3.21.3.) Bachelor of Science (Education) This four year course is for Intending teachers of science and mathematics. It combines a study of one or more branches of science and mathematics with studies in education. The education studies will occupy approximately one quarter of the course and will be integrated with the science and mathematics studies in the last three years of the course. During the first year of the course students will be expected to select a major subject area in which they wish to specialize. It is anticipated that the depth to which the major subject Is studied will be such as to obtain recognition for the degree as a general professional qualification appropriate to the major subject. Graduates of BSc ( Ед ) courses may apply for admission to postgraduate courses of the faculty of Science. Students are reminded that entry to honours level courses in mathematics occurs at the second year of the course. See Chapter 7 for details. Bachelor of Science in Forestry See Chapter 8 for details. Bachelor of Science (Optometry) See Chapter 9 for details. Bachelor of Science in Forestry (Honours) See Chapter 8 for details. Master of Science This degree may be obtained on the completion of not less than one year's advanced studies with experimental and observational work, subsequent to the completion of the course for the BSc (Honours) degree. The work must be undertaken within the University, unless the candidate has obtained special permission from the Faculty of Science to work elsewhere.

19 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Bachelors of Science of at least four years' standing may qualify for the Master's Degree on submission of a satisfactory thesis based on original work in a branch of Science approved by the faculty. Mester of Science in Forestry See Chapter 8 for details. Master of Science in Optometry See Chapter 9 for details. Doctor of Philosophy This is a degree for full-time research workers. A candidate must be a graduate of this or some other University recognized for the purpose, must be of such standing as may required by the Professorial Board for graduates in his faculty, and must be accepted as such by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned. He must have had two years' approved research experience and must pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and research under a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the board, and on its completion must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The only part-time candidates who are accepted by the Professorial Board are full-time members of staff. (See regulation 3.60 University Calendar.) Doctor of Science This degree is gained by thesis only. Candidates must be Bachelors of Science of at least five years' standing or graduates of the same standing in another faculty who satisfy the Faculty of Science that they have received an adequate scientific training. They must have already made substantial published contributions to Science, and must submit their published work together with any unpublished work they may deem appropriate. The subject or subjects dealt with must be approved by the faculty. Three copies of each thesis must be submitted.

POLICIES GOVERNING ADMISSION 1973 Quotas and Selection In view of the shortage of staff and accommodation, the University Council has placed a restriction on the number of students permitted to enrol in all subjects of the Science course and in the faculty as a whole. Selection of students into the faculty is made through the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee. This committee is the official body set up for receipt of applications for selection of undergraduates to the universities of the state of Victoria. The office of the committee is on the ground floor, 450 St Kilda Road, Melbourne 3004. Applications must be lodged before 31 October (E-type) and 20 November (N-type). Categories of Applicants and Selection Formula There are two categories of applicant. Normal Applicants (N): These comprise all those applicants who, as full-time scholars, have passed the Higher School Certificate examination in one or more of the three years prior to the year of selection and sat for the examination in 1972, provided: (a) that no attempt at any subject of the examination had been made at any time prior to the three years; 20 GENERAL INFORMATION

(b) that no form of tertiary education has ever been attempted. An applicant who has not previously passed the Higher School Certificate examination and who has entered for English Expression and at least three other subjects in 1972 will be considered a normal applicant. Should he later fall to pass the examination his application will be ignored. Exceptional Applicants (E): These comprise all other applicants. For type 'N' applicants, a common selection formula will be used for all three universities. Details of the basis of this formula are sent to schools in the state.

UNIVERSITY GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR FIRST-YEAR COURSES (Including revisions adopted by the University Couпсil, July, 1972)

SELECTION COMMITTEE The selection committee for each course shall consist of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned and such other members as may be approved by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of that Faculty or Board of Studies. If any member of a selection committee is unable to act, the Chairman of the Professorial Board may approve the appointment of a substitute, on the recommendation of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned. Each selection committee shall have power to reach decisions on a majority vote and shall report its decisions to the Professorial Board as soon as possible. Such report shall include a list of those applicants who were selected afd enrolled. APPLICATIONS Applicants for selection in a quote must submit applications on the prescribed form by the date set down in the list of Principal Dates. No application for selection lodged after the due date shall be considered unless the selection committee concerned is satisfied that special circumstances exist justifying the late application. Persons of aboriginal extraction seeking admission to the University will, if they so wish, be considered by the Professorial Board under Regula- tion 1.1.2. Persons wishing to be considered under this resolution should make application to the Registrar. SELECTION 1. Each selection committee shall be responsible for selecting, up to the number fixed by Council, those applicants who are considered most likely to pursue successfully the course concerned. 2. (a) Selection shall be based primarily on academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examina- tion. Provided that the qualifications of the applicants who have not attempted the Victorian H.S.C. Examination shall be equated as far as possible with the H.S.C. Examination. (b) Selection committees may also take into account: (i) The results of any subsequent examinations attempted. (ii) The age of applicants when attempting the examination under consideration.

21 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

(iii) Any illness, war or military service, or other serious cause, as a result of which the studies or performance of an applicant have, in the opinion of the committee, been ham- pered. (iv) Physical handicaps or defects. (v) The number of years spent preparing for the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination. This is to be considered only where the original scoring puts a candidate who did not sit in his first year of preparation for the H.S.C. in a marginal position in the order-of-merit list. (vi) Information revealed by such interviews as the selection committee may conduct. (vii) Any other factors approved by the Professorial Board and the Council on the recommendation of the Faculty or Board of Studies concerned. (c) Headmasters' reports shall not be taken into consideration, except in cases of illness or where an applicant has applied for a place in the succeeding year's quota. (d) No weight shall be given to the order of an applicant's course preferences, i.e., a first preference of one applicant is not to rate above a lower preference of another candidate with a higher selection score. 3. In assessing academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Melbourne Matriculation Examination, the formula adopted by the Vic- tonal Universities Admissions Committee shall be used. Provided that: (i) Prerequisites approved by the Professorial Board and the Council may be included in the 'best four subjects'. (ii) Where prerequisite subjects must be included in the basic quota score, an applicant who has had more than one sitting at the Matriculation Examination shall be credited with the best of his prerequisites from any sitting, with the proviso that, in order to be credited with the marks of a prerequisite taken at any sitting, a candidate must have passed in three subjects other than 'English Expression' at that sitting. (iii) Special debits and bonuses may be applied if stated in special principles of selection recommended by a Faculty or Board of Studies and approved by the Professorial Board and the Council. (iv) A selection committee shall have the right to consider an applicant's record as a whole in deciding between candidates near the border- line. 4. Underage applicants in the selection range must be interviewed by or on behalf of the selection committee concerned before being selected. 5. in the absence of special reasons, applicants for admission to a quota who have not yet attempted a university course shall be preferred to graduates. 6. (i) National servicemen applying for admission shall receive not less favourable treatment than they would have had had they sought entry at the appropriate time. Thus, national servicemen applying for admission to courses with quotas should be assessed on exactly the same basis as they would have been in the year when they commenced their training and be accorded the same

22 GENERAL INFORMATION

order of priority as they would have been accorded in that year; (ii) national servicemen re-enrolling at an Australian university shall not suffer any loss of academic status in relation to work completed prior to their period of national service training; (iii) the period when these concessions will apply shall be limited to two years. Thus, to benefit from the concessions, students will have to apply to enrol, or re-enrol, Immediately on completion of their national service. 7. The number of non-Victorian applicants admitted to any course should not normally exceed the annual average percentage of such students admitted to that course over the past three years. No non-Vic- torian applicant shall be selected in preference to a Victorian applicant of equal or superior merit. ('Non-Victorian' means a student whose home is in another State or overseas and who either has presented for the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination or has been admitted ad eиndeт staturr.) 8. If an applicant is not selected for the course of his first choice, his application must be considered for the course of his second and, if necessary, subsequent choice and he must be selected in preference to any other applicant of inferior academic merit. 9. An order of merit list shall be prepared according to the above principles, and places up to the number fixed by the Council shall be filled in order from this list.

RESERVATION OF PLACES IN QUOTAS Places in the succeeding year's quota may be reserved for such applicants and In such numbers as may be decided by the Faculty or Board of Studies in accordance with its principles of selection, it being understood that the number will not be great and that except in special circumstances preference will be given to applicants in the top 80% of those whose marks are above the cut-off point for admission to the quota concerned.

Selection to later year Units Students are reminded that entry to later years is subject to quota, therefore applications must be made direct to the faculty office. In these cases applications for selection must be lodged with the faculty office not later than Wednesday, 20 December, 1972, and enrolments lodged after selection has been notified.

Selection of Students already enrolled in the faculty Into units in which limitation has been imposed New students and previously enrolled students will be placed on an order- of-merit list based on the following criteria— (a) results in previous University examinations; (b) results in first year level or second year level of the particular subject concerned and its prescribed prerequisites, where applicable; (c) the approved course of study being undertaken by the applicant; (d) a student's admission for one unit in relation to his admission to other units of the approved course; (e) any other special conditions as detailed in 1973 faculty of Science handbook.

23 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

Additional criteria which may be taken into account are— (1) Hardship conditions if any (interruptions to studies in previous year due to illness or other serious cause beyond the student's control). (2) Such personal interviews as are conducted by the committee aimed at an assessment of the student's capability to complete successfully the particular subject or course chosen. (3) Hardship involved in a student's being denied the right to proceed to the particular subject or course chosen. The qualifications of transferees from other courses or students granted credit for relevant subjects on the grounds of equivalent subjects passed elsewhere shall be equated as far as possible with the criteria stated above.

MATRICULATION ROLL When beginning a course for a degree or diploma which requires matriculation, all students must sign the prescribed declaration at the time of enrolment. Unless this is done no subjects passed can count towards a degree or diploma requiring matriculation. In order to be eligible to sign the matriculation roll, candidates must have: (a) satisfied the university entrance requirements of the Victorian Uni- versities and Schools Examinations Board. Full information regarding the board's requirements and conditions of exemption may be obtained from the secretary of the board, 450 St Kilda Road, Mel- bourne, Vic. 3004; (b) satisfied the special course requirements, if any, for their particular course; (C) been selected for and enrolled in their course; and (d) attained the age of seventeen years by 31 March of the year concerned,

CREDIT FOR WORK DONE AT TECHNICAL COLLEGES Credits may be given to candidates over eighteen years of age who have passed the Higher School Certificate examination and hold an approved diploma at a recognized Technical College. These credits will be only for those subjects in the degree course the necessary equivalents of which have been passed at the Technical College. Unless the candidate is over nineteen, the total credits granted will not be equivalent to more than one year towards the degree of BSc.

24 GENERAL INFORMATION

List of Recognized Technical Colleges •

BиЫвcЧ in which vacognIlIon will be Wanted вгв Indicated by в CIO" ln ‚b. арргормно column .- .s ř g = а. ú ° E 0 1; !! г Иаmв of CoIlg• в 3 ш

Ваllвгaн Schoд of Mini' B.ndigo lnititut• of Technology * .. .. r i l Castlв м м ТкАп свl School .. .. *

Caulfield Institutв of Technology . .. * Foot'ciay lnetitul• of Technology . . Сврраlвпд lniiitut• of Advancd Education

Gordon Institute of Technology, G..long * Mвryborou0h Technical School . . .. Preston Institute of Technology .. * r Roval elbo lnstitut f Tec nolog М игм в * Swlnburм Collрв of Technology.. .. Warmambool ln'titut• of Адивпевд Education . . . . . . . . . . . . *

* The 11п of виЫкгв in which recognition wilt b. granted 1в correct в1 the tlnи of going to pгмs. Alterations to th. list may b. тедв subsequently ou th• гкоттвпдaнlоп of ih. Technical College' Board Т Credit In Survвying 1 1s 'uNici to the pвdoгmaпaв of the required vacation work in Surveying. it will not De granted 1п h, Sеiвпсв eoим without в special rвcommendation from thв Technical Colleges Boird.

For sресial conditions as to matriculation for Technical College students, see under matriculation. Creswick Forestry School: Students from this School who hold the graduate certificate may be granted credit for Chemistry I (Terminal) in the degree of BSc, or two years of BSc (For.). The application must be accompanied by a record of examination results, to be obtained irom the Forestry Commissioners.

Approved Technical College Requirement for Exemption from Subjects (For List of Technical Colleges recognized for relevant subjects see table above.)

NOTE: The Technical Colleges Board may determine that credits given in any subject or subjects are for the purposes of a specified course at the University, and in such cases candidates transferring to another course may not be given credits in the corresponding subject or subjects of that course without permission of the Board. A certificate from the Principal stating what stage the candidate has reached in the diploma course must be submitted with each application, and the certificate must specify the subjects passed or exempted in the diploma course, the date passed and the marks obtained.

25 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

No. University subject Technical College Prerequisites Special Notes iAPPLIED 1 Mathematics IA. 1B, 1С, uA, 11В, Credit or near credit required In MATHEMATICS 111.1v. Mathematics 111 and IV. PART I 2 Chemistry Subjects: (a) MATRICU- General Chemistry, Theory and In cases where Matriculation Chemis- LATION Practical try is prescribed ass prerequisite for CHEMISTRY Inorganic Chemistry 1 (new) subjects in the University Science plus or Couree, passes In the Technical Chemistry for Engineers College subjects shown will be accepted In lieu. (b) CHEMISTRY Theoretical Chemistry (Inorganic) See table of University subject pre- lol I (old) requisites in the Regulation for Practical Chemistry 1 (old) subjects which must be taken Theoretical Chemistry (Inorganic) preceding Chemistry Part I1. 11 (old) Practical Chemistry 11 (Quantitative) f old) or Assaying II Organic Chemistry IA (old) Alternatively the following group of subjects is approved Inorganic Chemistry 1 (new) Analytical Chemistry I (new) (Quantitative only) Physical Chemistry I (new) Organic Chemistry I (new) (c) CHEMISTRY Diploma of Applied Chemistry Holders of the Diploma of Applied PART I1 Chemistry may be granted certain (Practical) exemptions In practical work in Chemistry Part Il. 3 ENGINEERING Graphics PART I Engineering Drawing IIA or 118 Appiied Mechanics I end Applied Mechanics 11A or 118 For 1965 diplomas the following group of subjects is approved. Applied Mechanics I and II Engineering Drawing and Graphics 1 and 11

4 GENERAL Mathematics IA, 1B, IC. 11A, Ill, Credit or near credit required at III MATHEMATICS or IIIC, or IIID, or 111E. level.

в GEOLOGY Geology 1 A Daas In Geology IIE examination. PARTI Geology lIE as set by the University, is essential. Geology IIA of Geology 119

б METALLURGY Fellowship Diploma In Metallurgy A pass or credit required for Pure PART I or Metallurgical Engineering or Mathematics Part I, Physics Part I Associateship and Chemistry Part I before credit for Diploma in Metallurgy Metallurgy Part 1 can be granted. 7 Physics Subjects: Physics II (old) See table of University subject pre- or requisites In the Regulation for Physics III (new) and IV (new) subjects which must be taken before or proceeding to Physics Pan II. PHYSICS Physics I (new) 140 Physics II (new) Electrical Engineering I Electrical Engineering II /Engineeňng Physics or or NOTE Physics IA Credit for Physics 100 will generally PHYSICS Physics 1B not permit entry to second year 160 Physics IC Physics. Electrical Engineering 1 Electrical Engineering II

8 PURE Mathematics IA, IB, IC, IIA, Ill Credit or near credit required In MATHEMATICS Mathematics Ill. PART I

9 SCIENCE Scientific German 1 GERMAN Scientific German II

10 SURVEYING Land Surveying 1** PARTI Land Surveying II** Surveying 11A*

t Credit for Applied Ma hematics Part I not available after 1970. * If passed at R.M.I.T. ire Surveying IT (Fellowship Diploma Course) Is not approved GENERAL INFORMATION

Alternative Approved Prerequisite for Single Subject Exemptions

(For students taking the new diploma course, introduced in 1965.)

No. University Subiвet Technicil Instilution РfвгеqиЫlЧ SpвNвl Notei I APPLIED Mithemitics 1, 2 ind 3 Credit or near credit required In MATHEMATICS Mathematics 2 and 2. PART I

2 BIOLOGY PART I Fellowship Diploma of Applied Biology (R.M.1.T.) BIOCHEMISTRY Biochemistry I Diplomi of Applied Biology з PART I Biochemistry II } (R.M.LT.)

4 CHEMISTRY Diplomi of Applied Chemistry PART 11 (swinburne)

в ENGINEERING Applied Mechanics I PARTI Applied Mechanics II Engineering Drawing ind Graphic' I Engineering Drawing ind Graphics II

e GENERAL МвнАвтанiсв 1 MATHEMATICS Mathematics 2 or Mith.mitIc, 1 Mathematics 1 H Mathвmatica 2H 7 GENERAL Fellowship Diploma of Applied MICROBIOLOGY Biology (R.M.I.T.) в ORGANIC Diploma of Applied Chemistry CHEMISTRY (Swinburne) PART lie or ORGANIC CHEMISTRY PART ‚IC

a PHYSICS Physics II or 11 Е 140 end Physics IE, IIE end Ill required Applied Hest II for Diploma of Applied Chemis- PHYSICS Applied Mechanics II try (Swinburne). 160 Applied Electflcity 1I

10 PURE Math•mitics 1 Credit or neat credit required 1n MATH E MATICS Mathematics 2 Mathematics 2. PARTI

Victoria Institute of Colleges—BPharm Degree

An applicant holding the degree of BPharm of the Victoria Institute of Colleges may be granted admission to courses of the Faculty of Science as follows:

(a) On the recommendation of the head of department of Pharmacology, may be granted ad eundem statum admission to the MSc preliminary year in Pharmacology pursuant to Regulation 3.3.(4), subject to his taking such additional course of study (if any) as may be prescribed for him by the faculty of Science after considering any recommendation made on that matter by the head of department.

(b) An applicant wishing to undertake other courses (as well as the Pharmacology Major), if selected, may be granted subject exemption for:

27 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Biology (allowed as a prerequisite for Zoology 200 level but not Botany 200 level), Chemistry 101, Chemistry IIB, Microbiology 201. Pharmacology 300 Physics 160 However, pursuant to Regulation 3.20.(8), such applicant shall only receive credit for 40 points towards the degree of Bachelor of Science.

ATTENDANCE AT THE UNIVERSITY Attendance at the University is compulsory for all subjects of the Science courses except those subjects which may be undertaken externally as shown below.

EXTERNAL STUDIES An External Student is regarded as one who Is residing in Victoria but outside the metropolitan area. With the approval of the faculty and subject to selection In any quotas operating (see details regarding application and enrolment), the following subjects may be undertaken: Pure Mathematics Part I. Pure Mathematics Part Il, 141 Applied Mathe- matics, Applied Mathematics Part 1I, and History and Philosophy of Science Units 101, 102 and 221. Some notes, lists of references and example sheets are sent by post and work may be sent in for correction.

EVENING LECTURES Subject to sufficient enrolments being received, evening lectures will be delivered in 1973 in the following subjects: Applied Mathematics Parts I, II and Ill Biology Chemistry 101 Geology 101 Physics 140 series (with laboratory work) Psychology (all levels) Pure Mathematics Parts I. I1 and III (Course B) Science French, Science German and Science Russian. Lectures in Geology will be given only if twenty or more enrolments are received by the closing date.

FEES The comprehensive and general service fees can be paid yearly in advance or in three terminal instalments. The Library fee must be paid in full with the first term's fees. Students should consult the Fees Section of Students' Records on enrolment to have their fees determined. Payment can be made to the University's account at any branch of the. National Bank of Australasia. A branch is next to the Book Room. As a service to students, the State and Commonwealth Savings Banks branches will accept payment of fees. These branches are respectively on the ground floors of the Administration Annexe and the Raymond Priestley Buildings. A summary of fees is given at the end of this book.

28 GENERAL INFORMATION

EXAMINATIONS All candidates for examination must have enrolled at the beginning of the year for lectures or for external studies, and must lodge an examination entry with the Registrar. Where the content in a pass course In any subject is different from the honours course in that subject the entry must specify whether the candidate Intends presenting for pass or honours In each subject, no candidate being permitted to enter for both pass and honours in that same subject. Candidates who take the honours papers in any subject, but fail to reach honours standard, are eligible to be granted a pass. A time-table will be available some weeks before each examination. No additional examination fee is payable by those who have paid full lecture fees in the subjects for which they present themselves, but external candidates sitting at country centres must pay a supervision fee of $3 per subject. Examination numbers for candidates presenting at the University will be available at Students' Records during the week before the examination begins, and must be applied for by candidates in person. External post. candidates sitting at country centres will rесеive their numbers by Applications for special consideration, together with medical evidence, must be lodged before the commencement of the examination period or as soon thereafter as practicable. Applications lodged after the publication of results will not be considered. Any student in any faculty who faits at the examinations may be reported to the Professorial Board, and may be suspended from such course or courses as the Professorial Board shall specify or may be limited In any year to subjects specified by the faculty. Any student suspended from any course or courses or from any subject or subjects may apply for re-admission to any such course or subject. if the Professorial Board is satisfied that the condition or circumstances of any such student have so changed that there is a reasonable probability that he will make satisfactory progress in any such course or subject, it may authorize the re-admission of that student to any such course or subject, and may impose such conditions as It may determine. GRADUATION The dates for conferring degrees in 1973 are as follows: Wednesday,—March 14 Saturday,—March 24 Saturday, April ? Wednesday,—April 18 Saturday, August 11 Saturday,—Decеmber 15 Candidates for degrees and diplomas must lodge an application on the prescribed form, obtainable from the Students' Records Office, by the due date. STUDENT COUNSELLING AND HOUSING COUNSELLING The staff of the Student Counselling Service, Mr Jon Frederick, Mrs Marjorie Priestley, Mr Denis Kelynack, Dr Brian James and Mrs Petra Williams are available to help any student at the University with problems such as: culties in settling down to study or exams • difП • adjustment to University life 29 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

• practical problems—financial, housing, domestic and so on • personal and emotional problems. Where appropriate, students can also be referred for further help to a medical practitioner, psychiatrist, or a speech therapist, for example. The Counselling Office also offers a number of other services, Including discussion group activities on a variety of topics and a tape recorder loan scheme for temporarily or permanently disabled students. The service is free, voluntary and confidential. The counsellors are available in the usual University hours, preferably with, but if necessary without, an appointment. The Student Counselling Service is located at 268 Elgin Street, Carlton, just near the University and tram stop 11 In Swаnston Street. The phone number is 340484' extension 6928 or 6929. HOUSING The Student Housing Service gives assistance in obtaining off-campus accommodation in rooms, with or without full-board facilities, flats or houses, information in regard to the Colleges and Halls of Residence, and advice in connection with any housing problems that may arise. The Housing Officer is Mrs. Pamela Normark. The Service is available to all enrolled students, and where applicable, to people connected with the University. Appointments can be made by ringing either 34 2023 or 34 0484, extension 6930, or by calling at the Housing Office, which is located at 255 Elgin Street, Carlton, opposite the Student Counselling Office. APPOINTMENTS BOARD The Appointments Board provides a careers advisory and employment service for intending students, undergraduates, and graduates. INTENDING STUDENTS The staff of the Board are always prepared to assist intending students with information and advice concerning the career implications of various courses of study. In addition, booklets on careers and information on scholarships are available free of charge. UNDERGRADUATES It is highly desirable that students who will be seeking employment upon graduation should inform themselves of likely career and employment opportunities well in advance. The staff of the Board are freely available for discussions on such matters. In addition, further information is provided for f'inaI-year students by the distribution of the Graduate Careers Directory and by the programme of on-campus interviews with visiting employers. PERMANENT EMPLOYMENT Graduates and undergraduates seeking full-time work are put in touch with suitable employers—special approaches may be made on behalf of particular students and graduates. CAREERS LIBRARY The Careers Library has been extensively modified and expanded and any interested person wishing to make use of it is most welcome to do so.

STUDENT FACILITIES Information about the student health service, student housing, student counselling, the student accident insurance scheme, the free legal advisory scheme, the students' loan fund, contact, Blackwood, concessions, the students' dental scheme, the A.U.S. Medical and Hospital Benefits Scheme and other facilities are given in the Orientation Handbook and at the S.R.C. The Handbook Is usually distributed free to all first entry

З0 GENERAL INFORMATION

students in Orientation Week. Details of ail Welfare Services are also found in the Services Booklet published in early first term and posted to all first entry students and also availabІ e In the S.R.C. Office/Contact. The handbook also contains information about the S.R.C., Union, Clubs and Societies, sporting activities and other aspects of student life at the University. SCIENCE STUDENTS SOCIETY The Science Students' Society Is a predominantly student organization which plays an important part In the life of the faculty. Through student representatives on the Science Faculty and Its various committees, the Science Students' Society Is able to present the student attitude in a formal way to the academic staff of the faculty. By its activities the club helps to provide a broader outlook on science, which cannot be presented in lectures, and to Increase contact between students of the various departments. The society publishes free a regular magazine, Newtrino, which contains general student news and articles of scientific interest. The society also caters for the social welfare of science students by arranging Inter-faculty sporting contests, the annual Science Ball and numerous informal social functions throughout the year. It is very active during Orientation Week and conducts welcoming lectures, guided tours of science departments, and a guidance centre offering advice to new science students. This society is run by science students, and students have every opportunity of taking part in its activities. Further details are available from the Science Students' Society office, Union House. THE COLLEGES OF THE UNIVERSITY There are eleven residential colleges connected with the University, each of which provides additional teaching, mainly of a tutorial character. The residential colleges for men are: Trinity College (Church of England) Warden: Dr R. L. Sherwood, Parkville, Vic. 3052 Ormond College (Presbyterian) Master: The Rev. Dr J. D. McCaughey, Parkville, Vic. 3052 Queen's College (Methodist) Master: Dr O. W. Parnaby, Parkville, Vic. 3052 Newman College (Roman Catholic) Rector: V. Rev. G. G. Daily, S.J., Parkville, Vic. 3052 Whitley College (Baptist) Principal: Rev. D. M. Himbury, Parkville, Vic. 3052 Ridley College (Church of England) Principal: Dr L. Morris, Parkville, Vic. 3052

The residential colleges for women are: Janet Clarke Hall (Church of England) Principal: or Eva G. Eden, Parkville, Vic. 3052 St Mary's College (Roman Catholic) Principal: Mother Joan Nowotny, I.B.V.M., Parkville, Vic. 3052 University Women's College (Undenominational) Principal: Mrs Margaret Russell-Smith, Parkville, Vic. 3052 31 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

St Hilda's College (Methodist-Presbyterian) Principal: Mrs Marjorie Smart, Royal Parade, Parkville, Vic 3052 In addition there is the following post-graduate college for men and women: Graduate House (Undenominational) Warden: Mr W. E. F. Berry, 224 Leicester Street, Carlton, Vic. 3053 College teaching is available for non-resident as well as resident students. All the colleges have liberal provision for resident scholarships and non- resident exhibitions. The University fees do not include college fees, which are payable to the colleges themselves. For further information regarding the colleges, students are referred to the sections printed in the University Calendar and to the heads of colleges.

UNIVERSITY HALLS OF RESIDENCE International House Warden: Mr J. F. Hopkins Address: 241 Royal Parade, Parkville, Vic. 3052 International House, a University Hall, provides a place of residence, education and corporate life for members of the University, Its members comprising approximately equal numbers of students from Australia and from overseas. The House provides tutorial assistance in the basic subjects of most faculties for both non-resident and resident men and women members. There is a comprehensive library of essential reference books, and scholarships and bursaries are available. International House also provides for associate membership which en- ables students who reside in the vicinity to be full members who come into the House for meals and tutorials as well as enjoying all its facilities and privileges. Non-resident members are those attending tutorials only.

Medley Hall Warden: R. H. Wilkinson Address: 48 Drummond Street, Carlton, Vic. 3053 A university hall of residence, accommodating some 30 women and 30 men residents, mainly undergraduate. Annual fee Is S675 (for 1972) payable in three terminal or nine monthly instalments.

32 CHAPTER 2

FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

COMMONWEALTH UNIVERSITY SCHOLARSHIPS SCHEME Open Entrance Scholarships: Awarded on the basis of results in the best four subjects (including English Expression if one of best four) at the Higher School Certificate examination In four or more subjects. How- ever, one adjustment is made in respect of additional subjects taken and account is taken of whether a student is repeating the examination. Applicants up to 30 years of age. Later Year Scholarships: Awarded to undergraduates on the basis of their entire academic record. Applicants should normally have completed the equivalent of at least one year of full-time study in an approved university course. Applicants up to 30 years of age. Mature Age Scholarships: Awarded either on results obtained in the Higher School Certificate examination or, If the applicant has already commenced an approved university course, on his academic record in the course. In the latter case he should have completed the equivalent of at least one full-time year of the university course. Applicants over 30 and under 40 years of age. Only a small number of awards are made each year. BENEFITS: All compulsory fees. Full-time students may be granted a living allowance subject to a means test. APPLICATIONS: Applications close on 30 September each year. All enquiries should be addressed to: The Regional Director, Department of Education and Science, 450 St Kilda Road, Melbourne, Vic. 3004.

DAFYDD LEWIS TRUST SCHOLARSHIPS Available to males only who were educated at State Elementary. State Secondary or Technical Schools. There ia a means test for applicants, and scholarships are not available for Theology, Music, Arts or Education. There is an age limit of 18% years for boys from High Schools and 20% years for boys from Technical Colleges. BENEFITS All studies and registration fees will be paid. A living allowance will be paid. ENQUIRIES The Secretary, Dafydd Lewis Trust, c/o The Trustees, Executors and Agency Co. Ltd., 401 Collins Street, Melbourne, Vic. 3000.

33 в FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

COWRIE SCHOLARSHIPS BENEFITS A grant of 8150 per annum. Open only to members of the Australian Armed Forces (or their descen- dants) who served overseas during the war of 1939/45. Closing date 30 September. ENQUIRIES The Secretary, The Gowrie Scholarship Trust Fund, Box E5, St James, Sydney, N.S.W. 2001. STUDENTS' LOAN FUND Loans up to $500 may be made to students pursuing courses satisfactorily. A guarantor able and willing to guarantee the repayment of the loan must be provided. ENQUIRIES Accounts Branch, Room 406, Raymond Priestley Building, University of Melbourne, Parkville, Vic. 3052. or from Faculty Secretary. EDUCATION DEPARTMENT SECONDARY STUDENTSHIPS Holders of studentships are required to enter into an agreement to teach with the Education Department for three years after completion of course. Service for one year is required if studentship assistance has been given for one year only (e.g., to enable holder to undertake Dip.Ed.) BENEFITS All studies and registration fees. Living allowance. Special rates for undergraduates and graduates not previously assisted. ENQUIRIES The Secretary, Education Department, (Teacher Education Division), 480 Collins Street, Melbourne, Vic. 3000. POSTGRADUATE STUDIES: GRANTS FROM RESEARCH FUNDS ALLOCATION Grants are made by the Professorial Board on the advice of its Standing Research Committee and the heads of the departments concerned. Commonwealth Postgraduate Awards These awards are currently $2,600 per annum and applications close with the Secretary for Graduate Studies on 31 October each year. Awards are normally for two years for MSC or three years for PhD or up to four years for combined MSc/PhD candidature. A limited number of awards are available for MSc by course work. Further details are available from the Secretary for Graduate Studies. Research Awards The University of Melbourne grants to students a limited number of research scholarships from its own resources. Where an award is made, 34 FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

scholars are expected to devote their whole time to research except for such tutoring and demonstrating work as is approved by the head of the appropriate department. Research scholarships (some known as Williams Scholarships) are awarded to graduates who have shown marked ability for research and who are undertaking further research training, as Master degree or PhD candidates. Research scholarships may be renewed annually for a period not exceeding three years. EMOLUMENTS OF AWARDS The value is 82,000 per annum plus fees. Research Fellowships The University of Melbourne has established five research fellowships, not more than two of which may be senior iellowships. The senior fellowships have the status and salary of a senior lecturer and the fellowships the status and salary of a lecturer. Fellowships may be held for one or two years. Travelling allowance is made for a fellow appointed from overseas. Fellowships will be advertised as they become vacant.

Travelling Research Scho1aгahipa Two travelling research scholarships' are offered in two years out of every three to enable a graduate who shows first-rate capacity for research to undertake approved work at an overseas university, or other suitable Institution. The value of the scholarship, which is normally awarded for three years, is 43,200 per annum. RESEARCH REPORT All persons conducting research in the University, whether under research awards or otherwise, are required to submit, by the end of February in each year, reports on their research during the preceding twelve months to the heads of their departments, together with a list of their research publications during the period. Heads of departments also submit departmental research reports, which are published in the annual University of Melbourne Research Report. MODE OF APPLICATION Applications for research awards and grants must be made on a form designed for the purpose (and available at the office of the Dean of Graduate Studies). Applications must be lodged with the Secretary for Graduate Studies before 19 December. In general, research awards are made as from 1 March. Further information may be obtained from the Secretary for Graduate Studies.

SUMMARY OF AWARDS The following table gives a summary of awards other than those described above which are available to Science students at entrance, undergraduate, final examination and postgraduate leveis. More precise information concerning these awards may be obtained from Appendix 3 In the Calendar or from the person or Calendar regulation Indicated In the table.

• The Aitchison Travelling Scholarship and the Mуеr Scholarship, which ere together worth $3,200, are also available for research abroad. The combined scholarship Is also offered for three years, but only in two out of every three years.

З5 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Nots: Values of awards as shown below are approximate only. ENTRANCE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Unrestricted Senior Government The Secretary, Scholarships Education Department, $80 p.a. Treasury Place, East Melbourne Free Places The Secretary, Tuition fees Education Department, Treasury Place, Melbourne. Vic. 3002 N.U.A.U.s. Aboriginal Accounts Department Scholarships Dick Bursaries Accounts Department 8100 Moran Bursaries Accounts Department $180 Rest Home Bursary Accounts Department - $100 p.a. War Bursaries Accounts Department Tuition fees Edwin Nonus Smith Accounts Department Scholarship $100 Students' Loan Fund Science Faculty Office or (up to $500 p.a.) Accounts Branch Forestry Commonwealth Forestry The Director-General, Scholarships Forestry and Timber Tuition fees Bureau, Canberra, A.C.T. Optometry Details are shown in Chapter 7

UNDERGRADUATE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Unrestricted Aitchison Scholarships Accounts Department $140 each Agricultural James Curing Prize R.ß.28 Chemistry $80 Applied Mathe- Dixon Scholarship R.8.13.2 matics (first $30 year) 36 FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Applied Mathe- Dixson Scholarship R.6.1 3.2 matics (second 840 year) Biochemistry Exhibition R.3.20.10 (second year) 820 Biochemistry Dunlop Rubber Company R.7.3.8 (third year) Exhibition $40 Biology J. F. W. Payne Exhibition А.7.3.в $40 Botany (later Brunning Prizes (2) Announcements years) $20 (each) Botany (second E. F. Millar Exhibition А.7.3.в year) *40 Botany (third Exhibition R.3.20.10 year) $60 Chemistry (first Dwight's Prize R.6.5 year) 850 Exhibition R.3.20.10 830 Chemistry Dixson Scholarship R.ß.13.2 (second year) 840 Chemistry (third Dixson Scholarship R.8.13.2 year) $80 Engineering Howard Smith Exhibition R.7.3.6 Part I 840 Geology (first Argus Exhibition R.6.3.1 year) $30 Geology (second Exhibition R.3.20.10 year) $40 Geology (third Exhibition R.3.20.10 year) $60 Industrial Grimwade Prize Secretary, Chemistry 4300 approx. Faculty of Science Mathematics Wyselaskie Scholarship Professor of Mathematics 8440 p.a. Metallurgy Mining afd Metallurgical Professor of Metallurgy Bursaries 4100 p.a. Metallurgy Dixson Scholarship R.6.13.2 (second year) $30 Metallurgy Part I1 Exhibition R.3.45.7 $20' R.3.20.10 МiсгоЫоlоуу Exhibition R.3.20.10 $40 'An award of 540 may be made if one candidate qualifies for the award in the two subjects Metallurgy Part II and Metallurgy II E.

Э7 FACULTY of SCIENCE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Mining Part I George Lansel) Exhibition R.6.23.3 840 Natural Science Wyselaskie Scholarship Head of Department 8274 p.a. concerned R.6.7 Pathology Walter and Eliza Hall R.7.3.6(1) Exhibition $60 Physics (first Dwight's Prize R.6.5 year) 850 Physics (second Dixson Scholarship R.6.13.2 year) 840 William Sutherland Prize R.6.72(8) Books ($14) Physics (third Dixson Scholarship R.6.13.2 year) $80 Physiology Exhibition R.3.20.10 (second year) $20 Physiology Exhibition R.3.20.10 (third year) 840 Psychology 101 Exhibition R.3.20.10 $30 Psychology 201 Exhibition R.3.20.10 $30 Pure Mathe- John MacFarland R.7.3.6 matics (first Exhibition year) $30 Pure Mathe- Dixson Scholarship R.6.13.2 matics 840 (second year) Science Dublin Prize Registrar's Office $200 F. Gordon Elford Fund Registrar's Office Surveying Part 1 H. B. Howard Smith R.7.3.6 Exhibition 840 Surveying Part I1 Exhibition R.3.20.10 and IIA $40 Statistics Maurice H. Belz Prizes R.6.72(55) (second year) Books $40 and 820 Zoology Baldwin Spencer Prizes R.6.72(9) Books (820) Zoology (second Georgina Sweet Exhibition R.7.3.6 year) 840 Zoology (third Exhibition R.3.20.10 year) 860 38 FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION OR FINAL EXAMINATION

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Chemistry Cuming Scholarships Professor of Chemistry 8150, $100 Chemistry (third Walker Scholarship Professor of Chemistry year) $178 Civil Engineering Argus Scholarship Professor of Civil 850 Engineering Electrical Dixson Scholarship Professor of Electrical Engineering 840 Engineering Engineering Argus Scholarship Dean of Faculty of Research $100 Engineering Dixson Research Dean of Faculty of Scholarship Engineering $630 Melvin Memorial Dean of Faculty of Scholarship Engineering $200 Stawell Scholarship Dean of Faculty of 8150 Engineering Statistics Dwight's Prize R.6.5 850

OPTOMETRY

Undergraduate awards for the Optometry course are shown In Chapter 7.

GRADUATE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Science Aitchison Travelling Secretary for Graduate Scholarship Studies $3,200 Bartlett Research Secretary for Graduate Scholarships Studies $200 each British Council Travel Registrar's Office Grants Tourist return sea passage Gowrie Research The Trustees, Travelling Scholarships Gowrie Scholarship Trust £720 stg. each Fund, P.O. Box ES, St James, Sydney, N.S.W. 2001 Rhodes Scholarship Mr S. Sheffield, £750 stg. P.S. Registrar's Office

39 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Sir Arthur Sims Travelling Secretary for Graduate Scholarship Studies $2,500 Taft Interchange Secretary for Graduate Scholarship Studies $ 2,000 Alcock Scholarship Secretary for Graduate $600 Studies Daniel Curdle Scholarship Secretary for Graduate $150 Studies Sir John and Lady Higgins Secretary for Graduate Research Scholarship Studies $ 2,000 Shell Scholarships The Office Manager, £1,600 stg. P.S. Shell Co. of Aust Ltd., 155 William Street, Melbourne, Vic. 3000 David Syme Research Secretary, Faculty of Prize Science 8250 approx. 1851 Exhibition Secretary for Graduate Scholarship Studies £1,000 stg. p.a. Royal Society Rutherford Secretary for Graduate Scholarship Studies £900-£1,000 stg. Р . Anatomy Scholarship R.3.24.13 $80 (if not awarded in Microbiology) Biochemistry I.C.I. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate $1,800-$2,300 Studies Scholarship R.3.24.13 $80 Biological Dawson Bursary Accounts Department Sciences $310 p.a. Botany . Howitt Scholarship Secretary, Faculty of 8100 at least Science Caroline Kay Scholarship Professor of Botany $538 MacBain Scholarship Professor of Botany $130 Scholarship R.3.24.13 $80 Chemistry Dixson Research Professor of Chemistry Scholarship $456 40 FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Dunlop Rubber Company Secretary for Graduate Research Scholarship Studies $1,200 i.C.1. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate 61,800-82,300 Studies Kernot Scholarship Professor of Chemistry $426 Union Carbide Australia Professor of Chemistry Ltd. $1,400 ($1,200 for student, 8200 for University) Union Carbide Australia Professor of Chemistry Ltd. 8100 Chemotherapy I.C.I. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate 1,800-$ 2,300 Studies Economic Georgina Sweet Memorial Secretary for Graduate Geology Fellowship Studies Not less than $1,000 Economic Georgina Sweet Fellowship Secretary for Graduate Zoology $1,000 Studies Engineering Argus Research Dean, Faculty of Scholarship Engineering $100 Dixson Research or Dean, Faculty of Travelling Scholarship Engineering 8800 I.C.I. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate $ 1.800-$2,300 Studies Melvin Memorial Dean, Faculty of Scholarship Engineering $234 Stawell Scholarship Dean, Faculty of 8150 Engineering Forestry R. S. Fox Travelling Secretary, Faculty of Scholarship Science Genetics Howitt Scholarship Secretary, Faculty of *100 at least Science Geology Howitt Scholarship Secretary, Faculty of 8100 at least Science Kernot Research Professor of Geology Scholarship $404 Scholarship R.3.24.13 $80

41 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Industrial Grimwade Prize Secretary, Faculty of Chemistry $650 Science Mathematics Naneon Prize Professor of Mathematics $140 Wilson Prize Professor of Mathematics $200 Wyselaskie Scholarship Professor of Mathematics 8620 Mechanical Mobil Oil Company Secretary for Graduate Engineering Research Scholarship Studies 82,650 p.a. Medicine Alcock Scholarship Secretary for Graduate $460 Studies Elizabeth Mary Sweet Secretary for Graduate Fellowship Studies Metallurgy I.C.I. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate $1,800-82,300 Studies Scholarship R.3.24.13 880 Conzinc Riotinto Professor of Metallurgy Scholarships 82,000 Microbiology Scholarship R.3.24.13 880 Mining I.C.I. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate 81,800-82,300 Studies George Lansell Research Secretary for Graduate Scholarship Studies 8100 Mobil Oil Company Secretary for Graduate Research Scholarship Studies 82,650 Natural Science Wyselaskie Scholarship Head of Department 8355 concerned R.6.7 Pathology Beaney Scholarship R.6.12 Pharmacology I.C.I. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate 81,800-82,300 Studies Physics Dixson Research Professor of Physics Scholarship $530 Dunlop Rubber Company Secretary for Graduate Research Scholarship Studies 8600 (2) I.C.I. Fellowships Secretary for Graduate 81,800-82,300 Studies 42 FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

Title and Approximate Calendar Reference or Field Value Information Source

Kernot Research Professor of Physics Scholarship $426 Sir Thomas Lyle Professor of Physics Fellowship (determined by the Council) Royal Society Rutherford Secretary for Graduate Scholarship Studies £900-£1,000 stg. p.a. John Tyndall Scholarship Professor of Physics $142 Physiology Scholarship R.3.24.13 880 Radio Science Ormsby Hamilton Prize Secretary, Faculty of 853 Science Zoology Margaret Catto Professor of Zoology Scholarship $360 Howitt Scholarship Secretary, Faculty of 8100 Science MacBain Research Professor of Zoology Scholarship $150 Scholarship R.3.24.13 880

43 CHAPTER 3 REGULATIONS Regulation 3.20—Degree of Bachelor of Science 1. A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science shall, after matriculating, pursue his studies for at least three years, and pass examinations in accordance with the conditions prescribed. 2. The subjects of the course for the degree and the conditions on which such subjects may be taken shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published together with the details of subjects.1 3. (1) During each Year a candidate shall attend classes and perform written, practical, laboratory, field and clinical work prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and publshed with the details of subjects unless he satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere. (2) A candidate who enrols for a second or subsequent time in any subject for which practical work is prescribed shall be required to repeat the whole of such practical work, save insofar as he is exempted by the head of the department responsible for such practical work. 4. (1) A candidate's progress in his course of study shall be by years. Such years shall be defined by a cumulative total of points to be scored as a credit for examinations passed. The points to be scored for each subject of examination passed shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects. (2) A candidate shall be: (a) In the first year of his course until such time as his cumulative points score shall equal or exceed twenty-eight points; (b) in the second year of his course until such time as his cumulative points score shall equal or exceed sixty points; (c) in the third year of his course until such time as his cumulative points score shall equal or exceed one hundred points. 5. (1 ) A candidate who does not pass in a subject may be credited by the faculty with the points to be scored for that subject, having regard to his performance in all subjects taken by him (whether taken at one annual examination or more), in accordance with the principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. . (2) A candidate who has without passing in a subject been credited by the faculty with the points to be scored therefor shall not be permitted to proceed to a higher part of that subject, but shall be allowed to proceed with other subjects of a later year of the course for which a pass In that subject may be a prerequisite. 6. No candidate may pursue a course of study or receive credit for examinations passed unless his proposed selection of subjects and the years of his course in which they are to be taken have been approved by the faculty. Any subsequent alterations in the course of study must be approved by the faculty. 7. The faculty may allow a candidate to substitute for any subject of his course another subject of a university course which is, in Its opinion. of at least equal standard and relevant to the candidate's course of study.

The faculty may allow parts or units of these subjects to be studied and examined separately The points to be allotted in such case shall be as determined by faculty.

44 REGULATIONS

The points to be scored for passing the examination in any such substituted subject shall be prescribed by the faculty. 8. A candidate who, having completed or simultaneously being a candidate for any other degree, enrols in the course for the degree of Bachelor of Science may, with the approval of the faculty, be given credit for subjects the equivalent of which have been passed by him In the course for such other degree. The total number of points to be so scored by him in respect of such subjects shall not exceed forty. 9. A candidate who has complied with the prescribed conditions and obtained a cumulative points score equal to or exceeding one hundred points may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Science. 10. For the purposes of Regulation 8.1.2 courses in the faculty of Science shall not be deemed to be courses in which specific work is assigned to specific years or in which candidates are required to complete years, but prizes, exhibitions and scholarships In the subjects of the course shall be awarded on such conditions as shall irom time to time be prescribed by the faculty and published together with the details of subjects. 11. In this Regulation the expression 'subject' shall Include part of a subject.

UNIT COURSES 1. Points Score The subjects (hereinafter described as units) for the degree and the points to be awarded for each are specified as follows. Examination results will be expressed as letter grades, A (80 and above), B (70-79), C (60-69), D (50-59), E (40-49), and F (below 40) for all units. 2. Prerequisites and Special Conditions (1) Except where otherwise provided, or with the special permission of the Science Faculty, no candidate shall be admitted to examination In any unit of the course unless he has the specified prerequisite units, and satisfies any special conditions associated with that unit. (11) A candidate who has, without passing a unit, been credited with the points for that unit, shall not proceed to higher level units in that course, but shall be allowed to proceed to higher levels of other courses for which a pass to that unit is a prerequisite. (ill) Credit is not normally available for both pass and honours level units of the same course. 3. For the purpose of Regulation 3.20 (i) Each unit at first-year level shall be known as a 100-level unit, afd shall be designated within the relevant department by numbers between 100 and 199. (11) Each unit at second-year level shall be known as a 200-level unit, and shall be designated within the relevant department by numbers between 200 and 299. (iil) Each unit at third-year level shall be known as a 300-level unit, and shall be designated within the relevant department by numbers between 300 and 399.

4. Availability of Units The Science Faculty reserves the right to not offer a unit In a particular year if a minimum enrolment is not reached. The availability of some units will also depend on staffing.

Lectures (These ф Practical Work figures are Special Conditions Unit Course (Hours) Points Prerequisites all approximate)

353 DEPARTMENT OF BIOCHEMISTRY 201 Biochemistry (practical) 2% per week Students majoring in Biochemistry 2 For all units: throughout the Biology 101 are required to take Biochemistry academic year Chemistry 101 201 and 202. Unit 201 is not avail- Physics 120, 140 able without lecture unit 202. or 160 202 Biochemistry (lectures) 48 б 301 Energy Transformations in the Cell 8 2 Biochemistry 201 Students majoring in Biochemistry 302 Protein Structure and Function 8 2 and 202 are expected to take a total of nine 2 units plus associated practical work. 303 Nucleic Acids and Protein Syn- 8 Chemistry 200 thesis level—any of the Units 301-305 inclusive are ob- 304 Metabolite Control of Metabolism 8 2 recommended ligatory; the remaining units may be 305 Endocrine Control of Metabolism 8 2 (A), (B), or (C) selected from units 306-317 inclu- courses sive. 306 Amino Acid and Protein Meta- 8 2 In special cases Students may take more than nine bolism the head of the lecture units but normally only stu- 307 Carbohydrates—Synthesis and 8 2 department may dents wishing to study all the nu- Metabolism waive the above trition units (i.e. 311, 312, 313 and 308 Lipid Metabolism and Membranes 8 2 prerequisites for 314) would be permitted to take 309 Biochemical Equilibria and 8 2 any or all of the more than one extra unit. specified units Kinetics The Department of Biochemistry 8 2 reserves the right to withdraw any 310 Physical Biochemistry 8 2 311 Whole Animal Metabolism of the elective units if they are 8 2 selected by only a small number of 312 Mineral Metabolism 313 Vitamins and Associated Meta- 8 2 students. bolism

* For 351 Department of Anatomy see page 82. 314 The Nutritive Value of Foods and 8 2 Units 301-309 will be given at the Nutritional Diseases normal times for Biochemistry 300 315 Plant Biochemistry 8 2 level, i.e. 9 a.m. on Tuesday and Thursday and 10 a.m. on Friday. The 316 Biochemistry of Human Disease 8 2 remaining lecture units will be given 317 Social Aspects of Biochemistry 8 2 at times to be determined. 921 Practical Biochemistry A 11 per week 3 Students wishing to take more than for 12 weeks four lecture units are obliged to take a practical unit. Units 321 and 322 Practical Biochemistry B 11 per week 3 322 will be obligatory for students for 12 weeks intending to major in Biochemistry 323 Practical Biochemistry C 6 реr week 3 and, unless recommended by the for 24 weeks head of the department, only those students taking both units 321 and 322 will be considered for the B.Sc. (Ions.) course in Biochemistry. Stu- dents not considering majoring in the subject may take unit 321 or unit 322 or unit 323. In filling practical places, preference for the first 36 places for the combined units 321 and 322 will be given to students taking a minimum of nine lecture units. The remaining 12 places in each practical unit will be allotted on the basis of academic merit. The quota for unit 323 will be 12.

АV Lectures

ф (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

356 DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY 101 Biology 72 96 8 Students majoring in Botany are and excursions required to take Botany 201 to 204. 201 Angiosperm Systematics and 24 34 4 For units 201- Students taking Botany 201 to 204 Ecology and excursions 206: are required to take Genetics 201 Chemistry 101 or Botany 206, not necessarily con- 101 Biology currently. 202 Plant Physiology (Sc.Co.) 24 48 203 Introduction to Non-flowering 24 72 Plants

204 Plant Anatomy 9 18 205 Whole-plant and Community 34 48 в Full credit for Botany 202 not given Physiology (Ag.Co.) with this unit.

206 Advanced Genetics and 18 27 4 Credit for Genetics 201 not given Plant Breeding (Ag.Co.) and excursion with this unit. 207 Conservation—Global and 18 2 Local Aspects

301 Plant Physiology 24 48 Botany 202 or Students taking three units from 205 Botany 301 to 307 will be considered as majoring in Botany.

302 Whole-plent Physiology and 24 48 6 Botany 202 or Community Ecology 205 303 Mycology and Pathology 24 48 6 Botany 203 304 Ecology and Geography 24 48 6 Botany 201 Prerequisites may be waived by the and excursions Head of the School of Botany. 305 General Botany 24 48 6 Botany 203 and and excursions 204 306 Plant Population Genetics 24 48 6 Genetics 201 or Botany 206 307 Phycology and Marine Botany 24 48 6 Botany 201 and and excursions 203

357 DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY 101 Chemistry 78 72 hours 8

Physical 201 Basic Physical Chemistry 32 42 hours 6 For all 200 level units: Chem 101 Maths 101 or 108 Physics 120, 140 or 160 202 Solids and Liquids 8 1 Chem 201 must be enrolled for concurrently 203 Surface and Solution Chemistry 8 1 Chem 201 must Credit may not be held for this unit be enrolled for simultaneously with 206 and/or 208 concurrently 206 Colloid and Surface Chemistry 8 1 Chem 201 must be enrolled for concurrently

0и .Lectures (These Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions Unit Course figures are (Hours) all approximate)

207 Electrochemistry 8 1 Chem 201 must be enrolled for concurrently 208 Water and Aqueous Solutions 1 Chem 201 must be enrolled for concurrently

Organic 220 Elementary Reaction Mechanisms 221 Polyfunctional Compounds 8 222 Aromaticity 8 1 223 Heterocyclic Compounds s 1 224 Elementary Heterocyclic and s 1 Credit may not be held for this unit Aromatic Chemistry simultaneously with 222 and/or 223 225 Stereochemistry 8 1 226 Applied Spectroscopy 8 1 230 Organic Practical Work I 42 hours 1 Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled for 4 or more 200 level points in Organic Chemistry. 231 Organic Practical Work Il 21 hours Enrolment in either this unit or 230 is compulsory for all students enrolled in 2 or 3 200 level points in Organic Chemistry. Inorganic 240 Theoretical Concepts A 8 1 Credit may not be held for this unit 241 Theoretical Concepts В 8 1 simultaneously with 240 242 Physical Methods 8 1 243 Co-ordination Chemistry and 1st 18 2 Row Transition Elements 244 Co-ordination Chemistry 8 1 Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 243 245 Descriptive Chemistry of Non- 8 i metals A 246 Descriptive Chemistry of Non- 8 I Credit may not be held for this unit metals В simultaneously with 245 247 Valence Theory and Co-ordina- 18 2 tion Chemistry for Students of biological sciences 248 Instrumental and Analytical Pro- 8 1 cedures 250 Inorganic Practical Work I 42 hours 1 Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled in 4 or more 200 level points In Inorganic Chemistry. 251 Inorganic Practical Work Il 21 hours % Enrolment in either this unit or 250 is compulsory for all students enrolled for 2 or 3 200 level points In In- organic Chemistry. General 260 Analytical Chemistry 42 hours 1 Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled for 10 or more points In Chemistry at the 200 level at

юи Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate )

Physical 301 Basic Quantum Mechanics 7 2 practice classes 1% Chem 201 302 3rd Law of Thermodynamics and 7 2 practice classes 1% Chem 201 Statistical Mechanics 303 Valence Theory 10 2 practice classes 2 Chem 201 304 Advanced Statistical mechanics 10 2 practice classes 2 Chem 201,302 305 Atomic and Molecular Spectro- 11 2 practical 2% Chem 201, 301, scopy exercises 302 306 Nuclear Resonance Spectroscopy 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201,301 exercises 307 Electrochemistry 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201 exercises 308 Electron paramagnetic resonance 8 2 practice 2 Chem 201, 301 classes 309 Surface Chemistry 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201, 302 exercises 310 Surface Chemistry for biologists 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201 Credit may not be held for this unit exercises simultaneously with 309. 311 Polymer Chemistry 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201,302 exercises 312 Polymer Chemistry for biologists 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201 Credit may not be held for this unit exercises simultaneously with 311 313 Kinetics of Gas Phase Reactions 2 practical 2 Chem 201, 302 exercises 314 Combustion Chemistry 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201, 302, exercises 314 315 Solution Chemistry 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201, 302 exercises 316 Solid State Chemistry 8 2 practical 2 Chem 201, 302 exercises 317 Kinetics and Thermodynamics of 9 1 1/2 Chem 201 biological systems 318 Chemical Processes in Natural 8 4 tutorials 2 Chem 201 Waters Organic 320 Spectroscopic Methods A 8 1% Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 226. 321 Spectroscopic Methods B 8 11 322 Reaction Mechanisms 8 1% 323 Elementary biological Chemistry 8 1% 324 Biological Chemistry 8 1% Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 323. 325 Biosynthesis 8 1% 326 Organic Photochemistry and 8 1% Electrocyclic Reactions 327 Reactive Intermediates 8 1% 328 General Organic Chemistry 8 1% Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 221. 329 Principles of Organic synthesis 8 1% Chem 221 or 328 330 Polymer and Free Radical 8 1% Chemistry 331 Molecules from nature 8 1% wи

и Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

332 Carbonium ion chemistry 8 1% 335 Organic Practical Work I 120 hours 4 Chem 230 or 231 Enrolment in this unit is compulsory Chem 226 or 320 for all students enrolled in 7 or more Organic theory points at the 300 level 336 Organic Practical Work it 60 hours 2 Chem 230 or 231 Enrolment in either this unit or 335 Chem 226 or 320 is compulsory for all students enrolled in from 3-6 Organic Theory points at the 300 level.

Inorganic 340 Physical Methods A 1 Chem 240 341 Physical Methods В 8 1% Cher 240, 242, 340 342 Non aqueous solvents 8 1% 343 Lanthanides and actinides 8 1% 344 Radiochem A 8 1% Not offered in 1973 345 Radiochem 8 8 1% Cher 344 Not offered in 1973 346 2nd and 3rd row transition metals 8 1% 347 Organometallic Chemistry 8 1% 348 Reaction Mechanisms 8 1% 349 Descriptive Chemistry of non- 8 1% Credit may not be held for this unit metals simultaneously with 245 350 Chemical aspects of metals of economic importance to Australia 351 Biological Inorganic Chemistry 16 60 hours 5 352 Advanced Instrumental Procedures 8 1% 354 Structure and Crystal Chemistry 8 1% 358 Inorganic Practical Work 120 hours 4 Chem 260 and Enrolment in this unit is compulsory 250 or 251 for all students enrolled in 8 or more Inorganic theory points at the 300 level (not counting 351). 359 Inorganic Practical Work II 60 hours 2 Chem 250 or 251 Enrolment in either this unit or 358 is compulsory for all students enrolled in from 3-7 Inorganic theory points at the 300 level (not counting 351). General 399 Chemical Research Project 1 5 weeks 4

359 DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Electronics

301 Electronics and Networks 60 3 per week 12 Pure Mathematics 201 and a minimum of 16 points credit from Physics 200 level units 302 Digital Circuits 18 3 Electronics 301 must be taken concurrently 303 Applied Electrodynamics 18 3 Electronics 301 al must be taken Cn concurrently

аи Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions all approxi- (Hours) mate)

304 Laboratory Project 3 per week 3 Electronics 301 Not to be offered in 1973 must be taken concurrently 652 DEPARTMENTS OF THE ENGINEERING SCHOOL 101 Introduction to Engineering 2 per week Tutorials and 8 drawing office work 399 DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY 201 Forestry: Forestry 78 100 14 Biology 101 and field excursions •202 Forestry: Forest Conservation 30 Field excursions 6 Biology 101 and exercises 203 Forestry: Dendrology 17 34 З Biology 101 301 Forestry: Forestry 78 78 15 Forestry 201 and field excursions 302 Forestry: Forest Products 78 30 12 and field excursions 303 Forestry: Forest Technology 52 78 and field excursions

•304 Forestry: Forest Biology 52 27 and field 8 Biology 101 excursions •305 Forestry: Aerial Photo- 10 1 Interpretation •306 Forestry: Forest Recreation 9 27 1 and field excursions 401 Forestry: Forestry 165 78 Forestry 301 and 78 project and field excursions 403 Forestry: Natural Resource 37 78 Forestry 305 Inventory and field exercises

•404 Forestry: Systems Analysis 78 40 15 Forestry 301 or and exercises Agricultural Economics Il or Economics A • 405 Forestry: Remote Sensing of the 12 27 3 Forestry 305 Natural Environment and field exercises or its equivalent 406 Forestry: Forest Resource 14 21 3 Inventory and field exercises •407 Forestry: Elements of Aerial 11 30 2 Forestry 305 Photogrammetry or its equivalent 381 DEPARTMENT OF GENETICS 201 General Genetics 1 per week 2 per week 5 Biology 101 throughout the year

m V • Available for candidates not enrolled for BSeF.

и Lectures (These Points Practical Work Unit Course figures are Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

301 Biochemical and Developmental 4 per week 10 per week 4 Genetics 201 Genetics (4 weeks) and a 2-hour tutorial

302 Population Genetics 4 реr week 10 реr week 4 Genetics 201 (4 weeks) and a 2-hour tutorial 303 Microbial and Molecular Genetics 4 реr week 10 per week 4 Genetics 201 (4 weeks) and a 2-hour tutorial 304 Human Genetics 4 per week 10 per week 4 Genetics 201 (4 weeks) and a 2-hour tutorial

305 Cytogenetics 4 реr week 10 реr week 4 Genetics 201 (4 weeks) апд a 2-hour tutorial

306 Genetics of Fungi and 4 реr week 10 per week 4 Genetics 201 Higher Plants (4 weeks) and a 2-hour tutorial

363 DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY 101 Geography 72 3 per week 8 All 200 and 300 апд field level units require excursions Geography 101 as prerequisite 201 Land Systems Analysis 3 per week 6 per week 6 Geology 100 (1 term) and field excursions 202 Principles of Conservation 3 per week 6 per week 6 (1 term)

203 Quantitative Methods in 3 per week 6 per week Students majoring in Geography Geography (1 term) must take all 200 level units. 301 Coastal and Fluvial 3 per week 6 per week 7 Geology 100 Geomorphology (1 term)

302 Population Geography 3 per week 6 per week 7 Credit will not be available for both (1 term) Geography 301, and 288 or 289 Geomorphology. 303 Regional Theory 3 per week 3 per week 3 Students majoring in Geography will (1 term) take all 300 level units. 304 Problems of Modem Geography (1 term) 3 per week З tutorial-practical work 305 Project in Physical Geography 6 per week 4

365 DEPARTMENT OF GEOLOGY

101 Geology 78 3 per week 8 If it Is necessary to invoke quotas for selection into any of the series of 200 Geology 100 6 per week 18 For units 201- later-year units, preference will be 206: given to students opting to major in 101 Geology either Geology or Geophysics or 101 Chemistry both. 201 Mineralogy 16 24 З 202 Igneous and Metamorphic 16 24 3 201 Mineralogy v, Petrography co Lectures (These Practical Work figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions Unit Course (Hours) all approximate)

203 Structural Geology 16 24 З Students majoring in Geology are required to take Geology 200 and to 204 Sedimentology 16 24 3 201 Mineralogy enrol Individually in units 201-206.

205 Palaeontology 16 24 3 206 Principles of Stratigraphy 16 24 3 204 Sedimen- tology 205 Palaeon- tology 300 Geology 112 6 per week 21 For units 301- Students majoring in Geology are 307: required to take Geology 300 and to Geology 200 enrol individually in units 301-307. Students majoring in Geophysics may not take unit 306 Introductory Geo- physics. 16 24 3 202 Igneous and 301 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenesis Metamorphic Petrography 302 Historical Geology 16 24 З 303 Tectonics and Geological Synthesis 16 24 3 206 Principles of Stratigraphy 304 Economic Geology A 16 24 З 201 Mineralogy 305 Economic Geology В 16 24 З 306 Introductory Geomorphology 16 24 3 I 307 Introductory Geophysics 16 24 3 Not available to students taking Geo- physics 340 or any of its constituent units other than 345 Exploration Geophysics A.

310 Geology с85 12 per week 20 For units 311- Students taking Geology 310 are re- 320: quired to enrol individually in the Geology 300 five units selected. Except in special circumstances students wishing to proceed to ВSc( Нons) in Geology are required to have taken five units in Geology 310. 311 Advanced Mineralogy and Petro- 16 48 4 301 Igneous and logy Metamorphic Petrogenesis 312 Structural Analysis 16 48 4 203 Structural Geology 313 Advanced Sediment°logy 16 48 4 204 Sediment- ology 314 Advanced Palaeontology 16 48 4 205 Palaeonto- logy 315 Advanced Economic Geology A 16 48 4 304 Economic Geology A

318 Advanced Economic Geology В 16 48 4 305 Economic Geology В 317 Principles of Geochemistry 20 36 4 101 Chemistry 318 Research Methods in Geology 20 38 4 101 Chemistry 319 Processes in Geomorphology 16 48 4 307 Introductory Geomorpho- logy 320 Surficial Geology 16 48 4 307 Introductory Geomorpho- ф logy Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

340 Geophysics с100 с300 24 For units 341- Students majoring in Geophysics are 346: required to take Geophysics 340 and to enrol individually In each unit 120 Physics or selected. 140 Physics or Students taking 9 or more points of Geophysics are required to take 351 341 Geodesy, Geomagnetism and the 16 160 Physics and Geophysics Practical A. Students Origin of the Earth taking 18 or more points of Geo- 101 Geology or 342 Seismology 16 physics are required to take both 347 Geology 351 Geophysics Practical A and 352 For units 341- 343 Geothermy, Geomagnetism and 16 Geophysics Practical B. З 344 and 346: Global Tectonics 240 Mathematics or 281 Mathematics 344 Oceanography 16 3 For unit 345: 345 Exploration Geophysics A 16 3 101 Mathematics or 141 Mathematics or 346 Exploration Geophysics В 16 З 181 Mathematics 347 Geology (Geophysics) 20 c3ß 4 Available only to students taking Geophysics 340 or its constituent units who do not have credit for 101 Geology. 351 Geophysics Practical A 150 3 352 Geophysics Practical 150 3 В 360 Geochemistry 48 144 12 101 Geology Not available to students majoring in 101 Chemistry Geology.

380 Geomorphology 48 120 11 101 Geology Not available to students majoring in Geology. Credit cannot be obtained for both Geomorphology 380 and Geography 301. 367 DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

101 History of Astronomy 25 lectures 4 First half of year only. and 12 tutorials 102 History of Theories of Generation 25 lectures 4 Second half of year only. and Inheritance and 12 tutorials 201 Philosophy of Mathematics 25 lectures c8 6 Minimum of 14 First half of year only. and points of BSc 12 tutorials units 202 General philosophy of Science 25 lectures 5 Minimum of 14 Second half of year. Students must and points of 8Sc either have done Philosophy of 12 tutorials units Mathematics unit or satisfy the De- partment of their competence in elementary logic. 210 History of Mathematics 25 2-hour 8 Minimum of 14 lecture- points of BSc seminars units of on throughout special recom- year mendation of head of ф department

Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

221 History of Theories of Matter and 50 lectures 12 Chemical Change and 24 tutorials 222 History of Public Health and Germ 50 lectures 12 Theory and 24 tutorials 301 Philosophy Foundations of 25 2-hour 8 202 Available in 1973 and alternate Induction and Probability lecture- years thereafter. seminars throughout the year 302 Philosophical Problems in Theory- 25 2-hour c6 8 202 Not available in 1973. Available in Structure and Explanation lecture- 1974 and alternate years thereafter. seminars throughout the year 321 History of Theories of Matter and 15 1 %s-2 4 Second half of year only. This sub- Chemical Change hour ject can only be taken in conjunction lecture- with 221. seminars 322 History of Public Health and 15 2-hour 4 First and Second Terms only. This Germ Theory lecture- subject can only be taken in con- seminars junction with 222.

For further H.P.S. units see Physics (385-368) and В.Sc.Ed. (367-311) o 369 DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION SCIENCE 101 Computer Programming 18 12 2 (Term 1) 201 Computer Programming 18 18 4 Information Note that the computing unit of 151 Science 101 Applied IE may be considered equivalent to 101 Information Science as 202 Numerical Methods 24 8 4 Pure Mathe- a prerequisite. matics 101 Information Science 101 203 Computers: Logical Design and 21 7 4 Information This prerequisite may be waived in Organization Science 201 special circumstances. 301 Computers: Systems, Pro- 27 18 6 Information gramming Science 203 302 Numerical Methods for Linear 24 16 6 Pure Mathe- Systems matics 201 Information Science 202 or Mixed Math- matics 281 303 Numerical Analysis of Con- 21 14 5 Pure Mathe- tinuous Functions matics 201 Information Science 202 or Mixed Math- matics 281 313 Data Structures and Data 21 14 5 Information Management Science 301 371 DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS Note: 100 Pass Series Ions. Series 140 Pass Series Ions. Series 180 Other subjects 220 260 200 Pure Maths 320 Pure laths Applied Maths Applied Maths и 240 280 300 Subjects Subjects 340 Subjects 360 Subjects 380

ф Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

(When an existing subject is unitized, students in faculties other than Science, such as Arts, will continue to take the whole subject, specified below as an appropriate combination of units.)

101 Pure Maths 69 23 8 103 Group Theory 1 8 3 1 141 Mechanics I 44 15 5 141 must be accompanied by 101 and CP 143 Differential Equations 8 3 1 CP Computer Programming 17 6 2 (Inf.Sci.101) 181 General Maths 69 23 • 8 181 and 101 cannot both be credited 201 Pure Maths 11 Pass 69 46 12 101 103 is either prerequisite or corequi- site for 201 taken in 1973 221 Pure Maths II Hone 92 23 15 101 221 must be accompanied by 227 with honours 103 is either prerequisite or corequi- site 227 Maths Numerical Project 0 0 1 101 228 Number Theory Project 0 0 1 241 Math Methods II Pass 36 12 6 101 + 141 241 should normally be accompanied by 201 Prerequisite 141 may be waived if results in 101 are sufficiently good.

243 Classical Mechs 11 Pass 18 6 3 101+141 243 must be accompanied by 241 245 Fluid Mechanics 11 Pass 15 5 3 101+141 245 must be accompanied by 241 261 Math Methods II Ions 36 12 7 101+141 261 must be accompanied by 221 with honours 263 Classical Mechs I1 Ions 18 6 4 101+141 263 must be accompanied by 261 with honours 265 Fluid Mechs 11 Ions 15 5 4 101+141 265 must be accompanied by 261 with honours 281 Mixed Maths Il 69 46 12 101 281 cannot be credited along with any of 201 221 241 261 301 Linear Algebra 15 3 201 or 221 or 281PURE MATHS Ill Pass: 302 Complex Variable 20 4 201 or 221 or 281Mathematics Pass Majors must include one of the following three com- 303 Analysis 25 6 201 or 221 binations: 304 Further Analysis 15 4 201 + 303, or PURE MATHS III Pass Maths Pass 221 Majors should take 305 Abstract Algebra 15 4 201 or 221 301 + 302 + 303 + 304 + 228 or 301 + 302 + 303 + 305 + 228 309 Topology 15 4 201 or 221 or 318. 318 Mathematical Structures 69 18 201 ог 221 227 can replace 228 301, 302, 305 cannot be credited with 318 309, if available, can replace 304. 321 Real and Complex Analysis 60 12 221 PURE MATHS III Ions consists of 322 Abstract Algebra 25 4 with honours or 321 + 322+ 323 -I- 324. 301 + 303 The only other combination available 323 Projective Geometry 25or0 4 + 304 with is 321 + 322. 324 Differential Geometry Oor 25 4 good results For Maths-Phys Ions course stu- 325 Matrix Theory 25 4 221 dents must take either Pure Maths co 1111 or 321 + 322 -F 361. rn ф Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

341 Potential Theory 10 2 201 or 221 APPLIED MATHS Ill Pass consists 241 or 261 of 342 with either of 341 or LP LP Linear Programming (Stat. 311) 10 201 or 221

342 Continuum Mechanics and 60 14 201 ог 221 It is recommended that Pure Maths Mathematical Methods 241 or 261 Ill Pass or H be taken concurrently 243 or 263 if not completed previously. 245 or 265 361 Electromagnetism 35 10 221 + 261 APPLIED MATHS III Ions consists } Phys 122 of 361 and 362. It is recommended or 142 that 321 + 322 be taken concurrently if not completed previously. A knowledge of 263 or Physics 224 will be assumed. 362 Continuum Mechanics 35 10 221 + 261

373 DEPARTMENT OF METALLURGY 201 Materials Processing 36 24 hours of Mathematics 101 Metallurgy 200 (17 points), com- practice classes Physics 120, 140, prises 201, 202 and 204. This is or seminars, 160 normally the minimum requirement 36 hours practical Chemistry 101 for students intending to major in work, excursions Metallurgy; 203 is recommended.

202 Materials Science 36 24 hours of 8 Mathematics 101 practice classes Physics 120, 140, or seminars, 160 36 hours practical Chemistry 101 It is desirable that 202 and 203 be work taken In conjunction by students 203 Continuum Mechanics 24 24 hours of 6 Mathematics 101; whose major interest is Materials practice classes Mathematics 141 Science or Physics. or seminars, is desirable 36 hours practical work 204 Statistical Thermodynamics O 12 hours of 1 Mathematics 101 204 may only be taken in conjunc- practice classes Physics 120, 140, tion with 201 or 202. or seminars 160 Chemistry 101 301 Metallurgy 84 1 hour practice 24 Metallurgy 201 class per week 12 hours practical work per week and excursions 375 DEPARTMENT OF METEORO- LOGY 101 Introduction to the Atmosphere 12 1 102 Atmospheric Dynamics 12 1 Meteorology 101 (recommended) 103 Large Weather Systems 12 1 Meteorology 101, 102 (recommended) 104 Local Weather Systems 12 1 Meteorology 102 (recommended) 105 Analysis and Prediction 12 1 Meteorology 101, 102, 103

(mandatory) co

V o Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

106 Radiation and Energy Balance 12 1 Meteorology 101, 102 (recommended) 107 Climate and Man 12 1 108 Computer Meteorology 6 18 1 Information Available in 2nd and 3rd terms only Science 101 201 Outline of,Meteorology 12 For all 200 and 300 level units students without credit for at least 101 and 102. Credit is not available for both 201 and any 100 level unit. 202 Meteorological Measurements 10 2 203 Thermodynamics of the 10 в 2 Atmosphere 204 Climatology 10 6 301 Dynamics 8 12 2 A total of 9 third-year units is required by students majoring in Meteorology. 302 Micrometeorology s 12 2 303 Solar Radiation 8 12 2 304 Turbulence 8 12 2 305 Numerical Weather Prediction 12 2 Meteorology 301

306 Terrestrial Radiation Meteorology 303 307 Synoptic Meteorology Meteorology 301 308 Cloud Physics 8 12 2 309 General Glaciology 12 12 2 310 onwards are units provided by guest lecturers and vary from year 310 Tropical Dynamics 12 2 to year. 311 Ice Dynamics 8 12 2

312, 313 etc Further guest units on topics to be decided.

377 DEPARTMENT OF MICROBIOLOGY 201 Microbiology 48 72 8 Biology 101 Students planning to take Micro- biology 301 must take Microbiology 201. 202 Microbiology 48 8 Biology 101 203 Microbiology (Optometry) 20 3 Biology 101 Microbiology Students majoring in Microbiology 301 Microbiology 100 240 26 201, and are required to take at least 4 of 302 Bacteriology 20 so в Biochemistry these 5 third year units. 303 Virology 20 40 5 201, or second level Chemistry either group (A). (B), or (C)

304 Immunology 20 40 ь In special cases the head of the 305 Industrial Microbiology 20 40 Б department may 306 Microbial Genetics 20 40 5 waive the above prerequisites for any of the specified units .

N Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions all approxi- (Hours) mate)

379 DEPARTMENT OF MINING 201 Mining (Science Course) 38 3 per week 9 and excursions

381 DEPARTMENT OF PATHOLOGY 301 Lecture and Tutorial Course 75 40 201 Physiology, 301, 302, 303 and 304 Pathology (tutorials) 201 Histology can be taken concurrently. 201 10 (201 Biochemistry Microbiology advised. OR Medicine Div. Il 302 Practical Histopathology and 60 5 301 Pathology 301 Pathology can be taken con- Autopsy Demonstration Classes currently. 303 Experimental Pathology 100 8 301 and 302 301 and 302 Pathology can be taken Pathology concurrently. 304 Histopathological and Electron 6 12 1 (a) Not advised except as a com- Microscopic Techniques ponent of the complete course 301, 302, 303, and 304 Path- ology. (b) Not necessary if candidate has passed Advanced Histology or is taking this subject concurrently. 306 General Pathology 10-12 May not be available in 1973. 383 DEPARTMENT OF PHARMACOLOGY 301 Systematic Pharmacology 26 72 8 In general, Physi- Students are advised to take 301 302 Physiological Pharmacology 12 48 4 ology 201 and with any or all other units. 4 Histology 201 303 Behavioural Pharmacology 12 48 and Biochemistry 304 Molecular and Biochemical 12 48 4 201 are pre- Pharmacology requisites for all 305 Applied Pharmacology 12 48 4 units, but consideration will be given for exemption in special cases 385 DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS Note: Physics 120 = Physics 121 + 122 + 123 + 199 Students wishing to take 24 or more points worth of third year units must Physics 140 = Physics 141 + 142 + 143 -{- 199 include in their courses Physics 120 Physics 160 = Physics 161 + 162 + 163 + 198 or 140. 121 Mechanics, Wave Motion 29 2 122 Electromagnetism 24 2 123 Modern Physics 21 2 141 Mechanics, Wave Motion 29 2 142 Electromagnetism 24 2 143 Modern Physics 21 2 161 Mechanics, Properties of Matter 27 2 162 Thermodynamics, 23 2 Electromagnetism 163 Modern Physics 21 2 198 Laboratory Work 60 2 . 199 Laboratory Work 72 2 wа

Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate) 241 Electronics 16 54 3 Physics 122 or 142 Mathematics 101

223 Quantum Mechanics 24 3 Physics 121 or 141 243 Quantum Mechanics 24 З Mathematics 101 224 Classical Mechanics 16 2 Physics 121 or or 244 Classical Mechanics 16 2 141, )Mathematics 141 Mathematics 101 225 Electromagnetism 16 2 Ì Physics 122 or 142 245 Electromagnetism 16 2 Physics 121 or 141 Mathematics 101 }Physics 121 or 226 Thermal Physics 16 2 141 246 Thermal Physics 16 2 Mathematics 101

227 Optics 16 2 Physics 121 or 141 247 Optics 16 2 Mathematics 101

228 Relativity 8 Physics 121 or 248 Relativity 8 )141 299 Laboratory Work 84 3 Physics 199 Core Units 320 Quantum Mechanics 30 5 )Physics 223 or Students are required to include core 340 Quantum Mechanics 24 4 243 units and laboratory work according Mathematics 241 to the table on page 201. or 261 or 281 321 Thermal Physics 30 6 lPhvslcs 226 or 341 Thermal Physics 18 3 246

322 Nuclear Physics 30 5 Physics 223 or 342 Nuclear Physics 18 g 243

323 Solid State Physics З0 6 Physics 223 or 343 Solid State Physics 18 3 243

324 Electrodynamics З0 )Physics 225 or 344 Electrodynamics 18 3 Ј 245 Mathematics 241 or 261 or 281

Supplementary Units

360 Atomic and Molecular Physics 18 3 Physics 223 or Students wishing to proceed to BSc 243 (Ions) year must take at least 24 361 Diffraction 18 3 Physics 222 or points worth of third year Physics 242 or 227 or units, which must include Physics 247 320 or 340.

Mathematics 241 и or 261 or 281 о» Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

362 Electronics 18 3 Physics 241 363 Astronomy 12 2 364 Biophysics 12 2 365 Cosmic Rays 12 2 366 Digital Computing 12 2 368 History and Philosophy of Science 12 2 370 Theory of Experiments 12 2 371 Upper Atmosphere Physics 12 2 375 Particle Physics 12 2 Physics 223 or 243 Physics 222 or 4 242 390 Laboratory Work 6 weeks ' 391 Laboratory Work 9 weeks в 392 Laboratory Work 12 weeks 8 393 Laboratory Work 15 weeks 10 Physics 299 394 Laboratory Work 18 weeks 12 395 Laboratory Work 21 weeks 14 396 Laboratory Work 24 weeks 16 387 DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY 201 Physiology 2 per week 2%2 per week 8 Physics 160 Students taking this unit must have (Minimum passed or be studying Histology 201. requirement) Students are advised that it is de- Chemistry 101 sirable to have passed or be study- Biology 101 ing,Biochemistry 201 or 202.

301 Physiology 3 per week 12 per week 24 As for 302 Physiology 301 consists of Physio- logy 302, with 6 hours additional laboratory work per week. 302 Physiology 3 per week 6 per week 18 Physiology 201 Histology 201 Biochemistry 201 or 202 304 Biophysics and nervous system 3 per week 8 per week ß As for 302 Physiology 304 or 305 cannot be (1st term (1st term only) taken if Physiology 301 or 302 Is only) taken. 305 Renal, alimentary and lipid 3 per week 6 per week 5 As for 302 transport systems (3rd term (3rd term only) only)

389 DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY

101 Psychology 24 48 8 201 Psychology 72 48 12 Psychology 101 205 Human Learning A (ii) 9 18 3 Normally open only to Provisional 211 Perception A 8 14 3 Honours candidates (see p. 246). Enrolled for 224 Social Interaction Processes A (ii) 16 16 3 Psychology 201 226 Social Research Methods 8 14 3 243 Quantitative Methods A (i) ) 7 14 3

301 Psychology 60 64 15 Psychology 201

304 Topics in the Psychology of 12 12 3 Language

v W Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) ail approximate)

305 Cognitive Processes 12 12 3 306 Information Processing 12 12 3 308 Cognitive Development 12 12 3 309 Applied Personality Theory 12 12 3 311 Perception В 12 12 3 3 312 Neuropsychology В 12 12 313 Human Performance 12 12 3 314 Psychophysics 12 12 3 316 Introduction to Simulation 12 12 3 322 Social Interaction Processes C 12 12 3 Normally open only to Final Ion- 324 Introduction to Occupational 12 12 3 ours candidates (see p. 246) and not Psychology all available in 1973. 325 Interpersonal Processes 12 12 3 335 Psychopathology C 12 12 3 342 Quantitative Methods C 12 12 3 342 may not be taken with 343. 343 Quantitative Methods D 12 12 3 344 Assessment 12 12 3 345 Models of Data in Social Science 12 12 3 355 Theory in Psychology A 12 12 3 356 Theory in Psychology В 12 12 3 361 Research Project 200 6 395 DEPARTMENT OF SCIENCE LANGUAGES (THE LANGUAGE CENTRE) 201 Science French (Pass Only) 2 per week Tutorials and A Science Language is not required language labora- for the degree of Inc (Pass), and tory practice no points are therefore allotted to these subjects. 202 Science German (Pass Only) 2 per week Tutorials and language laboratory practice 203 Science Russian (Pass Only) 2 per week Tutorials and language laboratory practice 391 DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS 101 Descriptive Statistics, Probability, 101, 102, and 103 Statistics are Distributions 18 8 hours practical 2 terminal units. Credit is not avail- work and 8 hours Statistics 101 able for these units if any 200 or 102 Inference 16 tutorial work 2 which may be 300 level units of Statistics are in- waived cluded in the course. 103 Design and Analysis of 16 with each unit 2 Statistics 102 Experiments

201 Probability and Distribution Theory 24 4 Mathematics 101 for all 200 level 8 hours tutorial units 202 Statistical Inference 24 and 16 hours 4 Statistics 201 practical 203 Design and Analysis of Expert- 24 4 Statistics 202 ments, Regression 1 221 Forecasting and Inventory Control 12 12 2 Mathematics 101, Statistics 101 222 Queueing Theory 12 12 2 Mathematics 101, Statistics 101 ф Lectures (These фo Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

223 Linear Programming 12 12 2 Mathematics 101 224 Mathematical Programming 12 12 2 Statistics 223 301 Distribution Theory A 14 3 Statistice 201, + Mathematics 201 or 221

302 Distribution Theory В 10 Statistics 301 303 Statistical Inference A 14 Statistics 202, + Mathematics 201 or 221

304 Statistical Inference В 10 Statisticв 303 305 Analysis of Variance 14 Statistics 301, 7-8 hours 303 practical and 7-8 306 Introductory Stochastic Processes 14 Statistics 301 hours tutorial 307 Design and Analysis of 10 work are 2 Statistics 203, Experiments required for 305 each unit 308 Regression Analysis 10 2 Statistics 203, 305

309 Sample Surveys 10 2 Statistics 201

310 Distribution-Free Methods 10 2 Statistics 202, 301

311 Linear Programming 10 2 Mathematics 201 Credit is not given for both Statis- or 221 tics 223 and 311.

312 Decision Theory 10 Statistics 301, 303 313 Project (Honours) 582 DEPARTMENT OF SURVEYING

201 Basic Operations in Plane Sur- 12 18 2 Students who receive credit for unit veying 205 cannot in addition receive credit for more than one of the units 201 to 204 inclusive. 202 Theodolite Traversing 12 18 2 203 Tacheometric Surveying 12 18 2 } 204 Engineering Surveying 12 18 2 205 Surveying 25 25 4 Students who receive credit for more than one of the units 201 to 204 inclusive cannot in addition receive credit for unit 205. 301 Surveying Part Il 75 6 per week 18 302 Photogrammetry Part I 48 Э per week 10 393 DEPARTMENT OF ZOOLOGY (355-101) Biology 72 100 8 Students majoring In Zoology are 201 Invertebrate Zoology and 22 45 6 Biology 101 required to take Zoology 201 to 204 Excursion and General Genetics 201 unless an adequate standard has already been 202 Vertebrate Zoology 20 42 4 Biology 101 attained in this subject. 203 Cell Physiology 15 30 3 Biology 101 Chemistry 101 204 Ecology and Excursions 15 30 3 Invertebrate Zoology and Excursion 201 301 Advanced Cell Physiology 24 72 6 Cell Physiology 203 or Physio- Students majoring in Zoology are logy 201 required to enrol for 5 unit courses in 302 Ethology 24 72 6 Vertebrate the series 301-308. ф Zoology 202

Iternativ, units. Lectures (These Practical Work Unit Course figures are Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (Hours) all approximate)

1303 Comparative Physiology 24 72 6 Cell Physiology 203 or Physio- logy 201 t304 Advanced Ecology 24 72 6 Ecology 204 *305 Embryology and Morphogenesis 24 72 6 Vertebrate Prerequisites may be waived by the Zoology 202 head of the Department. General Genetics 201 *306 Entomology 24 72 6 Invertebrate Zoology 201 307 Evolution 24 3 Biology 101 BSc (Ed) students may take General General Genetics Genetics concurrently with Evolu- 201 tion 307 308 Project 72 З Except in special circumstances enrolment in this unit is restricted to students already enrolled for 21 points of Zoology 300 level units. 351 DEPARTMENT OF ANATOMY 201 Histology 26 2 per week 4 Biology 101 Must be studying, or must have Chemistry 101 studied, Physiol. 201 or Biochem. Physics 160 202. 301 Advanced Histology 52 3 per week 10 Physiology 201 Histology 201 Biochem. 201 or Med. Div. II t Alternative units. t Alternative units. REGULATIONS

APPROVAL OF COURSE Approval by the faculty must be obtained for a candidate's proposed choice of units and the years in which they are taken. (See Reg. 3.20.6.) Any subsequent changes must also be approved. It is the responsibility of each student to obtain this approval and on authorization-to-enrol prior to enrolling or amending enrolment at the Students Record Office and embarking on any units. The following rules apply to Approval of Course. Normal Course (i) An approved course of study must contain units selected from the 100 level such that the cumulative total of possible points scored as a credit for passing examinations in these units shall be not less than twenty-eight (28) nor more than forty-eight (48). (ii) Except where special permission Is granted by the faculty for this to be exceeded, the maximum total credit which may be attempted during one year is ss follows: First year students 32 points Second year students 38 points Third year students 44 points Note: A first year student is one who has earned less than 28 points. A second year student Is one who has earned 28 or more but less than 60 points. A third year student is one who has earned 60 or more but less than 100 points. See Reg. 3.20.4. (Ili) In certain cases approval may be given by the faculty for a candidate to substitute subjects or portions of subjects other than those listed above In his approved course, provided they are relevant to the student's course and of suitable standard and content. (See Reg. 3.20.7.) Science students must have such substitutions approved before embarking on the subjects. Transfer from another Course Students who transfer to Science, having done relevant subjects In other courses may be granted credit for subjects deemed equivalent to Science units, according to a table of equivalents approved from time to time by the faculty, and will be awarded points for the equivalent Science units so credited. Cases are not covered by this table will be considered If they are submitted to the faculty. The maximum number of points awarded to transferring students is sixty. Combined Courses Credit for work done elsewhere is granted to candidates undertaking courses leading to two qualifications, or to persons holding other qualifications entering a Science course, in a manner similar to that of awarding credit for students transferring to Science from other courses, except that in this case, the maximum credit awarded will be 40 points. Prizes (See Reg. 6.1.) For the purpose of Regulation 6.1, a candidate who obtains honours in a unit or group of units may be awarded a prize, exhibition or scholarship in accordance with the conditions prescribed in the regulation relating to any such award In that subject, provided he has, at the one annual examination obtained a total point score of not less than twenty-eight (28). 83 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

A complete list of undergraduate awards offerer for subjects in the faculty of Science is given on p. 35. Regulation 3.21—Degree of Bachelor of Science (Degree with Honours) 1. An applicant for candidature for the degree of Bachelor of Science (degree with honours) shall— (a) have completed an approved course for the degree of Bachelor of Science course of a university; (b) be recommended for candidature by the head of the appropriate department; (c) obtain the approval of the faculty to enter the course; provided that in those departments in which the honours course is the last year of a specified course•, a candidate shall have completed the requirements for all preceding years of that specified course, as prescribed in the details of subjects for the degree of Bachelor of Science (degree with honours). 2. A candidate shall pursue for at least one year a course of study and investigation prescribed by the Professorial Board in the details of subjects in such honour school or schools as the faculty may approve. 3. A candidate shall— (a) pass such written examinations or viva voce examinations or both, as the faculty may decide; (b) submit for examination a detailed report on the investigations carried out by him during that year; (C) unless he has previously done so, pass the examination in one of the following- Science French, Science German, Science Russian or any other language approved by the faculty as appropriate to the course of study undertaken by the candidate; provided that a candidate who satisfies the faculty of his competence in French or German or Russian or any other language approved by the faculty may be excused examination in the corresponding Science Language subject. 4. A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science (degree with honours) may not, except by special permission of the faculty, enter at the annual examination for any subject other than those prescribed in the course for that degree.

5. The final assessment of the candidates shall be for honours only, and first, second, and third class honours may be awarded. 8. A candidate who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Science (degree with honours). Regulation 3.24—Degree of Master of Science PRELIMINARY 1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science shall either— (a) have completed the course for the degree of Bachelor of Science (degree with honours) of the University, provided however that a • Schools of Mathematical Statistics, Mathematics, and Psychology end the combined School of Mathematics and Physics.

84 REGULATIONS

thesis of such a candidate submitted under section 7 of this regulation shall not be accepted for examination unless he has graduated in the University; or (b) holds a degree or qualification recognized by the Professorial Board pursuant to Regulation 3.3.4; or (c) be any other graduate who satisfies the faculty of Science (hereinafter called 'the faculty') that he has adequate scientific training. 2. For each applicant under clause 1 (b) or 1 (c), the faculty may prescribe, on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned, appropriate preliminary courses of study and examinations which the applicant must complete before he can be accepted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Science. 3. An applicant for candidature for the degree of Master of Science shall submit to the faculty of Science a proposed course of advanced study and training in research to be undertaken by him in a department of the University. 4. The faculty may admit as a candidate for the degree an applicant who satisfies the faculty— (a) that his proposed course of study and training is of a sufficient standard; and (b) his candidature is recommended by the head of the appropriate department.

COURSE OF STUDY 5. (a) After being accepted a candidate shall pursue for at least one year a course of advanced study and training in research in the University under supervision prescribed by the faculty, save that when the head of the appropriate department recommends that it is essential for the candidate to obtain material for his course away from the University the faculty may grant permission for the candidate to absent himself from the University for such periods as may be determined in each case, provided that supervision satisfactory to the faculty can be maintained; (b) a candidate for the degree of Master of Science may not except by special permission of the faculty enter at the annual examination for any subject other than those prescribed for the completion of the course for that degree.

8. The candidate shall be required during the course to devote his whole time to his advanced study and research, save that— (a) the faculty may allow a candidate on application to undertake a limited amount of university teaching or outside work which in its judgment will not Interfere with the pursuit of the proposed course of advanced study and research; (b) the following persons may be accepted by the faculty as part-time candidates for the degree: (1) a member of the staff of the University; or (1i) In special circumstances a person engaged in another occupation which in the opinion of the faculty leaves the candidate substantially free to pursue his course in a department of the University;

85 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

and the faculty shall prescribe the duration of the course of a part- time candidate having regard to the proportion of time which he is able to devote to the course in the appropriate University department, which is equivalent to the one year ordinarily required. 7. Each candidate shall— (a) submit for examination a thesis embodying the results of research carried out by him during his course for the degree, within the time prescribed by the faculty; (b) pass at the annual examination in any subject or subjects prescribed by the faculty; (c) pass the examination in one of the following— Science French or Science German or Science Russian or any other language approved by the faculty as appropriate to the research approved under section 3; provided that a candidate who satisfies the faculty of his competence in French or German or Russian or in any other language approved by the faculty may be excused examination in the corresponding Science Language subject.

SPECIAL CANDIDATES 8. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding section— (a) a graduate in a scientific discipline of this University of not less than four years standing may, as a 'non-attending' candidate, submit for examination his published or unpublished work based on research in some approved branch of Science;

(b) a graduate in a scientific discipline of a recognized university, which does not grant the degree of Master of Science in a School of Meteorology may be accepted as a candidate in the School of Meteorology and such candidate shall: (i) complete such appropriate preliminary courses of study and pass examinations prescribed by the faculty; and (ii) establish substantial association with the University as determined by faculty; and (iii) after a period of not less than four years from the date of acceptance as a candidate submit for examination his published or unpublished work based on research in the approved topic; (c) a graduate in a scientific discipline of a recognized university who satisfies the faculty of Science that he has received an adequate scientific training and who resides in Victoria, may be accepted as a candidate, and such a candidate shall: (i) establish substantial association with the University as determined by faculty; and (ii) after a period of not less than four years from the date of acceptance as a candidate submit for examination his published or unpubIished work based on research in the approved topic.

GENERAL 9. Repealed. 10. A candidate in submitting his thesis shall state generally in a preface, afd specifically in notes, the sources from which his information

8в REGULATIONS is derived, the extent to which he has availed himself of the work of others, and in general terms the portions of his work which he claims as original. When a candidate submits work carried out in collaboration with another person, he shall indicate his own share in the work. 11. A candidate may not present as his thesis any work for which a degree has been conferred on him in this or another university. If he Incorporates such work as background, the work or any part thereof which has been Incorporated in the thesis must be clearly Indicated, and the examiners are Instructed to take account thereof. 12. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of Master of Science. SCHOLARSHIPS 13. A Scholarship of $80 in each of the following departments will be open to competition to those candidates who have fulfilled the conditions prescribed in section 7 of this regulation and who save with special permission of the faculty are of not more than one year and three months standing since the commencement of the course for the degree— Anatomy Botany Metallurgy Physiology Biochemistry Geology Microbiology Zoology

Regulation 3.25—Degree of Doctor of Science 1. The faculty of Science may admit as a candidate for the degree of Doctor of Science a Bachelor of Science who is of not less than five years' standing since he became qualified for that degree, or a graduate in some other faculty who is of at least five years' standing and who satisfies the faculty of Science that he has received an adequate scientific training. 2. An Intending candidate shall submit the prescribed number of copies of his thesis,' which may consist of published or unpublished work. 3. The faculty shall appoint a committee, not necessarily of Its own members, which shall determine whether the subject matter of the candidate's thesis falls within the scope of Science? When the committee is agreed that the subject matter is acceptable, it shall nominate examiners. 4. The work must be original and must be a substantial contribution to the knowledge and understanding of a branch of Science. 5. Should the work have been undertaken in collaboration with others, the examiners shall be satisfied that the candidate has been responsible for the major portion of the original research work. The candidate will be required to submit a signed statement as to the extent of his own share in the work and to satisfy such other requirement as the ехатiпеrа may lay down. 8. A candidate may not submit for examination work In respect of which he has already qualified for a degree in any university or, without the permission of the faculty, work which he has previously presented for any such degree. 7. Candidates who have been passed by the examiners and who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of Doctor of Science. s Three copies must be submitted (see Regulation 4.6.) 2 The faculty of Science has resolved that theses embodying the results of mathematical research may be submitted for the degree of Doctor of Science 87 CHAPTER 4

DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE

(INCLUDING R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) Vacation Reading: Students are advised that they are expected to use a considerable part of the summer and spring vacations for reading purposes. In some cases specific references are made In the following details; in others, a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice boards; in all cases the lecturers concerned should be consulted. Prescribed textbooks are essential, and students should possess them. Students are advised to consult their tutors or lecturers regarding the relative value of different books before purchasing such books. Some (but not all) departments mark particularly important books with an asterisk. Fees: As all fees are under review at the time of publication. It is the responsibility of students to consult departmental notice boards on enrolment in 1973 to determine whether or not they are required to pay any special fees for notes, apparatus, and the like.

351 ANATOMY 200 LEVEL 201 HISTOLOGY A course of one lecture and two hours laboratory work, per week throughout the year. Special demonstrations may be arranged during the course. SYLLABUS The microscopic structure of cells, tissues and organs of mammals. LABORATORY WORK Two hours per week. A notebook for drawing (No 10 or similar) is required. A set of slides is available on loan to each student. The slides must be returned to the department on or before the day of the practical examination at the end of the course. A microscope is available to each student for use within the department. It must not be removed from the laboratory.

BOOKS

Prescribed textbooks: 'Агву L B lumen Histology, Saunders Bloom W & Fawcett D A Textbook of Histology, 8th or subsequent ed Saunders Recommended for reference: Ham A W Histology, 5th or subsequent ed., Lippincott EXAMINATION Continuous assessment of practical work will be made throughout the course. The annual examinations will include written and 88 ANATOMY

practical work. Examinations on sections of the work may be held during the course.

203 OCULAR ANATOMY (OPTOMETRY) A course of one lecture per week and twenty-six hours of demonstrations and practical work throughout the year. SYLLABUS The macroscopic and microscopic anatomy of the orbit, its contents and adjacent structures. An outline of the anatomy of the head and neck; the cranial nerves associated with vision and their cortical connections. The embryology of the nervous system in outline, with a more detailed study of the embryology of the face, eye and associated structures. Studies in comparative anatomy to Illustrate the evolution of the visual apparatus. PRACTICAL WORK Examination of prepared dissections; microscopical study. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: ' Wolff E The Anatomy of the Eye end Orbit, 6th ed Lewis 1968 Recommended for reference: Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology, Vol I Kimpton 1958 Duke-Elder S & Wybar K C System of Ophthalmology, Vol I1 Kimpton 1961 Gray H Textbook of Anatomy, 34th ed Longmans 1967 Ham A W Histology, 5th ed Lippincott 1965 or Bloom W & Fawcett D Textbook of Histology, 9th ed Saunders 1968 Mann I The Development of the Human Eye, CUP 1928 Mann I Development Abnormalities of the Eye, 2nd ed CUP 1957 Polyak S L The Retina, Chicago UP 1941 Whitnall S E The Anatomy of the Human Orbit, Frowde & Hodder & Stoughton 1921 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper; oral examination; one half- hour practical examination.

300 LEVEL 301 ADVANCED HISTOLOGY A course of two lectures and three hours laboratory work per week throughout the year. This course aims at providing a knowledge of the structure of cells, tissues and organs es well as an understanding of the strengths and limitations of modern methods of structural analysis of biological systems. SYLLABUS Lectures, lecture/demonstrations and laboratory work will be conducted on the following topics: the fine structure of cells; the microscopic structure of tissues Including e detailed study of nerve, muscle, endocrine and lymphatic and reticuloendothelia I tissue; neuroanatomy, cell and tissue differentiation and techniques used in histology end histochemistry. In addition, demonstrations on technical methods will be arranged. Topics will include electron microscopy, phase and fluorescent microscopy, photomicrography and tissue culture.

89 BIOCHEMISTRY

Throughout the course the emphasis will be on the relationships between structure and function in the systems investigated. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Bloom W & Fawcett D W A Textbook of Histology, 9th ed Saunders De Robertis E D P Nowinsky W W & Saez F A Cell Biology, 5th ed Saunders 1970 Baker J R Cytological Techniques, 5th ed Methuen 1966 Recommended for reference: Fawcett D W The Cell, Saunders 1966 Porter K R & Bonneville M A Fine Structure of Cells end Tissues, 3rd ed Lea & Febiger 1968 Pearse A G E Histochemistry, theoretical and applied, 3rd ed Churchill Vol 11968 Vol 11 1971 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written examination, one 2-hour practical examination. An oral examination may also be held.

353 BIOCHEMISTRY 200 LEVEL Students wishing to major in Biochemistry are required to take Bio- chemistry units 201 and 202. 201 BIOCHEMISTRY 60 hours practical work. SYLLABUS Two and a half hours per week of experimental work designed to give an introduction to studies on the biochemistry of animal and plant tissues. In order that they may be allocated to a particular practical session students must report to the Russell Grimwade School of Biochemistry during the second last week of the long vacation, stating the other units they will be taking and, if desired, nominating partners. Before arranging practical work in other units with alternative sessions, students must confirm that the arrangement is one which will allow them to be ac- commodated in a Biochemistry session. Students absent from Melbourne should communicate by letter. The apparatus used for practical biochemistry is supplied by the Bio- chemistry Department. EXAMINATION Continuous assessment will be made throughout the course and examinations will be held during the year. 202 BIOCHEMISTRY A course of 48 lectures. SYLLABUS Bioenergetics, elementary enzyme kinetics. Structures, reactions and metabolism of lipids, carbohydrates, amino acids, protein and nucleic acids. The regulation of metabolism. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: McGilvery R W Biochemistry A Functional Approach, Saunders 1970 90 BIOCHEMISTRY

and Wold F Macromolecules Structure and Function. Prentice-Hall 1971 Recommended for reference: Barker R Organic Chemistry of Biological Compounds, Prentice-Hai, 1971 Lamer J Intermediary Metabolism and Its Regulation, Prentice-Hall, 1971 Lehninger A L Biochemistry, Worth 1970 Mahler H R & Cordes E H Biological Chemistry, Harper 1966 White A Handler P & Smith E L Principles of Biochemistry, 4th ed McGraw-Hill 1968 EXAMINATION Written examinations will be held during the year as well as an annual examination.

300 LEVEL Students majoring in Biochemistry are expected to take e total of nine units plus associated practical work. Units 301-305 inclusive are obligatory; the remaining units may be selected from units 306-317 inclusive. All units are of 8 lectures. Students may take more than nine lecture units but normally only students wishing to study all the nutrition units (i.e. 311, 312, 313 and 314) would be permitted to take more than one extra unit. The Department of Biochemistry reserves the right to withdraw any of the elective units if they are selected by only a small number of students. Students wishing to take more than four lecture units are obliged to take a practical unit. Units 321 and 322 will be obligatory for students intending to major in Biochemistry and, unless recommended by the Head of the Department, only those students taking both units 321 and 322 will be considered for the BSc (Ions.) course in Biochemistry. Students not considering majoring in the subject may take unit 321 or unit 322 or unit 323. In filling practical places, preference for the first 36 places for the combined units 321 and 322 will be given to students taking a minimum of nine lecture units. The remaining 12 places in each practical unit will be allotted ort the basis of academic merit. The quota for unit 323 will be 12. BOOKS Recommended for reference: (i) General Lehninger A L Biochemistry, Worth Publishers 1970 Mahler H R & Cordes E H Biological Chemistry, Harper 1966 Mallette M F Clagett C 0 Phillips A T& IcCarl R L Introductory Bio- chemistry, Williams & Wilkins 1971 White A Handler P & Smith E L Principles of Biochemistry, 4th ed Mc- Graw-Hill 1968 (ii) For specific textbooks refer to constituent units. EXAMINATION A one-hour written paper will be held for each theory unit In the specified examination period following the completion of that unit. Practical units will be continuously assessed and examinations may be held in addition.

91 BIOCHEMISTRY

301 BIOCHEMISTRY Energy Transformations in the Cell SYLLABUS Consideration of the synthesis of Intermediates of high group transfer potential with special reference to oxidative phosphorylation, the cyto- chrome system and associated electron transport. Biosynthesis and structure of haem enzymes. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Falk J E Porphyrins and Metalloporphyrins, Elsevier 1964 Rabinowitch E & Govindjee Photosynthesis, Wiley 1969 302 BIOCHEMISTRY Protein Structure and Function SYLLABUS Isolation and characterization of proteins; amino acid sequence and its relationship to conformation. Protein evolution. Elementary immunochemistry. Inter- and intra-molecular forces; conformational analysis of biopolymers. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Barker R Organic Chemistry of Biological Compounds, Prentice-Hall 1971 303 BIOCHEMISTRY Nucleic Acids and Protein Synthesis SYLLABUS Structure of DNA in relation to its genetic function. Mech- anisms and regulation of the biosynthesis of DNA, RNA and protein.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Ingram V M Biosynthesis of Macromolecules, 2nd ed Benjamin 1972 304 BIOCHEMISTRY Metabolite Control of Metabolism SYLLABUS Regulation of anabolic and catabolic pathways by metabolites, including the mechanism and regulation of the biosynthesis of nucleotides and "one carbon" compounds. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Lamer J Intermediary Metabolism and Its Regulation, Prentice-Hall 1971

305 BIOCHEMISTRY Endocrine Control of Metabolism SYLLABUS Hormone structures, mode of action and effects on the metabolism of carbohydrate, fat and protein and of calcium and phosphorus. 92 BIOCHEMISTRY

BOOKS No specific textbook is recommended but references to the original literature will be given.

306 BIOCHEMISTRY Amino Acid and Protein Metabolism SYLLABUS The synthesis and degradation of amino acids in bacteria, plant and animal tissues. Inborn errors of metabolism of amino acids in humans. Protein breakdown and turnover in animals. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Meister A Biochemistry of the Amino Acids, Vols I & Il 2nd ed Aca- demic Press 1965 Nyhan W L ed Amino Acid Metabolism and Genetic Variation, Mc- Graw-Hill 1967

307 BIOCHEMISTRY Carbohydrates—Synthesis and Metabolism SYLLABUS lnterconversions of monosaccharides and the synthesis of disaccharides such as lactose and sucrose. Synthesis and degradation of the various a and ß glycans of both animal and plant origin. Considera- tion of the relation between structure and function. Synthesis and structure of glycoproteins. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Dickens F Randle P J & Whelan W J Carbohydrate Metabolism and its Disorders, Academic Press 1968 Rees D A The Shapes of Molecules, Contemporary Science Paperbacks 14 Oliver & Boyd 1967 Whistler R L ed Methods in Carbohydrate Chemistry Vols 1-5, Aca- demic Press

308 BIOCHEMISTRY Lipid Metabolism and Membranes SYLLABUS The role of fats and other lipids in metabolism and In the structure of membranes of the cell. Consideration of lipids derived from mevalonic acid sid of the essential fatty acids and prostaglandins. The biochemistry of vision. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Chapman D Biological Membranes, Academic Press 1968 Gurr M I & James A T Lipid Biochemistry, Chapman & Hail 1971 Mason, E J Physiological Chemistry of Lipids In Mammals, Saunders 1968

309 BIOCHEMISTRY Biochemical Equilibria and Kinetics SYLLABUS Thermodynamic approach to the study of protein-protein and protein-ligand interactions. The theoretical basis of allosteric behaviour.

93 BIOCHEMISTRY

Enzyme kinetics; steady-state treatment of one and two substrate reactions, consecutive enzyme systems, enzyme inhibition. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Tanford C Physical Chemistry of Macromolecules, Wiley 1961 van Holde K E Physical Biochemistry, Prentice-Hall 1971 310 BIOCHEMISTRY Physical Biochemistry SYLLABUS Principles of physical techniques used in studying molecular weights and conformations of proteins end other biopolymers. Hydro- dynamic, electrophoretic and optical properties. Conformational change. X-Ray and NIR methods for the determination of the mechanism of action of enzymes and evolutionary relationships of proteins. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Tanford C Physical Chemistry of Macromolecules, Wiley 1961 van Holde K E Physical Biochemistry, Prentice-Hall 1971 Wold F Macromolecules Structure and Function, Prentice-Hall 1971 311 BIOCHEMISTRY Whole Animal Metabolism SYLLABUS Body composition and lean body mass. Compartmentalization of the body in terms of function and types of energy utilization. Current theory of appetite regulation. The macronutrients—their absorption, utilization, interconversion and role in various biochemical and physiological processes in the body. Quantitative requirements for growth and the maintenance of health. Effects of deficient or excess intake, starva- tion, obesity. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Davidson S & Passmore R Human Nutrition and Dietetics, 4th ed Livingstone 1969 312 BIOCHEMISTRY Mineral Metabolism SYLLABUS Macro and trace mineral nutrients in human and animal nutrition; functions, quantitative requirements, dietary sources and effects of deficient or excess intake. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Davidson S & Passmore R Human Nutrition and Dietetics, 4th ed Liv- ingstone 1969 Underwood E J Trace Elements in Human and Animal Nutrition, 3rd ed Academic Press 1971

313 BIOCHEMISTRY Vitamins and Associated Metabolism SYLLABUS Historical aspects of vitamin research, biochemical and physiological functions of vitamins, vitamin deficiency and vitamin toxicity. 94 BIOCHEMISTRY

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Davidson S & Passmore R Human Nutrition and Dietetics, 4th ed Liv- ingstone 1969

314 BIOCHEMISTRY The Nutritive Value of Foods and Nutritional Diseases SYLLABUS The composition and nutritive value of foods and the modi- fications as a result of processing, storage, cookery, etc.; selection of suitable foods to provide an adequate diet for the individual; variations in nutrient requirements between different groups of individuals, infants, children, adults, the aged, and the effects of environment and other conditions; nutritional deficiency diseases. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Davidson S & Passmore R. Human Nutrition and Dietetics, 4th ed Liv- ingstone 1969

315 BIOCHEMISTRY Plant Biochemistry SYLLABUS Assimilation of nitrate and fixation of atmospheric nitrogen by plants. Nitrogen metabolism in plants. Photosynthetic phosphoryiatlon and the fixation of carbon dioxide. Special aspects of lipid and carbohydrate metabolism associated with plants. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Bonner J and Varner J E ed Plant Biochemistry, 2nd ed Academic Press 1965 Zelitch I Photosynthesis Photorespiration and Plant Productivity, Aca- demic Press 1971

316 BIOCHEMISTRY Biochemistry of Human Disease SYLLABUS Consideration of biochemical aspects of human disease with special reference to inborn errors of metabolism and genetic variation. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Bondy P K Diseases of Metabolism—Genetics and Metabolism, 6th ed Saunders 1969 Thompson R H S& Wootton I D P Biochemical Disorders in Disease, 3rd ed Churchill 1970 Tietz N W Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry, Saunders 1970

317 BIOCHEMISTRY Social Aspects of Biochemistry SYLLABUS Topics to be discussed will include biochemical aspects of pollution of the environment, biodegradability and toxic nature of waste products, the relation between biochemistry and behaviour, o-

95 BOTANY

chemical nature of variation among Individuals, quantity end quality of food in relation to numbers of people on the planet. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Ehrlich P R & Ehrlich A H Population Resources Environment, Freeman 1970 Leach G The Biocrats, McGraw-Hill 1970 Wolstenholme G ed Man and His Future Ciba Foundation Volume, Churchill 1963

321 BIOCHEMISTRY Practical Biochemistry A SYLLABUS Eleven hours per week for 12 weeks on experiments with emphasis on metabolism.

322 BIOCHEMISTRY Practical Biochemistry B SYLLABUS Eleven hours per week for 12 weeks on experiments with emphasis on analytical, physical and kinetic aspects of biochemistry.

323 BIOCHEMISTRY Practical Biochemistry C SYLLABUS Six hours per week for 24 weeks on experiments with emphasis on metabolism in whole animals and nutritional aspects of metabolism.

BIOLOGY The details of this course are shown under 355 Botany, unit 101 Biology.

355 BOTANY 100 LEVEL 101 BIOLOGY A course of three lectures per week with laboratory work and field excursions during the year. A knowledge of Biology, Chemistry and Physics to Higher School Certificate standard is assumed; students who have not studied Biology for Higher School Certificate are advised to study the following sections in Biological Science — The Web of Life, 1, 2, 6, 7, 9, 10 and 11. (Other books recommended for preliminary reading are given below — see under Books.) It is intended to allocate students who have passed Higher School Certificate Biology to one lecture group. (Those responsible for this subject are: Drs Calder and Weste and others) SYLLABUS An introduction to the living world; plant and animal diversity. The cell as the basic unit of life; structure and fine-structure of plant and animal cells; mitosis and meiosis. Growth, morphology and physiology of flowering plants and vertebrates. Behaviour responses of plants and animals—nervous and hormonal control. Photosynthesis, respiration and the flow of energy In biological systems. Plant and animal reproduction, embryology and development. 96 BOTANY

Structure, life-history and biological significance of selected invertebrates and non-flowering plants emphasizing the Increasing complexity of the organism, the increasing adaptation to the terrestrial environment and the associated changes in life-cycles. Modes of nutrition and the significance of heterotrophic plants in disease and decay and the cycling of carbon and nitrogen. Introduction to population genetics; the population as a biological unit, its structure and regulation. The community and interaction of populations. Environmental biology. Variation and evolution, 'family' genetics and natural selection. PRACTICAL WORK Three hours' formal laboratory work per week. A further one hour per week will be required for demonstrations. Half-day and whole-day field excursions may be held: the first of these is normally on the morning of the second Saturday of term 1. Students must provide themselves with an approved microscope, razor, dissecting instruments and laboratory drawing books, a number of microscope slides, covarslips and a hand lens (x10). Microscopes are normally hired from the laboratory in the Redmond Barry Building. Do not pur- chase any equipment until you have discussed your requirements with a staff member from the Biology laboratory. ADDITIONAL FACILITIES Students are advised to attend weekly tutorials held In the Biology laboratory; the timetables for these will be arranged in the first week of term 1. Self-teaching carrela equipped for Individual study are also available. From time to time these carrels will be used instead of demonstration work.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Bold H C The Plant Kingdom, 3rd ed Prentice-Hall 1970 Hanson E D Animal Diversity, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1964 Swanson C P The Cell, 3rd ed Prentice-Hall 1969 Prescribed textbook: Johnson W H Delanney L E & Cole T A Essentials of Biology, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969 Recommended for reference: Griffin D R Animal Structure and Function, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1962 Levine R P Genetics, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1962 Lehninger A L Bionergetics, Benjamin 1965 McLuckie J & McKee H $ Australian and New Zealand Botany, Associa- ted General Publications 1954 Schmidt-Nielsen K Animal Physiology, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1964 Simpson C G & Beck W S Life, 2nd ed Routledge & Kegan Paul 1965 Stebbins G L Processes of Organic Evolution, Prentice-Hall 1966 Steward F C About Plants: Topics in Plant Biology, Addison-Wesley 1968 Sussman M Animal Growth and Development, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1984 Torrey J G Development in Flowering Plants, Macmillan 1967 EXAMINATIONS Three theory papers, one in each of the Science Faculty examination periods. Practical examinations will also be held during these examination periods. The practical work of each student is

97 а BOTANY

assessed continuously throughout the year and is taken into account, along with all examination results, in compiling the final mark. Field excursions and examinations may be held on Saturdays.

200 LEVEL 201 BOTANY ANGIOSPERM SYSTEMATICS AND ECOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and 32 hours practical work. A week's excursion to Wilsons Promontory during the course. (Drs Ashton and Duigan) SYLLABUS Morphology, classification, nomenclature, evolution and experimental taxonomy of angiosperms. The distribution and dispersal of plants; the interaction of climate, soil and animal factors In plant communities; succession; competition between plants, measurement and classification of vegetation. Introduction to ecological processes.

BOO КS Preliminary reading: Clarke G L Elements of Ecology, Wiley 1967 Anderson E Plants Man and Life, Little Brown 1964 Prescribed textbooks: The Families and Genera of Victorian Plants, available from the Botany School Porter C L Taxonomy of Flowering Plants, Freeman 1959 Willis J H A Handbook of Plants in Victoria, Vol I & Il MUP 1962 Heywood V H Plant Taxonomy, Arnold, 1967 Heslop-Harrison J New Concepts in Flowering-plant Taxonomy, Heine- mann 1960 or Harvard UP 1956 Recommended for reference: Daubenmire R F Plants and Environment: A Textbook of Plant Auteco logy, 2nd ed Wiley 1959 Daubenmire R F Plant Communities: A Textbook of Plant Synecology, Harper & Row 1968 kormondy E J Concepts of Ecology, Prentice-Hall 1969 EXAMINATION One 3-hour theory paper, one 3-hour practical paper, and assessment of excursion report.

202 BOTANY PLANT PHYSIOLOGY (SCIENCE COURSE) A course of 24 lectures and 48 hours practical work. (Prof. Turner and Dr Rowan) SYLLABUS Metabolism of the growing plant.

BO 0 КЅ Preliminary reading: James W 0 Introduction to Plant Physiology, 6th ed OUP 1963 Prescribed textbooks: 'Salisbury F B & Ross C Plant Physiology, Wadsworth 1969 or •Leopold A C Plent Growth and Development, McGraw-Hill 1964 98 BOTANY

Recommended for reference: Fogg G E The Growth of Plants, Penguin 1963 Fogg G E Photosynthesis, English Universities Press 1968 Dixon M & Webb E C Enzymes, 2nd ed Longmans 1964 James W 0 Cell Respiration, EUP 1972 Jensen W A The Plant Cell, Macmillan 2nd ed 1972 Price C A Molecular Approaches to Plant Physiology, McGraw-Hill 1970 Wilkins M B ed The Physiology of Plant Growth and Development. McGraw-Hill 1969 Wareing P F & Phillips I D J The Control of Growth and Differentiation in Plants, Pergamon 1970 Other reference books will be Indicated during the course. EXAMINATION One 3-hour theory paper. The laboratory work of each student is examined continually during each term and records of assessments kept. In addition, short practical examinations may be given. Marks obtained in this way are included in the final assessment of the student's performance In the subject. 203 BOTANY INTRODUCTION TO NON-FLOWERING PLANTS A course of 24 lectures, about 72 hours practical work and excursions. (Dr Swart and Mrs Ducker) SYLLABUS The biology of algae, fungi, bryophyta, pteridophyta and gymnosperms with particular reference to Victorian representatives. BOOKS Preliminary Reading: Corner E J H The Life of Plants, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1964 Prescribed textbooks: Prescott G W Now to Know the Fresh-water Algae, Brown 1984 •Scagel R F et al Plant Diversity: An Evolutionary Approach, Wadsworth 1969 Recommended for reference: Dawson E Y Marine Botany, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1966 Ingold C T The Biology of Fungi Hutchinson 1981 Smith G M Cryptogamic Botany, Vol 1 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1955 McLuckie J & McKee H S Australian and New Zealand Botany, Associa- ted General Publishers 1954 EXAMINATION One 3-hour theory paper and three 2-hour terminal practical papers as directed. 204 BOTANY ANATOMY A course of nine lectures and eighteen hours practical work. (Prof. Chambers) SYLLABUS The histology of seed plants, Including a practical project In- vestigating the anatomy of a selected Australian plant. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Esau K Anatomy of seed plants, Wiley 1960 •Grimstone A V The Electron Microscope in Biology, Arnold 1968

99 BOTANY

Recommended for reference: Esau K Plent Anatomy, Wiley 1965 Cutter E C Plant Anatomy: Experiment and Interpretation Part I Cells and Tissues, Arnold 1969 O'Brien T P & McCully Margaret E Plant Structure and Development. Macmillan 1969 EXAMINATION One 3-hour combined written and practical paper.

205 BOTANY WHOLE PLANT AND COMMUNITY PHYSIOLOGY A course of 33 lectures and 48 hours practical work in terms I and Ill. (Drs Neales and Attiwell) SYLLABUS The processes by which whole plants and plant communities grow. The structural and nutritional basis of plant physiology: photosynthesis, the water relations of plants and crops, and the inorganic nutrition of plants. Metabolism, transport and the hormonal control of plant growth. The flow of energy and carbon, photosynthesis and nutrient cycles in plant communities. Carbon dioxide in the ecosphere. The systems approach to biology. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Salisbury F B & Ross C Plant Physiology, Wadsworth 1969 Troughton J & Donaldson L A Probing Plant Structure, Reed 1972 paperback Recommended for reference: Fogg G E Photosynthesis, EUP 1968 paperback Leopold A C Plant Growth and Development, McGraw-Hill 1964 Lowry W P Weather and Lite, Academic Press 1969 Odum E P Fundamentals of Ecology 3rd ed, Saunders 1971 Phillipson J Ecological Energetics, Arnold 1966 Steward F C Plants et Work, Addison-Wesley 1964 San Pietro A ed Harvesting the Sun, Academic Press 1968 Slaryer R O Plant-Water Relationships, Academic Press 1967 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper. The laboratory work of each student is examined continually during each term and records of assessments kept. In addition, short practical examinations may be given. Marks obtained in this way are included in the final assessment of the student's performance in the subject.

206 BOTANY ADVANCED GENETICS AND PLANT BREEDING A course of 18 lectures, 27 hours practical work Including a field excursion in term II. (Drs. Blackwood and Lawson) SYLLABUS Mutation, polyploidy, extra-nuclear inheritance, tetrad analysis, inbreeding and outbreeding, incompatibility, hybridization, biological variation, disease resistance, chromosome manipulations as special techniques in plant breeding. 100 BOTANY

В00КS: Prescribed textbooks: •Lawrence W J C Plant Breeding (Studies in Biology. No. 12), Arnold 1968 Singleton W R Elementary Genetics, 2nd ed Van Nostrand 1967 Recommended for reference: Allard R W Principles of Plant Breeding, Wiley 1960 Brewbaker J L Agricultural Genetics, Prentice-Hall 1964 incham J R S & Day P R Fungal Genetics, 2nd ed Blackwell 1968 Frey K J ed Plant Breeding, Iowa State UP 1966 Riley R & Lewis K R eds Chromosome Manipulation and Plant Genetics, Oliver & Boyd 1966 Sinnot E W Dunn L C & Dobzhansky T Principles of Genetics, 6th ed McGraw-Hill 1958 Srb A M Owen R D & Edgar R S General Genetics, 2nd ed Freeman 1965 Williams W Genetical Principles and Plant Breeding, Blackwell 1964 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper. The laboratory and field work of each student is examined continually during each term and records of assessments kept. In addition, short practical examinations may be given. Marks obtained in this way are Included In the final assessment of the student's performance in the subject. 207 BOTANY CONSERVATION-GLOBAL AND LOCAL ASPECTS A course of 18 lectures (Prof. Turner, Dr Attlwell and others) Current problems resulting from the present expansion of the human population are treated in a biological and evolutionary manner. The course requires no prerequisites and aims to cater for undergraduates and postgraduates from any faculty. The course deals with topics not specifically covered in other botanical subjects. SYLLABUS The growth of populations, population and food supply, maximum and optimum population sizes. Some biogeochemical cycles, particularly those of oxygen and carbon dioxide. Pollutants in the biosphere. Social, political and economic controls and the philosophy of their implementation. Principles of land use, conservation of terrestrial communities, classification of reserves, their selection and management. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Arthur D R Survival, EUP 1969 Ehrlich P R and Ehrlich A H Population, Resources, Environment, Free- man 1970 Mass Inst of Technology Man's Impact on the Global Environment Report of Study of Crit Environm Problems, MIT Press 1970 Wagner R H Environment and Man, Norton 1971 Marshall A J The Great Extermination, Heinemann 1966 Frankenberg J ed. J S Turner Nature Conservation in Victoria, Victorian Natl Parks Assoc 1972 Duffey E & Watt A S The Scientific Management of Animal and Plant Communities for Conservation, Blackwell Sci Pubn 1971 Maddox J The Doomsday Syndrome, Macmillan 1972 Meadows D H et a 1 The Limits of Growth, Universe 1972 EXAMINATION One 2-hour terminal examination. 101 BOTANY

300 LEVEL 301 BOTANY PLANT PHYSIOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and 48 hours practical work. (Prof. Turner, Dr Attiwell and others) SYLLABUS Advanced work on selected topics of plant physiology. BOOkS Preliminary reading: Rabinowitch E 1 Photosynthesis, Vol 1, Ch 1-3 Interscience 1948 Prescribed textbooks: Beavers H Respiratory Metabolism in Plants, Row-Peterson 1961 Rabinowitch E I & Govindjee Photosynthesis, Wiley 1969 Recommended for reference: Price C A Molecular Approaches to Plant Physiology, McGraw-Ill 1970 Steward F C ed Plant Physiology — A Treatise, Vol I Academic Press 1960 Davies D D Giovanilli J & Ap Rees T Plant Biochemistry, Blackwell 1964 Bonner J & Varner J E Plant Biochemistry, Academic Press 1965 Conn E E & Stumpf P IC Outlines of Biochemistry, 2nd ed Wiley 1966 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper. The laboratory work of each student is examined continually during each term and records of assessments kept. Marks obtained in this way are included in the final assessment of the student's performance in the subject. The laboratory work may include a practical project.

302 BOTANY WHOLE-PLANT PHYSIOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGICAL ECOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and 48 hours practical work, seminars and excursions. (Drs Neale and Attiwell) SYLLABUS The flow of energy and carbon dioxide in plant communities. Models of community production. CO2 cycles in nature. Processes where- by plant leaves exchange CO2 and water vapour with the atmosphere. En- vironmental effects. Comparative plant physiology. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Gates D M Energy Exchange in the Biosphere, Harper & Row 1962 Rose C W Agricultural Physics, Pergamon 1966 Slatyer R 0 Plant-water Relationships, Academic Press 1967 San Pietro A et al eds Harvesting the Sun, Academic Press 1967 Lowry W P Weather and Life, Academic Press 1969 Troughton J & Donaldson L A Probing Plant Structure, Reed 1972 paperback Wadsworth R M ed The Measurement of Environmental Factors in Terrestrial Ecology, Blackwell 1968 102 BOTANY

Prediction and Measurement of Photosynthetic Activity Proc IBP/PP Tech Mtg Trebon, Wageningen Centre for Agric Pub shg & Docu- mentation 1970 Odum E P Fundamentals of Ecology 3rd ed, Saunders 1971 EXAMINATION One three-hour written paper. Laboratory work may be based on specific projects and an assessment of practical work will be incorporated in the final assessment of overall performance.

303 BOTANY MYCOLOGY AND PATHOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and 48 hours practical work. (Dr Swart) SYLLABUS Distribution and spread of fungi in nature; general aspects of plant pathology; fungi in industry and medicine; biodeterioration. BOOkS Preliminary reading: Large E C The Advance of the Fungi, Cape 1940 Prescribed textbook: Talbot P H B Principles of Fungal Taxonomy, Macmillan 1971 Recommended for reference: Alexopoulus C J Introductory Mycology, 2nd ed Wiley 1962 Burnett J H Fundamentals of Mycology Edward Arnold 1968 Cochrane V W Physiology of Fungi, Wiley 1958 Walters A H & Elphick J S ed Bioterioration of Materials Vol I, Else- vier Press 1968 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper and one practical paper.

304 BOTANY ECOLOGY AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY A course of 24 lectures and 48 hours practical work. An excursion will be arranged before the beginning of first term. Local excursIons will be held during term. (Drs Ashton and Dulgen) SYLLABUS Plant distribution, present and past; statistical ecology. Struc- ture, distribution and development of communities, with special reference to Victoria. Factors of the environment. Autecology, life form and competition. Quaternary palynology. Books Preliminary reading: Wulff E V An Introduction to Historical Plent Geography, Ch 8-10 Chronica Botanica 1950 Duffey E & Watt A S The Scientific Management of Animal and Plant Communities for Conservation, Blackwell 1971 Prescribed textbooks: 'Lesper G W introduction to Soil Science, 4th ed MUP 1964 'The Australian Environment, latest ed CSIRO and MUP Recommended for reference: Kershaw K A Quantitative end Dynamic Ecology, Arnold 1964

103 BOTANY

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written and one 2-hour practical paper. Re- ports on practical work will be marked and included in the assessment of the student in the subject.

305 GENERAL BOTANY A course of 24 lectures, 48 practical classes, and excursions. (Prof. Chambers and Mrs Ducker) SYLLABUS The evolutionary trends in non-vascular and vascular plants with particular reference to those related to the past and present Austra- lian flora. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Corner E J H The Life of Plants, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1964 Prescribed textbooks: •Foster A S & Gifford E M Comparative Morphology of Vascular Plants, Freeman 1959 Parihar N S An Introduction to Embryophyta, Vol 1 Bryophyte, 4th rev ed Central Book Depot Allahabad 1961 Scagel R F et al Plant Diversity: An Evolutionary Approach, Wadsworth 1969 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper and one 3-hour practical paper.

306 BOTANY PLANT POPULATION GENETICS A course of 24 lectures and 48 hours of practical work. (Drs Calder and Blackwood) SYLLABUS Genetic control of metabolism in plant pigment production and in incompatibility systems. Mutable loci in plants. Polyploidy in plant breeding. B chromosome systems, sex determination in plants. Cryptogams as tools in genetics. Apomixis and plant breeding systems. An introduction to the study of natural plant populations. Biometric and genetic analysis of variation and adaptation. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Brewbaker J L Agricultural Genetics, Prentice-Hall 1964 Falconer D S Introduction to Quantitative Genetics, Oliver & Boyd 1964 Li, C C Population Genetics, U of Chicago 1955 Riley R & Lewis K R Chromosome Manipulations and Plant Genetics, Oliver & Boyd 1966 Singleton W R Elementary Genetics, 2nd ed Van Nostrand 1967 Sprague G F ed Corn and Corn Improvement, Academic Press 1955 Stebbins G L Processes of Organic Evolution, Prentice-Hall 1966 Wagner R P & Mitchell H K Genetics and Metabolism, 2nd ed Wiley 1964 Williams W General Principles and Plant Breeding, Blackwell 1964 EXAMINATION Theory, one 3-hour paper. The practical work will be assessed continually throughout the course on the basis of written reports and terminal examinations. An annual practical examination of 3 hours may replace terminal tests. 104 CHEMISTRY

307 BOTANY PSYCHOLOGY AND MARINE BOTANY A course of 24 lectures. 48 hours practical work and two full day excursions. (Mrs Ducker and Dr Rowan) SYLLABUS Biology of fresh-water, marine and soil algae, with particular emphasis on Victorian species. The isolation and culture of algae; the importance of algae in the foodchain; pollution of aquatic environments. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: • Prescott G W How to Know the Fresh-water Algae, Brown Iowa 1964 Recommended for reference: Dawson E Y Marine Botany: An Introduction, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1966 Scagel R F et al Plant Diversity: An Evolutionary Approach, Wadsworth 1989 Goodwin T W ed Chemistry and Biochemistry of Plant Pigments, Aca- demic Press 1965 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper and one 2-hour practical paper.

357 CHEMISTRY 100 LEVEL 101 CHEMISTRY A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week, together with laboratory work throughout the year. A preliminary standard equivalent to Higher School Certificate Chemistry will be assumed. SYLLABUS (I) Physical Chemistry Gases and Liquids Kinetic theory of gases. Deviations from Ideal gas behaviour: van der Waals and virial equations. Liquefaction, critical phenomena. Phase equilibria in one-component systems, phase diagrams, metastable phases. Clausius-Clapeyron equation. Liquid-vapour two-component systems: ideal and non-Ideal solutions, dis- tillation, lever rule. Competing Equilibria Experimental methods of analysis in systems at equilibrium: spectra photometry, conductimetry, potentiometry. Acid-base equilibria: buffer solutions, titration curves, indicators. Soluы lity of solids in acid-base systems. Electrochemistry Conductance and its measurement. Ionic conductances. Determination of Ionic concentrations, applications to equilibrium constant determination. Reversible cells: emf measurements, types of half-cell, Nernst equation. Use of cells in chemical analysis and equilibrium constant determination. Cells as sources of energy: fuel cells, storage batteries.

105 CHEMISTRY

Thermodynamics First law: heat and work; calorimetry; functions of state, U and H. Heat capacity. Standard thermodynamic quantities and their tabulation: enthalpies of formation of pure substances and solutes. Free energy and second law. Direction of spontaneous chemical and physical changes, reversibility and maximum work. Standard free energies of formation and their application in calculation of equilibrium constants and maximum cell emfs. Entropy and its definition. Entropy changes in chemical and physical processes. Standard entropy changes. Molecular interpretation of entropy. Variation of equilibrium constant with temperature. Kinetics Measurement of reaction rate in homogeneous and heterogeneous systems. Rate laws. Effects of temperature, catalysis, and radiation. Simple collision model and reaction mechanism.

(ii) Inorganic Chemistry Atomic structure and the theory of valency: electrovalent, covalent, coordinate hydrogen, metallic and van der Waals bonding. Structure of solids: influence of bond type on chemical and physical properties and type of structure. Introduction to co-ordination chemistry: nature of complex compounds, Werner's original experiments, isomerism and stereo-chemistry of complex compounds, typical reactions, elementary approach to bonding, practical applications.

(iii) Organic Chemistry The scope of organic chemistry. Bonding, structure and elementary stereochemistry of carbon compounds. An outline of the chemistry of hydrocarbons and of the major groups of mono-functional compounds in terms of molecular structure and elementary electronic theory. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week, throughout the year, illustrating the principles of physical, organic and Inorganic chemistry together with exercises in quantitative and qualitative analysis. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry building. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Pauling L General Chemistry, Freeman Stranks D R et al Chemistry: A Structural View, MUP 1965 The lectures in Chemistry I will be based on the assumption that all students have read the textbook by Stranks et al. Prescribed textbooks: Mackay K M & Mackay R A Introduction to Modern Inorganic Chemis- try, Intertext De Puy C & Rinehart K Introduction to Organic Chemistry, Wiley 1968 'Departmental Publications. Experiments in Physical Chemistry. Experi- ments in Organic Chemistry, Inorganic Chemistry Laboratory Manual 1973 eds. (These laboratory handbooks are available only from the Chemistry School) Aylward G H & Findlay T J V eds S/ Chemical Data, Wiley 1971 t

106 CHEMISTRY

Recommended for reference: Mahan B H University Chemistry, Addison-Wesley Moore W J Physical Chemistry, 4th ed Longmans t Barrow G M Physical Chemistry, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1966 t Addison W E Structural Principles in Inorganic Compounds, Longmans Basolo F & Johnson R Co-ordination Chemistry, Benjamin 1964 Douglas B E & McDaniel D H Concepts and Models of Inorganic Chemi- stry, Blaisdell 1965 Companion A L Chemical Bonding, McGraw-Hill Cartmell E & Fowles G W A Valency and Molecular Structure, 3rd ed Butterworth Harvey K B & Porter G B Introduction to Physical Inorganic Chemistry, Addison-Wesley Brown R D & O'Donnell T A Manual of Elementary Practical Chemistry, 3rd ed MUP Allinger N L & Allinger J Structures of Organic Molecules, Prentice-Hall 1965 Morrison R T & Boyd R N Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed Allyn & Bacon 1966 Saunders W H Ionic Aliphatic Reactions. Prentice-Hall 1965 Tedder J M & Nechvatal A Basic Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed Wiley 1966 Sykes P A Guidebook to Mechanism In Organic Chemistry, Longmans 1965 Books marked t are used by students proceeding to Chemistry Il and Chemistry Ill. EXAMINATION There will be assignments and tests throughout the course and these will be taken into account in determining the candidate's success in the year's work. The final examination will consist of one 3-hour written paper In Physical Chemistry, one 2-hour written paper In Inorganic Chemistry, and one 2-hour written paper In Organic Chemis- try.

200 LEVEL The Chemistry School, consisting of the Departments of Physical, Or- ganic and Inorganic Chemistry, offers the following units at the second level. To assist students who wish to choose Chemistry as a major or sub-major study, three categories of course are set out below, designed for students taking respectively a full Chemistry major, Chemistry with a biological science, and Chemistry with Mathematics or another physical science. Courses In these categories have been approved In advance for Chemistry majors and sub-majors. Any student wishing to construct a Chemistry major or sub-major course differing from those set out below must submit his proposed course for approval, to a panel of Chemistry School course advisors at the appropriate time. Category A For students majoring in Chemistry only. These students must enrol for a minimum of 20 points in Chemistry, made up as follows: Physical: 201 + any one of 202-208 (6 points) Organic: 220, 221, 222, 223, 225, 230 (6 points) Inorganic: 240, 242, 243, 245, 250 (6 points) Analytical: 260 (1 point) together with any one other unit. Note that unit 248 is recommended for students enrolled for 260.

107 CHEMISTRY

Category В For students majoring in a biological science, together with Chemistry. These students must enrol for а minimum of 14 points in Chemistry, made up as follows: Physical: 201 + any one of 202-208 (6 points) Organic: 220, 221, 224, 225, 230 (5 points) Inorganic: 247 (2 points) Analytical: 260 (1 point) Note that there is an approved course corresponding to this at the 300 level. Category C For students majoring in Mathematics or another physical science, together with Chemistry. These students must enrol for a minimum of 16 points in Chemistry, made up as follows: Physical: 201 (5 points) Organic: 220, 224, 225, 231 (3% points) Inorganic: 241, 242, 244, 246, 250 (5 points) Analytical: 260 (1 point) together with any two other units. Note that unit 248 is recommended for students enrolled for 260. Note that there is an approved course corresponding to this one at the 300 level. Practical Work Physical: All physical chemistry laboratory work is combined with theory for the purposes of examination. Physical Chemistry prac. is associated with unit 201 only, and satisfactory completion of the practical course will be necessary before any credit is granted for this unit. Organic: Separate practical units 230 and 231 are offered. Students who enrol for 4 or more theory points in Organic Chemistry are required to enrol for 230. Students who enrol for 2 or З theory points In Organic Chemistry are required to enrol for 230 or 231. Students enrolled for less than 2 points of Organic Chemistry are not required to enrol Tor 230 or 231. Inorganic: Separate practical units 250 and 251 are offered. Students who enrol for 4 or more theory points in Inorganic Chemistry are required to enrol for 250. Students who enrol for 2 or 3 theory points in Inorganic Chemistry are required to enrol for 250 or 251 but may apply for exemption if they are concurrently enrolled for 260. Students enrolled for less than 2 theory points in Inorganic Chemistry are not required to enrol for 250 or 251. Analytical Chemistry: This course consists of 42 hours of practical work. Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all Science faculty students enrolled for 10 or more other units of Chemistry. Unit 248 is recommended for students enrolled in this unit. Agricultural Chemistry: 72 hours of practical work are included within this 8-point unit. Satisfactory completion of this prac. will be necessary before any credit is granted for the unit. EXAMINATIONS Units may be examined at fixed times throughout the year, and in the examination term at the end of the year. In general, a minimum of 10 200-level Chemistry points must be credited before permission will be granted a student to enrol for any 300-level Chemistry points. 108 CHEMISTRY

PREREQUISITES Prerequisite studies have been specified for certain units and such preparation is to be generally regarded as essential. In exceptional cases, however, permission may be granted by the school to waive such requirements.

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 201 BASIC PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY (5 points) 32 lectures, 42 hours practical work Thermodynamics: Thermodynamic systems and variables. Second law: entropy, free energy. Conditions for equilibrium and spontaneous change. Chemical equilibrium in homogeneous and heterogeneous systems. Gases. Solutions: mixing, colligative properties, activities, applications to non- Ideal situations, including electrolyte solutions. Kinetics: Experimental techniques, treatment of results. Reaction mechanisms: stationary state approximation. Diffusion in gases, liquids and solids: conductivity and kinetics in liquids, solids; solid/gas reactions. Quantum Mechanics and Spectroscopy: Schrödinger equation: 1-dimensional potential well, rigid rotor. H atom. Angular momentum. Rotational and vibrational spectra of diatomic molecules, magnetic resonance. Dipole moment and its measurement. [This Unit is a prerequisite for all 300 level Physical Chemistry units.] 202 SOLIDS AND LIQUIDS (1 point) 8 lectures; prerequisite: Chemistry 201 Crystal structure, symmetry, diffraction techniques; defects in crystals. Structure and thermal motion in liquids, viscosity. Phase equilibrium; phase rule; thermodynamics and representation of P-T-x behaviour of two-component systems; thermal analysis, compound formation; solid solutions. Multicomponent systems: distribution, solvent extraction, chromatography. Diffusion, conduction in solids and liquids. [Students taking Unit 318 (Solid State Chemistry) would normally be expected to have taken this unit.] 203 TOPICS IN AQUEOUS CHEMISTRY (1 point) 8 lectures; prerequisite: Chemistry 201 Structure of ice, mixture models for the structure of water. Solution of hydrocarbons in water, entropie effects, hydrophobic bonding. Surface activity, soluble and insoluble monolayers, Gibbs adsorption isotherm. Solubility of hydrocarbons in surfactant solutions, micelle structure. lin-ion and Ion-colloidal particle interactions, simple Debye-Hückel and electrical double-layer theory. (Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 208 and/or 208) 206 COLLOID AND SURFACE CHEMISTRY (1 point) 8 lectures; prerequisite: Chemistry 201 Surface activity, soluble and Insoluble monolayers, Gibbs adsorption isotherm, applications. The electrical double layer and applications to colloidal systems.

109 CHEMISTRY

207 ELECTROCHEMISTRY (1 point) 8 lectures; prerequisite: Chemistry 201 Conductance as a function of concentration in solvents of high and low dielectric constant. Ionic mobilities and transport numbers. Ionic diffusion coefficients. Interactions between ions and solvents. Molten salts. Diffu- sion-controlled charge transfer processes, and analytical applications. Rate-controlling charge transfer. The Tafel equation. Overvoltage. 208 WATER AND AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS (1 point) 8 lectures; prerequisite: Chemistry 201 Hydrogen bonding. Structure of ice, mixture models for the structure of water. Solution of hydrocarbons in water, entropic effects, hydrophobic bonding. Solutions of electrolytes In water: effect on water structure. Thermodynamics of ionic solutions, simple Debye-Hůckel theory and limitations. Extensions to Debye-Hückel theory, ion-pair formation.

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 220 ELEMENTARY REACTION MECHANISMS (1 point) 8 lectures A consideration of bonding and electronic effects in simple organic molecules and the factors which influence reactivity. Reactive intermediates, acidity and basicity and the mechanism of fundamental organic chemical processes. 221 POLYFUNCTIONAL COMPOUNDS (1 point) 8 lectures A survey of simple organic systems containing more than one functional group and the ways in which they interact. Emphasis is directed towards processes fundamentally important in organic synthesis. 222 AROMATICITY (1 point) 8 lectures The benzene problem and aromatic character in general are discussed together with criteria for aromaticity and resonance energy. Non-benzenoid and higher benzenoid systems are then considered. Aromaticity Is treated from a physical standpoint as well as in terms of its consequences on chemical reactivity.

223 HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS (1 point) 8 lectures The properties, reactions and synthesis of heterocyclic compounds of nitrogen, oxygen and sulphur are considered in detail from a mechanistic standpoint. Important natural products containing hetero-rings are also discussed. 224 ELEMENTARY HETEROCYCLIC AND AROMATIC CHEMISTRY (1 point) 8 lectures An integrated course outlining the phenomenon of aromaticity and the effect of hetero-atoms in cyclic organic systems. 110 CHEMISTRY

Important natural products based on these systems are also considered. Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 222 and/or 223.

225 STEREOCHEMISTRY (1 point) 8 lectures The shape and symmetry of carbon compounds. Geometrical isomerism. Molecular dissymmetry and optical isomerism. Restricted rotation about bonds; conformational analysis. The shapes and stereochemistry of ring systems, Including sugars. Physical and chemical consequences of molecular shape.

226 APPLIED SPECTROSCOPY (1 point) 8 lectures A simple treatment of the analysis of infrared, nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectra with particular emphasis on applications in organic structure determination.

230 ORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK I (1 point) 42 hours of laboratory work This course is designed to provide both illustrative experimental work for 200 level Organic Chemistry units and training in techniques. It is composed of a number of projects which are related to the lecture units; for example, Polyfunctional Compounds and Heterocyclic Chemistry. (Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled for 4 or more 200 level points in Organic Chemistry. This Unit, or 231, Is a prerequisite for the 300 level units 335 and 336)

231 ORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK II (% point) 21 hours of laboratory work Selected parts of unit 230 consistent with lecture units taken. (Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled for 2 or 3 200 level points in Organic Chemistry. This unit, or 230, is a prerequisite for the 300 level units 335 and 336).

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Hendrickson J B Cram D J & Hammond G S Organic Chemistry, 3rd ed International student ed McGraw-Hill Kogakusha 1970 Roberts J D & Casedio M J Principles of Organic Chemistry, Benjamin 1965 Recommended for reference: Sykes P A Guidebook to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed Long- mans 1965 Gould E S Mechanism and Structure In Organic Chemistry, Holt Halles G Organic Stereochemistry, McGraw-Hill 1965 Eliel E L Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds, McGraw-Hill 1962 Silverstein R M & Bassier G C Spectrometric Identification of Organic Compounds, 2nd ed Wiley 1967 111 CHEMISTRY

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 240 THEORETICAL CONCEPTS A (1 point) 8 lectures Molecular orbital theory applied to the diatomics of the first row of the periodic table. An introduction to ligand field theory and simple molecular theory of metal complexes. Electrode potentials and oxidation state diagrams and applications.

241 THEORETICAL CONCEPTS В (1 point) 8 lectures Molecular orbital theory applied to the diatomics of the first row of the periodic table. Simplified approach to ligand field theory. Various definitions of electronegativity and their applications. Electrode potentials and oxidation state diagrams; simple applications. Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 240.

242 PHYSICAL METHODS (1 point) 8 lectures , The application of various physical methods to the elucidation of molecular and electronic structure. Dipole moments, molecular weights, magnetic susceptibility measurements, infra-red spectroscopy, analytical applications of electronic and atomic absorption spectroscopy, stability constants by potentiometry and spectrophotometry. 243 CO-ORDINATION CHEMISTRY AND FIRST ROW TRANSITION ELEMENTS (2 points) 16 lectures Basic chemistry of the first-row transition elements is discussed with complexes containing simple ligands. In this, emphasis is placed on the following: oxidation number, stereochemistry, thermodynamic parameters relating to the formation of transition metal compounds and aqueous solution chemistry. The importanace of ligand type in the above examples is stressed. Discussion of stability constants and solution equilibria in general. Mechanisms of some inorganic reactions. More detailed discussion of transition metal chemistry with compounds containing more complex ligands. Emphasis on synthetic techniques; solid state stability; stabilization of low oxidation states; reactions of co-ordinated ligands; stereochemistry, governed by ligand type; and the use of some physical methods to elucidate structure and bonding.

244 CO-ORDINATION CHEMISTRY (1 point) 8 lectures Synthesis and reactions of complexes, elementary kinetic studies, solution equilibria and stability constants: principles of determination and significance of results. Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 243. 245 DESCRIPTIVE CHEMISTRY OF NON-METALS A (1 point) 8 lectures Boron hydrides, including a discussion of the manipulation of air sensi-

112 CHEMISTRY

tive compounds, rare gases and their compounds, halogens including a thermodynamic treatment of IX and oxyacids and oxidation-reduction relations.

246 DESCRIPTIVE CHEMISTRY OF NON-METALS B (1 point) 8 lectures Halogens (restricted to a descriptive account), oxygen and sulphur (selenium and tellurium briefly) nitrogen and phosphorus, structure of oxides, silicates and similar minerals. Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 245.

247 VALENCE THEORY AND CO-ORDINATION CHEMISTRY FOR STUDENTS OF BIOLOGICAL SCIENCES (2 points) 18 lectures Molecular orbital and valence bond theories of bonding in simple molecules. Descriptive co-ordination chemistry. Crystal field, molecular orbital, ligand field and, briefly, valence bond theories of metal complexes. Ther- modynamics, kinetics and mechanisms of reactions involving metal complexes.

248 INSTRUMENTAL AND ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES (1 point) 8 lectures Determination of composition and structure of compounds by classical and instrumental methods. Principles and applications of electrochemical procedures such as potentiometry, coulometry and polarography. Con- ductance end colligative properties of solutions. Spectrophotometry. Separation procedures.

250 INORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK I (1 point) 42 hours laboratory work 1. Preparations of lnterhalogen and polyhallde compounds and their characterizations using volumetric and potentiometric techniques. 2. Determination of the K., of magnesium oxalate using volumetric (including complexometric) techniques. 3. Spectrophotometric determination of the species formed between cobalt (ii) and nickel (II) and halide ions, In various solvents. 4. Preparation of coordination compounds of nickel (II) end copper (II) containing a Schiff Base ligand and the determination of the relative stabilities to W dissociation and metal substitution. Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled in 4 or more 200 level points in Inorganic Chemistry. This unit, or 251, is a prerequisite for the 300 level units 358 and 359.

251 INORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK II (Y: point) 21 hours laboratory work Selected experiments from Parts 1-4 of unit 250. Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled in 2 or 3 200-level points In Inorganic Chemistry. This unit, or 250, is a prerequisite for the 300-level units 358 and 359.

113 CHEMISTRY

Books Prescribed textbooks: Heslop R B & Robinson P L Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd ed Elsevier 1987 (Chemistry lIA and IIC) Gray H B Electrons and Chemical Bonding, Benjamin 1964 (Chemistry IIA and IIC) Basolo F & Johnson R Co-ordination Chemistry, Benjamin 1964 Recommended for reference: Claassen H H The Noble Gases, Heath 1966 (Unit 245) Cotton F A & Wilkinson G Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd ed liter- science 1966 (Category A only) kettle S F A Co-ordination Compounds, Nelson 1969 Marteil A E & Calvin M Chemistry of the Metal Chelate Compounds, Prentice-Hall (Especially for Chemistry lIB) Drago R S Physical Methods in Inorganic Chemistry, Reinbold 1965 Unit 242 Sutton, D Electronic Spectra of Transition Metal Complexes, McGraw- Hill (unit 340)

260 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY (1 point) 42 hours practical work The course will include exercises in: Separation techniques, solvent extraction chromatography, ion exchange. Identification of unknown organic compounds by classical qualitative and spectroscopic analysis. Gravimetric and volumetric analysis, e.g., gravimetris chloride, unsatura- tion of oils by ICI (standardized spectrophotometrically), complexometric titration. Potentiometry, polyprotic acids, specific electrodes. Spectrophotometry (UV/vis). Conductometry, aqueous and non-aqueous. Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled for 10 or more points in Chemistry at the 200 level. Students taking this unit are advised to take 248 Instrumental and Analytical Procedures.

300 LEVEL To assist students who wish to choose Chemistry as a major or sub- major study, courses are set out below in three categories, designed respectively for students taking a full Chemistry major, Chemistry with a biological science, and Chemistry with Mathematics or another physical science. Courses listed in these categories have been approved in advance for Chemistry majors and sub-majors. Students obtaining satisfactory results in any of these set courses will be eligible to apply for entry into LheBSc Honours year in the School of Chemistry. Any student wishing to construct a Chemistry major or sub-major course outside the framework set out below must submit his proposed course for approval to a panel of Chemistry School course advisors at the appropriate time. Students majoring in other subjects may take any of the Chemistry 300-level units offered, provided they comply with the prerequisite requirements and conditions of the Chemistry School and the Science faculty. 114 CHEMISTRY

Category A: For students majoring in Chemistry only. Students should enrol for about 45 points of Chemistry (47 maximum) as follows: Physical 12-18 points Organic 12-18 points Inorganic 12-18 points Chemical Research Project 4 points

Category В: For students majoring in Chemistry together with a biological science. Students should enrol for at least 23 points, as follows: Physical 8 points (310, 312, 317 recommended) Organic 12 points (320, 335 and any 5 of 321, 322, 324, 325, 330 and 331) Inorganic 5 points-351

Category C: . For students majoring in Chemistry together with mathematics or another physical science. Students should enrol for at least 24 points, as follows: Physical 10 points Organic б pоints-320, 328, 336, 323 or 329 Inorganic 8 points (342, 349, 350, 362 recommended + any other inorganic unit)

Practical Work: Physical: All physical chemistry laboratory work is combined with theory units for the purposes of examination. Organic: Two practical units 335 and 336. are offered. Students enrolled for 7 or more theory points in organic chemistry are required to enrol for 340. Students enrolled for from 3-8 theory points in organic chemistry are required to enrol for 335 or 338. Students enrolled for less than 3 points In organic chemistry are not required to enrol for 335 or 338. Inorganic: Two separate practical units, 358 and 359 are offered. Students enrolled for 9 or more theory points in Inorganic chemistry must enrol for 358. Students enrolled for from 3-8 theory points must enrol for 358 or 359. Students enrolled for less than 3 theory points in inorganic chemistry are not required to enrol for 358 or 359. Note that students enrolled for 351 may not enrol for 358 or 359. Chemical Research Project: This 4 point unit includes about 100 hours of laboratory work, and Is compulsory for all students majoring only in Chemistry. EXAMINATIONS Units may be examined at fixed times throughout the year, and in the examination term at the end of the year. PREREQUISITES Prerequisite studies have been specified for certain units and such preparation is to be generally regarded as essential. In exceptional cases, however, permission may be granted by the school to waive such requirements.

115 CHEMISTRY

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 301 BASIC QUANTUM MECHANICS (1% points) 7 lectures, 2 practice classes; prequisite 201 Concepts of operators, eigenvalues and eigenfunctions. The Hamiltonian operator and the Schrödinger equation. Variational methods and secular equations. Orbital angular momentum. Electron spin for one and two electrons. 302 THIRD LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS AND ELEMENTARY STATISTICAL MECHANICS (1% points) 7 lectures, 2 practice classes; prerequisite 201 Third Law of Thermodynamics—basis and applications. Probability, averaging; Boltzmann distribution; statistical quantities and thermodynamic functions. Independent subsystems. Ideal atomic, diatomic and polyatomic gases; chemical equilibrium between gases. 303 VALENCE THEORY (2 points) 10 lectures, 2 practice classes; prerequisite 201 Types of wave-functions and energy calculations for He, W, and H,. Born and Oppenheimer approximation. Ruedenberg theory of covalent bonding. Нйckel molecular orbital theory for x-electron systems. Antisymmet- rized product wave-functions. Elements of valence-bond theory for electron-excess polyatomic molecules. The Pauling 'three-electron bond' and its incorporation into valence formulae for diamagnetic and paramagnetic polyatomic molecules. Elements of Mulliken theory of charge-transfer complexes. Some transformations of non-localized molecular orbitals into localized molecular orbitals.

304 ADVANCED STATISTICAL MECHANICS (2 points) 10 lectures, 2 practice classes; prerequisites 201, 301 Ensemble theory. Systems of independent molecules; systems of interacting molecules. Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein statistics.

305 ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY (2% points) 11 lectures afd 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 301, 302 Introduction to atomic spectroscopy. Electronic spectra of diatomic molecules. Raman spectroscopy. Fluorescence and phosphorescence.

306 NUCLEAR RESONANCE SPECTROSCOPY (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 301 Principles of nuclear magnetic resonance and electron paramagnetic resonance. Applications to determination of structure. 307 ELECTROCHEMISTRY (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisite 201 Theory of the metal-solution interface. Adsorption of molecules and ions. 116 CHEMISTRY

Theory of charge transfer. Adsorbed intermediates and evaluation of rate- determining step In multi-step charge transfer processes. Dissolution of metals and mixed potentials. Corrosion. Theory of electrocatalysis. Organic electrosynthesis.

308 ELECTRON PARAMAGNETIC RESONANCE (2 points) 8 lectures, 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 301 Quantum mechanical principles of E.P.R.—the spin Hamiltonian and hyperfine effects in solution radicals. Anisotropic magnetic Interactions—the E.P.R. spectra of free radicals trapped in solids, the E.P.R. of triplet states. Introduction to the g-tensor and the E.P.R. of Inorganic radicals and transition metal ions. Applications to photochemistry, solid-state and solution chemistry.

309 SURFACE CHEMISTRY (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 302 Thermodynamics of surfaces, properties of curved surface, nucleation. Surface tension and adsorption in multicomponent systems, surfactant solutions. The solid-gas interface, adsorption, surface areas, surface structure. Electrical double layers at interfaces, ion adsorption, coagulation of colloids. 310 SURFACE CHEMISTRY FOR BIOLOGISTS (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisite 201 General thermodynamics of surfaces, properties of insoluble monolayers and bilayers, transport through membranes. Surface tension and adsorption, surfactants at interfaces, micelle formation. Stabilization and destabilization of colloidal dispersions. (Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 309)

311 POLYMER CHEMISTRY (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201,302 Types of polymers. Condensation polymerization; kinetics, expected molecular weight, molecular weight distribution. Radical chain polymerization; kinetics and mechanism, transfer reactions, control of molecular weight, molecular weight distribution functions. Extension of radical chain Ideas to cationic and anionic polymerization. Elementary chain statistics; average molecular weight, average molecular dimensions. Osmotic pressure, light scattering, viscosity methods of measuring molecular weight and dimensions. 312 POLYMER CHEMISTRY FOR BIOLOGISTS (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisite 201 Molecular structure and simple physical models (random coil, sphere, ellipsoid) for macromolecules. Molecular weights averages. Polyelectro- iyte behaviour. Osmotic pressure, Donnai equilibrium, determination of molecular weight and shape. Light scattering, determination of molecular weight, shape afd dimensions. Interpretation of molecular shape and Its changes.

117 CHEMISTRY

Viscosity behaviour of macromolecules. Magnetic resonance studies of macromolecular conformation. (Credit may not be held simultaneously for this unit and 311)

313 KINETICS OF GAS PHASE REACTIONS (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 302 The following topics will be covered: (1) Absolute rate theory. (2) Free radical reactions in the gas phase. (3) Unimolecular reactions in the gas phase.

314 COMBUSTION CHEMISTRY (2 points) 8 lectures, 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 312 Theory of linear and branched chain reactions in the gas phase. Chain initiation, propagation and termination. Ignition, explosion and explosion limits; sensitization by surfaces, impurities and radiation. Flames, cool flames, combustion intermediates and the products of incomplete combustion. Hydrocarbon-oxygen flames. Environmental effects of combustion. Texts Recommended: Dainton F S Chain Reactions, Methuen 1956 Minkoff G J & G F H Tipper Chemistry of Combustion Reactions, Butterworth 1962 Fristom R M & A А Westenberg Flame Structure, McGraw-Hill Combustion of Petroleum, Advances in Chemistry Series No. 22, Amer. Chem, Society.

315 SOLUTION CHEMISTRY (2 points) 8 lectures, 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 302 Effects of changing solvent on equilibria and rates of chemical reactions. Survey of experimental techniques available for measuring solvent and solute properties. Thermodynamic properties of Ions and molecules in various solvents. Survey of current theories of solute-solvent Interactions.

316 SOLID STATE CHEMISTRY (2 points) 8 lectures and 2 practical exercises; prerequisites 201, 302 Simple crystal structures and structure determinations. Growth of single crystals. Non-ideal solids; point, line and plane defects. Liquid crystals and amorphous solids. Electrical properties of solids; band theory. Properties of defect solids; diffusion. Solid state reactions; oxidation, reduction and decomposition reactions; the photographic process. The solid surface; catalytic reactions.

317 KINETICS AND THERMODYNAMICS IN BIOLOGY (1% points) 9 lectures; prerequisite 201 Absolute rate theory, energy and entropy of activation, kinetic treatment of biological reactions, thermodynamic quantities and enzymatic reactions, denaturation of enzymes, structural effects, coupled reactions. 118 CHEMISTRY

318 CHEMICAL PROCESSES IN NATURAL WATERS (2 points) 8 lectures, 4 tutorials; prerequisite 201 The control of the chemical composition in natural waters, radox equilibria in the aqueous environment, sediment-water equilibria, thermodynamics of sea water, dissolved gases and the CO,-Н,0 system, prob- 'ers in water pollution. Computational methods for treating multiple equilibria In natural systems. Texts Recommended: Stumm W & J J Morgan Aquatic Chemistry An Introduction Emphasizing Chemical Equilibria In Natural Waters, Wiley-lnterscience 1970 Horne R A Marine Chemistry The Structure of Water and the Chemistry of the Hydrosphere, Wiley-lntersclence 1969

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 320 SPECTROSCOPIC METHODS A (1% points) 8 lectures A simple treatment of the analysis of infrared nuclear magnetic resonance and mass spectra with particular emphasis on application in organic structure determination. Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 226. 321 SPECTROSCOPIC METHODS B (1% points) 8 lectures Qualitative and quantitative aspects of ultraviolet absorption spectroscopy, including a discussion of the relationship between structure and absorption for a wide range of organic compounds. Fundamentals of optical rotatory dispersion and circular dichroism and their application to stereochemical and structural problems. 322 REACTION MECHANISMS (1% points) 8 lectures A treatment of the mechanisms of reaction of amides, esters and other systems, especially those containing carbonyl groups. The effect of neigh- bouring groups on these and other reactions. 323 ELEMENTARY BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY (1% points) 8 lectures Chemical aspects of nucleic acids and other metabolites based on pur- Ines, pyrimidines and related heterocyclic systems. Structure and chemistry of, and mechanisms Involving, proteins and other systems of o- logical significance. 324 BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY (1% points) 8 lectures The content of this unit covers topics that are broadly similar to those described in 323 but Is designed for students having experience of a biological science. Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 323.

119 CHEMISTRY

325 BIOSYNTHESIS (1% points) 8 lectures Well established biosynthetic pathways involving acetate, shikimic acid and mevalonate are discussed. This is illustrated in terms of a brief discussion of the chemistry of aromatic metabolites, alkaloids, terpenolds and steroids.

326 ORGANIC PHOTOCHEMISTRY/ELECTROCYCLIC REACTIONS (1% points) 8 lectures Chemical consequences of photo-excitation including photoisomerism and photoaddition. Stereochemistry of such processes and elementary treatment of current theoretical approaches to the study of electrocyclic reactions.

327 REACTIVE INTERMEDIATES (1% points) 8 lectures, Structures of arynes and hetero-arynes and their applications in organic synthesis. The generation, structures and chemical reactions of methy- Iene, other divalent carbon species and the isoelectronic nitrenes are discussed.

328 GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY (1% points) 8 lectures A survey of fundamental organic processes that are essential to third level chemistry. The unit is designed for students who have not completed this material at second level, especially 221. Credit may not be held for this unit simultaneously with 221. .

329 PRINCIPLES OF ORGANIC SYNTHESIS (1%points) 8lectures; prerequisites 221 or 328 Application of mechanistic (using the term in its widest sense) principles to the understanding and planning of organic synthesis. Illustrations cover a wide field of organic synthesis.

330 POLYMER AND FREE RADICAL CHEMISTRY (1ýi points) 8 lectures The formation, stability and methods of detection of free radicals. Common organic reactions involving free radical intermediates, e.g. ad- ditions, rearrangements. The mechanism of free radical polymerization of olefins and the structures of some common synthetic high polymers are discussed.

331 MOLECULES FROM NATURE (1 points) 8 lectures The structures, reactions and synthesis of simple and complex molecules selected from some groups of natural compounds, e.g. alkaloids, poly- phenols, terpenes, quinones, vitamins, antibiotics. 120 CH 332 CARBONIUM ION CHEMISTRY (1% points) 8 lectures The formation, stability and methods of detection of carbonium Ions. Their role in organic reactions is illustrated by the examination of hydrolysis reaction mechanisms and from consideration of kinetic, thermodynamic and stereochemical data. 335 ORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK I (4 points) 120 hours; prerequisite 230 or 231; 226 or 320 The emphasis of this course is on the techniques of organic chemistry rather than on illustration of lecture material. Column, preparative thin layer and gas liquid chromatography are employed. The uses of photochemistry, catalytic hydrogenation, Grignard reagents, etc., as preparative methods are shown. Extensive use Is made of spectroscopic techniques. There are exercises in structure determination by chemical and spectroscopic means. Enrolment in this unit Is compulsory for ail students enrolled in 7 or more organic theory points at the 300 level. 336 ORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK II (2 points) 60 hours; prerequisite 230 or 231; 226 or 320 Syllabus same as for 335, but less Intensive. Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled in 3-8 organic theory points at the 300 level. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Silverstein R M & Bassler G C Spectrometric Identification of Organic Compounds, 2nd ed Wiley Brand J C & Eglinton G Applications of Spectroscopy to Organic Chemi- stry, Oldbourne Press 1965 Norman R O C Principles of Organic Synthesis, Science Paperbacks, Methuen 1970 Recommended for reference: Bu'Lock J D The Biosynthesis of Natural Products, McGraw-Hill 1965 Mahler I R & Cordes L H Biological Chemistry, Harper 1968 Bethel D & Gold V Сerbоniuт Ions, Academic Press 1967 Hine J Physical Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1962 Albert A Heterocyclic Chemistry, 2nd ed Athlone Press 1968 Ingold C K Structure and Mechanism in Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed Bell 1969 Gould E S Mechanism and Structure in Organic Chemistry, International ed Holt 1969 March J Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions Mechanism and Struc- ture, Student ed McGraw-Hill 1970

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 340 PHYSICAL METHODS A (1% points) 8 lectures; prerequisites 240, 242 Ligand field theory: electronic spectra, structural, thermodynamic and kinetic Implications in transition metal complexes.

121 CHEMISTRY

341 PHYSICAL METHODS В (1% points) 8 lectures; prerequisites 240, 242 and 340 The application of magnetic susceptibility, nuclear magnetic resonance • (of paramagnetic ions), electron spin resonance and Mossbauer spectroscopy to problems in Inorganic Chemistry.

342 NON-AQUEOUS SYSTEMS (1% points) 8 lectures Use of physico-inorganic methods in the study of acid-base and oxidation-reduction reactions in protonic and non-protonic solvents.

343 LANTHANIDES AND ACTINIDES (1% points) 8 lectures Chemistry of lanthanides and actinides with special reference to stabilities of oxidation states in compounds of lanthanides and actinides in terms of the involvement of d and f electrons in bonding.

344 RADIOCHEMISTRY A (1% points) 8 lectures Review of the nature of radiation afd its detection, principles involved in designing a radiochemical experiment, simple applications to chemical problems in tracer experiments, in analysis, in equilibrium constant determination and in exchange reactions. Will not be offered in 1973.

345 RADIOCHEMISTRY В (1% points) 8 lectures; prerequisite 344 Advanced applications of tracers to chemical problems; reaction mechanisms, corrosion of metals, the Szilard-Chalmers effect, the Mössbauer effect, diffusion, radiation chemistry and safety considerations. Will not be offered in 1973.

346 2nd/3rd ROW TRANSITION METALS (1% points) 8 lectures A survey of the special features of the structures and reactions of compounds of the 2nd and 3rd row transition metals. 347 ORGANO-METALLIC CHEMISTRY (1% points) 8 lectures Synthesis, reactions and structure of organo-metallic compounds with special reference to the use of spectroscopic, magnetic and diffraction techniques (e.g. carbonyls, nitrosyls, sandwich compounds, hydride compounds, olefins compounds).

348 REACTION MECHANISMS (1% points) 8 lectures A discussion of the ligand dissociation reactions of some trivalent and divalent transition metal ion complexes will be undertaken. The types of chemical reactions which will be covered will include hydrolysis and

122 CH EM !my

вolvolyѕis, anation, Zsomerization and ligand transfer between metal ions or metal ions and protons. Some material will be presented on the reacti- vities of potential ligands catalyzed by metal ions.

349 DESCRIPTIVE CHEMISTRY OF THE NON-METALS (1% points) 8 lectures (Not available for students having credit for unit 245.) Hydrogen (classification of hydrides, structures, properties, etc). Non- stoichiometric compounds. Chemistry of rare gases.

350 CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF METALS OF ECONOMIC IMPOR- TANCE TO AUSTRALIA (1% points) 8 lectures Mineral Dressing. Thermodynamics of metal extraction. Extraction of metals, e.g. titanium, Iron, copper, lead, aluminium, uranium etc. Nu- clear fuel processing and nuclear reactors.

351 BIOLOGICAL INORGANIC CHEMISTRY (5 points) 16 lectures and 60 hours' practical work Co-ordination chemistry of metalloporphyrins. Reactions of molecular oxygen with metal complexes. Haemoglobin. Cytochromes. Electron transfer. Vitamin В12. Chemistry of molecular nitrogen and nitrogen fixation. Reactions of co-ordinated ligands. Metal containing enzymes and related model systems.

352 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTAL PROCEDURES (1% points) 8 lectures The application to Inorganic systems of Infra red, Raman and nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy. Separation procedures, such as solvent extraction, chromatography and Ion-exchange. Advanced electrochemical procedures.

354 STRUCTURAL AND CRYSTAL CHEMISTRY (1% points) 8 lectures Topics will be taken from the following: Nature of crystals, crystal axes and crystal planes, Miller Indices. Crystal symmetry. Geometrical considerations. Hexagonal and cubic close packing. Interstitial sites in close packed structures. Structures of simple compounds of the type AB, AB2, АВ3, А2Bs. The spinel structure, normal and Inverted spinals. The perovskite structure and tungsten bronzes. Influence of directed lone pairs and directed bonding on crystal structures. Crystal chemistry of copper (il). Ionic radius. Co-ordination number and co-ordination polyhedra.

358 INORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK I (4 points) 120 hours; prerequisites 250 or 251 and 260 A course of synthetic procedures and instrumental techniques applied to the chemistry of the transition metals and designed to illustrate many of the topics covered In the third year Inorganic Chemistry lecture units. Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled In 9 or more Inorganic Theory points at the 300 level, not counting 351.

123 CHEMISTRY

359 INORGANIC PRACTICAL WORK II (2 points) 60 hours; prerequisites 250 or 251 A selection of the above experiments will be used throughout this course. Enrolment in this unit Is compulsory for all students enrolled in from 3-8 Inorganic theory points at the 300 level, not counting 351.

399 CHEMICAL RESEARCH PROJECT (4 points) 1 lecture; 100 hours laboratory work; preparation of written and oral reports Students will carry out a brief chemical investigation under the direction of a Chemistry School staff member. Titles of the projects available will be displayed during second term, and the project work will be carried out during third term. Each student will be required to prepare both a written and oral report on the results obtained. Points for the unit will be awarded on the basis of these reports. Enrolment in this unit is compulsory for all students enrolled in 35 or more 300 level points in Chemistry. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Cotton F A & Wilkinson G Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd ed Inter- science 1966 (Chemistry IIIA only) Duncan J F & Cook G В isotopes in Chemistry, OUP 1968 (Units 344 and 345) Ваsоlо F & Pearson R G Mechanism of Inorganic Reactions, 2nd ed Wiley 1967 (Category A only) Canterford J H & Colton R Halides of the Second and Third Row Tiansi- don Elements, Wiley (Unit 346) Lever A B P Inorganic Electronic Spectroscopy, Elsevier (Unit 340) Orgel L E Introduction to Transition Metal Chemistry, 2nd ed Methuen 1966 (Unit 340) Drago R S Physical Methods in Inorganic Chemistry, Reinhold (Unit 341) Day P & Hill H A 0 Physical Methods in Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, Wiley (Unit 341) Addison W E Structural Principles in Inorganic Compounds, Longmans (Unit 354) Recommended for reference: Kettle S F A Co-ordination Compounds, Nelson 1969 Lewis J & Wilkins R G eds Modern Co-ordination Chemistry, Inter- science Phillips C S G & Williams R J P Inorganic Chemistry, Vols I & II OUP Latimer W M The Oxidation States of the Elements, 2nd ed Prentice Hall Brown G H & Sallee E M Quantitative Chemistry, Prentice-Hall Falk J E Porphyrins and Metalloporphyrins, Elsevier (Unit 351) Dwyer F P & Mellor D P Chelating Agents and Metal Chelates, Academic Press (Unit 351) Garrets R M & Christ C L Solutions, Minerals and Equilibria, Harper & Row Wells A F Structural Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd ed OUP (Unit 354) Krebs H Fundamentals of Inorganic Crystal Chemistry, McGraw-Hill (Unit 354) 124 ELECTRONICS 359 ELECTRONICS 301 ELECTRONICS AND NETWORKS A course of approximately 60 lectures and three hours per week of laboratory work. SYLLABUS Analysis of linear electrical networks, time and frequency response. Transform methods. The physical basis of semi-conductor amplifying devices. Electrical models. Voltage and power amplifiers, their analysis and design. Feedback systems. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week on experiments relating to the above course. No student will be admitted to the annual examinations without evidence of satisfactory practical work.

BOOKS Prescribed Textbooks: Chirlian P M Basic Network Theory, McGraw-Hill Gray P E & Searle C L Electronic Principles, Physics, Models and Cir- cuits, Wiley Recommended for reference: Balabanian N Fundamentals of Circuit Theory, Allyn & Bacon Reza F M & Seeley S Modern Network Analysis, McGraw-Hill Cherry E M & Hooper D E Amplifying Devices end Low Pass Amplifier Design, Wiley Skilling H H Electrical Engineering Circuits, Wiley Angelo E J Electronics, B.J.T.'s, F.E.T.'s, and Microcircuits, McGraw- Hill

302 DIGITAL CIRCUITS A course of eighteen lectures. SYLLABUS Combinational logic circuit analysis and synthesis. Introduc- tion to sequential circuit analysis. Pulse and logic circuit techniques.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hill F J & Peterson G R Introduction to Switching Theory end Logic Design, Wiley Marcus M P Switching Circuits for Engineers, Prentice-Hall

303 APPLIED ELECTRODYNAMICS A course of eighteen lectures. SYLLABUS Electromagnetic fields. Maxwell's equations. Transmission lines. Radiation and propagation.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Paris D T & Hurd F K Basic Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill

304 LABORATORY PROJECT Three hours per week which will be devoted to work of a project nature. Students who are taking either 302 or 303 are strongly advised to take this unit concurrently.

125 ENGINEERNG

EXAMINATIONS These units will be examined in November. Unit 301 will have two 3-hour papers. Units 302 and 303 will have one 2-hour paper each. Unit 304 will not be formally examined but the results will be based on the quality of work done and reports submitted during the year.

552 ENGINEERING 100 LEVEL 101 INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING This subject is divided into a compulsory core and a selection of three units from a series of options. SYLLABUS (a) Compulsory Core (Approximately 50 lectures with 70 hours of tutorial and practical classes) Topics included are: ( 1 ) Introductory lectures (2) Graphical Analysis, Engineering Drawing and Sketching (3) Computational aids (4) Introduction to Engineering systems with particular reference to statics. (b) Options The options are 20 hour units some of which consist of core studies and engineering projects. The following options are typical of those which may be offered: (1) Navigation (2) Bridge Building (3) Beyond the Mining Boom (4) Descriptive Geometry (5) Shaping the Product (6) Photogrammetric Survey (7) Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation (8) Communication and Digital Systems (9) Chemical and Metallurgical Processing of Materials (10) Beach Erosion and Coastal Processes (11) Human Factors in Engineering (12) Environmental Problems (13) Rural Environmental Studies (14) The Design of Racing Cars (15) Hovercraft (16) Introduction to Technology NOTE A full list of options available, and any restrictions which may be applicable, will be available at the Engineering faculty office during Orientation Week. DRAWING OFFICE WORK Three hours per week throughout most of the year. Students must procure the following set of drawing requisites before the course commences: NOTE University students may claim exemption from sales tax on this equipment. 1. Set of good quality drawing Instruments Including: A large (say 6") master bow with lengthening bar. 126 GENETICS

A small (say 3%" or 4") master bow with pencil attachment and divider points (or small pencil and divider spring bows). 2. One 10 in. slide rule with ABCD, Sin, Tan, log-log scales. 3. Celluloid set squares. One 10 or 12 in. adjustable set square. One 60 degrees set square, 10 in. size or larger. 4. One celluloid protractor. 5. A set of French curves. 6. Scales t One 12 in. scale, graduated %2 in., 1,41 in., lie in., %оо In. and m.m. units. 7. A clutch pencil with refill leads, F, H, 4Н and 6Н. 8. One hard eraser, one artgum, one eraser shield. 9. One small fine file (5 In. smooth warding file) or sand paper block. 10. One roll of drafting tape. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Granter L E Engineering Preview, Macmillan Hogben L T Science for the Citizen, Allen & Unwin Huxley J Uniqueness of Men, Chatto & Windus Shute N Slide Rule, Heinemann Kirby R S et al. Engineering in History, McGraw-Hill (b) Prescribed textbooks: • leriam J L Mechanics Part 1, Statics, Wiley—Internat edn • Institution of Engineers (Australia) Australian Standard Engineering Drawing Practice AS No. CZ 1 1966 (c) Recommended for reference: A list of references will be supplied in lectures. EXAMINATIONS One 3-hour and one 1 %-hour examination. Performance to the examinations, the options afd drawing office work will be used as the basis of assessment for Pass and Honours.

361 GENETICS 200 LEVEL 201 GENERAL GENETICS A course of one lecture and two hours of laboratory work per week throughout the year. The course will cover the fundamental principles of cytology and genetics in viruses, bacteria, fungi, higher plants and animals, Including the human species. SYLLABUS The nature of the genetic material. Structure and replication of the genetic material. Polyploidy. The segregation of genes. Sex-linked Inheritance. Linkage and recombination of genes. The cytoplasm in heredity. Mutation. Gene action and protein synthesis. Elementary population and evolutionary genetics. PRACTICAL WORK Two hours per week throughout the year. A list of equipment to be provided by students will be posted in the department. Students must call at the department office on February 26, 27 or 28 to be assigned to a laboratory group.

127 GENETICS

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Srb A M Owen R D & Edgar R S General Genetics, 2nd ed Freeman 1965 Dobzhansky T Genetics of the Evolutionary Process Columbia Univ Press. Herskowitz I H Basic Principles of Molecular Genetics, Nelson McKusick V A Human Genetics, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall White M J D The Chromosomes, Methuen 1961 Swanson C P Merz T & Young W J Cytogenetics, Prentice-Hall • Fincham J R S Microbial and Molecular Genetics, English Universities Press Hartman P E & Suskind S R Gene Action, Prentice-Hall Sutton H F An Introduction to Human Genetics, Holt Rinehart & Win- ston Strickbeгger M W Genetics, Macmillan Fincham J R S & Day P R Fungal Genetics, 2nd ed Blackwell EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper. A 2-hour practical examination at the end of the year. Practical tests may also be held during the year.

300 LEVEL 301-306 ADVANCED GENETICS These six units each occupy four weeks. In 1973 the sequence of these units will be 301, 304, 305, 302, 306, 303. There will be four lectures a 2-hour tutorial and ten hours practical work per week. The following books are recommended for the use of students taking any or all of the units: BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading: Carlson E A The Gene—A Critical History, Saunders Hartman P E & Suskind S R Gene Action, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall Haynes R H & Hanawalt P C eds The Molecular Basis of Life, Freeman Whitehouse H L K Towards an Understanding of the Mechanism of '. Heredity, 2nd ed Arnold. Watson J Molecular Biology of the Gene 2nd ed, Benjamin EXAMINATIONS One 3-hour paper after the conclusion of each unit. Practical work may be assessed and practical tests may be held in any unit. 301 BIOCHEMICAL AND DEVELOPMENTAL GENETICS Gene function in higher organisms (eukaryotes): special aspects of replication, transcription and translation. Transport, stabilization and life of m-RNA. Regulation of gene activity: activation in the zygote and in interspecific heterocaryons; determination and differentiation; trans- determination; nuclear transplantation. Dosage compensation; genetic regulation of metabolism; isozymes; models of control systems. Integra- tion of the genotype in development: gene-action systems, treodes; pattern formation and morphogenesis; current problems in developmental biology. 128 GENETICS

PRACTICAL WORK Practical work In this unit is designed as an Intro- duction to the techniques of molecular biology and biochemical genetics. Methods for studying nucleic acid and protein biosynthesis, for charac- terizing these macromolecules afd investigating their functional relationships are emphasized. Isotopic tracer techniques, electrophoresis, and enzyme assay procedures are included. BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading: Harris H Nucleus and Cytoplasm, 2nd ed OUP Recommended for reference: Davidson E H Gene Activity in Early Development, Academic Press Harris H Cell Fusion, OUP Loomis W F ed Papers on Regulation of Gene Activity during Develop- ment, Harper & Row Markert C L & Ursprung H Developmental Genetics, Prentice-Hall Trinkaus J P Cells into Organs the Forces that Shape the Embryo, Pren- tice-Hall Waddington C H New Patterns in Genetics and Development, Columbia UP

302 POPULATION GENETICS The unit examines the role of genes in populations of organisms at the theoretical and applied level. Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium. Selection, Drift, Mating Systems. Heterosis and Epistasis. Genetic Homeostasis. Balanced polymorphism and co-adaptation. Genetic Load. Genetic Assimi- lation. Genetics of Biological Control. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Mettler L E & Gregg T C Population Genetics and Evolution, Prentice- Hall Falconer D S Introduction to Quantitative Genetics, Oliver & Boyd Wallace B Topics in Population Genetics, Norton Ford E B Ecological Genetics 3rd ed, Chapman & Hall

303 MICROBIAL AND MOLECULAR GENETICS A course of lectures and practicals designed for students who desire to master the concepts of microbial genetics and molecular biology well enough to be able to apply them to their own problems and to compre- hend original papers. The course will stress genetical analysis, in the various novel genetic systems which have been found In micro-organisms, esресially in bacteria and their viruses. It is Intended also to cover the Integration of genetic studies with biochemical and physical analyses of the synthesis, structure and function of nucleic acids and proteins. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Mandelstam J & MсQuillen K Biochemistry of Bacterial Growth, Black- well Hayes W The Genetics of Bacteria and their Viruses, 2nd ed Blackwell Stent G S Molecular Biology of Bacterial Viruses, Freeman

129 в GENETICS

304 HUMAN GENETICS A course designed to demonstrate the special contributions of human genetics to the overall sum of genetic knowledge. Relation of mutation to protein structure and function in man. Haemoglobin and enzyme vari- ants, harmless and harmful. Inborn errors of metabolism in man. The techniques used in human genetics. Consanguinity, quantitative Inheri- tance and congenital malformations. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Harris H The Principles of Human Biochemical Genetics, North McKusick V A Human Genetics, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall LI C C Human Genetics, McGraw-Hill Stern C Principles of Human Genetics, 2nd ed Freeman Stanbury J B et al ed Metabolic Basis of Inherited Disease, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill

305 CYТOGENEТICS The chromosome as a macromoiecular structure. Mitosis and endomitosis. Giant chromosomes (poIytene and lampbrush). The mechanism of meiosis. Principles of chromosomal rearrangement. Chromosomal polymorphism in natural populations and its adaptive significance. karyotype evolution and the role of chromosomal rearrangements in race- and species formation. Anomalous chromosome cycles and mechanisms of meiosis. Cytogenetica of hybrids. Simple and complex sex chromosome mechanisms. The cytogenetics of parthenogenesis. Heteropycnosis, genetic inert- ness and inactivation and the timing of DNA replication. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Dobzhansky T Genetics of the Evolutionary Process Columbia Univ Press John B & Lewis K R The Meiotic System, Springer-Verlag White M J D Animal Cytology and Evolution, Cambridge Univ Press 306 GENETICS OF FUNGI and HIGHER PLANTS. The analysis and interpretation of genetic differences in fungi and higher plants and the genetic properties of plant species. The effects of different breeding systems. Artificial and natural selection. Biostatistics. Biochemi- cal basis of adaptation within populations. Chromosome botany. Recom- bination systems. Genecology and speciation. The genetics of plastids. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Stebbins G L Processes of Organic Evolution, Prentice Hall Allard A W Principles of Plant Breeding, Wiley Baker I G & Stebbins G L The Genetics of Colonizing Species, Aca- demic Press Kershaw R D Quantitative and Dynamic Ecology, Edward Arnold Stebbins G L Chromosomal Evolution in Higher Plants, Prentice-Hall Scagel R F et ai Plant Diversity: An Evolutionary Approach, Wadsworth kirk J T O& Tilney-Bassett R A E The Plastids, Freeman Esser k & Kuenen R The Genetics of Fungi, Springer Verlag Grant V Plant Speciation, Columbia UP

130 GEOGRAPHY

363 GEOGRAPHY (SCIENCE COURSE) 100 LEVEL 101 GEOGRAPHY A course of three lectures and three hours practical work per week throughout the year, together with excursions. SYLLABUS The course is designed as a general introduction to geography with special emphasis on method and on the physical aspects of the subject. Regional, economic and historical geography are Introduced through examples selected to illustrate Important types. Maps: types, projections, scale. Elementary study of processes, classification and cartographic presentation of data in weather, climate and land forms. Studies of selected areas of production and commodities. Geo- graphical aspects of planning and development. PRACTICAL WORK Maps, construction and interpretation; block diagrams, models, distribution maps and statistical diagrams; field studies; essays. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Bartholomew J The Advanced Atlas of Modern Geography, Meiklejohn or Lewis C & Campbell J D The Oxford Atlas, OUP or Fullard H & Darby H C The University Atlas, Philip or Watson J W Atlas Advanced, Collins/Longmans Strahler A N Physical Geography, 3rd ed Wiley EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. One practical test of three hours. The practical work performed during the year will be assessed as part of the annual examination. 200 LEVEL Students majoring In Geography must take all 200 level units. 201 LAND SYSTEMS ANALYSIS A course of three lectures and six hours' practical work (including field work) during first term. Four days' field work. SYLLABUS Methods of classifying and mapping landforms, soils, and vegetation. Land systems. Lend research methods used In Australia and elsewhere. Land evaluation. BOOKS Reading lists will be given In class. EXAMINATION One end-of-term 11/=-hours' written paper and one 2-hours' practical examination. Practical work, reports on field work a пд occasional testa will be assessed and taken Into account at the examination.

202 PRINCIPLES OF CONSERVATION A course of three lectures end six hours' practical work (including field work) during second term.

131 GEOGRAPHY

SYLLABUS Concepts of conservation. The use of natural resources (land, water and biological resources) now and in the future. Wildlife conservation. Management of National Parks and other Reserves. Recreation and tourism in relation to conservation.

BOOKS Dasmann R F Environmental Conservation, Wiley Further references will be given in class. EXAMINATION One end-of-term 1 %-hours' written paper. Practical work, reports on field work and occasional tests will be assessed and taken into account at the examination.

203 QUANTITATIVE METHODS IN GEOGRAPHY A course of three lectures and six hours' practical work during third term. SYLLABUS A survey of mathematical methods in geography. While the emphasis will be geographical rather than mathematical, the aim of the lecture and practical courses will be to examine the use of particular mathematical techniques to problems in physical and social geography.

BOOKS Reading lists will be given in class. EXAMINATION One end-of-year 1%-hours' written paper. Practical work and occasional tests will be assessed and taken into account at the examination.

300 LEVEL Students majoring in Geography must take all 300 level units.

301 COASTAL AND FLUVIAL GEOMORPHOLOGY A course of three lectures and six hours' practical work (including field work) during first term. Four days' field work. SYLLABUS Coastal processes and the evolution of coastal landforms. Fluvial processes and the evolution of landforms produced by running water.

BOOKS Bird E C F Coasts, ANU Press Leopold L B Wolman W G & Miller J P Fluvial Processes in Geomor- phology, Freeman EXAMINATION One end-of-term 1%-hours' written paper and one 3- hours' practical examination. Practical work, reports on field work, and occasional tests will be assessed and taken into account In the examination.

302 POPULATION GEOGRAPHY A course of three lectures and six hours' practical work during second term. A seminar paper will be prepared by each student. SYLLABUS Study of population distribution and dynamics. Measurement and transition; concepts and problems especially costs of population growth, and population and resources: examples drawn mainly from Asia and Europe.

132 GEOLOGY

Books Wrong D Population and Society, Random House Other readings given in class. EXAMINATION One end-of-term 1 %-hours' written paper. Practical work and occasional tests will be assessed and taken into account in the examination.

303 REGIONAL THEORY A course of three lectures and three hours' practical work during third term. SYLLABUS The theory of regions. Methods of regional analysis. BOOKS Reading lists will be given in class. EXAMINATION See Unit 304.

304 PROBLEMS OF MODERN GEOGRAPHY A tutorial/practical course of three hours a week in third term, dealing with topical problems in geography. BOOKS Reading lists will be given in class. EXAMINATION One end-of-year 1 %-hours' written paper covering Units 303 and 304. Practical work, reports on field work and occasional tests will be assessed and taken into account in the examination.

305 PROJECT IN PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY Each student Is required to make an Investigation and write a dissertation (5000 words) on a selected problem in the field of physical geography. This project will be Initiated at the beginning of first term, and will proceed under individual superviаion by a staff member. A programme of practical classes and field work will be arranged with each student, the average weekly work-load being six hours throughout the year. The dissertation must be submitted at the end of third term. EXAMINATION The dissertation will be assessed.

365 GEOLOGY 100 LEVEL 101 GEOLOGY A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory and field work, throughout the year. SYLLABUS An introductory course in the main branches of Geology. Introduction A brief survey of geology and of geological processes; the features resulting from interaction of processes of earth movements, erosion, sedimentation etc, and deep seated phenomena of Igneous activity and metamorphism. Crystallography The nature of crystalline substances; packing and symmetry in crystal lattices; unit cell; net planes and crystal faces; an introduction to stereographic projections and point groups; crystal forms; crystal growth and habit.

133 GEOLOGY

Mineralogy Relation between crystal structure, chemical composition and physical properties of minerals; common silicate minerals and their structure; non-silicate minerals; origin and occurrence of mineral deposits and their economic use. Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology Volcanoes and volcanic activity; igneous intrusions; igneous rocks, their origins and relationships; contact and regional metamorphism; metamorphic and metasomatic rocks; granitization. Weathering Chemical and physical weathering of minerals, common rocks and ore bodies; features developed by weathering of limestone; soils. Sediment°logy Surface and ground water, artesian basins; sediment transport; sedimentary structures; sedimentary rocks, their environments of deposition and relationships; coal; petroleum and natural gas. Geomorphology Land forms developed under fluvial, arid and semi-arid, glacial and periglacial conditions; hill slope development; coastlines. Structural and Tectonic Geology Mechanisms of rock deformation; folding and faulting; diastrophic movements; earthquakes and seismology; Internal structure of the earth; isostasy; major structural features of the earth's surface; geosynclines and the origin of fold mountains; theories of crustal deformation; plate tectonics. Palaeontology The nature and preservation of fossils; their use In geology and biology; structure of the principal groups of fossil Invertebrates; the succession of life, including vertebrates. Stratigraphy Physical and bio-stratigraphical principles; radioactive age determination; the geological history and structure of south-eastern Australia, with emphasis on Victoria; selected topics of Australian stratigraphy. Special Studies Certain topics may be used during the course as In- tegrating themes, and will receive emphasis as illustrative examples in various sections of lectures, practical work and excursions, eg The Ter- tiary and Quaternary rocks of the Melbourne region. ESSAY REPORTS Students may be asked to submit essay reports on topics within the syllabus. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week. A continuous assessment of the work is made, and will be taken into account in the final mark. Tutorials will be given on various topics within the syllabus. They will be arranged at the beginning of the academic year. FIELD WORK Some of the sessions allotted to laboratory work may be held away from the University. Field excursions will be held on Saturdays and/or Sundays (up to a maximum of six days per year). Field work reports will be used in the assessment of candidates' examination results. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Skinner B J Earth Resources, Prentice-Hall 1969 Prescribed textbooks: Students are advised that all the textbooks listed are suitable for pur- chase, especially as many are in soft-cover editions. Advice will be given by the lecturers concerned. Longwell C R Flint R F & Sanders J Physical Geology, Wiley 1969 Berry L G & Mason B Mineralogy, Freeman 1959 134 GEOLOGY

Williams H Turner F J& Gilbert C M Petrography, Freeman Twldale C R Geomorphology, Nelson 1968 Eicher D L Geologic Time, Prentice-Hall 1968 Simpson B Geological Maps, Pergamon 1969 Black R M The Elements of Palaeontology, CUP 1970 Recommended for reference: Holmes A Principles of Physical Geology, 2nd ed Nelson 1965 Gilluly J Waters C A & Woodford A 0 Principles of Geology, 3rd ed Freeman 1968 Phillips F C An Introduction to Crystallography, Longmans 1963 Wade F A & Mattox R B Elements of Crystallography and Mineralogy, Harper 1960 Keller W D Chemistry In Introductory Geology, 3rd ed Lucas 1968 recommended for students without a background in chemistry. Huang W T Petrology, McGraw-Hill 1962 Bowen N L The Evolution of the Igneous Rocks, Dover 1958 Thornbury W D Principles of Geomorphology 2nd ed, Wiley 1969 Kirkaldy J F Fossils in Colour, Blandford 1987 Beerbower J R Search for the Pest, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1968 McAlester A L The History of Life, Prentice-Hall 1968 Laporte L F Ancient Environments, Prentice-Hall 1968 McAndrew J & Marsden M A H eds A Regional Guide to Victorian Geology, Geology Department 1972. (Distributed by the Melbourne University Bookroom) Geological Survey of Victoria Geology of the Melbourne District, Vic- toria, Bulletin No 59 1987 The library of the Department of Geology is open to students, and advice as to reading on any special section of the work will be given by members of the staff. Other introductory textbooks are available for preliminary reading and general reference in the reserve section of the departmental ibrary. EXAMINATION Theory: Term tests (or a mid-year test) and one 3- hour end-of-year written paper. Practical: Term tests (or a mid-year test) and a final practical test. All teste may be held at weekends.

200 LEVEL 200 GEOLOGY A course of four lectures and six hours practical work per week, with field excursions and a field mapping exercise, throughout the year. Students wishing to major in Geology are required to take Geology 200 and to enrol Individually in each of its constituent units.

SYLLABUS Geology 200 consists of the following units - 201 Mineralogy 202 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrography 203 Structural Geology 204 Sedimentology 205 Palaeontology 206 Principles of Stratlgraphy 135 GEOLOGY

FIELD WORK The prescribed field excursions for units 201-206 inclusive held at weekends or during term vacations, and a 3-day field mapping exercise held during a term vacation. Brief written reports on field work are required. BOOKS In addition to the books cited under units 201-206. Recommended for reference: Verhoogen J et al The Earth—an Introduction to Physical Geology, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970 Students should make full use of the departmental library for reference purposes, and advice will be given by members of the staff In the selection of suitable literature. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work as for units 201-206 inclusive. Laboratory and field work are assessed and are taken into account in determining the success of each candidate.

201 MINERALOGY A course of sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work with a field excursion. SYLLABUS Theory and applications of crystal optics; basic geochemistry; relationships between mineral structures and physical properties; structure, chemistry and paragenesis of the common rock-forming minerals. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Deer W A Howie R A & Zussman J An Introduction to the Rock-forming Minerals, Longmans Kerr P F Optical Mineralogy, McGraw-Hill Phillips W R Mineral Optics, Freeman 1971 Heinrich E W Microscope Identification of Minerals, McGraw-Hill Recommended for reference: Mason B Principles of Geochemistry, Wiley EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

202 IGNEOUS AND METAMORPHIC PETROGRAPHY A course of sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work, with field excursions. SYLLABUS Igneous rock classifications; petrography and elementary petrology of igneous and metamorphic rocks. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Bowen N L The Evolution of the Igneous Rocks, Dover 1956 Williams H Turner F J& Gilbert C M Petrography, Freeman Recommended for reference: Harker A Petrology for Students, CUP Heinrich E W Microscopic Petrography, McGraw-Hill EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling three hours. 136 GEOLOGY

203 STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY A course of sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work, with field excursions. SYLLABUS The behaviour of rocks under stress; structures in folded sediments; diapiric structures; salt domes; jointing in sedimentary and Igneous rocks; faulting. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Hills E S Outlines of Structural Geology, Methuen •Phillips F C The Use of Stereographic Projection in Structural Geology, Edward Arnold Recommended for reference: Hills E S Elements of Structural Geology, Methuen EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

204 SEDIMENTOLOGY A course of sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work with a field excursion. SYLLABUS The гбiе of sedimentology in stratigraphy and environmental analysis, with emphasis on the genesis of sedimentary rocks and their structures under various physical, chemical and biological conditions. Terrigenous sediments Origin, transport and deposition; texture, grain size and morphology and their relation to depositional environments; mineral composition and classification; hydrodynamic, rheotropic and biogenic sedimentary structures. Carbonate sediments An introduction to the origin, petrography and classification of carbonates. Chemical sediments An Introduction. Students may be required to undertake a short reading course of selected references and to prepare an essay based upon this. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Hatch F H & Rastall R H Revised by J. T. Greensmith Petrology of the Sedimentary Rocks, 4th ed Murby 1965 Recommended for reference: Pettijohn F J Sedimentary Rocks, 2nd ed Harper 1967 Folk R L Petrology of Sedimentary Rocks, Hemphill 1968 Conybeare C E B& Crook K A W Manual of Sedimentary Structures, Bulletin No 102 Bureau of Mineral Resources Department of National Development Canberra 1968 Allen J R L Physical Processes of Sedimentation, George Allen & Un- win 1970 Salley R C Ancient Sedimentary Environments, Chapman & Hall 1970 Other references will be given during the course. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 137 GEOLOGY

205 PALAEONTOLOGY A course of sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work with field excursions. SYLLABUS Principles of discrimination, naming and classification of animal and plant species; relationships between organisms and environment; uses of fossils in geology; a brief survey of the morphology, evolution and geological distribution of selected groups from the major invertebrate phyla and plant series. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Beerbower J R Search for the past, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall Recommended for reference: Moore R C Lalicker C G & Fischer A G Invertebrate Fossils, McGraw- Hill ShГОСk R R & Twenhofel W H Principles of Invertebrate Paleontology, McGraw-Hill Woods H Palaeontology: Invertebrate, 8th ed CUP EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

206 PRINCIPLES OF STRATIGRAPНY A course of sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work, with a field excursion. SYLLABUS Principles of structural, lithological, palaeontological and radiometric subdivision of sequences; nomenclature of units; principles of stratigraphical correlation. The facies concept. Relationships between tectonics and sedimentation. Environments of deposition—their physical, chemical and biological parameters, leading to elementary environmental analysis of stratigraphi- ca1 sequences. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Dunbar C O & Rodgers J Principles of Strаtigraphy, Wiley krumbein W C & Sloss L L Stratigraphy and Sedimentation, 2nd ed Freeman 1963 Recommended for reference: Weller J M Stratigraphic Principles and Practice, Harper 1960 EXAMINATION Examination In theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

300 LEVEL 300 GEOLOGY A course normally of four lectures and six hours practical work per week, with field excursions and a field mapping exercise, throughout the year. Students majoring in Geology will be required to take Geology 300 and to enrol Individually in each of its constituent units. Students undertaking a joint major in Geology and Geophysics will be required to take

1з8 GEOLOGY

Geology 300 with the exception of Geology 307—Introductory Geo- physics—and to enrol Individually in each of the remaining units. SYLLABUS Geology 300 will consist of the following units- 301 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenesis 302 Historical Geology 303 Tectonics and Geological Synthesis 304 Economic Geology A—Metalliferous Deposits 305 Economic Geology B—Fuels and Non-metalliferous Deposits 306 Introductory Geomorphology 307 Introductory Geophysics FIELD WORK The prescribed field excursions for units 301-307 inclusive held at weekends or during term vacations, and a ten day field exercise held before the commencement of First Term. Brief written reports on field work are required. Students are strongly recommended to gain additional experience during the preceding long vacation by obtaining a temporary position with a company or geological survey. The School of Geology will assist in this regard. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work as for units 301-307 inclusive. Laboratory and field work are assessed and are taken into account in determining the success of such candidate.

301 IGNEOUS AND METAMORPHIC PETROGENESIS A course of approximately 16 lectures and 24 hours practical work with a field excursion. SYLLABUS Theoretical igneous petrology with reference to selected rock associations and their genetic interpretations; experimental phase relationships and their applications to the genesis of magmas and their processes of differentiation. Interpretation of metamorphic assemblages and phase relationships of common metamorphic parageneses. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Turner F J & Verhoogen J Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology, Mс- Graw-Hill Turner F J Metamorphic Petrology, McGraw-Hill

EXAMINATION Examination in theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

302 HISTORICAL GEOLOGY A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work with field excursions. SYLLABUS Characteristics of the geology of Pre-Cambrian terrains. His- torical geology of the Phanerozoic, Including reference sections. Bio- stratigraphy and specific geological features of each Period; review of the geological history of Australia.

139 GEOLOGY

Books Prescribed textbook: McAndrew J & Marsden M A H eds A Regional Guide to Victorian Geology (School of Geology University of Melbourne 1972 Distributed by the Melbourne University Bookroom). Recommended for reference: Brown D A et al The Geological Evolution of Australia and New Zee- land, Pergamon 1968 David T W E The Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia, Arnold Journal of the Geological Society of Australia, Geology of the following Australian States: Western Australia, South Australia, Queensland, Tasmania, New South Wales Geological Survey of Great Britain British Regional Geology, HMSO London Gignoux M Stratigraphic Geology, Freeman EXAMINATION Examination in theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

303 TECTONICS AND GEOLOGICAL SYNTHESIS A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work, with field excursions. SYLLABUS (1) Tectonics—The concept of tectonic stability; major structure features of continents and oceans and their tectonic behaviour. The tectonic setting of sedimentation, vulcanism, deformation, metamorphism and plutonism; the concepts of the geosyncline and orogeny; tectonic evolution of mobile zones of the earth's crust in space and time. Con- tinental Drift. Theories of tectogenesis. (ii) Geological Synthesis—Detailed study of the following contrasting geological terrains (1) Pre-Cambrian of the Broken Hill district and Northern Flinders Ranges, (2) Cambrian to Carboniferous of south- eastern Australia, and (3) Mesozoic and Tertiary of southern Victoria. Emphasis will be placed upon the contributions of the different branches of Geology and Geophysics to the elucidation of both the regional geology and of specific problems. BOOKS As for 302 Historical Geology. Additional references will be given during the course. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

304 ECONOMIC GEOLOGY A-METALLIFEROUS DEPOSITS A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work with a field excursion. SYLLABUS Ore-forming processes and controls; role of physico-chemical factors in mineralization; zoning and paragenetic sequence in orebodies. Detailed study of Australian ore deposits including those of nickel, copper-lead-zinc, iron, manganese, aluminium, phosphate and gold. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Mason B Principles of Geochemistry, Wiley Bateman A M Economic Mineral Deposits, Wiley 140 GEOLOGY

Edwards A B ed Geology of Australian Ore Deposits, Aus III McAndrew J ed Geology of Australian Ore Deposits, 2nd ed Aus ill EXAMINATION Examination In theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours.

305 ECONOMIC GEOLOGY В-FUELS AND NON- METALLIFEROUS DEPOSITS A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work. SYLLABUS (I) Coal Geology of coal; rank classification; petrography; uses. (1i) Petroleum Composition of petroleum hydrocarbons; origin, migration and entrapment of petroleum; relationship between petroleum occurrence and basin history. (iii) Non-metalliferous minerals Non-metalliferous minerals important in Australian industry. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Raistrick A & Marshall C E Nature and Origin of Coal & Coal Seams, EUP Levorsen A I Geology of Petroleum, 2nd ed Freeman 1967 EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 306 INTRODUCTORY GEOMORPHOLOGY A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical work, with field excursions. SYLLABUS The origin afd classification of land forms and landscapes developed under various geological and climatic conditions; an introduction to processes of weathering, erosion, transport and deposition, soil formation, and slope development; landscape changes during the Quaternary with special reference to Australia. Aerial photograph interpretation. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Thornbury W D Principles of Geomorphology, 2nd ed Wiley 1969 Twidale C R Geomorphology, Nelson 1968 Twidale C R & Foale M R Landforms Illustrated, Nelson 1969 Recommended for Reference: Oilier C D Weathering, Oliver & Boyd 1969 Available volumes in the 'Introduction to Systematic Geomorphology' series, ANU Press Other reference works will be indicated throughout the course. EXAMINATION Examination In both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 307 INTRODUCTORY GEOPHYSICS A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 24 hours practical and field work.

141 GEOLOGY

SYLLABUS A brief introduction to Global Geophysics and its conclusions; methods of Exploration Geophysics—gravity, magnetic, electrical, seismic, well-logging and radiometric techniques. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Gaskell T F Physics of the Earth, Thames & Hudson 1970 Prescribed textbooks: Dobrin M B Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting, 2nd ed McGraw- Hill 1960 or Parasnis D S Mining Geophysics, Methuen 1966 EXAMINATION One 2-hour theory paper. Practical work is assessed and is taken into account in determining each candidate's result.

310 GEOLOGY A course of four lectures and twelve hours practical and field work per week throughout the year. Except in special circumstances approval to proceed to BSc (Honours) in Geology will be granted only to those students with sufficiently good results in Geoogy 300 and Geology 310. SYLLABUS Geology 310 consists of five of the following 4 point units, to be selected by the student. 311 Advanced Mineralogy and Petrology 312 Structural Analysis 313 Advanced Sedimentology 314 Advanced Palaeontology 315 Advanced Economic Geology A—Metalliferous Deposits 316 Advanced Economic Geology B—Petroleum 317 Geochemistry 318 Research Methods in Geology 319 Processes in Geomorphology 320 Surficial Geology. N.B. As these units are given in two concurrent series the student must consult the School of Geology BEFORE making his selection. EXAMINATION The examinations for the constituent units selected.

311 ADVANCED MINERALOGY AND PETROLOGY A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical and field work. SYLLABUS Modern approaches to the nature and evolution of the rock forming minerals and their associations in igneous and metamorphic rocks. Students may be expected to undertake literature surveys, to write reports and to conduct seminars within the course. BOOKS As for 301 Igneous and Metamorphic Petrogenesis; other books and references will be given during the course. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 142 GEOLOGY

312 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical and field work. SYLLABUS Strain in rocks and simple strain analysis; mechanics of folding and analysis of fold systems; superposed folding; analysis of de- formed linear structures. Fracturing in rocks; fault and joint systems. Structures and fabrics of metamorphic rocks. Students may be expected to undertake literature surveys, to write reports and to conduct seminars within the course. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: As for 203 Structural Geology together with Ragan D M Structural Geology, Wiley Recommended for reference: Ramsay J G Folding and Fracturing of Rocks, McGraw-Hill EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 313 ADVANCED SEDIMENTOLOGY A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical work and field work. SYLLABUS Mineralogy and chemistry of terrigenous sediments including processes of weathering and diagenesis; detailed treatment of carbonate rocks including origin and environment of deposition, using modern case studies; chemical sediments. Modern sedimentary environments; lithological and structural models for interpretation of depositional environments. Students will be expected to undertake a literature survey, to writs reports and to conduct a seminar on a topic within the course. A report on a practical project may also be required. BOOKS As for 204 Sedimentology; other references will be given during the course. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 314 ADVANCED PALAEONTOLOGY A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical and field work. SYLLABUS Systematic treatment of selected invertebrate and vertebrate groups; Introduction to Micropalaeontology, with a survey of Protozoan and other microfossils and their stratigraphical significance. Species theory; outline of evolutionary theory afd the evidence afforded by selected fossil groups; introduction to Palaeoecology and functional morphology. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Moot. R C LaIicker C G & Fischer A G Invertebrate Fossils, McGraw. Hill Shrock R R & Twenhofel W H Principles of Invertebrate Paleontology, McGraw-Hill

143 GEOLOGY

Recommended for Reference: Romer A S Vertebrate Paleontology, Chicago UP EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 315 ADVANCED ECONOMIC GEOLOGY-METALS A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical work. SYLLABUS A course on ore genesis applying the results of experimental studies to the interpretation of ore deposits. Topics may include geochemistry of ore deposits; sulphide phase equilibria; zoned pegmatites; ore genesis and orogeny, and metallogenic provinces; wallrock alteration, including porphyry copper deposits; application of stable isotopes of lead and sulphur, fluid inclusions, geochronology and geothermometry to case studies in economic geology; mineragraphy afd petrography of ore suites. Students will be required to prepare a report and to conduct a seminar on a topic in economic geology. BOOKS Recommended for Reference: Barnes H L ed Geochemistry of Hydrothermal Ore Deposits, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1967 Stanton R L Ore Petrology, McGraw-Ill 1972 Annual Reports of the Director, Geophysical Laboratory, Carnegie Institu- tion, Washington. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling З hours. 316 ADVANCED ECONOMIC GEOLOGY-PETROLEUM A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical work. SYLLABUS Study of selected major producing basins integrating basin tectonics, depositional history and petroleum occurrence. Isolated sand bodies as petroleum reservoirs, their identification from subsurface data and prediction of occurrence. Elementary reservoir physics; drill stem test interpretation, initial estimation of reserves. BOOKS Recommended for Reference: Levorsen A I Geology of Petroleum, 2nd ed Freeman 1967 EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 317 PRINCIPLES OF GEOCHEMISTRY A course of approximately twenty lectures and 36 hours practical work. SYLLABUS Chemical evolution of the elements; meteorites; lunar studies; chemical evolution of the earth; crystal chemistry; geochemical differentiation by igneous, metamorphic and sedimentary cycles; Isotope abundances and applications; organic geochemistry; geochemical exploration. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Mason B Principles of Geochemistry, Wiley 144 GEOLOGY

Goldschmidt V M Geochemistry, OUP Eitel W The Physical Chemistry of the Silicates, Chicago UP Hawkes H E & Webb J S Geochemistry in Mineral Exploration, Harper EXAMINATION One 1 t/2-hour theory paper. Practical work is assessed and is taken into account In determining the candidate's result.

318 RESEARCH METHODS IN GEOLOGY A course of approximately twenty lectures and 38 hours practical work. SYLLABUS Analytical, isotopic, geochronological end experimental methods in geological research; statistical analysis of geological data; computer techniques. Students may be expected to undertake literature surveys, to write reports and to conduct seminars within the course. BOOKS Books and references will be given during the course. EXAMINATION One 1 %-hours' theory paper. Practical work is assessed and taken into account in determining the candidate's result. 319 PROCESSES IN GEOMORPHOLOGY A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical and field work. SYLLABUS A study of the processes that have formed the landscape and are active today. Processes of weathering Including soil formation; processes of erosion and transport, including mass movement; the action of running water Including solution, waves, wind and ice; processes of volcanism and dia- strophism. Types and rates of processes and their variations with climate and time; techniques in process studies; application of Geomorphology process studies to engineering and conservation. Students may be required to prepare reports based on reading and laboratory and field work, and to conduct seminars. BOOKS As for 308 Introductory Geomorphology. EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 320 SURFICIAL GEOLOGY A course of approximately sixteen lectures and 48 hours practical and field work. SYLLABUS Origin of the surficial mantle and techniques for Its study. Regolith and soil studies, Including micromorphology and soil fabric, soil types and classification, relations to climate afd parent material, soil mapping and soil stratigraphy. Quaternary sedimentation afd volcanicity. Quaternary chronology and stratigraphy; Quaternary history of selected areas in Australia and overseas. Application of Surficial Geology studies to economic exploration. Students may be required to prepare reports based on reading and laboratory and field work, and to conduct seminars. BOOKS As for 308 Introductory Geomorphology.

145 GEOLOGY

EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling 3 hours. 340 GEOPHYSICS A course of approximately 100 lectures and 300 hours practical work throughout the year, including two field excursions. Students majoring in Geophysics are required to take Geophysics 340 and to enrol individually in each of the constituent units selected. Except in special circumstances approval to proceed to BSc (Honours) in Geo- physics will be granted only to those students with sufficiently good rе- sults in Geophysics 340. SYLLABUS Geophysics 340 consists of eight of the following 3 point units to be selected by the student. 341 Geodesy, Gravity and the Origin of the Earth 342 Seismology 343 Geothermy, Geomagnetism and Global Tectonics 344 Oceanography 345 Exploration Geophysics A 346 Exploration Geophysics В 347 Geology (Geophysics) 351 Geophysics Practical A 352 Geophysics Practical В The following 2 point units are also acceptable as part of the Geophysics 340 course in lieu of one or two of the above units, provided that the total point score is not less than 24 points. 375-201 Outline of Meteorology 375-309 General Glaciology 375-311 Ice Dynamics 397-353 Cosmic Radiation 397-355 Infra-Red Physics 397-356 Astrophysics Students without credit for 101 Geology must take 347 Geology (Geo- physics) which is available to them only. Students taking 9 or more points of Geophysics are required to take 351 Geophysics Practical A, and students taking 18 or more points both 351 Geophysics Practical A and 352 Geophysics Practical В. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks, recommended for all students: Dobrin M В Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting, 2nd ed McGraw- Hill 1960 Stacey F D Physics of the Earth, Wiley 1969 EXAMINATION The examinations for the constituent units selected. Laboratory and field work are assessed and are taken into account in determining each candidate's result. 341 GEODESY, GRAVITY AND THE ORIGIN OF THE EARTH A course of approximately sixteen lectures. SYLLABUS Theories of the origin of the earth. Geodesy and the shape of the earth; uses of artificial satellites; tidal forces and the dynamical con- 146 GEOLOGY

stants of the earth. The gravitational field of the earth; the measurement of gravity; reduction of observations. lsostasy and crustal thickness.

BOO КS Recommended for preliminary reading: Cook A H Gravity and the Earth, Wykeham Publications 1969 Garland G D The Earth's Shape and Gravity, Pergamon 1965 Recommended for reference: Heiskanen W A & Venlig Meinesz F A The Earth and its Gravity Field, McGraw-Hill 1958 Heiskanen W A & Mоriц H Physical Geodesy, Freeman 1967 kaula W M An Introduction to Planetary Physics, The Terrestrial Planets, Wiley 1968 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper. 342 SEISMOLOGY A course of approximately 16 lectures. SYLLABUS Wave propagation in solids and the effects of interfaces; seismic wave transmission; seismic velocities within the earth; the structure and properties of the crust and interior of the earth. Seismo- graphs. The interpretation of seismograms. Earthquake mechanisms.

BOO КS Prescribed textbook: Bullen IC E Introduction to the Theory of Seismology, 3rd ed CUP 1963 Recommended for reference: Ewing W M Jardetzky W S & Press F Elastic Waves In Layered Media, McGraw-Hill 1957 Jaeger J C Elasticity, Fracture and Flow 2nd ed Methuen 1962 Jeffreys H The Earth, 5th ed CUP 1970 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper. 343 GEOTHERMY, GEOMAGNETISM AND GLOBAL TECTONICS A course of approximately sixteen lectures. SYLLABUS Temperatures and heat flow in the Interior of the earth; thermal state of the core. The earth's magnetic field and Its variations in space afd time. Palaeomagnetlsm and the magnetic properties of rocks; the ferrimagnetism of magnetic minerals; Implications of palaeomagnetic measurements. The dynamo theory of the earth's magnetic field. Conti- nental drift and sea floor spreading.

BOO КS Recommended for preliminary reading: Blackett P M S Lectures on Rock Magnetism, Weizmann 1956 Takeuchi H Uyeda S & kanamori H Debate about the Earth, Freeman Cooper & Co 1967 Prescribed textbooks: Jacobs J A The Earth's Core afd Geomagnetism, Pergamon 1963 Recommended for rеferепсв: Bon M H P The Interior of the Earth, Arnold 1971

147 GEOLOGY

Gaskell T F ed The Earth's Mantle, Academic Press 1967 Irving E Palaeomagnetism, Wiley 1964 Jacobs J A Russell R D & Wilson J Tuzo Physics and Geology, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1970 Nagata T Rock Magnetism, Maruzen 1953 Runcorn S K Methods and Techniques in Geophysics, Interscience 1960 Tarling D H Principles and Applications of Palaeomagnetism, Chapman & Hall 1971 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper.

344 OCEANOGRAPHY A course of approximately sixteen lectures. SYLLABUS Oceanography Physical oceanography and ocean currents; the Influence of temperature, salinity and wind stress on the ocean surface; longshore drift. The floors and structures of oceanic areas. Books Recommended for reference: Defant A Physical Oceanography, Vol I Pergamon 1961 Hill M N ed The Sea, Vols 1-1V Interscience 1962-1970 US National Research Council Physics of the Earth, Vol 5 Oceanography Von Arx W S An Introduction to Physical Oceanography, Addison- Wesley 1962 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper.

345 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS A A course of approximately sixteen lectures. SYLLABUS A survey of the basic principles and theory of geophysical exploration methods. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Dobrin M B Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting, 2nd ed McGraw- Hill 1960 Recommended for reference: Griffiths D H & king R F Applied Geophysics for Engineers and Geolo- gists, Pergamon 1965 Parasnis D S Mining Geophysics, Methuen 1960 Parasnis D S Principles of Applied Geophysics, Methuen 1962 Society of Exploration Geophysicists Mining Geophysics, Vol Il (Theory), Society of Exploration Geophysicists 1967 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper.

346 EXPLORATION GEOPHYSICS В A course of approximately sixteen lectures. SYLLABUS Interpretation theory, particularly for gravity, magnetic and electrical exploration methods. Specialized techniques in seismic and electrical prospecting. Off-shore exploration. Well-logging. 148 GEOLOGY

Books Prescribed textbooks: Dobrin M B Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting, 2nd ed McGraw. liii 1980 Grant F S & West G F Interpretation Theory in Applied Geophysics, McGraw-Hill 1985 Recommended for reference: keller G V & Frischknecht F C Electrical Methods in Geophysical Pros- pecting, Pergamon 1968 Musgrave A W ed Seismic Refraction Prospecting, Society of Explora- tion Geophysicists 1967 Society of Exploration Geophysicists Mining Geophysics, Vol II (Theory), Society of Exploration Geophysicists 1967 Slotnick M M Lessons in Seismic Computing, Society of Exploration Geophysicists 1959 Wyllie M R J The Fundamentals of Well-Log Interpretation, 3rd ed Academic Press 1963 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper. 347 GEOLOGY (GEOPHYSICS) A course of approximately 20 lectures and 36 hours practical work, with two field excursions. This unit is only available to students taking one or more constituent units of Geophysics 340 and who do not have credit for 101 Geology. SYLLABUS Bавiс concepts in geology. Properties and paragenesis of common rock-forming and ore minerals. Petrology of Igneous rocks and meteorites; volcanism and intrusive activity. Weathering; soils; erosion, transport and deposition of sediment; petrography of sedimentary rocks. Metamorphism and petrography of common metamorphic rocks. Elements of structural geology and tectonics. Geomorphological processes and landforms; groundwater. Principles of stratigraphy. Occurrence of ore deposits, coal and petroleum. BOOks Prescribed textbook: Longwell C R Flint R F & Sanders J Physical Geology, Wiley 1969 Recommended for reference: Verhoogen J et al The Earth—an Introduction to Physical Geology, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970 EXAMINATION Examination in both theory and practical work, totalling three hours. 351 PRACTICAL GEOPHYSICS A A course of approximately 150 hours of laboratory and field work in Geo- physics, including one 4 to 6 day excursion. SYLLABUS Laboratory work Includes exercises In the Interpretation of simple problems in both global and exploration Geophysics. The excursion will normally be held during the First Term vacation and will normally concentrate on exploration techniques used In mining e.g. gravity, magnetic and/or electrical methods. 149 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination in Geophysical computing. Lab- oratory and field work are assessed and are taken into account in determining each candidate's result.

352 PRACTICAL GEOPHYSICS В A course of approximately 150 hours of laboratory and field work in Geo- physics, including one 4 to 5 day excursion. SYLLABUS Laboratory work will include more advanced interpretation problems in global and exploration Geophysics. The excursion will normally be held during the Second Term vacation and will normally be concerned with seismic exploration techniques. EXAMINATION One 3-hour examination in Geophysical computing. Lab- oratory and field work are assessed and are taken Into account in determining each candidate's result. 360 GEOCHEMISTRY A course of 56 lectures and 120 hours practical and field work. SYLLABUS Geochemistry consists of the following units: 317 Principles of Geochemistry 318 Research Methods in Geology and 311 Advanced Mineralogy and Petrology or 315 Advanced Economic Geology Students must enrol individually in the units selected. EXAMINATION As for the constituent units. 380 GEOMORPHOLOGY A course of forty-eight lectures and 120 hours practical and field work. SYLLABUS Geomorphology 380 consists of the following units. 306 Introductory Geomorphology 319 Processes in Geomorphology 320 Surficial Geology Students must enrol individually in each of these units. EXAMINATION As for the constituent units. 367 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 100 LEVEL In both the units detailed below the main concern will be a detailed study of the development of selected scientific theories using, where possible, the writings of the scientists concerned. This study will involve a discussion of the problems that had to be faced, the emergence of the new concepts necessary to solve these problems and the general outlook and philosophy of the times dealt with. Discussion of the nature of scientific knowledge and explanation as understood from classical Greek to modem times will also be included. 101 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week for the first half of the academic year. The substance of the course will be confined to two lec- 150 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

tures a week; the third lecture will be used for films, class exercises, etc. Written work and tests will be required during the course and will be taken into account in the final result. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Adler I The Sun and its Family, Signet Science Library 1962 Moore Patrick Basic Astronomy, Oliver & Boyd 1968 Prescribed textbooks: •Roneoed Source Material Issued by the department. •Kuhn T The Copernican Revolution, Vintage Books 1959 'Toulmin S & J Goodfield Fabric of the Heavens. Pelican 1963 Recommended for reference: 'Cohen I B The Birth of a New Physics, Heinemann 1961 Koestler A The Watershed, Heinemann Science Study Series Also contained in The Sleepwalkers, Hutchinson 1959 Butterfield H The Origins of Modern Science, Bell 1957 Farrington Benjamin Greek Science, Pelican 1961 Kearney H Science and Change 1500-1700, World University Library 1971 Lloyd G E R Aristotle: the Growth and Structure of his Thought, CUP 1968 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in November. Students may earn exemption from this examination by reaching a satisfactory standard in class work and tests given during the course. 102 HISTORY OF THEORIES OF GENERATION AND INHERITANCE A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week for the second half of the academic year. The substance of the course will be confined to two lectures a week. The third lecture will be used for films, class exercises, etc. Written work will be required during the course and will be taken Into account in the final result. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Asimov I Wellsprings of Life, Mentor 1987 Asimov I A Short History of Biology, Natural History Press 1964 Prescribed textbooks: •Roneoed Source Material issued by the department •Gasking E Investigations Into Generation 1651-1828, Hutchinson 1967 'BBC Pamphlet The Science of Man, No. 3, Egg to Adult, BBC Pub- lication Recommended for reference: Butterfield H The Origins of Modern Science, Bell 1957 Farrington B Greek Science, Pelican 1961 Kearney H Science and Change 1500-1700, World University Library 1971 Lloyd G E R Aristotle: the Growth and Structure of his Thought, CUP 1968 Taylor G R The Science of Life, Thames & Hudson 1963 Toulmin S & Goodfield J The Architecture of Matter, Pelican 1961 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper at the end of the year. 151 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

200 LEVEL 201 PHILOSOPHY OF MATHEMATICS A course of 25 lectures, twelve tutorial classes and about six hours of practice classes. An essay of about 2,000 words is part of the prescribed work in this subject. SYLLABUS (i) Introduction to formal methods: basic concepts of modern logic, the nature of axiomatic systems and discussion of these as analytical tools of philosophy. (ii) Introduction to the philosophy of mathematics: the foundations of geometry and its relation to empirical science, an examination of the use of logic and axiomatics in examining the nature of mathematics, and an introductory discussion of the Formalist, Logicist and Intuitionist schools of thought. BOOKS Preliminary Reading: Kline M ed Mathematics in the Modern World, Sections I & IV Freeman 1968 Prescribed textbooks: •Stoll R R Sets Logic and Axiomatic Theories, Freeman 1961 •Barker S F Philosophy of Mathematics, Prentice-Hall 1964 Recommended for reference: КпееЬопе G T Mathematical Logic and the Foundations of Mathematics, Van Nostrand Benacerraf P & Putman H Philosophy of Mathematics: Selected Read ings, Prentice-Hall 1964 Note: A fuller guide to preliminary reading and to the suitability of various reference books will be available from the HPS department office from January, 1973. EXAMINATIONS Two 1%-hour papers, one at the beginning of second term and one at the beginning of third term. The candidate's performance in tutorials, practice classes, and essay will be taken into account in determining the final result in the subject.

202 GENERAL PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE A course of 25 lectures and twelve tutorials. An essay of about 2,000 words is part of the prescribed work in this subject. Students who wish to take this subject without having previously taken Philosophy of Mathe- matics should consult with the lecturer in charge during the first part of the year. SYLLABUS Generai problems in the philosophy of science: Most of the following topics will be covered. Verification and meaning. The logic of explanation. The structure of scientific theories and the nature of theoretical concepts. Laws and concepts. Probability and induction. The status of methodological or 'metaphysical' principles (eg the principles of simplicity and sufficient reason). Concept Analysis: A logical and epistemological analysis of the family of concepts coming under one of the following headings. 152 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE

Force and related concepts. Heat and Temperature. Space and Time. Measurement. Mind and matter. Life and organization.

BOOkS Preliminary reading: Hempel C G Philosophy of Natural Science, Prentice-Hai Prescribed textbooks: A list of books will be available from the Department in January 1973. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper at the end of the year. The essay result and tutorial work will be taken into account in the final result.

210 HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS A course of one 2-hours seminar per week throughout the year. Pres- cribed written work amounting to one 3,500 word essay, or shorter papers of equivalent total length will be required and will count towards the final result in the subject. SYLLABUS An introductory examination of the different ways of studying the history of science (e.g., with or without attention to the cultural background, conceptually or biographically orientated, etc.), followed by a detailed study of selected topics in the history of mathematical ideas. In 1973 the topics will be chosen to illustrate the beginnings of mathematics in Egypt, Babylonia, Greece and India, and its subsequent development in Europe, especially during the 17th century. A familiarity with school mathematics, at least to fifth form level, will be assumed.

вooкs Preliminary reading: Aaboe A Episodes from the Early History of Mathematics, Random House & L W Singer Students needing to brush up their mathematics should work through the revised edition of: Hogben L Mathematics for the Million, Pan Books 1987 (Chapters 1 to 5 and first half of chapter 10) Prescribed textbooks: •Duplicated Source Material issued by the HPS Department. Heath T L The Works of Archimedes with the Method of Archimedes, Dover Recommended for reference: Eves H An Introduction to the History of Mathematics, Holt Rinehart & Winston Boyer C B A History of Mathematics, Wiley van de Waarden B L Science Awakening, Noordhoff Heath T L A Manual of Greek Mathematics, Dover Baron M E The Origins of the Infinitesimal Calculus, Pergamon Boyer C B The History of the Calculus and Its Conceptual Development, Dover EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. 221 HISTORY OF THEORIES OF MATTER AND CHEMICAL CHANGE A course of two lectures and one tutorial per week throughout the year.

153 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY 0F SCIENCE

The approach to this subject is similar to HPS 101 /2, but involves a more advanced study of the logic of the theories dealt with. The course will make extensive use of original sources and study the logical and conceptual problems that are raised. Written work and tests will be required during the year and these will be taken Into account in the final result. SYLLABUS Primitive views of nature. Theories of natural change in Greek philosophy. The alchemical approach. Descartes and Newton—the rise of the experimental method. The development of chemistry in the 18th century. Lavoisier and Dalton; atoms and elements. Books Preliminary reading: Toulmin S & Goodfield J The Architecture of Matter. Pelican 1961 Cohen I B The Birth of a New Physics, Heinemann 1961 Recommended for continual reference: Multhauf R The Origins of Chemistry, Oldbourne 1966 Hall AR The Scientific Revolution, Fontana 1970 Stillman J M The Story of Alchemy and Early Chemistry, Dover 1960 or Leicester H M The Historical Background of Chemistry, Wiley 1965 or Partington J R A Shon History of Chemistry. Macmillan 1965 EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. 222 HISTORY OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND GERM THEORY A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week. One lecture per week will be devoted to the factual scientific content necessary for an understanding of the historical material. Students should consult the lecturer for possible exemption from this lecture. The aim of this course is to study the development of scientific and medical ideas which have had important social or economic consequences. SYLLABUS Medicine in primitive societies. Theories of health and disease from the Greeks to the Nineteenth Century. Development of the Germ Theory and Public Health in the Nineteenth Century. BOOKS The emphasis will be on original scientific publications. Preliminary reading: Gale A H Epidemic Diseases, Penguin 1959 Postgate J Microbes and Man, Pelican 1969 Poynter F N L & Keеlе K D A Short History of Medicine, Mills & Boon 1961 Winslow C E A Man and Epidemics, Princeton 1952 Longmate N Alive and Well, Penguin 1970 Prescribed textbooks: Roneoed Sourse Material issued by the Department. Camac C N B Classics of Medicine and Surgery, Dover 1959 Winslow C E A The Conquest of Epidemic Disease, Hafner 1967 King Lester S A History of Medicine, Penguin 1971 Flinn M W Public Health Reform in Britain, Macmillan 1968 154 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY 0F SCIENCE

Recommended for continual reference: Longmate N King Cholera, Hamish Hamilton 1968 Dixon C W Smallpox J & A Churchill 1962 Hodgkinson R G The Origins of the National Health Service, Welcome 1967 Hall T S Ideas on Life and Matter Vols. 1 and 2, Univ. Chicago Press 1969 King Lester The Medical World of the 18th Century, Univ. Chicago Press 1958 Sigerist H E A History of Medicine Vols 1 and 2, OUP 1951 Livingstone's Pocket Medical Dictionary, Livingstone 1966 Additional bibliographies will be provided during the year. A further bibliography for preliminary reading may be obtained from the department. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Written work and tests will be required during the year and will be taken into account in the final result.

300 LEVEL

301 PHILOSOPHICAL FOUNDATIONS OF INDUCTION AND PROBABILITY (This course will be available in 1973 and alternate years thereafter.) A course of 25 two-hour lecture-discussion classes throughout the year and occasional practice classes to be arranged (not exceeding six hours in all). SYL ABUS A study of the basic literature in this field, especially the writings of Reichenbach, Carnap, Salmon and Hacking. An examination of some of the problems arising out of this literature. Substantial reading assignments and a 3,000 word essay are requirements of this unit. Prerequisite: 202 HPS BOOKS Salmon W C Foundations of Scientific Inference, Univ. Pittsburgh Press 1967 Foster M A & Martin M L Probability Confirmation and Simplicity, Ody- ssey 1966 EXAMINATION One three-hour paper in the November exams. Essay and class work will count towards the final result.

302 PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS IN THEORY-STRUCTURE AND EXPLANATION (This course will be available in 1974 afd each alternate year thereafter.) A course of 25 two-hour lecture-discussion classes throughout the year and occasional practice classes to be arranged (not exceeding aix hours in all). SYLLABUS An examination and discussion of the more formalist philosophical accounts of theory structure, explanation, afd reduction and of recent criticisms of this school. Substantial reading assignments and a 3,000 word essay are requirements in this unit.

155 INFORMATION SCIENCE

Prerequisite: 202 HPS BOOKS To be set. EXAMINATION One three-hour paper in the November exam period. Essay and class work will count towards the final result. 311 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE EDUCATION This course is available to science students. For details see page 240. FURTHER STUDIES Students interested In further studies in History and Philosophy of Science should note the provision in section 7 of Regulation 3.20 (see Chapter 3), as other History and Philosophy of Science subjects ara offered by the faculty of Ails. 321 HISTORY OF THEORIES OF MATTER AND CHEMICAL CHANGE (May only be taken concurrently with 221.) A course of approximately 15 weekly lecture-seminar classes with written work. SYLLAВ US A study in depth of some topics arising in unit 221. EXAMINATION Units 321 and 221 will be examined jointly in two three- hour papers in November. Written work will be assessed as part of the final examination. 322 HISTORY OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND GERM THEORY (May only be taken concurrently with 222.) A course of approximately 15 weekly lecture-seminar classes with written work. SYLLABUS A study in depth of some topics arising in unit 222. EXAMINATION Units 322 and 222 will be examined jointly in two three-hour papers in November. Written work will be assessed as part of the final examination.

369 INFORMATION SCIENCE 100 LEVEL 101 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING A course of three lectures and one one-hour practice class per week during the first six weeks of first term. SYLLABUS Introduction to computers, flow charts, number systems, elementary programming using a compiler language (Fortran IV), methods of approach to problems. PRACTICAL WORK Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified programming projects (not exceeding three) must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the first term. 156 INFORMATION SCIENCE

Books Recommended for reference: McCracken D A Guide to Fortran IV Programming, Wiley Blatt J M Introduction to Fortran IV Programming Using the Watfor Compiler, Goodyear Dimitry D & Mott T Fortran IV Programming, Holt Rinehart & Winston EXAMINATION A 1-hour paper at the beginning of second term for pass and honours combined.

200 LEVEL 201 COMPUTER PROGRAMMING A course of three lectures and a one-hour practice class per week during first term. SYLLABUS Advanced Fortran and assembly language programming. PRACTICAL WORK Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified programming projects (not exceeding three) must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the first term. EXAMINATION One two hour paper for pass and honours combined, to be held at the beginning of second term. 202 NUMERICAL METHODS A course of three lectures and a one hour practice class per week during second term. SYLLABUS Error analysis, finite differences, polynomial approximation, solution of linear equations, solution of non-linear equations, numerical Integration. PRACTICAL WORK Specified programming projects (not exceeding three) and at least 75 per cent of the numerical exercises must be completed satisfactorily and presented for assessment before the end of second term. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Нenricl P Elements of Numerical Analysis, Wiley Berezin and Zhidkov Computing Methods, Pergamon EXAMINATION One two-hour paper for pass and honours combined to be held at the beginning of third term. 203 COMPUTERS: LOGICAL DESIGN AND ORGANIZATION A course of three lectures and a one hour practice class per week during third term. SYLLABUS Boolean algebra, fundamentals of computer design, memory systems, sequential machines, design of computer systems. PRACTICAL WORK A record of practical work must be kept and be available for inspection as required. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Seigel P Understanding Digital Computers, Wiley

167 INFORMATION SCIENCE

EXAMINATION One two-hour paper for pass and honours combined, to be held at the end of the year.

300 LEVEL 301 COMPUTERS: SYSTEMS, PROGRAMMING A course of three lectures and a two hour practice class per week during first term. SYLLABUS Advanced programming, operating systems, compiler techniques. PRACTICAL WORK Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified programming projects (not exceeding three) must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the first term. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hopgood F R A Compiler Techniques, Macdonald EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper for pass and honours combined, to be held at the beginning of second term.

302 NUMERICAL METHODS FOR LINEAR SYSTEMS A course of three lectures and a two hour practice class per week during second term. SYLLABUS Solution of linear equations by direct methods, matrix inversion, determination of eigen values and eigen vectors, iterative solution of linear equations. PRACTICAL WORK Specified programming projects (not exceeding three) and at least 75 per cent of the numerical exercises must be completed satisfactorily and presented for assessment before the end of second term. BOOKS Recomended for reference: Fox L An Introduction to Numerical Linear Algebra, OUP Isaacson E and Keller H B Analysis of Numerical Methods Faddeeva V N Computational Methods of Linear Algebra, Dover Wilkinson J H The Algebraic Eigenvalue Problem, OUP ' EXAMINATION One two-hour paper for pass and honours combined, to be held at the beginning of third term.

303 NUMERICAL METHODS FOR CONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS A course of three lectures and a two-hour practice class per week during third term. SYLLABUS Interpolation, numerical Integration and differentiation, numerical solution of ordinary differential equations, approximation of functions. PRACTICAL WORK Practical classes are an integral part of the course. At least 75 per cent of the numerical exercises must be completed satisfactorily and presented for assessment before the end of third term.

158 MATHEMATICS

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hen rid P Elements of Numerical Analysis, Wiley Kops' Z Numerical Analysis, Chapman & Hall EXAMINATION One two-hour paper for pass and honours combined, to be held at the end of the year. 313 DATA STRUCTURES AND DATA MANAGEMENT (It is hoped to introduce this course In 1973.) A course of three lectures and a two hour practice class per week during third term. This is an optional course to 303 Numerical Analysis of Continuous Functions. SYLLABUS Types and properties of data structures, searching and sort- ing techniques, file management, handling of data on peripheral devices. PRACTICAL WORK Practice classes are an integral part of the course and specified programming projects (not exceeding two) must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required. All practical work must be completed by the end of the third term. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Foster J M List Processing, MacDonald-Elsevier Iverson K E A Programming Language, Wiley EXAMINATION One two-hour paper for pass and honours combined, to be held at the end of the year.

371 MATHEMATICS 100 LEVEL 101 PURE MATHEMATICS PART I A course of three lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Allocation to lecture groupa will be listed on the notice boards of the Mathematics department in the week preceding first term. SYLLABUS Numbers and Functions Finite series. Induction. Rational and irrational numbers. Approximations. Sketching graphs of polynomials afd rational functions. Convergence of sequences. Vectors and Linear Algebra Sums and products of vectors. Scalar and vector triple products. Applications to geometry. Determinants and linear equations. Linear transformations. Algebra of 3 X 3 matrices. Eigen- values and applications to central conics. Differential Calculus Applications of derivatives. Second derivatives and curvature. Partial derivatives. Chain rule. Total derivatives. Standard Functions Exponential and logarithm functions. Circular and hyperbolic functions and their inverses. Complex exponentlala. Integral Calculus Limit sums. Areas. Relation to differentiation. Syste- matic integration. Applications to areas and volumes. Applications using polar co-ordinates and parametric specification.

159 MATHEMATICS

Group Theory Group postulates. Commutative and non-commutative groups. Sub-groups. Isomorphisms. Permutation groups. Generators. Cosets. Lagrange's theorem. Cayley's theorem. Additional topics may be given, selected from: analytical plane geometry, number theory, theory of equations, central quadric surfaces. It will be assumed that students attending this course have passed the subject Pure Mathematics, or have an A or В grade pass in the subject General Mathematics, at the Higher School Certificate examination. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: . 'Thomas G В Calculus and Analytic Geometry, 4th ed., Addison-Wesley and 'Dinkines F Abstract Mathematical Systems, Appleton-Century-Crofts A book of mathematical tables (Kays & Laby Four-figure Mathematical Tables, Longmans) will be provided in examinations. References to other texts will be made in lectures. Recommended for reference: The following books should give some idea of the spirit and development . of mathematics and its relevance to science and learning. It is desirable that students read selectively from them during the year. Abrahamson В & Gray M C The Art of Algebra, Rigby Courant R & Robbins H E What is Mathematics? OUP Sudden F J Complex Numbers and their Applications, Longmans Lederman W Finite Groups, Oliver & Boyd Courant R & John F Introduction to Calculus and Analysis, Vol. I, Wiley Durell C V & Robson В N Calculus, Rigby Bell E T Men of Mathematics, 2 vols Pelican Mathematics in the Modern World, Readings from The Scientific Ameri- can, with an introduction by M. Kline, Freeman EXAMINATION Two 9-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken into account. 103 GROUP THEORY A unit of eight or nine lectures in all, with tutorials. To be taken concurrently with 201 Pure Maths 11, unless previously passed; 103 may not be taken concurrently with 101. SYLLABUS Group postulates. Commutative and non-commutative groups. Sub-groups. Isomorphisms. Permutation groups. Generators. Cosets. Lagrange's theorem. Cayley's theorem. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Dinkines F Abstract Mathematical Systems, Appleton-Century-Crofts Recommended for reference: Ledermann W Finite Groups, Oliver & Boyd EXAMINATION One 1-hour paper. Class work and written work will be taken into account. 143 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS A unit of eight or nine lectures in all, not available to students who have passed 101 in 1972 or previously. 160 MATHEMATICS

SYLLABUS First order separable, homogeneous and linear, with applications. Second order linear constant coefficient equations. Standard power series expansions. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Reuter G E H Elementary Differential Equations and Operators, Rout- ledge & Kegan Paul EXAMINATION One 1-hour paper. Class work and written work will be taken into account.

181 GENERAL MATHEMATICS (PASS ONLY) A course of three lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. Allocation to lecture groups will be listed on the notice boards in the Mathematics department in the week preceding first term. The course aims at covering a fairly wide range of topics suitable to students who have a general Interest in mathematics, and it includes the necessary mathematical techniques for the study of the biological and social sciences and economics. A general understanding of elementary mathematical processes will be expected, rather than a thorough and rigorous treatment of them. This subject is not a suitable basis for mathematical studies beyond first year, and will not normally be accepted as such without further work and the permission of the head of the department of Mathematics. It will be assumed that students attending this course have passed either Pure Mathematics or General Mathematics at the Higher School Cеrtifi- cate examination. Students who have passed a Higher School Certificate Mathematics subject, but not in a recent year, are strongly recommended to seek advice as to preparatory work from the department in January. Students who have not passed a Higher School Certificate Mathematics subject are advised to consult the lecturer before applying for enrolment. SYLLABUS (i) Algebra and Geometry. Sets; groups; number systems; vectors; matrices; determinants; elementary two- and three-dimensional geometry. Finite series. Introduction to probability. (li) Calculus. Graph sketching and curve fitting. Differentiation and integration of the standard elementary functions, with simple applications. Or- dinary differential equations. Introduction to functions of two variables, Including multiple integrals and the simplest partial differential equations. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: (i) Allendoerfer C B & Oakley C 0 Fundamentals of College Algebra, McGraw-Hill or Johnson W G & Zaccaro L N Modern Introductory Mathematics, Mc- G raw-Hill (ii) Stein S K Calculus, McGraw-Hill A book of mathematical tables (Kaye & Laby Four-figure Mathematical Tables, Longmans) will be provided in examinations. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken into account.

F 161 MATHEMATICS

APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART I This comprises Information Science 101 Computer Programming, Mathe- matics 141 Mechanics and 143 Differential Equations. For 141 and 143 it will be assumed that Mathematics 101 is being studied concurrently or has been studied previously, and that the Higher School Certificate subject Applied Mathematics has been passed. 141 MECHANICS A course of about 45 lectures and 15 tutorials. SYLLABUS (i) Dynamics. Fields of force. Celestial orbits. Aggregates of particles. Rigid bodies. Impulses. (ii) One-dimensional continuum mechanics Characteristics. Waves on strings and rods. Equations of fluid flow. Sound waves. Flow in ducts. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Bulien K E An Introduction to the Theory of Mechanics, Science Press Synge J L & Griffith B A Principles of Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Armit A P Advanced Level Vectors, Heinemann Supplementary reading: Readings from Scientific American, Mathematics in the Modern World, Freeman Kline M Mathematics in the Physical World, Murray Peierls R E The Laws of Nature, Allen & Unwin Maxwell J C Matter and Motion, Dover Vallentine H R Water in the Service of Man, Penguin Sutton O G Mathematics in Action, Bell EXAMINATION Two 2-hour papers.

200 LEVEL 201 PURE MATHEMATICS PART II (PASS) A course of three lectures per week with practice classes throughout the year. Allocation to lecture groups will be listed on the notice boards of the Mathematics department in the week preceding first term. Students who take 101 in 1973 are reminded that 201 will assume a knowledge of 143. SYLLABUS Functions. Exponential and related functions of a complex variable. Mappings. Continuity and differentiability. Integrals. Infinite and improper integrals. Reduction formulae. Multiple integrals. Curvilinear and surface integrals. Functions of several variables. Analytical geometry In space. Directional derivatives, differentiable functions, tangent planes, Taylor's theorem, stationary points. Lagrange multipliers. Change of variables. Mappings. Jacobians. Linear Algebra. Linear transformations. Matrix algebra; partitioned matrices. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalization and the Identification rices and partitioned inverses. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonaliza- 162 MATHEMATICS

tion and the identification of quadric surface. Vector spaces; linear transformations; projections; quadratic forms. Applications to simultaneous differential equations. Convergence. Sequences and series. Comparison and ratio tests. Absolute and conditional convergence. Power series and their use In approximate calculations. Series solution of linear differential equations with variable coefficients. Real numbers. Algebraic structure. Groups, rings, fields. BOOKS Supplementary reading: Sawyer W W Prelude to Mathematics, Pelican Courant R & Robbins H E What is Mathematics? OUP Reid C Introduction to Higher Mathematics, Routledge & Kegan Paul Prescribed textbook: Ayres F Calculus 2nd ed, Schaum Recommended for reference: Maxwell E A Algebraic Structure end Matrices, CUP Spiegel M R Advanced Calculus, Schaum Thomas G B Calculus and Analytic Geometry, 4th ed Addison-Wesley Courant R Differential end Integral Calculus, 2 vols Blackie Thomas G B Limits, Addison-Wesley Green J A Sequences and Series, Routledge & Kegan Paul Ledermann W Multiple Integrals, Routledge & Kegan Paul EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken Into account.

221 PURE MATHEMATICS PART 11 (HONOURS) A course of four lectures per week, with practice class work. A project, either unit 227 or 228, must be taken concurrently with 221, or completed previously. Note that the project must be completed by 31st March. Pure Mathematics II (Honours) may be taken by those who have obtained adequate honours in Pure Mathematics I, and by those with satisfactory passes In Pure Mathematics 11 (Pass), subject to the approval of faculty. Students who have not been accepted Into Pure Mathematics I1 (Honours) at the commencement of the year may be allowed to join the Pure Mathe- matics 11 (Honours) class for first term; their applications will be recon- sidered at the end of first term In the light of their work during first term. Attention is drawn to the four-year courses for BSc lona on pages 240-1 headed School of Mаthematics, School of Mathematical Statistics and Combined School of Mathematics and Physics. SYLLABUS (i) Analysis (about 45 lectures) . Convergence of sequences and series. Upper and lower limits. Continuous and differentiaЫe functions of one real variable. Riemann Integral of a continuous function. Convergence of infinite and improper integrale. Uniform convergence of series of functions. Power series. Continuous end differentiable functions of several real variables. Multiple Integrals. (li) Algebra and Geometry (about 30 lectures) Quadric surfaces. Envelopes.

183 MATHEMATICS

Vector spaces. Linear transformations. Matrix algebra. Systems of linear equations. Characteristic polynomial. Quadratic forms. (iii) Group theory (about 15 lectures) Permutation groups. Normal sub-groups. Abelian groups.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: (i) Ferrer W L Textbook of Convergence, OUP Olmsted J M H Advanced Calculus, Appleton-Century-Crofts or Fulks W Advanced Calculus, Wiley or Buck R C Advanced Calculus, McGraw-Hill (ii) Murdoch D C Linear Algebra, Wiley or Tropper A M Linear Algebra, Nelson or Lipschutz S Linear Algebra, Schaum (iii) Ledermann W Finite Groups, Oliver & Boyd Recommended for reference: Hail M Theory of Groups, Macmillan Wielandt H Finite Permutation Groups, Academic Press Infinite Series, Oliver & Boyd Нyslop J M Brand L Advanced Calculus, Wiley Coxeter H S M Introduction to Geometry, Wiley Hilbert D & Cohn-Vossen Geometry and the Imagination, Chelsea Кasner E & Newman J R Mathematics and the Imagination, Simon & Schuster Stabler E R Introduction to Mathematical Thought, Addison-Wesley Supplementary reading: as for unit 201. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken into account. Candidates who do not obtain honours may be credited with a pass In 201 Pure Mathematics Il.

227 NUMERICAL PROJECT Intending students should obtain the instructions and exercises from the Mathematics department in December or January, before lectures begin, and should hand in their work complete not later than 31st March. SYLLABUS Numerical exercises on summation of series, difference tables, interpolation, integration, differential equations, curve fitting, simultaneous linear equations and determinants. Calculating machines will be available, for use in the Mathematics department, on request. Book Prescribed textbook: Wilkes M V A Short Introduction to Numerical Analysis, CUP 228 NUMBER THEORY PROJECT Intending students should obtain the Instructions and exercises from the Mathematics department in December or January, before lectures begin, and should hand in their work complete not later than 31st March.

164 MATHEMATICS

SYLLABUS Exercises on prime numbers, factorization, congruences, quadratic residues, continued fractions, Diophantine approximation, quadratic forms. Prescribed textbook: Davenport H The Higher Arithmetic, Hutchinson Students of Pure Mathematics 11 (Honours), or of two of the normal combinations of units in Pure Mathematics Ill (Pass), must take either 227 or 228, unless they have already passed one of these units. Note that 227 is not available to students who are studying, or have passed, 369-202. Students of Applied Mathematics Ill (Honours) must take 227 in their third year, unless they have already passed 227 or 369-202. 240 APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART II (PASS) Comprises 241 Mathematical Methods II, 243 Classical Mechanics 11 and 245 Fluid Mechanics II. Students will be assumed to be studying 201 concurrently. BOOKS Supplementary reading for each of 241, 243 and 245: Hague B Introduction to Vector Analysis, Methuen Hopf L Introduction to the Differential Equations of Physics, Dover Mach E The Science of Mechanics, Open Court 241 MATHEMATICAL METHODS II (PASS) A course of 36 lectures and 12 practice classes. 241 should normally be accompanied by 201. SYLLABUS (i) Vector analysis. Differential operators. Divergence theorem. Stokes' theorem. Orthogonal curvilinear co-ordinates. (li) Ordinary differential equations. Linear second order. Variation of parameters. Power series solutions. (i11) Fourier series. Trigonometric series. Application to heat conduction, Laplace's equation and the wave equation. (iv) Special functions. Legendre polynomials. Bessel functions. Ortho- gonal series. Applications, as for (iii). BOOKS Recommended for reference: Spain B Vector Analysis, Van Nostrand Bland D R Solution of Laplace's Equation, Routledge & Kegan Paul Sokolnikoff I S & Redheffer R M Mathematics of Physics and Modern Engineering, McGraw-Hill Hildebrand F B Advanced Calculus for Applications, Prentice-Hall Spiegel M R Vector Analysis, Schaum Churchill R V Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems, McGraw- Hill Jaeger J C An Introduction to Applied Mathematics, OUP EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. 243 CLASSICAL MECHANICS II (PASS) A course of 18 lectures and 8 practice classes. SYLLABUS Lagrange's egиatiопв of motion. Small vibrations. Three dimensional motion of rigid bodies.

165 MATHEMATICS

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Rutherford D E Classical Mechanics, Oliver & Boyd Speigel M R Theoretical Mechanics, Shaum Synge J L & Griffith B A Principles of Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Ramsey A S Dynamics, Part II, CUP Goldstein Н Classical Mechanics, Addison-Wesley Sommerfeld A Mechanics, Academic Press EXAMINATION One 1'/2-hour paper. 245 FLUID MECHANICS II (PASS) A course of 15 lectures and 5 practice classes. SYLLABUS Euler's equations of motion. Elements of irrotational flow. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Rutherford D E Fluid Dynamics, Oliver & Boyd Lamb H Hydrodynamics, CUP Prandtl L & Tietjens 0 S Fundamentals of Hydro- and Aeromechanics, Dover Ramsey A S A Treatise on Hydromechenics, Part II, Bell Temple G An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, OUP EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. 260 APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART II (HONOURS) Comprises 261 Mathematical Methods Il (Honours), 263 Classical Mech- anics I1 (Honours) and 265 Fluid Mechanics II (Honours). Students will be assumed to be studying 221 concurrently. Attention is drawn to the comments following unit 228. Attention is drawn to the courses for BSc Honours in the School of Mathematics and the Combined School of Mathematics and Physics.

BOOKS Supplementary reading for each of 261, 263 and 265: Kline M Mathematics in Western Culture, Allen & Unwin Eddington A S Space, Time and Gravitation, CUP 261 MATHEMATICAL METHODS I1 (HONOURS) A course of 36 lectures and 12 practice classes. SYLLABUS (i) Vector analysis. Differential operators. Integral identities.. Orthogonal curvilinear co-ordinates. (ii) Ordinary differential equations. Existence and uniqueness. Linear second order. Variation of parameters. Power series solutions. (iii) Fourier Series. Trigonometric series. Fourier's theorem. Applications to heat conduction, Laplace's equation and the wave equation. (iv) Special functions. Legendre polynomials. Bessel functions. Ortho- gonal series. Applications, as for (iii).

BО OKS Recommended for reference: Bourne D E & Kendall P C Vector Analysis, 0ldbouгп• 166 MATHEMATICS

Churchill R V Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems, McGraw- Hill EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

263 CLASSICAL MECHANICS II (HONOURS) A course of 18 lectures and 6 practice classes. SYLLABUS Lagrange's equations. Small vibrations. Three-dimensional motion of rigid bodies.

BOO КS Recommended for reference: Corben H C & Stehle P Classical Mechanics, Wiley Kibble T W B Classical Mechanics, McGraw-Hill EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper.

265 FLUID MECHANICS II (HONOURS) A course of 15 lectures and 5 practice classes. SYLLABUS Elements of viscous flow and of lrrotational flow.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Curie N & Davies H J Modern Fluid Dynamics, Vol I Incompressible Flow, Van Nostrand Batchelor G IC An introduction to Fluid Dynamics, CUP

EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper.

281 MIXED MATHEMATICS II (PASS) A course of three lectures per week, with practice classes, throughout the year. This subject is designed to meet the minimum mathematical needs of second year students Intending to major in Physics; but It is not restricted to such students, and such students are not restricted to it. SYLLABUS Integrals Improper Integrals. Reduction formulae. Double In- tegrals. Line and surface integrals. Function of three variables. Small changes. Differential. Chain rule. Direc- tional derivative. Vector differential operators. Orthogonal curvilinear co- ordinates. Gauss's and Stokes's theorems. Laplace's equation in a context. Matrix algebra Rotations and projections. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors in a context. Dlagonalization. Differential equations Bessel and Legendre equations. Power series solution of second order linear differential equations with variable coefficients. Bessel and Legendre functions. Boundary value problems Fourier series. Legendre and Bessel series. Boundary value problems for Laplace's equation.

BOOkS Prescribed textbook: Stephenson G Mathematical Methods for Science Students, Longmans

167 MATHEMATICS

Recommended for reference: Spiegel M R Advanced Calculus, Schaum Cohn P M Linear Equations, Routledge & Kegan Paul LedermannW Multiple Integrals, Routledge & Kegan Paul Spain B Vector Analysis, Van Nostrand Bland D R Solution of Laplace's Equation, Routledge & Kegan Paul Jaeger J C Introduction to Applied Mathematics, OUP EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken into account.

300 LEVEL PURE MATHEMATICS PART III (PASS) Normal combinations of units are: (A) 301, 302, 303, 304, and 227 or 228. (B) 318 Mathematical Structures. (C) As for (A), substituting 305 or 309 for 304. Combination (A) is concerned with precise mathematical analysis and with mathematical techniques relevant to the exact sciences. Combination (C) is a variant of (A). Unit 318 is designed mainly for those Intending to teach mathematics; it is also appropriate for those whose interest in mathematics is as an element of general culture rather than a tool of trade. Unit 309 will be given only if enrolments are sufficient and staff available; this will be determined at the end of March. If 318 is taken 301, 302, and 305 may not be taken. Students taking 227 or 228 should start them well before lectures begin; these assignments must be handed in by the end of March. Students who do sufficiently well in units 301, 303, and 304 may, if they apply, be admitted to Pure Mathematics Ill (Honours) in a subsequent year. The 1%-hour examinations for units 301-305 and 309 may be combined into 3-hour papers.

301 LINEAR ALGEBRA (about 15 lectures) Topics selected from: Vector spaces, linear transformations, matrix factorization; further matrix algebra. Vector and matrix norms. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Artin E Geometric Algebra, Interscience Hohn F E Elementary Matrix Algebra, Macmillan Halmos P R Finite Dimensional Vector Spaces, Van Nostrand EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. Work done during the course may be taken into account. 302 COMPLEX VARIABLE (about 20 lectures) Differentiability. Conformal mapping. Contour Integration. Residues. 168 MATHEMATICS

Book Prescribed textbook: Tall D O Functions of a Complex Variable, 2 vols Routledge & kegan Paul EXAMINATION One 1 r/2-hour paper. Work done during the course may be taken Into account.

303 ANALYSIS (about 25 lectures) Real functions of a real variable; continuity; differentiability; limit points. Representations of functions by series, products, and integrals. Functions of several real variables. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Olmsted J M H Advanced Calculus, Appleton-Century-Crofts Buck R C. Advanced Calculus, McGraw-Hill Courant R Differential Integral Calculus, Vols. I & Il, Dover EXAMINATION One 1%-hour paper. Work done during the course may be taken into account. 304 FURTHER ANALYSIS (about 15 lectures) Uniform convergence, Riemann integral; differentiation and integration of series; function spaces.

BO 0 КЅ Recommended for reference: as for unit 303 EXAMINATION One 1'/2 -hour paper. Work done during the course may be taken Into account. 305 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA (about 15 lectures) Further topics In groups, rings and fields. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hall F M Introduction to Abstract Algebra, Vol 11 CUP Birkhoff G & MacLane S Survey of Modern Algebra, Macmillan 309 TOPOLOGY (about 15 lectures) Topics selected from: Classification of surfaces, equivalence and orientation, topological polygons, Riemann surfaces. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Blackett D W Elementary Topology, Academic Press EXAMINATION One 1 %-hour paper. Work done during the course may be taken into account.

169 MATHEMATICS

318 MATHEMATICAL STRUCTURES A course of about 65 lectures, with practice classes and reading, written' and oral assignments. Compulsory topics will be selected from items (a) to (f) of the Syllabus. In the remainder of the course, some choice will be allowed from these topics and from (g). The first assignment will be required early in first term. Details will be given in an instruction sheet available in the Mathematics Department. Students are strongly advised to obtain this sheet in January, so that they can do some of the reading, and complete the first written assignment, before lectures begin. A reading list will be supplied with the instruction sheet. SYLLABUS Topics selected from: (a) Linear Algebra Vector spaces. Further matrix algebra and applications. (b) Complex Variable Differentiability. Contour integration. Residues. (c) Abstract Algebra Further topics in groups, rings, and fields. (d) Geometry Projective geometry. Conics. (e) Number Theory Factorization. Congruences. Diophantine equations. (f) Topology Classification of surfaces; equivalence and orientation; topological polygons. (g) Includes the following topics: Philosophy of Mathematics. History of Mathematics. Applications of Mathematics. Transcendental Numbers. Transfinite Numbers. Graph Theory. Hyperbolic and Riemannian Geometry. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: (a) Munkres J P Elementary Linear Algebra, Addison-Wesley (b) Tall D O Functions of a Complex Variable, 2 vols, Routledge & Kegan Paul (c) Hall F M Introduction to Abstract Algebra, Vol II, CUP (d) & (e) Eves H V Fundamentals of Geometry, Allyn & Bacon Recommended for reference: (f) Blackett D W Elementary Topology, Academic Press EXAMINATION Assignments throughout the year, together with two 3-hog r papers on the topics given in lectures.

PURE MATHEMATICS PART III (HONOURS) A course of about 100 lectures on 321, 322, and one of 323, 324, and 325. 325, if given, and one of 323 and 324 will be lectured on; the other will be studied by guided reading and exercises without lectures; this topic must be started in the long vacation—notes and guides to reading should be obtained from the Mathematics department In December. A student who wishes to qualify to enter fourth year should take 321, 322, the guided reading unit, and one of the remaining units from 323, 324, 325. Unit 325 will only be given if enrolment is sufficient and staff available. Students wishing to take the Combined School of Mathematics and Physics may be permitted to replace 323 and 324 by 361. 321 REAL AND COMPLEX ANALYSIS Complex sequences and series. The elementary complex functions. Differ- entiability. Topology of the Euclidean plane. Cauchy's theorems. Contour integration. Singularities. Analytic continuation. Functions defined by integrals. Linear differential equation theory. Lebesgue measure afd In- tegration. 170 MATHEMATICS

322 ABSTRACT ALGEBRA Algebraic structures: groups, rings, lattices, fields.

323 PROJECTIVE GEOMETRY Projective spaces. Colllneatlons. Harmonic sets. Involutions. Conics. Polarities. Affine and Euclidean geometries as specializations of projective geometry.

324 DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY Curves In space. Servet Franet formulae. Centre of curvature. Helices. Surfaces. Directions. Principal curvatures. Lines of curvature. Indicatrix. Asymptotic lines. Envelopes of families of surfaces. Gauss characteristic equation, and related equations. Geodesics and geo- desic curvature.

325 MATRIX THEORY Topics selected from: Partitioned matrix inverse, and applications. Generalized inverse. Spectral resolution; projections; subspaces. Matrix norms. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 321 Burkill J C & Burkilt H Second Course in Mathematical Analysis, CUP or Goodstein R L Complex Functions, McGraw-Hill 322 Dean R A Elements of Abstract Algebra, Wiley Internat. Ed. Recommended for reference: 321 Ahlfors L V Complex Analysis, McGraw-Hill Copson E T Functions of a Complex Variable, OUP Hille E Analytic Function Theory, Vol. I, Blaisdell Pennisi L L Elements of Complex Variables, Holt Reinhart & Win- ston Titchmarsh E C Theory of Functions, OUP 322 Herstein I N Topics in Algebra, Ginn Blaisdell Artin E Galois Theory, Feffer & Simons Hall M Theory of Groups, Macmillan 323 Fishback W T Projective and Euclidean Geometry 2nd ed, Wiley Gruenberg K W & Weir A J Linear Geometry, Van Nostrand Ayres F Projective Geometry, Schaum Blumenthal L M A Modern View of Geometry, Freeman Coxetor H S M Projective Geometry, Blaisdell boredom A F Undergraduate Projective Geometry, Pergamon Schreier 0 & Sperner E Projoctive Geometry of n Dimensions, Chelsea 324 Coxeter H S Introduction to Geometry Chs 17-20, Wiley Weatherburn C E Differential Geometry, CUP Wardle K L Differential Geometry, Routledge Struik D Differential Geometry, Addison-Wesley Abram J Tensor Calculus through Differential Geometry, Butté&- worth Willmore T J Differential Geometry, OUP 325 Lancaster P Theory of Matrices, Academic Press

171 MATHEMATICS

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done• during the year will be taken into account.

340 APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART III (PASS) This comprises 342 Continuum Mechanics and Mathematical Methods with either 341 Potential Theory or Statistics 311. Linear Programming.

341 POTENTIAL THEORY A course of 10 lectures with 3 practice classes. SYLLABUS Potential theory, with applications to electrostatics and gravitation. Books Recommended for reference: Ramsey A S Newtonian Attraction, CUP Other references will be given in lectures. EXAMINATION One 1-hour paper.

342 CONTINUUM MECHANICS AND MATHEMATICAL METHODS A course of 60 lectures with 20 practice classes. SYLLABUS A selection from the following topics: Cartesian tensors, fluid dynamics, elasticity, calculus of variations, Laplace transforms, rigid dynamics. BOOks Recommended for reference: Jeffreys H Cartesian Tensors, CUP Batchelor G K An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, CUP Rutherford D E Fluid Dynamics, Oliver & Boyd Sokolnikoff I S Mathematical Theory of Elasticity, McGraw-Hill Hildebrand F B Methods of Applied Mathematics, 2nd ed Prentice- Hall. Jaeger J C The Laplace Transformation, Methuen Other references will be given in lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper and one 3-hour paper. APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART III (HONOURS) This comprises 361 Electromagnetism and 362 Continuum Mechanics. A student must take Numerical Project 227 in the preceding long vacation, unless he has previously passed either 227 or 369-202.

361 ELECTROMAGNETISM A course of 35 lectures. SYLLABUS A selection from the following topics: electrostatics and magnetostatics; electric currents; Maxwell's equations; waves In various media and waveguides; electromagnetic potentials and radiation; special relativity; electromagnetism In the Minkowskl world; moving media; In- troduction to magnetohydrodynamics. 172 M ETALLURGY

Books Prescribed textbooks:

Panofsky W K & Philips M Classical Electricity sic! 4Іagпetism, Addison-Wesley Lawden D F Tensor Calculus and Relativity, Science Paperbacks Recommended for reference: Ferraro V C A Electromagnetic Theory, Athlone Jackson J D Classical Electrodynamics, Wiley Reitz J R & Milford F J Foundations of Electromagnetic Theory, Addison-Wesley Traili N Classical Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill Coulson C A Electricity, Oliver & Boyd EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

362 CONTINUUM МECHANICS A course of 35 lectures.

SYLLABUS A selection from the following topics: Potential Theory. Conformal mapping. Incompressible viscous fluids. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Kellogg 0 D Foundations of Potential Theory, Springer Courant R & Hilbert D Methods of Mathematical Physics, Vol iI Partial Differential Equations, Interscience Batchelor G K An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, CUP Other references will be given in lectures. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

373 METALLURGY 200 LEVEL 201 MATERIALS PROCESSING A course of 36 lectures, 24 hours of practice classes or seminars, 36 hours of practical work, and one or two excursions. SYLLABUS (a) Introduction to systems for processing materials. Raw materials, thеir selection, assembly and characteristics in relation to preparations for subsequent processing. Size reduction and size separation. Liberation. Thermodynamic and kinetic factors affecting separation of chemical components by means of phase separations In non-reactive and reactive systems. Transfer of mass, heat and momentum. Mass and energy balances in relation to phase and component separations. (b) Separation of materials. Separations of: solid from solid, solid from liquid, solid from gas, liquid from liquid, liquid from gas, gas from gas. (c) Preparation of materials for utilization. Technological aspects of processing materials to make both metals and non-metals. Examples of integrated processes for producing metals. Mechanical processing of products, e.g. casting, compacting, rolling, etc. Preparation of products for transport and storage.

173 METALLURGY

PRACTICE CLASSES, SEMINARS, PRACTICAL WORK and EXCUR- SIONS. These relate to the lecture syllabus. BOOKS These are selected from the list under METALLURGY 200 below. EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year and one 3-hour paper. All work done in connection with practice classes, seminars, practical work аni excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the annual examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the annual examination.

202 MATERIALS SCIENCE A course of 36 lectures, 24 hours of practice classes or seminars, 36 hours of practical work. SYLLABUS (a) Structure of Materials (18 lectures). Crystalline solids, crystallography and crystallographic techniques, crystal structures in relation to types of bonding. Amorphous materials. Multi-phase structures and the use of phase diagrams in their interpretation. The structures of commercially important alloys. (b) Mechanical Behaviour (12 lectures). Mechanical tests and classification of behaviour. Elasticity and anelasticity. Viscosity. Geometry of plastic deformation. Dislocations and the theory of deformation. Frac- ture: the Griffith theory, mechanisms of crack initiation, brittle fracture, ductile rupture, the ductile-brittle transition, intercrystalline fracture, creep and fatigue failure. Non-metallic materials. (c) Theory of Metals (6 lectures). Atomic structure, bonding, cohesion of metallic crystals. Behaviour of electrons in a lattice, Brillouin zones, electrical conduction. Semi-conductors, magnetic properties. PRACTICE CLASSES, SEMINARS, PRACTICAL WORK and EXCUR- SIONS. These relate to the lecture syllabus. BOOKS These are selected from the list under METALLURGY 200 below. EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year and one 3-hour paper. All work done in connection with practice classes, seminars, practical work and excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the annual examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the annual examination. 203 CONTINUUM MECHANICS A course of 24 lectures, 24 hours of practice classes and 36 hours of practical work. SYLLABUS 1. Mechanical Behaviour (a) Stress and strain states: Definitions—true and nominal stresses and strains. Generalized state of stress. Stresses on any plane. Principal tresses and strains. Deviator and spherical components. (b) Possible Responses to Mechanical Environment. (i) Short-term deformation responses. The three Ideal responses, Hookean elasticity. New- ton viscosity, Rigid plastic. Non-ideal responses. Non-Hookean elasticity.

174 METALLURGY

Time dependent elasticity, non-Newtonian viscosity, Visco-elasticity. Elastic plastic, strain hardening plastic, strain-softening plastic. (ii) Shoгt- term fracture responses. Cleavage, Interparticle, Ductile—characteristic. 2. Analysis of Stress and Strain (Portion of the syllabus of Mechanics of Solids part I). (i) Bending of Beams. Pure Flexure. Stress-strain distributions, elastic non-elastic behaviour. Principal axes. Shear and Bending. Distribution of shear stresses for bending about principal axes. (ii) Deflections of Beams. Analytical Methods. Integration. Moment Area. (iii) Superposition and Reciprocity. PRACTICE CLASSES One hour per week on calculations and discussions pertinent to the lecture topics. 1 PRACTICAL WORK Three hours per week for 12 weeks on experiments and calculations pertinent to the lecture syllabus. BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading: Gordon J E The New Science of Strong Materials, Penguin 1968 Prescribed textbook: Students are advised to consult the lecturer. Dieter G E Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill or Feltham P Deformation and Strength of Materials, Butterworth Recommended for reference: McLintock F A & Argon A S Mechanical Behaviour of Materials, Addi- son-Wesley Polakowskl N H & Ripling E J Strength and Structure of Engineering Materials, Prentice-Hall Cottrell A H The Mechanical Properties of Matter, Wiley Jaeger J C Elasticity, Fracture and Flow, Methuen Van Nos- Johnson W & Мellог P B Plasticity for Mechanical Engineers, trand 1962 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. All work done in connection with practical work and practice classes will be taken Into account in assessing the results of the year's work In conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination.

204 STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS A course of 12 practice classes or seminars. SYLLABUS Randomness aspects of the physical states of matter. Randomness of monatomic gases. The concepts of temperature and entropy In terms of randomness and internal energy. Free energy in relation to stability. Configurational entropy, Internal energy and free energy of solid solutions.

175 METALLURGY

Free energy related to composition and physical state as a basis for understanding phase diagrams, alloy transformations and chemical reactions. BOOKS These are selected from the list under METALLURGY 200 below. EXAMINATION An evaluation of work done in practice classes.

200 METALLURGY A course designated 200 Metallurgy consists of the following units: 201 Metallurgy Materials Processing 202 Metallurgy Materials Science 204 Metallurgy Statistical Thermodynamics BOOKS Preliminary reading: Alexander W & Street A Metals in the Service of Man, Pelican 1964 Blainey G The Rush that Never Ended, MUP Gordon J E The New Science of Strong Materials, Penguin 1968 Prescribed textbooks: Newton J Extractive Metallurgy, Wiley •Cottrell A H An Introduction to Metallurgy, Arnold 1967 Wulff J ed The Structure and Properties of Materials, Vol III, Wiley Hayden H W Moffatt W G & Wulff J Mechanical Behaviour, Wiley •Prince A Alloy Phase Equilibria, Elsevier Recommended for reference: Eighth Commonwealth Mining and Metallurgical Congress 1965 Publica- tions Vol III The Australian Mining, Metallurgical and Mineral Industries Gaudin A M Principles of Mineral Dressing, McGraw-Hill Ore Dressing Methods in Australia and Adjacent Territories, Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress 1953 Publications Vol Ill Dennis W H Extractive Metallurgy, Pitman Szekely J & Themelis N J Rate Phenomena in Process Metallurgy, Wiley Interscience 1971 Butts A Metallurgical Problems, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill Barrett C S Structure of Metals, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill Brick R M Gordon R B & Phillips A Structure and Property of Alloys, 3rd ed McGraw-Hill 1965 Chalmers B Principles of Solidification, Wiley Cottrell A H Mechanical Properties of Matter, Wiley Cottrell A H Theoretical Structural Metallurgy, 2nd ed Arnold Dieter G Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill Fast J D Entropy, Philips Feltham P Deformation and Strength of Materials, Butterworth 1966 Guy A G Elements of Physical MetaUurgy, 2nd ed Addison-Wesley Hume-Rothery W Smallman R E & Haworth C W The Structure of Metals and Alloys, 5th ed Metals & Metallurgy Trust 1969 Kehl G 1 Principles of Metallographic Laboratory Practice, McGraw-Hill Reed-Hill R E Physical Metallurgy Principles, Van Nostrand Sonntag R E & Van Wylen G J Fundamentals of Statistical Thermo- dynamics, Wiley 176 METALLURGY

Samuels L E Metallographic Polishing by Mechanical Methods, Pitman 1967 Shewmon P C Transformations in Metals, McGraw-Hill 1969 Smallman R E Modern Physical Metallurgy, Butterworths 1962 Smallman R E& Ashbee K W G Modern Metallography, Pergamon Taylor A X-Ray Metallography, Wiley 1981 Tegart W J McG Elements of Mechanical Metallurgy, Collier-Macmillan Van Viack L I Elements of Materials Science, 2nd ed Addison-Wesley 1964 Winegard W C An Introduction to the Solidification of Metals, Institute of Metals 1964

300 LEVEL 301 METALLURGY PART II

A course of about 84 lectures, with practice classes, practical work and excursions throughout the year. SYLLABUS Mineral Processing—Physics and Chemistry (Approximately 24 lectures). Objectives of mineral processing. Phases in processing systems; interfaces; Interfacial energy. Elements of size reduction; brittle fracture. Characteristics of particulate solids; mineral suspensions. Some principles underlying gravity concentration. Aspects of electrical concentration. In- terfacial relationships in three-phase systems; alteration of interfacial energy relationships. Kinetic aspects of, and probability considerations in, processing. Physical Chemistry of Metal Extraction ( Approximately 24 lectures). Application of physico-chemical methods to metallurgical reactions. Equilibria in reduction of metallic oxides; stability and phase relations of oxides. Stability of sulphides; matte smelting; properties of metal-sulphur- oxygen systems. Slag-metal equilibria; properties of liquid slags and molten salts; solutions in liquid iron. Gases in metals. Electrochemistry of production and refining of metals. Physical Metallurgy (Approximately 24 lectures). Diffusion In solids. Phase transformations: solidification, precipitation, eutectold, martensitic. The pearlite, pro-eutectoid, bainite and martensite reactions In steels; tempering and strain ageing. Alloying elements In steel and the design of some steels. Metal Physics (Approximately 12 lectures). Thermal properties, introduction to electron theory of metals, reciprocal-space concept, Brillouin zones, cohesion of metals, electron compounds, zone theory of alloy phases, electronic structure of transition metals, magnetic properties. PRACTICE CLASSES One hour per week on discussions, calculations and demonstrations illustrating the principles of mineral processing, extraction metallurgy and physical metallurgy. PRACTICAL WORK A minimum of twelve hours per week. Mineral Processing. Scientific analyses of various aspects of processing techniques. Chemical Metallurgy. Chemical, physico-chemical, and physical methods of analysis of metallurgical materials. Physical chemistry of extraction metallurgy. Physical Metallurgy. Experimental work, seminars and practice classes relevant to the syllabus.

177 METEOROLOGY

EXCURSIONS Visits to metallurgical industries and establishments. At- tendance at these is considered as a part of the year's work. and a report on each visit must be submitted. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: The books prescribed for Metallurgy Part I, together with: Barrett C S & Massalski T B Structure of Metals, 3rd ed McGraw-Hill Cullity B D Elements of X-Ray Diffraction, Addison-Wesley Hume-Rothery W The Structure of Alloys of Iron, Pergamon 1966 Other newly-published books may be prescribed. Students are therefore advised to consult the lecturers. Recommended for reference: The books recommended for Metallurgy Part I, together with: Gaudin A M Flotation, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1947 Glembotskii V A klassen V I & Plaksin I N Flotation, ed H S Rabinovich (Primary Sources) Kingery W D Introduction to Ceramics, Wiley Klassen V I & Mokrousov V A introduction to the Theory of Flotation, Butterworth Rabona P Flotation Plant Practice, Mining Publishers Sutherland k L & Wark I W Principles of Flotation, Aust III 1955 Taggart A F Elements of Ore Dressing, Wiley Bodsworth C Physical Chemistry of iron and Steel Manufacture, Long- mans Darken L S & Gurry R W Physical Chemistry of Metals, McGraw-Hill Physical Chemistry of Process Metallurgy, Faraday Society Disc. No 4 1968 Bain E C & Paxton H W Alloying Elements in Steel, 2nd ed Amer. Soc. Metals Hutchinson T S & Baird D C The Physics of Engineering Solids, Wiley 1968 Martin J W Precipitation Hardening, Pergamen 1968 Relation of Properties to Microstructure, Amer. Soc. Metals Sinnott M J The Solid State for Engineers, Wiley 1958 Zackay V F & Aaronson H I eds The Decomposition of Austenite by Diffusional Processes, Interscience Cahn R W ed Physical Metallurgy, North Holland 1965 EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year, and three 3-hour papers for pass and honours: a three-day practical examination may be given. All work done in connection with practical and practice classes and eх- cursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the annual examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the annual examination. 375 METEOROLOGY The units shown below provide up to one third of the 100 points needed for a BSc degree in Meteorology, with the remainder coming from physics, mathematics, statistics afd the geophysical sciences. Unit 201, Outline of Meteorology, is designed and compulsory for 2nd year and more senior students who have not taken at least the first year units 101 and 102. All students are urged to study current synoptic charts and satellite cloud photos made available daily by the Bureau of Meteor- ology, and reviewed in a weekly staff-student meeting. 178 METEOROLOGY

100 LEVEL

Each unit carries one point and a 1%-hours' terminal exam. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Thompson P D Weather, Life Science Library 1965 Hare F K The Restless Atmosphere, Hutchinson 1966 Murchle G Song of the Sky, Houghton-Mifflin 1954

101 METEOROLOGY: INTRODUCTION TO THE ATMOSPHERE Twelve lectures. Astronomical relations; vertical structure of the atmosphere; surface patterns of temperature, pressure, wind, etc; zonal and meridional flow patterns. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Pettersson S Introduction to Meteorology, 3rd ed McGraw-Hili 1969 Riehl H Introduction to the Atmosphere, McGraw-Hill 1965

102 METEOROLOGY: ATMOSPHERIC DYNAMICS Twelve lectures. Equations of motion; meteorological forces; wind models; thermal wind and the hodograph; the jet stream. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Barry R G & Chorley R J Atmosphere, Weather and Climate, Methuen Reiter E R Jet Streams, Doubleday 1967

103 METEOROLOGY: LARGE SCALE WEATHER SYSTEMS Twelve lectures. Air masses; fronts; cyclones; anticyclones; associated weather; relevance to the Australian region. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Flohn H Climate end Weather, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1969 Tweedie A D Water апд the World, Nelson 1969 104 METEOROLOGY: LOCAL WEATHER SYSTEMS Twelve lectures. Condensation; clouds (formation and dissipation); precipitation; thunder- storms; other severe storms; the aerological diagram. BOOK Recommended for reference: Ludlam F H & Scorer R S Cloud Study, Murray 1957

179 METEOROLOGY

105 METEOROLOGY: ANALYSIS AND PREDICTION TECHNIQUES Twelve lectures. Vorticity; conservation of vorticity; numerical forecasting; general circulation models; rule of thumb forecasting; empirical forecast rules; frontal forecasting; local forecasting. BOOK Recommended for reference: Atkinson B W The Weather Business, Aldus 1968 106 METEOROLOGY: RADIATION AND ENERGY BALANCE Twelve lectures. Solar and terrestrial radiation; local and global energy budgets; energy transfer processes; general circulation.

BOO КS Recommended for reference: Sellers W D Physical Climatology, Chicago UP 1965. Palmen E & Newton C W Atmospheric Circulation Systems, Academic Press 1969

107 METEOROLOGY: CLIMATE AND MAN Twelve lectures. Past climates; ice ages and their dating; climate, life afd evolution; weather and life; biometeorology. Man and his environment; past civiliza- tions and climate; city climate; air pollution.

BOOКS Recommended for reference: Fairbridge R W ed The Encyclopaedia of Atmospheric Sciences and Astrogeology, Reinhold 1967 Claiborne R Climate Man and History. Norton 1970 Inadvertent Climate Modification, MIT Press 1971 108 METEOROLOGY: COMPUTER METEOROLOGY Six lectures, eighteen hours practical work. Basics of Fortran IV and Watfor programming; application to meteorology; practical exercises. Pre-requisite: Information Science 101.

BО O К Recommended for reference: Blatt J M Introduction to Fortran IV Programming using the Watfor/ Watfiv Compilers, Goodyear 1971

200 LEVEL Each unit carries two points afd a one-hour terminal exam. Controlled reading and tutorials may be substituted for lectures in units with few students.

180 METEOROLOGY

201 METEOROLOGY: OUTLINE OF METEOROLOGY Twelve lectures. An introductory survey for students new to the subject.

202 METEOROLOGY: METEOROLOGICAL MEASUREMENTS Ten lectures and 6 hours practical work. Physical principles of measurement of basic meteorological parameters; radiation, temperature, humidity, pressure and wind. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Schwerdtfeger P Physical Principles of Basic Meteorological Measure- ments, Meteorology department University of Melbourne 1971 Middleton N E K& Spilhaus A F Meteorological instruments, Toronto UP 1943

203 METEOROLOGY: THERMODYNAMICS OF THE ATMOSPHERE Ten lectures, six hours of practical work. Statics; convection; dry and moist adiabatic processes; potential, Internal, and available energies; overturning and mixing. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Pippard A B Classical Thermodynamics, CUP 1964 Fleagle R G & Businger J A An Introduction to Atmospheric Physics, Academic Press 1963

204 METEOROLOGY: CLIMATOLOGY Ten lectures, six hours practical work. The physical basis of climate; meteorological and climatic elements; climatological statistics; large-scale and local climates; climatic change. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Critchfield H J General Climatology, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1966 Munn R E Descriptive Micrometeorology, Academic Press 1966 Brooks C E P & Carruthers N Handbook of Statistical Methods In Meteorology, HMSO Met Office Pub 638 1953 Sellers W D Physical Climatology, Chicago UP 1965

300 LEVEL Each unit carries two points and a one-hour terminal exam and/or an essay test on prescribed reading beyond the material treated in the lectures. In units with few students reading and tutorials may be substituted for lectures. 201 Meteorology is compulsory for students new to the subject. Units from 310 Meteorology onwards are given by guest lecturers on the subjects of their specialized research; details of guest units will not be available until the beginning of the year.

181 METEOROLOGY

301 METEOROLOGY: DYNAMICS Eight lectures and twelve hours practical work. Equations of frictionless motion in the rotating atmosphere; special co- ordinates and solutions; divergence, circulation, vorticity; the vorticity theorem. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Haltiner G J & Martin F L Dynamical and Physical Meteorology, McGraw-Hill 1957 Belinskii V A Dynamic Meteorology, Israel Program for Scientific Trans- lations 1962 302 METEOROLOGY: MICROMETEOROLOGY Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work (which may take the form of a field trip). Radiation; conduction; atmospheric heating; evapo-transpiration; the heat balance of planetary surfaces and layers. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Sellers W D Physical Climatology, Chicago UP 1965 Slatyer R O & Icllroy I C Practical Micro-climatology, UNESCO 1961 303 METEOROLOGY: SOLAR RADIATION Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work. Solar and terrestrial radiation. Energetics and remote sensing. Astronomi- cal relationships. Extinction and turbidity. Absorption and scattering by aerosol and clouds. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Fleagle R G & Businger J A An Introduction to Atmospheric Physics, Academic Press 1963. Robinson N Solar Radiation, Elsevier 1966 304 METEOROLOGY: TURBULENCE Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work. Introductory concepts; the statistical description of turbulence; equations of motion for mean and fluctuating quantities—Reynold's stress; diabetic wind profiles; spectral description of turbulence; observational and instrumental considerations; turbulence in air pollution.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Batchelor G K Homogeneous Turbulence, Cambridge UP 1953 Lumley J L & Panofsky H A Structure of Atmospheric Turbulence, Inter- science 1964 Pasquill F Atmospheric Dilusion, Van Nostrand 1962 Priestley C H B Turbulent Transfer in the Lower Atmosphere, Chicago UP 1959 Sutton 0 G Micrometeorology, McGraw-Hill 1953

182 METEOROLOGY

305 METEOROLOGY: NUMERICAL WEATHER PREDICTION Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work. 301 Meteorology is a prerequisite. General dynamic and numerical concepts; filtering. Initialisation, energy consistency. The hierarchy of prediction models used in forecasts and in general circulation experiments. BOO КS Recommended for reference: Thompson P D Numerical Weather Analysis and Prediction, Macmillan 1961 Lectures on Numerical Short-range Weather Prediction, WNW Regional Training Seminar, Moscow 1965, World Meteorological Organization. Haltiner G J Numerical Weather Prediction, Wiley 1971 306 METEOROLOGY: TERRESTRIAL RADIATION Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work. 303 Meteorology is a prerequisite. Radiative transfer with absorption and emission. Energetics—radiation charts. Remote sensing—temperature determination. Terrestrial radiation balance. BOO КS Recommended for reference: kondratyev k Y Radiation in the Atmosphere, Academic Press 1969 Drummond A J (ed) Advances in Geophysics, Vol 14, Interscience 1970 307 METEOROLOGY: SYNOPTIC METEOROLOGY Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work. 301 Meteorology Is a prerequisite. The problem of meteorological analysis; conventional synoptic data; the collection and processing of satellite data; large-scale features of the upper and lower troposphere; severe weather systems. BOOk Recommended for reference: Palmen E & Newton C W Atmospheric Circulation Systems, Academic Press 1969 308 METEOROLOGY: CLOUD PHYSICS Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work. Classification and dynamics of clouds; growth of cloud droplets and Ice crystals; precipitation mechanisms; cloud electrification; radar meteorology. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Byers H R Elements of Cloud Physics, Chicago UP 1969 Fletcher H N The Physics of Rain Clouds, CUP 1962 309 METEOROLOGY: GENERAL GLACIOLOGY Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work.

183 MICROBIOLOGY

Geographical distribution of ice; types of glaciers; glacial landscapes and their distribution in Australia. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Dyson J L The World of Ice, Knopf 1962 Mallit M Snow and Ice on the Earth's Surface, USA CRREL 1964

310 METEOROLOGY: TROPICAL DYNAMICS Eleven lectures providing an introduction to the dynamics of low-latitude processes as part of the general circulation. Mean structure of the tropical atmosphere and time scales of low-latitude phenomena, from cumuli to the quasi-biennial oscillation; parameters, scaling arguments, and boundary layer dynamics for low latitudes; interaction of the tropics and higher latitudes; moist processes, conditional instability of the second kind (CISK); modelling of tropical motions, and problems remaining to be solved. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Riehl H Tropical Meteorology, McGraw-Hill 1954 Riehl H Mechanisms of the general circulation of the troposphere, in: Landsberg H (ed) World Survey of Climatology, Vol 2 Elsevier 1970 Malkus J S Large-scale interactions, In: Hill M N (ed) The See, Vol. 1, Interscience 1962

311 METEOROLOGY: ICE DYNAMICS Eight lectures, twelve hours practical work. Mechanical and thermal properties of ice* observed movement of glaciers and ice sheets; dynamic and thermodynamic theory of glaciers and ice sheets; mass and heat budget of the Antarctic ice cap. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Paterson S The Physics of Glaciers, Pergamon 1969 Budd W F The Dynamics of Ice Masses, ANARE 1969 Lliboutry L Traité de Glaciologie, 2 vols Masson 1964/5

312 METEOROLOGY, 313 METEROLOGY, ETC. Further guest units on topics to be decided (see introductory note).

377 MICROBIOLOGY 200 LEVEL 201 MICROBIOLOGY A course of 48 lectures and 72 hours practical work. SYLLABUS A general introductory course dealing with the properties of micro-organisms (bacteria, viruses, and fungi), their behaviour in their natural environment and in the laboratory, their importance in the patho- 184 MICROBIOLOGY

genesis of disease in animals, plants and insects, their role in degrada- tive and synthetic cycles of compounds in nature, and their importance as tools for research into fundamental processes of life. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Burnet F M & White D 0 Natural History of Infectious Disease, Cam- bridge 1972 Prescribed textbooks: Brock T D Biology of Micro-organisms, Prentice-Hall 1970 or Staniar R Y Doudoroff M & Adelberg E A General Microbiology, 3rd ed Macmillan Student Eds 1971 Recommended for reference: Brock T D Principles of Microbial Ecology, Prentice-Hall 1966 Davis B D et al Microbiology, lieber 1968 EXAMINATION An annual 3-hours' written examination. Practical and oral examinations In certain cases.

202 MICROBIOLOGY The lectures of Microbiology 201 without the accompanying practical work. This unit course is available only for students not Intending to major In Microbiology 301.

203 MICROBIOLOGY (OPTOMETRY) (Third Year—Optometry Course) A course of 20 lectures with associated demonstrations. SYLLABUS The properties of bacteria, viruses, chlamydiae, fungi and protozoa affecting the eye. Antimicrobial chemotherapy. Sterilization of ophthalmological equipment and pharmaceuticals. Principles of immunity and allergy. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Brock T D Biology of Micro-organisms, Prentice-Hall 1970 or Staniar R Y Doudoroff M & Adelberg E A Generel Microbiology, 3rd ed Macmillan Student Editions 1971 Recommended for reference: Davis B D et aI Microbiology, lieber 1968 Jawetz E Melnick J L & Adelberg E A Review of Medical Microbiology, 11th ed Blackwell Scientific Publications 1972 Vaughan D Asbury T & Cook R General Ophthalmology 6th ed, Lange Med Pub cns 1971 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper. An oral examination may also be necessary.

185 MICROBIOLOGY

300 LEVEL 301 MICROBIOLOGY A course of 100 lectures and 240 hours practical work. Microbiology 301 is composed of five unit courses: Microbiology 302 303, 304, 305 and 306; details of each are listed below. Students majoring in Microbiology should enrol in at least 4 of the 5 units. Students not majoring in Microbiology may take any combination of the five individual units.

302 MICROBIOLOGY: BACTERIOLOGY A course of 20 lectures and 80 hours practical work. SYLLABUS The mechanism of disease production by bacteria in man, the principles governing the spread of infectious diseases in the community, and the ways in which bacteria can be controlled by immunization, sterilization and chemotherapy. Extensive practical work will include a systematic examination of the important pathogenic bacteria of man. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Davis B D et al Microbiology, lieber 1968 Recommended for reference: Bergey Manual of Determinative Bacteriology, 8th ed Williams & Wilkins 1970 Rubbo S D & Gardner J F A Review of Sterilization and Disinfection, 2nd ed Lloyd-Luke 1973 Skerman V B D A Guide to the Identification of the Genera of Bacteria, 2nd ed Williams & Wilkins 1967 Wilson G S & Miles A A Topley and Wilson's Principles of Bacteriology and Immunity, 5th ed Arnold 1964

303 MICROBIOLOGY: VIROLOGY A course of 20 lectures and 40 hours practical work. SYLLABUS A comprehensive study of the principles governing the behaviour of viruses in nature, in man and in the laboratory. The course has two contrasting themes: the role of viruses in human disease, and the contribution of viruses to the progress of molecular biology. Most of the important research techniques and diagnostic methods in common use are incorporated into the practical course. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Fenner F & White D 0 Medical Virology, Academic Press 1970 Recommended for reference: Davis B D et ai Microbiology, lieber 1968 Horsfall F L & Tamm I Viral and Rickettsia/ Diseases of Man, 4th ed Lippincott 1965 Luria S E & Darnell J E General Virology, 2nd ed Wiley 1967 188 MICROBIOLOGY

304 MICROBIOLOGY: IMMUNOLOGY A course of 20 lectures and 40 hours practical work. SYLLABUS The lecture course will provide a comprehensive survey of Immunology, with emphasis on the cellular and molecular aspects of im- mune mechanisms and on selected topics chosen to illustrate the applica- bility of immunological methods in the investigation of fundamental biological phenomena. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Although no textbooks are prescribed, reference will be made to specific chapters in the following reference books. Recommended for reference: Davis B D et al Microbiology, Noeber 1968 Haurowitz F lmmunochemistry and the Biosynthesis of Antibodies, Inter- science 1968 Humphrey J H & White R G Immunology for Students of Medicine, 3rd ed Blackwell 1970 Kabat E A Structural Concepts in Immunology and lmmunochemistry, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1968

305 MICROBIOLOGY: INDUSTRIAL MICROBIOLOGY A course of 20 lectures and 40 hours practical work. SYLLABUS The catabolism of substrates with special reference to the pathways peculiar to bacteria, the yield of energy obtained from catabolism, and the links between catabolism and biosynthesis. The application of fundamental biochemical and genetic knowledge to the production of particular fermentation products. The kinetics of growth, product formation and oxygen demand, and the Implications of these for the design of fermenters and the management of fermentations, both batch and continuous. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Although no textbooks are prescribed, reference will be made to specific chapters in the following reference books. Recommended for reference: Alba S Humphrey A E & Millis N F Biochemical Engineering 2nd ed, U of Tokyo Press 1973 Hersom A C & Huhland E D Canned Foods. An Introduction to their Microbiology, 6th ed Churchill 1969 Rainbow C & Rose A H The Biochemistry of Industrial Microorganisms, Academic Press 1963 Rhodes A & Fletcher D L Principles of Industrial Microbiology, Perga- mon 1968 Solomonn G L Materials and Methods in Fermentation, Асадетiс Press 1969 187 MINING

306 MICROBIOLOGY: MICROBIAL GENETICS A course of 20 lectures and 40 hours practical work. SYLLABUS The genetics of bacteria and their viruses with special reference to the nature of genetic material and its replication, mutation and recombination; the molecular basis of the processes of transcription and translation; the control of protein synthesis as exemplified by enzyme induction and repression; gene transfer in bacteria by conjugation, trans- duction and transformation. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Watson J D Molecular Biology of the Gene 2nd ed, Benjamin 1970 Prescribed textbooks: Although no textbooks are prescribed, reference will be made to specific chapters from the following reference books. Recommended for reference: Hayes W The Genetics of Bacteria and Their Viruses, 2nd ed Blackwell 1968 Stant G S Molecular Genetics An Introductory Narrative, Freeman 1971 EXAMINATION Terminal written examinations in each of these unit courses will be held during the year. Oral examinations may be given when required. The standard of laboratory work and performance In practical tests will be taken into account in assessing final results.

379 MINING 200 LEVEL 201 MINING (Science Course) One lecture a week throughout the year, with one additional lecture a week throughout the first half of the year, and practical work throughout the year. SYLLABUS History of mining. Geographical distribution of the mineral industries. Explosives. Blasting. • Boring and drilling: types of drilling equipment and their application. Sampling for grade and estimation of average grade. Support of excavations. Prospecting. Development. The principal underground and surface mining methods. Introduction to rock mechanics and its utilization in engineering practice. PRACTICAL WORK Three hours per week throughout the year. Examina- tion of rock drills and drill steel. Calculation of blasting charges. Compu- tation of tonnages and values. Study of mine models and plans. Excur- sions. Joint surveys for rock mechanical data. Rock testing. Photoelastic stress analysis. Candidates may be required to visit mines and other places associated with mining at times to be arranged during the year. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Blainey G The Rush That Never Ended, MUP Haddock M H Cultural Contacts of Mining, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1949

188' PATHOLOGY

Prescribed textbooks: Lewis R S The Elements of Mining, 3rd ed Wiley or Boky B Mining, MIR Publishers 1967 Explosives Users Guide, ICIANZ Ltd 3rd ed, rev 1970 Recommended for reference: Peel. R Mining Engineer's Handbook, 3rd ed Wiley Jackson C F & Knaebel J В Sampling and Estimation of Ore Deposits, US Bureau of Mines Bulletin 356 Stoces B Introduction to Mining, Lange Maxwell & Springer 1954 Coates D F Rock Mechanics Principles, Canadian Mines Branch Mono- graph 874 Eighth Commonwealth Mining and Metallurgical Congress 1965 Publica- tions Vol 3 The Australien Mining, Metallurgical and Mineral Industry A list of other references will be supplied. EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year and one 3-hour written paper. Practical work done during the course will be assessed as part of the annual examination. Reports of assignments in practical work and excursions should be indexed and suitably bound in e folder and retained for re-submission on the last day of examination in Mining (Science Course) if required.

381 PATHOLOGY 300 LEVEL The complete course (Units 301, 302, 303 and 304) consists of three lectures and twelve hours laboratory work per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Cell constituents, relations and significance in various states. Integration of cells in metazoa. Growth end Its disturbance. Differentia- tion of tissues. Influence of Inheritance and Environment respectively in disease. injury and its sequelae. Inflammation. Types of local Inflammation. Repair. General disturbances. Fever, Immunity, Shock. Progressive changes: Hypertrophy, Hyperplasia, Regeneration, Metaplasia. Neoplasia — in human beings and lower animals. Cysts. Regressive changes: Atrophy, Degeneration, Necrosis, Death. Pigmentation. Calculus formation. Vascular System — Thrombosis, Embolism, Infarction. Changes In thе Changes in the Nervous System. PRACTICAL WORK Gross Pathology; attendance at post-mortem examinations, human and animal. Dissection of material. Study of preserved specimens. Special tutorials. H1stopathology; demonstration afd study of prepared microscopic slides. Histological technique; preparation of sections by paraffin, callo1d1n afd freezing methods. Staining methods. Use of phase-contrast. Experimental pathology; a course of experimental demonstrations illustrating pathological principals. Techniques of animal surgery. Care and handling of experimental animals. Induction and transplantation of tumors. The apparatus used In the course Is supplied by the Pathology department. 189 PHARMACOLOGY

Students are advised to obtain a suitable microscope and a set of dissecting instruments. A few microscopes are available at the department for hire. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: 'Florey H General Pathology, 4th ed Lloyd-Luke 1970 Recommended for reference: Robbins S L Textbook of Pathology, Chs 1-XIII 3rd ed Saunders 1966 Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology, 3rd ed Churchill 1970 Willis R A Pathology of Tumours, 4th ed Butterworth 1968 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper (301). One 3-hour practical examination (302). One vive voce. Records of practical work will be taken into account in assessing results at the annual examination (303).

307 GENERAL PATHOLOGY (OPTOMETRY) A course of three hours of lectures and demonstrations per week during first term. SYLLABUS An outline of general pathology with reference to degenerative processes including necrosis and atrophy; circulatory disturbances: infarction, thrombosis, embolism, hyperaemia, oedema; inflammation; disorders of growth; aplasia, hypoplasie, hyperplasia and hypertrophy, neoplasia, metaplasia; tissue regeneration and repair. PRACTICAL WORK Demonstrations on the morbid anatomy of specimens illustrating general pathology and microscopic examination of sections illustrating pathological histology. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Robbins S L & Angell M Basic Pathology, Saunders Recommended for reference: Florey H General Pathology, 4th ed Lloyd-Luke 1970 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper in the June examination period.

383 PHARMACOLOGY 300 LEVEL Students wishing to major in Pharmacology are required to take Pharma- cology Units 301-305 inclusive. Students not taking all units are adviвeд to take 301 with any combination of units.

301 SYSTEMATIC PHARMACOLOGY (8 points) A course of 26 lectures and 72 hours practical work. Tutorials will be given at fortnightly intervals. One essay will be prepared.

190 PHARMACOLOGY

SYLLABUS Lectures and practical classes will be concerned with the general principles of pharmacology and the general effects, mechanisms of action and therapeutic uses of the major groups of drugs. 302 PHYSIOLOGICAL PHARMACOLOGY (4 points) A course of twelve lectures and 48 hours practical work. Tutorials will be given at fortnightly intervals. One essay will be prepared. SYLLABUS The course will be concerned with the nature, identification, assay, biosynthesis, metabolism and action of transmitter agents and autocoids. The role of these substances in physiological and pathological processes and modification of their actions by drugs will also be covered. 303 BEHAVIOURAL PHARMACOLOGY (4 points) A course of twelve lectures and 48 hours practical work. Tutorials will be given at fortnightly intervals. One essay will be prepared. SYLLABUS The course will cover the mechanism of action and effects of drugs which stimulate or depress central nervous system function and affect consciousness, mood or behaviour. Drug addiction and abuse will also be studied. 304 MOLECULAR AND BIOCHEMICAL PHARMACOLOGY (4 points) A course of twelve lectures and 48 hours practical work. Tutorials will be given at fortnightly intervals. One essay will be prepared. SYLLABUS The course will cover the following topics: The nature of receptors. The physico-chemical basis of drug action. The kinetics of drug action. Structure activity relationships. Biochemical mechanisms in drug action. The absorption, distribution, excretion, metabolism and interaction of drugs. 305 APPLIED PHARMACOLOGY (4 points) A course of twelve lectures and 48 hours practical work. Tutorials will be given at fortnightly intervals. One essay will be prepared. SYLLABUS The course will be concerned with the application of pharmacological principles and systematics to drug screening and toxicity studies. The Importance of bioassay techniques, biostatistics, pharmacogene- tics and clinical trials will be considered. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Units 301-305 inclusive. Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 4th ed Macmillan 1970 Bowman W C Rand M J & West G B Textbook of Pharmacology, Black- well 1970 Barlow R B Introduction to Chemical Pharmacology, 2nd ed Methuen 1984 Rand M J Raper C & McCulloch M W An Introduction to the Physio- logy and Pharmacology of the Autoпomiс Nervous System, Austral. Pharm. Pub. Co. 1971 191 PHARMACOLOGY

Recommended for reference: Appropriate references for particular Units will be indicated in lectures. Moroney M J Facts from Figures. Pelican 1963 Finney D J Statistical Methods in Biological Assay, 2nd ed Griffin 1964 Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology, 3rd ed Churchill 1966 Burn J H The Autonomic Nervous System, 3rd ed Blackwell 1967 Albert A Selective Toxicity, 4th ed Methuen 1968 Laurence D R & Bacherach A L Evaluation of Drug Activities: Pharmaco- metrics, Academic Press 1964 Goldstein A Arnow L & Kalman S M Principles of Drug Action. The Basis of Pharmacology, lieber 1968 Crossland J Lewis's Pharmacology, Livingstone 1970 Rech R & Moore K An Introduction to Psychopharmacology, Raven Press 1971 Turner P Clinical Aspects of Autonomic Pharmacology, Heinemann 1969 Review articles in Annual Review of Pharmacology. Pharmacological Reviews, Advances in Drug Research, Academic Press Progress in Medicinal Chemistry, Butterworth Physiological Pharmacology, Academic Press EXAMINATION Terminal written examinations in the units of the subject will be held during the year. For unit 301 the written examination will be of 3 hours and for units 302-304 inclusive the written examinations will each be of 2 hours duration. Oral examinations will be given following the written examinations. Practical examinations will be given where necessary. Practical work, reports and essays will be taken into account in assessing the examination results. A final examination may be required for students taking two or more units.

306 OCULAR PHARMACOLOGY (Third Year—Optometry Course) A course of not more than fifteen lectures, four 3-hour practical sessions and five tutorials will be held during the third term. It will be orientated towards the actions, side effects and toxic reactions of drugs which act on the eye. SYLLABUS The course will cover the pharmacology of endogenous and exogenous substances of clinical and scientific importance in relationship to the functions and diseases of the eye. In particular the course will cover such groups of drugs as Mydriatics and Cycloplegles; Miotics and Cyclospastics; Local Anaesthetics; Antibacterials; Anti-viral agents; Stains; Preservatives; Thickening agents; Collyria and Lubricants. The subject matter, in general, will comprise the following: (a) The autonomic innervation of the eye and drugs acting on intraocular muscles; their mechanisms of actions; interaction; untoward effects. (b) Other drugs commonly used in ocular conditions including local anaesthetics, antihistamines, anti-inflammatory drugs and the chemotherapy of ocular infections. (c) Drug hypersensitivity with special reference to the eye. (d) Drugs which may cause or exacerbate glaucomatous states, and drugs used to treat glaucoma. (e) Lacrimators; CW agents, domestic and industrial chemicals. (f) Drug absorption and penetration through the cornea; vehicles for drugs applied topically to the eye. 192 PHYSICS

(g) Drug regulations; classification and naming of drugs. (h) Doses and preparations of drugs and diagnostic aids which may be used or encountered by optometrists; ocular first aid involving drugs. Four 3-hour sessions Illustrating the practical aspects of the course. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Rand M J Raper C & McCulloch M W An introduction to the Physiology and Pharmacology of the Autonomic Nervous System, Aust Pharm Pub Co 1971 Bowman W C Rand M J & West G B Textbook of Pharmacology, Black- well 1970 Ellis P P & Smith D L Handbook of Ocular Therapeutics and Pharma- cology, 3rd ed Mosby 1969 Recommended for reference: Havener W H Ocular Pharmacology, Mosby 1968 Newell F W Ophthamology, Principles and Concepts, 2nd ed Mosby 1969 Goodman L S & Gillman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 4th ed Macmillan 1970 Patterson G Miller J J H & Patterson G Drug Mechanisms In Glaucoma, Churchill 1966 Potts A M 'The Effects of Drugs upon the Eye' in Physiological Pharma- cology Vol il, Academic Press 1965 Mitchell D W A Drugs In Refraction, Brit Optical Assoc London 1959 Meakin W J The Ophthalmic Opticians Drug Cupboard, Hatton 1980 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper and oral examination. A practical examination may be required if necessary.

385 PHYSICS Many units given by the school of Physics are offered at two levels, standard and advanced. In general, the treatment of the subject matter in the advanced level units will be deeper than that at the standard level, and may Involve more sophisticated mathematics. Admission to advanced level units In the first year is restricted to students with a strong Higher School Certificate background in physics and mathematics, and preference may be given to students intending to major In physics. Admission to advanced level units in the second and third year is restricted to students with a strong background In the prerequisites for those units and in Physics and Mathematics as a whole. In addition, in the first year, terminal units are offered. The syllabus of these units covers the basic principles of physics without the use of a д- vanced mathematics. Material of general Interest is introduced, and applications of physics to other disciplines ars used as much as possible. Except in special circumstances, a pass in a terminal unit will not permit entry Into second year physics units. Students wishing to take 24 or more points worth of third year physics unite must Include 120 or 140 Physics in their courses.

193 в PHYSICS

100 LEVEL 121 PHYSICS: MECHANICS, WAVE MOTION (ADVANCED) 29 lectures; weekly tutorials; 1st term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examina- nation. (H. H. Solotin) The kinematics and dynamics of a single particle and of systems of particles. Dynamics of rigid bodies. Oscillatory motion and wave motion. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Classical Physics, Vols 1 & ii Allyn & Bacon Recommended for reference: French A P Newtonian Mechanics, Nelson French A P Vibrations end Waves, Nelson Berkeley Physics Course, Vol I McGraw-Hill Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures in Physics, Vol I Addison-Wesley Alonso M & Finn E J Physics, Addison-Wesley 122 PHYSICS: ELECTROMAGNETISM (ADVANCED) 24 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (D. G. Sargood) Electromagnetic theory leading to Maxwell's equations in integral form. Applications to Electrostatics, Magnetostatics, Electromagnetic waves. Circuit theory. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Classical Physics, Vol II Allyn & Bacon Recommended for reference: Alonso M & Finn E J Physics, Addison-Wesley Berkeley Physics Course, Vol II McGraw-Hill Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures In Physics, Vol II Addison-Wesley 123 PHYSICS: MODERN PHYSICS (ADVANCED) 21 lectures; weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (M. N. Thompson) Wave particle duality in radiation, leading to elementary quantum concepts and wave mechanics. Applications to simple atomic systems, spectra, x-rays and solids. The nature of the nuclear force and nuclear stability. Nuclear reactions as a probe of nuclear structure. Introduction to elementary particles. 194 PHYSICS

Prescribed textbook: Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Modern Physics, 2nd ed Allyn & Bacon Recommended for Reference: Wehr M R & Richards J A Physics of the Atom, Addison-Wesley 141 PHYSICS; MECHANICS, WAVE MOTION 29 lectures; weekly tutorials; 1st term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination; (R. H. Wilkinson) Motion of a particle. Motion of a rigid body. Fluids. Oscillations. Waves. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Classical Physics, Vols I & Il Allyn & Bacon Recommended for reference: Alonso M & Finn E J Physics, Addison-Wesley Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures In Physics, Vol I Addison-Wesley 142 PHYSICS: ELECTROMAGNETISM 24 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (G. C. Joshi) Electromagnetic theory leading to Maxwell's equations in integral form. Applications to electrostatics, magnetostatics, electromagnetic waves. Circuit theory. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Classical Physics, Vol II Allyn & Bacon Recommended for reference: Alonso M & Finn E J Fundamental University Physics, Vol 11 Addison- Wesley Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures in Physics, Vol II Addison-Wesley 143 PHYSICS: MODERN PHYSICS 21 lectures; weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminel examination. (K. A. Amos) Atoms, molecules, nuclei, elementary particles and their Interactions. Gen- eration and properties of radiation. Microscopic analysis of the macroscopic matter in the gaseous, plasma, liquid and solid states. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Modern Physics, 2nd ed Allyn & Bacon

195 PHYSICS

161 PHYSICS: MECHANICS (TERMINAL) 27 lectures; 1st term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (G. J. F. Legge) The Nature Scope and Principles of Physics. Particle Mechanics. Rigid Body Mechanics. Fluid Mechanics. The Wave Equation. Relativity.

BOOK Prescribed textbook: •Ford K W Basic Physics, Blaisdell 1968

162 PHYSICS: THERMODYNAMICS AND ELECTROMAGNETISM (TERMINAL) 26 lectures; 2nd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (А. P. Booth) Thermodynamics: first and second laws, kinetic theory, viscosity. Elec- tromagnetism: statics, dynamics, electromagnetic waves. Light.

BOOK Prescribed textbook: •Ford K W Basic Physics, Blaisdell 1968

163 PHYSICS: QUANTUM PHYSICS (TERMINAL) 21 lectures; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (E. G. Muirhead) Quantum Mechanics: waves, particles, uncertainty principle. Atoms: structure including Pauli and exclusion principles, spectra, x-rays. Molecules: forces including surface tension and elasticity, structure. Nuclei: forces, radioactivity, reactions. Particles and Interactions.

ВOO к - Prescribed textbook: 'Ford K W Basic Physics, Blaisdell 1968.

198 PHYSICS: LABORATORY WORK (TERMINAL) Approximately 60 hours; all three terms; 2 points; examined continuously throughout year. (E. Mckenzie)

199 PHYSICS: LABORATORY WORK Approximately 72 hours; all three terms; 2 points; examined continuously throughout year. (E. Mckenzie) 196 PHYSICS

120 PHYSICS Consists of 121, 122, 123 and 199 Physics. Students taking these 140 PHYSICS courses must enrol for Consists of 141, 142, 143 and 199 Physics. the four units included within each course. 160 PHYSICS Consists of 161, 162, 163 and 198 Physics.

200 LEVEL 241 PHYSICS: ELECTRONICS 18 lectures; 54 hours laboratory; weekly tutorials; 1st term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (J. L. Rouse) Properties of networks and alternating currents. The vacuum tube and transistor. Simple amplifiers and their properties. Feedback and oscillators. Prerequisites: 122 or 142 Physics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Brophy J J Basic Electronics for Scientists, 1 st or 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 227 PHYSICS: OPTICS (ADVANCED) 16 lectures; weekly tutorials; 1st term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (D. G. Sargood) Fourier Transforms; Coherence; Superposition; Fraunhofer diffraction; Fresnel diffraction; Applications to optical instruments. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Fowles G R Introduction to Modern Optics, Holt Rinehart & Winston Ghatak A J An Introduction to Modern Optics, McGraw-Hill Andrews C L Optics of the Electromagnetic Spectrum, Prentice-Hall Jenkins F A & White H E Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw-Hill 247 PHYSICS: OPTICS 16 lectures; weekly tutorials; 1st term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (C. Mckenzie) Fourier Transforms; Coherence; Superposition; Fraunhofer diffraction; Fresnel diffraction; Applications to optical instruments. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Andrews C L Optics of the Electromagnetic Spectrum, Prentice-Hall Jenkins F A & White H E Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw-Hill Fowles G R Introduction to Modern Optics, Holt Rinehart & Winston

197 PHYSICS

228 PHYSICS: RELATIVITY (ADVANCED) 8 lectures; tutorials; 1st term; 1 point; 1 hour terminal examination. Lorentz Transformations; kinematics; Dynamics: Applications. (D. G. Sargood) Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: French A P Special Relativity, Nelson Recommended for Reference: Taylor E F & Wheeler J A Spacetime Physics, Freeman

248 PHYSICS: RELATIVITY 8 lectures; tutorials; 1st term; 1 point; 1 hour terminal examination. Lorentz Transformations; kinematics; Dynamics: Applications. (G. C. Joshi) Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: French A P Special Relativity, Nelson Recommended for Reference: Taylor E F & Wheeler J A Spacetime Physics, Freeman.

223 PHYSICS: QUANTUM MECHANICS (ADVANCED) 24 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (B. M. Spicer) Basic postulates of quantum mechanics. Its experimental basis and relation to classical mechanics. Solutions of the Schroedinger equation for simple systems including (1) barriers and alpha-radioactive decay, (2) harmonic oscillator, (3) hydrogen atom, (4) deuteron. Introduction to Angular Momentum and Spin. Atomic and Nuclear Shell Structure. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics It will be assumed that students are also taking 241 or 261 or 281 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Ziock K Basic Quantum Mechanics, Wiley Recommended for reference: Eisberg R M Fundamentals of Modern Physics, McGraw-Hill Pauling L & Wilson E B Introduction to Quantum Mechanics, McGraw- Hill Livesey D L Atomic and Nuclear Physics, Ginn-Blaisdell

198 PHYSICS

243 PHYSICS: QUANTUM MECHANICS 24 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (B. H. J. McKellar) Wave packets, operators, commutators, the Schroedinger wave equation. Applications to the rectangular potential well, the harmonic oscillator, the hydrogen-like atom, etc. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics. It will be assumed that students are also taking 241 or 281 or 281 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Scharff M Elementary Quantum Mechanics, Wiley Recommended for reference: Eisberg R M Fundamentals of Modern Physics, Wiley Wichmann E H Quantum Physics, Berkeley Physics Course Vol. 4, McGraw-Hill Alonso M & Finn E J Fundamental University Physics Vol 3 Quantum and Statistical Physics, Addison-Wesley

224 PHYSICS: CLASSICAL MECHANICS (ADVANCED) 18 lectures; tutorials; 2nd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (K. C. Hines) Fundamentals, Lagrangian mechanics, Hamiltonian mechanics, Variational principles, Transformation theory, Poisson brackets, Applications. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics or 141 Mathematics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Konopinski E J Classical Descriptions of Motion, Freeman Goldtsein H Classical Mechanics, Addison-Wesley

244 PHYSICS: CLASSICAL MECHANICS 18 lectures: weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (J. L. Rouse) Development of Lagrange's equations. Variational principles. Invariance and conservation laws. Hamilton's canonical equations. Transformations. Poisson brackets. Related topics and applications. Oscillatory systems, including damped, forced and coupled oscillations. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics or 141 Mathematics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Konopinski E J Classical Descriptions of Motion, Freeman Goldstein H Classical Mechanics, Add ison-Wesley

199 PHYSICS

225 PHYSICS: ELECTROMAGNETISM (ADVANC ED) 16 lectures; weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (H. H. Bolotin) Maxwell's equations in differential form. Electromagnetic waves. Electric and magnetic fields in material media. Electromagnetic potentials. Solu- tions of Laplace's and Poisson's equations. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 122 or 142 Physics; 101 Mathematics. It will be assumed that students are also taking 241 or 261 or 281 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Lorrain P & Corson D R Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, 2nd cd Freeman Recommended for reference: Reitz J R & Milford F J Foundations of Electromagnetic Theory, Addi- son-Wesley Marion J B Classical Electromagnetic Radiation, Academic Press Trail N Classical Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill 245 PHYSICS: ELECTROMAGNETISM 16 lectures; weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (G. G. Shute) Maxwell's equations in differential form. Electromagnetic Waves. Electric and Magnetic fields in material media. Electromagnetic Potentials. Solu- tions of Laplace's equation. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 122 or 142 Physics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Lorrain P & Corson D R Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, 2nd ed Freeman Recommended for reference: Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures in Physics, Vol Il Addison-Wesley Marion J B Classical Electromagnetic Radiation, Academic Press

226 PHYSICS: THERMAL PHYSICS (ADVANCED) 16 lectures; weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (G. C. Joshi) The laws of thermodynamics. Ideal and real gases. Elementary kinetic theory. Transport theory. Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics. PHYSICS

Books Recommended for reference: Sears F W Thermodynamics Kinetic Theory of Gases and Statistical Mechanics, Addison-Wesley 246 PHYSICS: THERMAL PHYSICS 18 lectures; tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination; The laws of thermodynamics. Ideal and real gases. Elementary kinetic theory. Transport theory. (N. E. Frankel) Prerequisites: 121 or 141 Physics; 101 Mathematics. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Sears F W Thermodynamics Kinetic Theory of Gases and Statistical Mechanics, Addison-Wesley 299 PHYSICS: LABORATORY WORK 84 hours; 2nd and 3rd terms; 3 points; examined continuously throughout course. (R. L. Abbey)

300 LEVEL Third year units fall Into two groups: core units and supplementary units. The core units are 320 or 340, 321 or 341, 322 or 342, 323 or 343 and 324 or 344. Students taking 18 or more points worth of third year units are required to include core units and laboratory work according to the following table: Points Taken Number of Core Units Laboratory Work required Units required X10 No restriction None allowed 11-17 No courses are allowable in this range 18-23 at least 2 391 or 392 24-29 at least 3 392 or 393 30-35 at least 4 393 or 394 38 or more all 6 394, 395 or 398

310 PHYSICS: UNDERGRADUATE SEMINAR One hour per week throughout the year. The aim of this unit is to encourage students to consider the wider aspects of physics; indeed students are encouraged to present papers on topics which are of particular interest to them. The following topics typify the nature of the seminar: (a) Recent advances in physics. (b) The Physics Research Scene in the School of Physics, elsewhere in Australia, and overseas. (c) The efficient use of scientific literature. (d) Report and paper writing. (e) The impact of physics on society. Each seminar will be led by a staff member, visitor or student who will give a brief talk and lead discussion in which all students are expected

201 PHYSICS

to participate. The whole seminar programme will be organized by a senior staff member. 320 PHYSICS; QUANTUM MECHANICS (ADVANCED) 30 lectures plus tutorials; 1st term; 5 points; 3-hour terminal examination. (J. W. G. Wignall) The general principles of non-relativistic quantum mechanics (including Hilbert space formulation), with illustrative applications to atomic, nuclear and solid-state physics. Prerequisites: 223 or 243 Physics; 241 or 261 or 281 Mathematics. It is strongly recommended that students with 241 or 261 Mathematics should also have 201 or 221 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Merzbacher E Quantum Mechanics, 2nd ed Wiley or Messiah A Quantum Mechanics, 2 vols North-Holland or Gottfried K Quantum Mechanics, Vol I Benjamin Recommended for reference: Dirac P A M Quantum Mechanics, OUP Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures in Physics, Vol Ill Addison-Wesley Jammer M The Conceptual Development of Quantum Mechanics, McGraw-H ill Park D Introduction to the Quantum Theory, McGraw-Hill 340 PHYSICS: QUANTUM MECHANICS 24 lectures; tutorials; assignments; 1st term; 4 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (G. G. Shute) The general principles of non-relativistic quantum mechanics with relevant applications. The treatment given will closely follow that in the. prescribed text. Prerequisites: 223 or 243 or 263 Physics; 241 or 261 or 281 Mathe- matics. It is strongly recommended that students with 241 or 261 Mathematics should also have 201 or 221 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Merzbacher E Quantum Mechanics, 2nd ed Wiley Recommended for reference: Messiah A Quantum Mechanics, 2 Vols North-Holland Saxon D S Elementary Quantum Mechanics, Holden-Day Dirac P A M Quantum Mechanics, OUP Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures in Phys- ics, Vol 111 Addison-Wesley Gottfried K Quantum Mechanics, Vol 1 Benjamin Park D Introduction to the Quantum Theory, McGraw-Hill 202 PHYSICS

321 PHYSICS; THERMAL PHYSICS (ADVANCED) 30 lectures; weekly tutorials; 1st term; 5 points; 3-hour terminal examination. (G. I. Opat) The foundation and applications of thermodynamics and statistical mechanics are presented. Prerequisites: 226 or 246 Physics. It is recommended that students should have taken some second year Mathematics: either 281 or a combination of 241 or 261 with 201 or 221. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: kittel C Thermal Physics, Wiley Recommended for reference: Morse P M Thermal Physics, Benjamin Callen H B Thermodynamics, Wiley Reif F Statistical and Thermal Physics, McGraw-Hill 341 PHYSICS; THERMAL PHYSICS 18 lectures; weekly tutorials; 1st term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal e»- amination. (G. I. Opat) The foundation and applications of thermodynamics and statistical mechanics are presented. Prerequisites: 226 or 246 Physics. It is recommended that students should have taken some second year Mathematics: either 281 or a combination of 241 or 261 with 201 or 221. BOOKS Recommended for reference: kittel C Thermal Physics, Wiley Morse P M Thermal Physics, Benjamin Callen H B Thermodynamics, Wiley Reif F Statistical and Thermal Physics, McGraw-Hill 322 PHYSICS: NUCLEAR PHYSICS (ADVANCED) 30 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 6 points; 3-hour terminal examination. (K. Amos) Static Nuclear Properties; The two nucleon problem; Nuclear models; Radioactive decay; Nuclear reactions; Plus special topics (eg pairing forces In nuclei, Isobaric spin, parity non-conservation In ß-decay). Prerequisites: 223 or 243 Physics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Cohen В L Concepts of Nuclear Physics, McGraw-Hill 203 PHYSICS

Recommended for reference: Segre E Nuclei and Particles, Benjamin Paul E B Nuclear and Particle Physics, North Holland von Buttlar H Nuclear Physics — an Introduction, Academic Press

342 PНYSICS: NUCLEAR PHYSICS 18 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (E. G. Muirhead) Static nuclear properties; The two nucleon problem; Nuclear modes; Radioactive decay; Nuclear reactions. Prerequisites: 223 or 243 Physics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Cohen B L Concepts of Nuclear Physics, McGraw-Hill Recommended for reference: Sagre E Nuclei and Particles, Benjamin Paul E В Nuclear and Particle Physics, North Holland Mayerhof W E Elements of Nuclear Physics, McGraw-Hill von Buttlar H Nuclear Physics — an Introduction, Academic Press

323 PHYSICS; SOLID STATE PHYSICS (ADVANCED) 30 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 5 points; 3-hour terminal examination. (M. Fehlmann) Structural, Mechanical and Thermal Properties of Solids; Electrical and Magnetic Properties; Quantum Theory of Solids. Prerequisites: 223 or 243 Physics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Kittel C Introduction to Solid State Physics, 4th ed Wiley 1971 Recommended for reference: Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures In Physics, Vol Ill Addison-Wesley 1965

343 PHYSICS: SOLID STATE PHYSICS 18 lectures; weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (M. Fehlmann) Structural, Mechanical and Thermal Properties of Solids. Electrical and Magnetic Properties. Quantum Theory of Solids. Prerequisites: 223 or 243 Physics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Kittel C Introduction to Solid State Physics, 4th ed Wiley 1971 204 PHYSICS

Recommended for reference: Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures in Physics, vol 3 Addison-Wesley 1965

324 PHYSICS: ELECTRODYNAMICS (ADVANCED) 30 lectures; weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 5 points; 3-hour terminal examination. (S. Y. Lo) The syllabus for this course assumes a knowledge of Maxwell's equations in differential form. It covers a derivation from the Maxwell theory of the standard optical results such as laws of reflection and refraction, total internal reflection and polarization Including a consideration of complex refractive indices. Other topics included are electron theory, scattering of electromagnetic radiation, dispersion in Insulators, metals and plasmas, radiation of accel. charge, tensor form of electrodynamics. Prerequisites: 225 or 245 Physics; 241 or 261 or 281 Mathematics. It is strongly recommended that students with 241 or 261 Mathematics should also have 201 or 221 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Jackson J D Classical Electrodynamics, Wiley Recommended for reference: Panofsky W K & Phillips M Classical Electricity and Magnetism, Addi- son-Wesley

344 PHYSICS; ELECTRODYNAMICS 18 lectures; weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (S. Y. Lo) The syllabus for this course assumes a knowledge of Maxwell's equations in differential form. It covers a derivation from the Maxwell theory of the standard optical results such as laws of reflection and refraction, total Internal reflection and polarization Including a consideration of complex refractive indices. Other topics included are electron theory, scattering of electromagnetic radiation, dispersion in insulators, metals and plasmas and radiation from an oscillating dipole. Prerequisites: 225 or 245 Physics; 241 or 261 or 281 Mathematics It Is strongly recommended that students with 241 or 281 Mathematics should also have 201 or 221 Mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Tra11i N Classical Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill 360 PHYSICS; ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR PHYSICS 18 lectures; 3rd term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (B. M. Spicer) The experimental and theoretical study of the structure and properties of atoms and molecules and of various atomic and molecular processes.

206 PHYSICS

Prerequisites: 223 or 243 Physics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Bethe H A & Jackiw R Intermediate Quantum Mechanics, Benjamin Recommended for reference: Heine V Group Theory in Quantum Mechanics, Pergamon kauzmann W Quantum Chemistry, Academic Press Marton L & Marton C Methods of Experimental Physics, Vols 3 4 & 7 Academic Press 361 PHYSICS: DIFFRACTION 18 lectures; 3rd term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (A. E. C. Spargo) An introduction to the production and interpretation of diffraction patterns and images formed by the scattering of light, x-rays, electrons and neut- rons from regular and irregular macroscopic and atomic systems. Prerequisites: 222 or 242 or 227 or 247 Physics; 241 or 261 or 281 Mathematics. It is strongly recommended that students with 241 or 261 Mathematics should also have 201 or 221 Mathematics. BOOKS Recommended for reference: James R W The Optical Principles of X-ray Diffraction, Bell Guinier A X-ray Diffraction, Freeman 362 PHYSICS: ELECTRONICS 18 lectures; 1st term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. (A. G. Klein) A selection from: Response of linear systems to non-sinusoidal inputs. Laplace Transforms. Transients in linear systems. Description of circuits in the complex frequency domain. Wide-band amplifiers, pulse amplifiers, tuned amplifiers, operational amplifiers and typical applications. Non linear circuits. Modulation. Switching. Digital Circuits. Prerequisite: 241 Physics. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Brophy Basic Electronics for Scientists, McGraw-Hill Millman & Halkias Electronic Devices and Circuits, McGraw-Hill Edminister Electric Circuits, Schaum Millman & Taub Pulse, Digital and Switching Wave Forms 363 PHYSICS: ASTRONOMY 12 lectures; 3rd term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination or examina- till by essay. (R. H. Wilkinson) Observational Astronomy — Visual & Positional, Solar System, Stars: Magnitudes & Parallaxes, Colours, Spectral Classes, Temperatures, Masses, Radii & Variability, Groups of Stars, Distances & Populations, The Galaxy and Other Galaxies, Stellar Structure & Stellar Evolution.

206 PHYSICS

Boos Prescribed textbook: Payne-Gaposchkin C Introduction to Astronomy, University Paperbacks Recommended for reference: Norton A P & Inglis J G Norton's Star Atlas, Gall & Inglis

364 PHYSICS; BIOPHYSICS 12 lectures; 1st term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination. (D. J. Dewhurst) Non-linear and Time-variant systems in biology. Transport of materials in living systems; osmosis, diffusion. The living cell: composition, resting and action potentials. Propagation of nerve impulses. Elements of communication and control theory. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Katz B Nerve, Muscle and Synapse, McGraw-Hill Recommended for reference: Cherry C On Human Communication, Wiley

365 PHYSICS: COSMIC RAYS 12 lectures; 2nd term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination. (V. C. Officer) High energy interactions, Modulation, Geophysical effects, Spectral composition, Extensive air showers. Origin and galactic phenomena. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hooper J E & Scharff M The Cosmic Radiation, Methuen Galbraith W Extensive Air Showers, Butterworth Hopper V D Cosmic Radiation and High Energy Interactions, Elek Logos

366 PHYSICS; DIGITAL COMPUTING 12 lectures; 2nd term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination. (А. G. Klein) Number representation; codes. Boolean Algebra and combinatorial logic. Sequential logic. Functional blocks; Registers; Memory systems. Com- puter Instructions and their implementation. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hughes J L Computer Lab Workbook, Digital Equipment Corp Siegel P Understanding Digital Computers 2nd ed, Wiley Foster C Computer Architecture, Van Nostrand Maley G A & Earle P Design of Transistor Digital Computers, Prentice- Hall

207 PHYSICS

368 PHYSICS: HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 12 lectures; 1st term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination. (H. Krips) A look at some of the paradoxes in the foundations of quantum theory. Discussions will cover some of the relevant material in the references below. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Feynman Leighton & Sands The Feynman Lectures on Physics Vol 3, Addison-Wesley Heisenberg W The Physical Principles of the Quantum Theory, Dover

370 PHYSICS: THEORY OF EXPERIMENTS 12 lectures; 3rd term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination. (J. L. Rouse) Scientific method, measurement, error classification, accuracy, precision, elementary mathematical probability, probability distributions, frequentist and baysian interpretations of probability, the theory of error.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Arley N & Buch K R Introduction to the Theory of Probability and Statistics, Wiley Parratt L G Probability and Experimental Errors in Science, Wiley

371 PHYSICS: UPPER ATMOSPHERE PHYSICS 12 lectures; 3rd term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination. (J. Thomas) A course dealing with the formation structure, and physical properties of the upper atmosphere and the widely varying experimental techniques used in its investigation.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Fleagle R G & Businger J A An Introduction to Atmospheric Physics, Academic Press Hines C O et al Physics of the Earth's Upper Atmosphere, Prentice-Hall Air Force Cambridge Research Laboratories Handbook of Geophysics and Space Environments, McGraw-Hill 1965 Haymes R C Introduction to Space Science, Wiley

375 PHYSICS: PARTICLE PHYSICS 12 lectures; 2nd term; 2 points; 1-hour terminal examination. (G. I. Opat) An Introduction to the physics of the 'elementary' particles. The course will discuss the experimental methods used in high energy physics to probe the nature and interactions of the elementary particles, and give some idea of the way in which modern particle theory seeks to classify the particles and explain their behaviour. 208 PHYSIOLOGY

Prerequisites: Physics 223 or 243, and 222 or 242. It will be assumed that students have taken Physics 320 or 340. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Frazer W R Elementary Particles, Prentice-Hall 1968. 390-396 PHYSICS: LABORATORY WORK 6-24 weeks; four mornings a week; all three terms; 4-16 points; examined continuously throughout course. (V. C. Officer) Unit Period Points 390 6 weeks 4 391 9 weeks 6 392 12 weeks 8 393 15 weeks 10 394 18 weeks 12 395 21 weeks 14 396 24 weeks 16 Laboratories available include: Astronomy, Atomic Physics, Computer Pro- gramming, Diffraction, Electronics, Nuclear Physics, Numerical Analysis, Workshop Practice.

387 PHYSIOLOGY 200 LEVEL 201 PHYSIOLOGY A course of two lectures and 2} hours practical work per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS An Introduction to the physiology of the cell, with special reference to nerve and muscle, followed by an outline of mammalian aye- tematic physiology and the principles of the regulation of the Internal environment. PRACTICAL WORK Laboratory work on the cell, nerve and muscle. Ex- amination of the blood. Experiments on the heart, circulation, respiration and metabolism in man and other animals. There is no fee payable for practical work in physiology. Students are required to provide themselves with a Centigrade clinical thermometer, a 100°C thermometer and a set of dissecting instruments. In order that they may be allocated to a particular practical session, students must report to the department of Physiology during the second last week of the long vacation, stating the other units they will be taking and, If desired, nотinating partners. Students absent from Melbourne should communicate by letter. Laboratory Manual: Students should obtain these from the department of Physiology—room N212. Manuals will be issued after 2 March. BOOKS Preliminary Reading: Schmidt-Nielsen K Animal Physiology, 2nd ad Prentice-Hall 1984

209 PHYSIOLOGY

Prescribed Textbooks: Vander A J Sherman J H & Luciano D S The Mechanisms of Body Func- tion, McGraw-Hill 1970 'Lippold O C J & Winton F R Human Physiology, 6th ed Churchill 1968 or 'Guyton A C Textbook of Medical Physiology, 4th еd Saunders 1971 For students intending to proceed to Part Il: Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics, 19th ed Saunders 1965 or •Dayson H & Eggleton M G Principles of Human Physiology, 14th ed Churchill 1968 'Practical Notes—Published by the department. Recommended for reference: Young J Z The Life of Mammals, OUP 1957 Dayson H A Textbook of General Physiology, 2nd ed Churchill 1959 Selected topics from Scientific American. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in Physiology, and viva voce if required by the department. A practical examination may be required if records of laboratory work are unsatisfactory.

300 LEVEL 301 PHYSIOLOGY 302 PHYSIOLOGY Three lectures per week, with practical work. 302 Physiology is intended for those who are taking another subject as their major one, and who require a sound background in Physiology. Students considering an Honours year in Physiology are recommended to take 301 Physiology. SYLLABUS The course will cover the fields of cellular and systematic physiology and biophysics at an advanced level. PRACTICAL WORK 302 Physiology: Six hours per week, covering standard physiological techniques, including electrophysioiogy and mammalian experiments. 301 Physiology: As for Physiology 302 together with an additional six hours per week on more advanced experimental work in the fields of systematic and general physiology and biophysics. Apparatus is supplied by the department of Physiology. In addition, each student must provide himself with a set of dissecting instruments. Books Preliminary reading: Kennedy D ed The Living Cell: readings from Scientific American, Free- man 1966 Prescribed textbooks: •Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics, 19th ed Saunders 1965 or •Dayson H & Eggleton M G Principles of Human Physiology, 14th ed Churchill 1968 •Katz B Nerve, Muscle and Synapse, McGraw-Hill 1966 210 PSYCHOLOGY

Recommended for reference: Ganong W F Review of Medical Physiology, 3rd ed Lange 1967 Dayson H A Textbook of General Physiology, 2nd ed Churchill 1959 EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers in examination term III and viva voce examination if required by examiners. Practical work and other assignments throughout the year will be assessed as 30 per cent of the total possible mark of the final examination.

304 BIOPHYSICS AND NERVOUS SYSTEM Three lectures per week, with practical work, In first term only. This subject, which is identical with the first term of 302 Physiology, is normally taken by third year optometry and BSc (Education) students, but is available to other applicants if places are available within the quota.

BOOKS As for 302 Physiology EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper to be held in examination term I, and viva voce examination if required by examiners. Practical work and other assignments throughout the course will be assessed as part of the examination.

305 RENAL, ALIMENTARY AND LIPID TRANSPORT SYSTEMS Three lectures per week, with practical work, in third term only. This subject, which Is Identical with the third term of 302 Physiology, Is normally taken by third year BSc (Education) students, but Is available to other applicants if places are available within the quota.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics, 19th ed Saunders 1965 Recommended for reference: Dayson H & Eggleton M G Principles of Human Physiology, 14th ed Churchill 1968 Ganong W F Review of Medical Physiology, Lange 1965 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper, In examination term ill, and viva voce examination if required by eхamiпегs. Practical work and other assignments throughout the course will be assessed as part of the examination.

389 PSYCHOLOGY

N.B. Students wishing to make Psychology their career iп either academic or professional (applied) fields are advised that an Honours degree is likely to prove a minimum qualification In future. They are asked to consult the department of Psychology for advice end full details of the Honours course during their first year.

211 PSYCHOLOGY

100 LEVEL

101 PSYCHOLOGY Introductory course (identical with course Psychology I in Faculty of Arts Handbook). A course of two lectures and three hours practical and discussion classes per week during the year. -

SYLLABUS The development of behavioural patterns, individual differences and personality. The biological and social foundations of behaviour and experience. Learning, motivation and perception. Introduction to quantitative methods.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: as many as possible of the following: Anderson J Durston B H et el Study Methods, McGraw-Hill paperback 1969 Chaplin J P Dictionary of Psychology, Dell paperback 1968 Prescribed textbooks. All titles marked with an asterisk are expected to be in the possession of every student. •Guilford J P Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education, 4th ed McGraw-Hill paperback 1965 •King R A Readings for an Introduction to Psychology 3rd ed, McGraw- Hill paperback 1971 *Wright D S Taylor Ann et al Introducing Psychology An Experimental Approach, Penguin 1970 All students with less than HSC mathematics competence or who doubt their ability to deal with the material in Guilford should buy and start studying the following paperback text: Bashaw W L Mathematics for Statistics, Wiley 1969 All students must obtain a set of reprints as under: •Selected set of 20 Scientific American offprints for Psychology 1 avail- abl a from MU Bookroom. EXAMINATION Examinations will take place during and at the end of the year. Laboratory and other practical work reports must be submitted at specified times.

200 LEVEL 201 PSYCHOLOGY (PASS and PROVISIONAL HONOURS) A course (comprising five units) of 72 lectures, 48 hours of discussion and practical work through the year. No correspondence courses are given. SYLLABUS HUMAN LEARNING A(i) Memory, verbal learning, representational processes.

212 PSYCHOLOGY

DEVELOPMENTAL AND PERSONALITY Human development to adulthood with particular emphasis on Integrative factors. Basic concepts of emotional and cognitive development. NEUROPSYCHOLOGY A Biological mechanisms of learning, memory, emotion. sleep and arousal. SOCIAL INTERACTION PROCESSES A(i) Interpersonal processes; Social attitudes; Group behaviour. QUANTITATIVE METHODS A(i) Aggregate measures. Elements of correlation, scaling and assessment. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: All titles marked with an asterisk are expected to be in the possession of every student. 'Argyle M The Psychology of Interpersonal Behaviour, Penguin 1987 •Baldwin A L Theories of Child Development, Wiley 1967 •Butter C M Neuropsychology. The Study of Brain and Behaviour, Brooks/Cole 1968 'Danziger K Socialization, Penguin 1971 •Guilford J P Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education, 4th ed, McGraw-Hill paperback 1965 'Neisser U Cognitive Psychology, Appleton-Century-Crofts 1967 'Postman L & keppel A eds Verbal Learning and Memory, Penguin 1969 •Smith P B ed Group Processes Selected Readings, Penguin 1970 Recommended for reference: Brenner C An Elementary Textbook of Psychoanalysis, Doubleday- Anchor 1957 Collins B E Social Psychology, Addison-Wesley 1970 Erikson E H Identity Youth and Crisis, Faber 1968 Ginsburg H & Opper S Piaget's Theory of Intellectual Development, Prentice-Hall 1969 Hall J F Verbal Learning afd Retention, Lippincott 1971 •Кintsch W Learning Memory and Conceptual Processes, Wiley 1970 Schaffer H R The Growth of Sociability, Penguin 1971 Triandis H C Attitude and Attitude Change, Wiley 1971 EXAMINATION All examinations will take place during or at the end of units. Reports must be submitted at times to be specified on the practical and observational work relating to the course and candidates must submit satisfactory workbooks.

PROVISIONAL HONOURS candidates only (tor whom all units are compulsory) 205 HUMAN LEARNING A(i) Discrimination, concept and probability learning. Problem solving. BOO КS Prescribed textbooks: 'Bourne L E Human Conceptuel Behaviour, Allyn & Bacon 1968 (paperback) •Кintsch W Learning Memory and Conceptual Processes, Wiley 1970

213 PSYCHOLOGY

Recommended for reference: Duncan C P ed Thinking Current Experimental Studies, Lippincott 1967 Melton A W ed Categories of Human Learning, Academic Press 1964 EXAMINATION After completion of the unit, before the end of the year.

211 PERCEPTION A Structure and function of perceptual sub-systems: vision, hearing, taste, smell, skin senses. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: •Geldard F A The Human Senses, Wiley 1972 EXAMINATION During and at the end of the unit.

224 SOCIAL INTERACTION PROCESSES А (ii) Theories of attitude change and group behaviour. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Kiesler C A Collins B E & Miller N Attitude Change a Critical Analysis of Theoretical Approaches, Wiley 1969 Lindzey G & Aronson E The Handbook of Social Psychology vol IV, Addison-Wesley 1968 Shaw M E & Costanzo P R Theories of Social Psychology, McGraw-Hill 1970 Zajonc R B ed Animal Social Psychology, Wiley 1969 EXAMINATION During and at the end of the unit.

226 SOCIAL RESEARCH METHODS Methods of obtaining, analysing and interpreting data from large and small samples.

EXAMINATION A research report after completion of the unit, but before the end of the year.

243 QUANTITATIVE METHODS A(Ii) Design of experiments and methods of data analysis. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: •Edwards A L Experimental Design in Psychological Research 4th ed, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1972 Recommended for reference: Campbell D T and Stanley J C Experimental and Quasi-experimental Design for Research, Rand McNally 1966 Sokol R R & Rohlf F J Biometry, Freeman 1969 Winer R B ed Statistical Principles in Experimental Design, McGraw- III' 1962 EXAMINATION During the unit.

214 SCIENCE LANGUAGES

300 LEVEL 301 PSYCHOLOGY (PASS and FINAL HONOURS)t A course (comprising five units) of 60 lectures, 24 tutorials and 40 hours of practical work. SYLLABUS PERSONALITY INTEGRATION Relations between thought, feeling and motivation. Personality theories emphasising cognitive and ego processes.

SOCIAL INTERACTION PROCESSES В Organizational factors in satisfaction and deviance in work and other contexts.

PSYCHOPATHOLOGY A & В a. Defining abnormality. Models for study of psychopathology. Research tactics. b. Abnormal behaviours and their treatment. Principles of behaviour modification.

QUANTITATIVE METHODS В Theory and practice of ability and trait measurement. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks. All titles marked with an asterisk are expected to be in the possession of every student. ' Butcher H J & Lomax D E eds Readings in Human Intelligence, Methuen Paperback 1972 'Cameron N Personality Development and Psychopathology: a Dynamic Approach, Houghton-Mifflin 1963 •Cattell R B The Scientific Analysis of Personality, Pelican 1965 'Katz D & Kahn R L The Social Psychology of Organizations, Wiley 1968 'Levy L Conceptions of Personality, Random House 1970 • Bott E The Family and Social Network, Tavistock paperback 1968 EXAMINATION Two papers et the end of the year. Satisfactory practical work reports and assignments during the year. There will be examinations during the year in Quantitative Methods B afd in Social Interaction Pro- cesses B.

395 SCIENCE LANGUAGES

201 SCIENCE FRENCH

A course of two classes per week throughout the year, plus tutorial assistance and language laboratory practice as required. SYLLABUS The aim of the course Is to enable research workers to read and translate French scientific literature. To this end, the course will provide Intensive instruction in the sound, word and sentence structure of French and practice in translation into English of research papers, extracts from technical publications and textbooks. The texts for

1 See 389-400 B.Sc. Hone School.

215 SCIENCE LANGUAGES

translation and analysis are graded, ultimately attaining the standards of current literature in the various branches of science. The course presumes no previous knowledge of the language, but students with substantial prior knowledge may be admitted to an accelerated course. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Brichant C French Grammar: The Key to Reading, Prentice-Hall 1968 Further notes and texts will be provided by the Language Centre. One of the following dictionaries: Harrap ś New Shorter French and English Dictionary Pt 1 French-English, Наггар 1967 de Vries L French/English Science Dictionary, McGraw-Hill 1962 or later Students wishing to acquire dictionaries specializing in particular subject areas should consult their lecturers. Recommended for reference: Brereton G The Concise French Verb Book, ULP 1965 Blair J H A Glossary of Language Learning Terms, Blackie 1963 EXAMINATION Terminal written examinations may be held during the year, as well as an annual written examination. Advanced courses in this subject may be offered where the demand exists and staff is available, Information on such courses will be circulated early in the year.

202 SCIENCE GERMAN A course of supervised self-tuition, including language laboratory work, totalling some 50 to 60 hours, generally spaced over at least two terms. In addition to the theoretical material, the course includes the translation of German scientific texts selected by each student from his/her own field of study. SYLLABUS This course teaches research workers to read and translate German scientific literature with the aid of specialized dictionaries. No previous knowledge of German is assumed but students with some prior knowledge can expect to complete the course more quickly. The course may be commenced at any time during the year, but once commenced, regularity of attendance is required. Enrolment should neverthe- less be effected at the beginning of the academic year in the same way as for any other subject. More detailed information is available from the Language Centre. BOOKS Prescribed reading: •De Vries L German/English Science Dictionary 3rd ed, McGraw-Hill 1959 or later 'Science German Course Material, Artemis Educational Materials avail- abl a from the Language Centre. EXAMINATION Students will sit for individualized examinations, totalling 3 hours, only after having completed all the theoretical and practical work of the course. 216 STATISTICS

203 SCIENCE RUSSIAN A course of two classes per week, throughout the year, plus tutorial assistance and language laboratory practice as required. SYLLABUS The aim of the course is to enable research workers to read and translate Russian scientific literature. To this end, the course will provide intensive instruction in the sound, word and sentence structure of Russian and practice In translation into English of research papers. extracts from technical publications and textbooks. The texts for translation and analysis are graded, ultimately attaining the standard of current literature in the various branches of science. The course presumes no previous knowledge of the language, but students with substantial prior knowledge may be admitted to an accelerated course. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Herbert A J The Structure of Technical English, Longmans 1965 Prescribed textbooks: 'Zatorski R J A Russian Course for Scientists, Melbourne 1984. Avail- abl a from the University Bookroom. Dictionaries: 'Callaham L I Russian/English Chemical and Polytechnics/ Dictionary, Wiley 1962 Recommended for reference: Blair J H A Glossary of Language Learning Terms, Blackle 1963 Dictionaries: Smirnitskii A I ed Russian/English Dictionary, Moscow 1961 Voskoboinik D L ed Russian/English Nuclear Dictionary, Fitzmatgiz Moscow 1960 Carpovlch E Russian/English Biological and Medical Dictionary, Tech- nical Dictionary Co New York 1958 US Department of the Army English/Russian, Russian/English Elec- tronics Dictionary, Technical Manual No 30-545 Washington 1956 Sofieno T A Russian/English Geological Dictionary, Fiцmatgiz Moscow 1960 EXAMINATION Terminal written examinations may be held during the year, as well as an annual written examination. Advanced courses In this subject may be offered where the demand exists and staff is available. Information on such courses will be circulated early In the year.

391 STATISTICS 100 LEVEL SYLLABUS Three units of equal value. Units may be taken Individually.

101 STATISTICS Descriptive statistics, probability and distributions: Approximately seven- tien lectures and seventeen hours of combined tutorial and practical work.

217 STATISTICS

SYLLABUS An elementary presentation of statistical logic and techniques as applied to problems of science and industry, illustrated by the use of clinical, field and laboratory data. Description of sample data by means of tables, graphs and simple arithmetic measures. Elements of probability. Random variables and probability distributions: binomial, Poisson, normal. Distribution of the sample mean; use of the central limit theorem.

102 STATISTICS Inference: Approximately seventeen lectures and seventeen hours of combined tutorial and practical work. SYLLABUS Sampling methods, populations, parameters. Estimation and hypothesis testing. Applications of t normal and chi-square distributions.

103 STATISTICS Design and analysis of experiments: Approximately seventeen lectures and seventeen hours of combined tutorial and practical work. SYLLABUS Linear regression and correlation. Elements of the design and analysis of experiments. One and two-way classification, Latin squares, factorial designs. Use of the F-distribution. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Borel E Probabilities and Life, Dover Wallis W A & Roberts H V The Nature of Statistics, Free Press Huff D Now to Lie with Statistics, Gollancz Prescribed textbooks: •Lindley D V & Miller J C P Cambridge Elementary Statistical Tables, CUP •Wonnacott T H & R J Introductory Statistics, Wiley Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be provided at the first lecture. EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. Candidates must also satisfactorily complete the practical work in each unit.

200 LEVEL SYLLABUS Three units, details of which are given below. Students not intending to major in Statistics may take individual units.

201 STATISTICS Probability and distribution theory: 24 lectures, 8 tutorial hours, 16 practice hours. SYLLABUS Event spaces, assigning probabilities to events, basic rules for probabilities of compound events. Random variables, probability distributions and cumulative distribution functions. Moment, and other, generating functions. Standard univariate and multivariate distributions and some of their applications.

218 STATISTICS

202 STATISTICS Statistical inference: 24 lectures, 8 tutorial hours, 16 practice hours. SYLLABUS Parameters of distributions. Estimation of parameters, consistency and unbiasedness of estimates. Hypotheses concerning parameters, tests of hypotheses and the notions of critical regions, size and power of tests. Details of some commonly occurring types of statistical tests; for example, tests involving the t, F and chi-square distributions.

203 STATISTICS Design and analysis of experiments, regression: 24 lectures, 8 tutorial hours, 16 practice hours. SYLLABUS Basic Ideas in the design of experiments such as randomization and formation of blocks. Elements of factorial designs. The method of least squares and its application in linear regression problems, including the analysis of experiments. BOOKS Prescribed tables: 'Lindley D V & Miller J C P Cambridge Elementary Statistical Tables, CUP Prescribed textbooks: None of the currently available textbooks is adequate for the entire course and students are advised to consult a member of staff about books which are particularly suitable for individual units. General texts treating the subject at the appropriate level are: Larson H J Introduction to Probability Theory and Statistical Inference, Wiley Hogg R J & Craig A T Introduction to Mathematical Statistics, Mac- millan Brunk H D Introduction to Mathematical Statistics, Blaisdell Plackett R L An Introduction to the Theory of Statistics, Oliver & Boyd EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. A practical examination will be held in third term.

OPERATIONAL RESEARCH The course In Operational Research comprises four units, details of which are as follows: 221 FORECASTING AND INVENTORY CONTROL 12 lectures, 12 hours practical work SYLLABUS Mathematical and statistical models of operational phenomena. Optimization. Mathematical aids to forecasting—simple trend curves and methods of fitting them, model selection, seasonal variation, forecasting of matrices. Stock control. 222 QUEUEING THEORY 12 lectures, 12 hours practical work SYLLABUS Arrival patterns, service mechanism. Simple queues with random arrivals, many server queues, series of queues. Waiting-time and busy period distributions. Random walks. Equilibrium behaviour. 223 LINEAR PROGRAMMING 12 lectures, 12 hours practical work

219 STATISTICS

SYLLABUS The simplex method, duality theory and special topics such as the transportation problem and network flow. 224 MATHEMATICAL PROGRAMMING 12 lectures, 12 hours tutorial and practical work SYLLABUS A selection from the following topics: Critical path analysis, parametric linear programming, Integer programming, dynamic programming, quadratic programming, non-linear programming, game theory, stochastic linear programming. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Ackoff R L & Sasieni M W Fundamentals of Operations Research, Wiley or English UP Hou'den B T ed Some Techniques of Operational Research, or •Duckworth W E A Guide to Operational Research, 2nd ed Methuen Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be provided at the first lecture. EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. 300 LEVEL 301 STATISTICS: DISTRIBUTION THEORY A 14 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS Basic methods in probability and distribution theory for discrete and continuous sample spaces. Distribution functions, generating functions, characteristic functions. Elementary limit laws. 302 STATISTICS: DISTRIBUTION THEORY В 10 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS Detailed treatment of various special distributions and their Interrelations. 303 STATISTICS: STATISTICAL INFERENCE A 14 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS Criteria for estimators; consistency, sufficient statistics, un- biased estimation. Criteria for tests of hypotheses. 304 STATISTICS: STATISTICAL INFERENCE В 10 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS Maximum likelihood estimators and their asymptotic properties. Comparison of methods of estimation. Sufficiency and exponential families of distributions. Sequential analysis. 305 STATISTICS: ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE 14 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS General least squares theory of estimation and hypothesis testing. Application to one and two-way classifications. Mixed and random effect models.

220 STATISTICS

306 STATISTICS: INTRODUCTORY STOCHASTIC PROCESSES 14 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS The simplest Markov chains in discrete and continuous time. Poisson, birth, branching processes. Classification of discrete Markov chains, finite Markov chains, limiting distributions.

307 STATISTICS: DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTS 10 lectures, approximately 7 tutorial and 7 practice hours. SYLLABUS Randomization, randomized block and Latin Square designs. Balanced incomplete biock designs and Youden Squares. Factorial and quasi-factorial designs. Analysis of experiments with and without recovery of interbiock Information.

308 STATISTICS: REGRESSION ANALYSIS 10 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS Application of least squares theory to multiple regression. orthogonal polynomials, analysis of covariance, discriminant analysis.

309 STATISTICS: SAMPLE SURVEYS 10 lectures, approximately 7 tutorial and 7 practice hours. SYLLABUS Simple random sampling, cluster sampling, stratified sampling and other special methods.

310 STATISTICS: DISTRIBUTION-FREE METHODS 10 lectures, approximately 7 tutorial and 7 practice hours. SYLLABUS Distribution-free estimation, for example, estimation of moments. Tests based on randomization. A survey of some special distribution-free methods.

311 STATISTICS: LINEAR PROGRAMMING 10 lectures, approximately 7 tutorial and 7 practice hours. SYLLABUS The simplex method, duality theory and other special topics such as the transportation problem, integer programming, quadratic programming, parametric linear programming.

312 STATISTICS: DECISION THEORY 10 lectures, approximately 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours. SYLLABUS Loss functions as a basis for making decisions. Bayes and minimax principles for the choice of a decision rule. Statistical inference from a decision-theoretic viewpoint. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Cox D R Planning of Experiments, Wiley Lindley D V Introduction to Probability and Statistics, Vols 1 & II CUP Prescribed textbooks: 'Feller W An Introduction to Probability Theory and its Applications, Vol I Wiley 'Rao C R Linear Statistical Inference and Its Applications, Wiley 221 SURVEYING

Recommended for reference: Cochran W G Sampling Techniques, Wiley Draper N R & Smith H Applied Regression Analysis, Wiley Ferguson T H Mathematical Statistics: A Decision Theoretic Approach, Academic Press Fraser D A S Non-Parametric Statistics, Wiley Gass S i Linear Programming, McGraw-Hill Heathcote C R Probability: Elements of the Mathematical Theory, Unwin kern t S A First Course in Stochastic Processes, Academic Press Kempthorne O The Design and Analysis of Experiments, Wiley Peng K C The Design and Analysis of Scientific Experiments, Addison- Wesley Raj D Sampling Theory, McGraw-Hill Wetherill G B Sequential Methods in Statistics, Methuen Williams E J Regression Analysis, Wiley Recommended tables: Fisher R A & Yates F Statistical Tables, Oliver & Boyd Pearson E S & Hartley H O Biometrika Tables for Statisticians, Vol 1 CUP EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year.

300 LEVEL Honours Course SYLLABUS Seven of the units listed above, 301, 302, 303, 305 being compulsory. 306 should be taken by students intending to take 400 level units. In addition a special project must be undertaken, and a written report of this work must be presented. The report will be given the same weight as a 3 point unit. (This is unit 313.) BOOKS As listed above.

EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year.

582 SURVEYING

200 LEVEL Syllabus of Four Units of equal value. Each unit is of 12 lectures and 18 hours of practical work and exercise classes.

201 SURVEYING Basic Operations in Plane Surveying. SYLLABUS Co-ordinate systems; distance measurements; differential levelling; contouring; magnetic compass surveys; plane table surveys;. Concepts of precision in surveying; adjustment of plotted traverses.

222 SURVEYING

202 SURVEYING Theodolite Traversing. SYLLABUS Use of theodolite; traversing; calculation and adjustment of angular and linear misclosures; missing data problems; areas of traverses; precision of theodolite traversing. 203 SURVEYING Tacheometric Surveying. SYLLABUS Tacheometric methods; instruments and precision. Baro- metric heighting. Volumes of regular solids. 204 SURVEYING Engineering Surveying. SYLLABUS Curve lay-out; contouring; earthwork volumes; cut and fill; design and adjustment of levels and theodolites; evaluation and compensation of residual instrumental errors. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Bannister A & Raymond S Surveying 3rd ed, Pitman 1972 EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year. There will be no formal practical examination but work done during the course will be assessed as part of the unit examinations. How- ever, any candidate may be asked to re-submit assignments performed during the course. 205 SURVEYING A course of about 24 lectures and about 24 hours of practical work. SYLLABUS An introduction to control and detail surveys, traversing, tacheometry and contours; measurement of elevations and differential levelling; plane table, theodolite and dumpy level, survey computations, areas and volumes; applications of photogrammetry. PRACTICAL WORK Field exercises in the use of surveying Instruments. Office computations in connection with control surveys, traverses, areas and volumes. Surveying projects including plotting and plan drawing. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: • Bannister A & Raymond S Surveying 3rd ed, Pitman 1972 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for pass only; the practical work and assignments performed during the year will be assessed as part of the examination. If necessary, any candidate may be required to submit to a practical test and to re-submit field notes and assignments of work performed during the course. The examination may be held at the conclusion of the course.

300 LEVEL 301 SURVEYING PART I1 A course of three lectures per week and six hours' practical work per week throughout the year plus seven 1-hour seminars and 2 laboratory classes on Electronic Instrumentation.

223 SURVEYING

SYLLABUS Engineering Surveying. Application, procedures and computation of resections using plane table, sextant or theodolite. Trigonometrical levelling, precise levelling. Surveys for roads, railways, water supply and irrigation. Theory and application of compound curves, transition curves and vertical curves. Points and crossings. Hydrographic surveying, stream and tide gauging. Electromagnetic distance-measurement. Terminology, equipment, procedures and computations in Mine surveying. Astronomy. Spherical trigonometry, astronomic phenomena, observations for latitude, longitude and azimuth. Effect and compensation of errors in observations and reductions. Geodesy. Convergence of meridians, procedures and computations for setting out parallels of latitude and rectangular leases, spherical excess, Legendre's theorem. Calculation of geographical co-ordinates, azimuth, reverse azimuth and spheroidal distance. Angular and linear measurements. Adjust- ment of survey observations, least squares, formation and solution of observation and condition equations. Precision of measured and derived quantities. Correlation. Theory and application of selected map projections for a spherical earth. PRACTICAL WORK The equivalent of six hours per week devoted to field astronomy and other field and office work. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: •Clark D Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers, Vol II. 5th ed Constable. Mackie J B Astronomy for Surveyors, 7th ed Griffin •Star Almanac for Land Surveyors HM Stationery Office EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. There will be no formal practical examination; the practical work performed during the year will be assessed as part of the examination. However, any candidate may be asked to submit to a practical test and to resubmit field notes and assignments of work performed during the course.

302 PHOTOGRAMMETRY PART 1 A course of about 48 lectures, with practical work throughout the year. The subject deals with the basic theory and applications of photogram- retry, with emphasis on mapping from aerial photographs.

SYLLABUS Mathematical properties of the photograph: perspective and analytical relationship between object and image; fundamental concepts of stereo photogrammetry. Optical and photographic principles: aerial cameras afd lenses; distortion and other aberrations; photography and processing; sensitometry and metric stability of photographic materials; colour and infra-red photography. Mapping from aerial photographs: numerical, graphical and optical recti- fication; radial plotting and triangulation.

224 ZOOLOGY

Stereo photogrammetry: stereo vision, parallax bar measurement; basic operations In connection with plotting equipment including relative afd absolute orientation. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: • Moffitt F H Phorogrammetr', 2nd ed Intern Textbook Co PRACTICAL WORK The equivalent of three hours per week throughout the year including laboratory and office work, tutorial classes and excursions. Laboratory sessions are related to elementary stereoscopic measurement and the operation of stereoscopic plotting equipment. Assign- ments may be given with each topic of the course to encourage students to make continuous progress. EXAMINATION One three-hour paper for Pass and Honours. Other tests may be held at the discretion of the examiners during the year. Assign- ments submitted during the year and the practical work will be assessed as part of the examination. Candidates may be asked to resubmit their work performed during the year.

393 ZOOLOGY 100 LEVEL 101 BIOLOGY This course is taken by all students wishing to major in the biological sciences. The details of the course are shown on page 85.

200 LEVEL Students wishing to major In Zoology must enrol for Zoology 201, 202, 203 and 204, and concurrently for 201 General Genetics unless an adequate standard has already been attained in this subject. Quotas permitting these courses are also available to students not In- tending to major in Zoology.

201 ZOOLOGY: INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY A course of 22 lectures and 45 hours practical work. Students must attend a field camp of 4-5 days for the study of Invertebrate Zoology and Ecology during the first term vacation.

202 ZOOLOGY: VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY A course of 20 lectures and 42 hours practical work.

203 ZOOLOGY: CELL PHYSIOLOGY A course of 15 lectures and 30 hours practical work.

204 ZOOLOGY: ECOLOGY A course of 15 lectures and 30 hours practical work together with half- day excursions. BOOKS Recommended for preliminary reading: A list may be obtained from the Zoology department office.

H 225 ZOOLOGY

Prescribed textbooks: 201 Zoology: Invertebrate Zoology 'Barnes R D Invertebrate Zoology, 2nd ed Saunders 1968 202 Zoology: Vertebrate Zoology •de Beer G R Vertebrate Zoology, Sidgwick & Jackson 1947 203 Zoology: Cell Physiology • Giese A C Cell Physiology, 3rd ed Saunders 1968 Ebert J D & Sussex I M Interacting Systems in Development, 2nd ed Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970 Fawcett D W The Cell, its Organelles end Inclusions: An Atlas of Structure, Saunders 1966 Loewy A G & Siekevitz P Cell Structure and Function, 2nd ed Holt Rinehart & Winston 1969 Novikoff A B & Holtzman E Cells end Organelles, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970 204 Zoology: Ecology Kormondy E J Concepts of Ecology, Prentice-Hall 1969 Recommended for reference: 201 Zoology. Invertebrate Zoology Borradaile L A et al The Invertebrate, Revised by Kerkut G A 4th ed CUP 1967 Barrington E J W Invertebrate Structure and Function, Nelson 1967 202 Zoology: Vertebrate Zoology Romer A S The Vertebrate Body, Saunders Colbert E N Evolution of the Vertebrates, Wiley Young J Z The Life of Vertebrates, CUP 203 Zoology: Cell Physiology Freeman W H & Bracegirdle B An Atlas of Embryology, Heinemann 1969 Fawcett D W The Cell, its Organelles and Inclusions: An Atlas of Structure, Saunders 1966 204 Zoology: Ecology Odum E P. Fundamentals of Ecology 3rd ed, Saunders 1971 EXAMINATIONS Written: A 2-hour written paper in each unit course. Practical: Students will be required to keep records of practical work; a practical examination may be held In each unit.

300 LEVEL Students majoring in Zoology are required to enrol for five unit courses including 307 Evolution and 308 Project. A choice must be made between 301 and 302, between 303 and 304, and between 305 and 306. Each student's choice of units must be approved by the head of the department. Quotas permitting, students not majoring in Zoology may enrol for any of the units 301 to 307; enrolment for 308 Project is possible only in special circumstances.

301 ZOOLOGY: ADVANCED CELL PHYSIOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and seminars and 72 hours practical work.

302 ZOOLOGY: ETHOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and 72 hours practical work.

226 ZOOLOGY 303 ZOOLOGY: COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and 72 hours practical work. 304 ZOOLOGY: ADVANCED ECOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and seminars, essays, and 72 hours practical work. A field camp of 4-5 days may be held during the second vacation. 305 ZOOLOGY: EMBRYOLOGY AND MORPHOGENESIS A course of 24 lectures and 72 hours practical work.

306 ZOOLOGY: ENTOMOLOGY A course of 24 lectures and 72 hours practical work. 307 ZOOLOGY: EVOLUTION A course of one lecture a week throughout the year. 308 ZOOLOGY: PROJECT An individual research project involving 72 hours practical work throughout the year. A report on the project must be submitted by the end of November. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 302 Zoology: Ethology kikkawa J & Thorne M J The Behaviour of Animals, Jacaranda 304 Zoology: Advanced Ecology •Odum E P Fundamentals of Ecology, 2nd ed Saunders 1959 305 Zoology: Embryology and Morphogenesis •Balinsky B I An Introduction to Embryology, Saunders Recommended for reference: 301 Zoology: Advanced Cell Physiology Eccles J C The Physiology of Synapses, Springer 1964 Katz B Nerve, Muscle and Synapse, McGraw-Hill 1966 Fawcett D W The Cell, its Organelles and Inclusions: An Atlas of Structure, Saunders 1988 302 Zoology: Ethology Eiь Eibesfeldt I Ethology The Biology of Behavior, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970 Hinde R A Animal Behaviour, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1970 Manning A An Introduction to Animal Behaviour, Arnold 1967 Williams G C Adaptation and Natural Selection, Princeton UP 1968 303 Zoology: Comparative Physiology Prosser C L & Brown F A Comparative Animal Physiology, 2nd ed Saunders 1981 Gordon M S Animal Function, Principles and Adaptations, Macmillan 1988 304 Zoology: Advanced Ecology Cox G W ed Readings in Conservation Ecology, Appleton Century Crofts 1969 Hutchinson G E The Ecological Theater afd the Evolutionary Play, Yale UP 1985 305 Zoology: Embryology and Morphogenesis

227 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

Waddington C H Principles of Development and Differentiation, Mac- millan 1967 306 Zoology: Entomology CSIRO The Insects of Australia, MUP 1970 lmms A D A general Text Book of Entomology. Revised by Richards O W & Davies G R 9th ed Methuen 1957 307 Zoology: Evolution Ehrlich P R Holm R W & Raven P H eds Papers on Evolution, Little Brown 1969 Mayr E Populations, Species and Evolution, Harvard UP 1970 Simpson G G The Geography of Evolution, Chilton 1965 Williams G C Adaptation and Natural Selection, Princeton UP 1966 EXAMINATIONS A 3-hour written examination in each unit course except 308 Project. Students will be required to keep records of practical work. Practical examinations may be held.

397 ROYAL AUSTRALIAN AIR FORCE ACADEMY

Most students will attempt the course as set out below: A Bachelor of Science Degree requires 100 or more points credit. Substitution of other units from the Science Course may be possible for some of the units.

100 LEVEL 101 Pure Mathematics 8 141 Physics (Mechanics and 102 Applied Mathematics 8 Wave Motion) 2 103 Chemistry Physical and 142 Physics (Electromagnetism) 2 Inorganic 6 143 Physics (Modern Physics) 2 104 Computation Theory 2 199 Practical Work (72 hours) 2

200 LEVEL Prerequisites 201 Pure Mathematics 12 101 210 Vector Analysis 4 101 Assumed that 201 will be studied concurrently and 102 studied. 211 General Dynamics 2 101 Assumed that 201 will be studied concurrently and 102 studied. 241 Electronics 3 142 101 242 Electromagnetism 3 142 101 244 Atomic Physics 2 101 or 102 245 Physics of the Atmosphere 1 101 246 Molecular Properties 2 Victorian HS Chemistry Assumed 247 Dimensional Analysis 1 290 Practical work 84 hours 3 199 or 291 Practical work 112 hours 4 199 300 LEVEL Core units 341 342 343 344 345 346 to be included as well as one Practical unit from 391-395. 228 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

Core Units 341 Atomic Physics 4 244 201 342 Fluid and Gas Dynamics 3 201 2 201 343 Gas Dynamics 344 Meteorology 2 201 345 Solid State Physics 2 346 Advanced Electricity 2 201 241 or 242 Optional units acceptable for the course 397-350 Geophysics 2 385-364 Biophysics 2 397-353 Infrared Physics 2 385-365 Cosmic Rays 2 397-354 Astrophysics 2 385-366 Digital Computing 2 397-355 Oceanography 2 385-368 History and Philosophy of Science 2 385-371 Upper Atmosphere Physics 2 Practical Work Prerequisites 397-391 Practical work 9 weeks 8 290 oг 291 392 Practical work 12 weeks 8 290 ог 291 393 Practical work 15 weeks 10 290 ог 291 394 Practical work 18 weeks 12 290oг 291 395 Practical work 21 weeks 14 290 or 291 NOTES 100 points are required for the degree of BSc. (i) An approved course of study must contain units selected for the 100 level such that the cumulative total of possible points scored as a credit for passing examinations In these units shall be not less than twenty-eight (28) nor more than forty-eight (48). (li) Except where special permission is granted by the faculty for this to be exceeded, the maximum total credit which may be attempted during one year is as follows: First year students 32 points Second year students 36 points Third year students 44 points Note: A first year student is one who has earned less than 28 points. A second year student is one who has earned 28 or more but less than 60 points. A third year student is one who has earned 60 or more but less than 100 points. 100 LEVEL 101 PURE MATHEMATICS PART I (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) A course of three lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year.

229 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

SYLLABUS Numbers and Functions. Finite series. Induction. Rational and irrational numbers. Approximations. Sketching graphs of polynomials and rational functions. Inverse functions. Trigonometric equations. Inverse trigonometric functions. Vectors and Linear Algebra. Applications of vectors to geometry. Deter- minants and linear equations. Linear transformations. Algebra of 3 X 3 matrices. Central conics. Rotation of axes. Differential Calculus. Applications of derivatives. Second derivatives and curvature. Partial derivatives. Chain rule. Total derivatives. Standard Functions. Exponential and logarithm functions. Hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic functions. Complex exponentials. Integral Calculus. Limit sums. Areas. Relation to differentiation. Syste- matic integration. Applications to areas and volumes. Applications using polar co-ordinates and parametric specification. Differential Equations. First order separable, homogeneous and linear, with applications. Second order linear constant coefficient equations. Standard power series expansions. Additional topics may be given, selected from: analytical plane geometry, group theory, theory of equations. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Maxwell E A An Analytical Calculus, Vols I I1 & Ill CUP Maxwell E A & Chong F Elementary Coordinate Geometry, OUP Brown J T & Manson C W M The Elements of Analytical Geometry, Macmillan A book of mathematical tables, Kaye & Laby Four figure Mathematical Tables, Longmans, will be provided in examinations. Recommended for reference: Ferrar W L Higher Algebra for Schools, OUP Durell C V Advanced Algebra, Bell Coulson A E An Introduction to Matrices, Longmans EXAMINATION Examinations will be held at the end of each course during the year.

102 APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART I (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) A course of three lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Vectors. Addition and subtraction. Scalar and vector product. Triple products. Differentiation with respect to scalar. Line integrals. Accelera- tion in plane polar co-ordinates. Moments of forces. Angular velocity. Mechanics. Principles of mechanics. Motion of a particle, of a system of particles, and of a rigid body. Simple harmonic motion. Central forces. Fluid mechanics. Introduction to dynamics and kinematics of fluids. Additional topics may be given, chosen from: simple waves, numerical analysis, differential equations, computer programming. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Weatherburn C E Elementary Vector Analysis, Bell Builen K E Introduction to the Theory of Mechanics, Science Press

230 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

Recommended for reference: Spain B Vector Analysis, Van Nostrand Synge J L & Griffith B A Principles of Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Coulson A E An Introduction to Vectors, Longmana EXAMINATION Examinations will be held at the end of each course during the year.

103 CHEMISTRY (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) Physical and Inorganic Chemistry 6 Units A course of 56 lectures and 20 tutorials throughout the year together with associated laboratory work. A preliminary standard equivalent to Victorian Higher School Certificate will be assumed. SYLLABUS The topics covered will be essentially the same as those of the corresponding parts of the University Chemistry 101 course. LABORATORY WORK This comprises three hours per week for 19 weeks and will Include experiments related to the theory course. Students must take the full laboratory course relevant to the units they are studying. EXAMINATION Units may be examined at fixed times during the year and in the examination term at the end of the year. The laboratory work of each student is assessed continually through the year and Is taken into account in determining his final result in the subject. BOOKS Stranks D R et al Chemistry A Structural View, MUP •Glasstone S & Lewis D Elements of Physical Chemistry, Macmillan 1960 •Bell C F & Lott K A K Modern Approach to Inorganic Chemistry, But- terworth 1964 'Aylward G H & Findlay J T V eds Chemical Data Book, 2nd ed Wiley 1966

104 COMPUTATION THEORY (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) A course of 20 lectures and 10 tutorials throughout the year. SYLLABUS An Introductory course in Computation programming with practical applications in physics, chemistry and mathematics. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: McCracken D D A Guide to Fortran IV Programming, Wiley

EXAMINATION will be held at the end of the course.

140 PHYSICS (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week divided Into three units, each occupying one term and worth 2 faculty points, plus three hours practical work 199 per week worth 2 faculty points. The three theoretical units ere: 141 Mechanics and Wave Motion, 142 Electro- magnetism, 143 Modern Physics.

231 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

воокs •Caro D E McDonnell J A& Spicer B M Modern Physics, Cheshire Halliday D & Resnick R Physics for Students of Science and Engineer- ing, Wiley Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Classical Physics, Vols I & II Allyn & Bacon Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Modern Physics, Allyn & Bacon Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures In Physics I, Addison-Wesley Alonso M & Finn Е J Fundamental University Physics, Vols I & lI Addison-Wesley EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper at the end of each theoretical unit.

200 LEVEL 201 PURE MATHEMATICS PART 11 (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) PASS A course of three lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Complex functions. Exponential and related functions of a complex variable. Differential equations. Applications of ordinary differential equations of the first and second orders. Integrals. Infinite and improper integrals. Reduction formulae. Multiple integrals. Curvilinear and surface integrals. Functions of several variables. Analytical geometry in space. Directional derivatives, differentiable functions, tangent planes, stationary points, Lagrange multipliers. Change of variables. Mappings. Jacobians. Linear Algebra. Linear transformations. Matrix algebra; partitioned matrices. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. Diagonalization and the identification of quadric surfaces. Convergence. Sequences and series. Comparison and ratio tests. Absolute and conditional convergence. Power series and their use in approximate calculations. Series solution of linear differential equations with variable coefficients. Additional topics. A selection from the following: mathematical logic, probability theory, linear programming, game theory, group theory.

BOO КЅ Prescribed textbooks: Maxwell E A Analytical Calculus, Vols Ill & IV CUP Kemeny J G Snell J L & Thompson G L Introduction to Finite Mathe- matics, Prentice-Hall Recommended for reference: Thomas G B Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Addison-Wesley Courant R Differential and Integral Calculus, Vols I & 11 Blackie Aitken A C Determinants and Matrices, Oliver & Boyd EXAMINATION Examinations will be held at the end of each course during the year. 232 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

APPLIED MATHEMATICS, PHYSICS COURSE (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) PASS A course of approximately 30 lectures, with practical classes. It is assumed that 201 Pure Mathematics will be studied concurrently. Intending students must have satisfactorily completed 101 Pure lathe- matics. 102 Applied Mathematics is not a prerequisite for the subject, but a familiarity with a part of the syllabus of that course will be assumed. Intending students who have not completed 102 Applied Mathematics will therefore be required to undertake a prescribed course of reading during the long vacation. 210 VECTOR ANALYSIS AND APPLICATIONS SYLLAВUS The differential and integral calculus of scalar and vector functions of position, with applications and illustrations. Boundary value problems. Separation of variables; the simpler properties of Bessel and Legendre functions; Introduction to Fourier series. (4 points.) 211 GENERAL DYNAMICS sYLLAВUS Generalized co-ordinates and Lagrange's equations of motion; small vibrations. (2 points.) B O 0КЅ Prescribed textbook: Sokolnikoff I S & Redheffer R I Mathematics of Physics and Modern Engineering, McGraw-Hill & Kogakusha Recommended for reference: Chisholm J & Morris R Mathematical Methods in Physics, North-Holland Chisnell R F Vibrating Systems, Routledge Hildebrand F B Advanced Calculus for Applications, Prentice-Hall Maxwell E A An Analytical Calculus, vol IV Cambridge Rutherford D A Classical Mechanics, Oliver & Boyd Sneddon I N Fourier Series, Routledge Synge J L & Griffiths B A Principles of Mechanics, McGraw-Hill & Kogakusha Wells D A Theory and Problems of Lagrangian Dynamics, Schaum EXAMINATION Examinations will be held at the end of each course during the year. PHYSICS (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) A course of lectures and practical sessions throughout the year in which each course of eight lectures is valued at 1 faculty point and 36 half day sessions of laboratory work is valued at 3 faculty points. The course of lectures Includes the following: Electronics (3), Electromagnetism (3), Atomic Physics (2), Molecular Properties (2), Dimensional Analysis (1), Physics of the Atmosphere (1), where the numbers in brackets denote the faculty point values of the units. Books Prescribed textbooks: Duncan W J Physical Similarity and Dimensional Analysis, Arnold

233 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

Trani N Classical Electromagnetic Theory, McGraw-Hill Winch R P Electricity and Magnetism, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall Rosser W G V Introduction to the Theory of Relativity, Butterworth Alley C L & Atwood K W Electronic Engineering, Wiley Reitz J R & Milford F J Foundations of Electromagnetic Theory, Addison-Wesley Hercus E 0 Elements of Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics, MUP Eisberg R M Fundamentals of Modern Physics, Wiley Zemansky M W Heat and Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures in Physics II, Addison-Wesley Fieagle R G & Bushinger J A An Introduction to Atmospheric Physics, Academic Press Byers H R Elements of Cloud Physics, U of Chicago Press Hess S L Introduction to Theoretical Meteorology, Holt Tedder J M & Nechvatal A Basic Organic Chemistry, Wiley 1966 Recommended for reference: Joyce M V & Clark K K Transistor Circuit Analysis, Addison-Wesley Parratt G Probability and Experimental Errors in Science, Wiley Haltlner G J & Martin F L Dynamical and Physical Meteorology, McGraw-Hill Sokolnikoff I S & Redheffer R M Mathematics of Physics and Modern Engineering, McGraw-Hill & Kogakusha Sproul) R L Modern Physics, Wiley EXAMINATION Examinations will be held at the end of each course during the year.

300 LEVEL PHYSICS (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) A course of lectures and practical work in which a six lecture group or 21 hours of practical work is equivalent to 1 faculty point. A compulsory set of lectures covers the topics of Atomic Physics, Fluid Dynamics, Gas Dynamics, Meteorology, Solid State Physics and Ad- vanced Electricity, and these are equal to 14 faculty points. Practical work may cover from 6 to 14 faculty points. The remaining faculty points may be selected from the two faculty point units; Biophysics, Upper Atmosphere Physics, Digital Computing, Geophysics, History and Philosophy of Science, Cosmic Radiation, Infrared Physics, Astrophysics, and Oceanography. BO0KS Prescribed textbooks: Batchelor G K Introduction to Fluid Dynamics, CUP Вlеаneу & Bleaney Electricity end Magnetism, OUP Bullen K E Introduction to the Theory of Seismology, 3rd ed CUP Clark & lead Electronic Radio and Microwave Physics, Heywood Delcroix J L Introduction to the Theory of Ionized Gases, Interscience Dewhurst D J Physical Instrumentation for Medical Measurement, De- partment of Physiology University of Melbourne Ditchburn R W Light, Blackie Eisberg R M Fundamentals of Modern Physics, Wiley 234 R.A.A.F. ACADEMY

Epstein H T Elementary Biophysics, Addison-Wesley Evans R D The Atomic Nucleus, McGraw-Hill Fermi E Nuclear Physics, U of Chicago Press Glauert H Elements of Aerofoil and Airscrew Theory, CUP Hackforth H L Infra Red Radiation, McGraw-Hill Haltiner G I & Martin F L Dynamical and Physical Meteorology, McGraw-Hill Hess S L Introduction to Theoretical Meteorology, Holt Hines C 0 et a1 Physics of the Earth's Upper Atmosphere, Prentice-Hall Hopper V D Cosmic Radiation and High Energy interactions, Logos Jeffreys H The Earth, CUP Jenkins F A & White H E Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw-Hill Katz B Nerve, Muscle and Synapse, McGraw-Hill Kittei C Introduction to Solid State Physics, 3rd ed Wiley Langhaar H L Dimensional Analysis and Theory of Models, Wiley Leipman H W & Roshko A Elements of Gas Dynamics, Wiley Linhart J G Plasma Physics, North-Holland McCracken D D A Guide to Fortran IV Programming, Wiley Maley G A & Earle J The Logic Design of Transistor Digital Computers, Prentice-Hall Massey H Space Physics, CUP Menzel D H Whipple F L & de Vacoulewis G Survey of the Universe, Prentice-Hall Mukhim K N Nuclear Physics, Macdonald Orifler J & MaseIand I Introduction to Solar Terrestrial Relations, Reide' Pap A Introduction to Philosophy of Science, Free Press Pearce W L The Origin of Field Theory, Random House Prandtl L Essentials of Fluid Dynamics, Blackie Ratcliffe J A Magneto-ionic Theory, CUP Ratcliffe J A Physics of the Upper Atmosphere, Academic Ruch T C & Fulton J F Medical Physiology afd Biophysics, Saunders Rutherford D E Fluid Dynamics, Oliver & Boyd Siegal P Understanding Digital Computers, Wiley Smart W M Foundation of Astronomy, Longmans Stacey F Physics of the Earth Thompson P D Numerical Weather Analysis afd Prediction, Mастillзп United States Air Force Handbook of Geophysics, Recent ed Macmillan Williams L P The Origin of Field Theory, Random House Zemansky M W Heat end Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill Recommended for reference: Alley C L & Atwood K W Electronic Engineering, Wiley Cottrell A J Dislocation and Plastic Flow In Crystals, OUP Dekker A J Solid State Physics, Macmillan Goldman S Frequency Analysis, Modulation and Noise, McGraw-Hill John J E A Gas Dynamics, Allyn & Bacon Klotz $ M Chemical Thermodynamics, Prentice-Hall Martin A E Infrared Instrumentation and Techniques, Elsevier Penna S S Chemical Problems in Jet Propulsion, Pergamon Pilar F L Elementary Quantum Chemistry, McGraw-Hill Spitzer L Physics of Fully Ionized Gases, Wiley EXAMINATION Examinations will be held at the end of each course during the year.

235 CHAPTER 5

DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE WITH HONOURS

Candidates are required to pass a test in one language as provided in section 3 (c) of Regulation 3.21.

351-400 SCHOOL OF ANATOMY Candidates will be required to undertake a course of directed reading and will also be required to carry out investigational work under the direction of a member of the staff. A written report on the results of the above work will be required. Candidates may also be required to attend such lectures and practical work as may be determined in each case. Candidates may also be required to undertake such written and oral examination as may be determined by the examiners of the written report.

353-400 SCHOOL OF BIOCHEMISTRY Candidates will be required to undertake advanced studies involving lectures and reading courses and to carry out, under direction, and report upon a research project. There will also be instruction in the use of special equipment. There will be written and oral examinations. The assessment of candidates will be mainly on the basis of these examinations and their research reports.

355-400 SCHOOL OF BOTANY Candidates will be required: (i) To submit a type-written report on results of original research on an approved topic before 1 December. (ii) To submit a review of the literature connected with this topic. (iii) To write essays (usually 4) under the supervision of members of staff or to substitute formal courses for some or all of the essays. Passes are required in all essays and/or formal courses. (iv) To attend special "research training" courses of lectures and practical work as specified. (v) To participate in all staff and postgraduate seminars in the Depart- ment. Assessment will be based on the research report, the literature review an oral examination and relevant information from essays, courses etc. Honours may be awarded at ist, 2nd or 3rd class level.

236 в.вс. ноиоинв 418-400 SCHOOL OF CHEMICAL ENGINEERING Candidates will be required to attend courses of lectures and practical work as specified. These will be selected from those available in the departments of the Science and Engineering faculties. A written examination will be required and oral tests may be given. In addition candidates will undertake work on selected research problems and present reports on this work. 357-400 SCHOOL OF CHEMISTRY Candidates may specialize in Physical, inorganic or Organic Chemistry. Candidates must have passed in Chemistry at third year level. They will be required to: (i) attend lectures on specified parts of the subject and undertake a course of directed reading; (ii) attend colloquia on selected topics, one of which they may be required to prepare and deliver; (iii) undertake original work on a selected research problem, and submit a report on their work; (iv) sit for a written examination, which may be accompanied by an oral test. 419-400 SCHOOL OF CIVIL ENGINEERING Candidates will be required to undertake a course of study, practical work and directed reading as may be determined in each case. A general review of literature on one or more engineering topics must be prepared, together with a report of an original research investigation of a subject approved by the head of the department. 417-400 SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Candidates who have completed the Electronics course in their third year and obtained honours will be required to take the subject Electronics Il (see Engineering Handbook) which comprises about 150 lectures together with a programme of laboratory work which will be mainly of a project nature. Candidates will be judged on their performance In written examinations, and written reports on their projects submitted during the year. 361-400 SCHOOL OF GENETICS Candidates will be required to undertake advanced studies and carry out under direction, and report upon, some research work connected with their special subject. In addition, candidates will be required to attend not more than 30 lectures on advanced topics, to write essays and to attend the departmental seminars. An examination will be held on the subject matter of the seminars and lectures. Honours will be awarded on the basis of research reports, supplemented by assessment of the essays and the examination results. 363-400 SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY Candidates will be required to carry out an investigation, supervised by a member of staff, on a selected geographical topic, and to submit two copies of a typewritten report by 1 December.

237 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

Intending (fourth year) honours candidates are advised to consult staff at the end of their third year course on topics that may require field work during the summer vacation preceding the honours year. Tutorials will be arranged. Students will attend such research seminars, submit such essays and perform such practical work as shall be required. 365-400 SCHOOL OF GEOLOGY To qualify for admission to the fourth year students will, except in special circumstances, be required to have obtained credit for Geology 310 or Geophysics 340. Approval to enrol will be granted only to students with a sufficiently good undergraduate record. Candidates will be permitted to specialize to a certain degree in an approved field within the geological sciences. They will be required to: (i) attend lectures and practical work as specified for each candidate, and undertake a course of directed reading; (ii) attend seminars on selected topics, at least one of which they may be required to prepare and deliver; (iii) undertake original work on a selected research problem and submit a report on their work; (iv) to commence field work connected with their research project during the preceding long vacation; (v) sit for a written examination which may be accompanied by an oral test.

367-400 SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Before entering the honours year candidates will be expected to have (I) Completed introductory courses in both History and Philosophy of Science. (ii) Have shown honours ability. (iii) Have a wider knowledge of the field than that specified in (i). This may be achieved through formal lectures or supervised reading courses and in certain cases these may be taken in the long vacation. Students who do not fulfil these requirements may be admitted to a year of preliminary studies. All intending candidates should consult the head of department before the end of their third year. History and Philosophy of Science IV will normally consist of four full year units including at least one History of Science and one Philosophy of Science unit. These will be decided in the light of the student's background and interests. The final assessment will take into account the seminar work, essays afd the written examination. Students should note that there are provisions to study for BSc Ions on a part-time basis with a maximum of four years permitted.

420-400 SCHOOL OF INDUSTRIAL SCIENCE Candidates will be required: (i) To carry out a piece of original research work. A report is to be submitted on this work which should not exceed 35 typewritten double spaced quarto pages, excluding appendices, and should be submitted before 1 December of the year in which the candidate is presenting for the degree.

238 в.вс. ноиоиRв

(11) To carry out a literature survey of the chosen topic of research, and present this, in writing within two months of commencing the research. (iii) To attend staff and postgraduate seminars held by the department, and such additional seminars held by other departments as are deemed appropriate. (iv) To give such research colloquia as may be directed from time to time. (v) To attend lectures and sit for written examinations and attend oral examinations as are specified for each candidate. 369-400 SCHOOL OF INFORMATION SCIENCE Candidates are required to: (i) attend lectures on specified parts of the subject and undertake a course of directed reading; (II) attend colloquia on selected topics, one of which they may be required to prepare and deliver; (iii) undertake original work on a selected research problem, and submit a report on their work; (iv) ait for examinations as required. 391-400 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS Candidates must have completed the course for the degree of BSc, having obtained honours In Pure Mathematics Parts 1, II H and Ill H and satisfactory passes in 200 and 300 Statistics. Candidates for BSc Ions must take Statistics 400 level, together with Pure Mathematics Part IV or equivalent units of Pure Mathematics Part IV afd Applied Mathematics Part IV approved by the department of Statis- tics. They will also carry out, under direction, a practical project and the study of a special topic in Probability or Statistics or related Mathematics Involving the reading and collation of the relevant literature and will present a thesis embodying this work at the beginning of the third term. 391-420 STATISTICS 400 LEVEL A course of approximately 78 lectures with tutorial and practice classes throughout the year, together with preparation of the thesis referred to in the section 'School of Mathematical Statistics'. Students will also be given a practical project. SYLLABUS A selection of seven units irom those listed below and from Statistics 300 level units not previously taken by the candidate. Individual units may be taken by students not majoring in Statistics. 401 Statistics Diвtribution theory C 402 Statistics Advanced probability 403 Statistics Multivariate analysis 404 Statistics Markov chains 405 Statistics Random walks 408 Statisticа Queues and storage 407 Statistics Stochastic processes In biology 408 Stаtlstica Time series analysis 409 Statistics Information Theory Each of the above units will comprise about eleven lectures. BOOKS Students will be advised about recommended books. Reference will also be made to certain articles in journals. 239 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

EXAMINATION Unit examinations will be held at times provided during the year.

371-400 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS Candidates must have qualified for the degree of BSc, having obtained honours in Pure Mathematics Parts ll H. Ill H and Applied Mathematics Parts I1 H, Ill H. Details of these subjects may be seen on pp. 159-173. Admission to the third parts of these subjects is conditional on having obtained adequate honours in the previous part. Students are expected to do reading and exercises related to the lectures throughout the course, and the work so done each year will be taken into account in the examinations. Candidates will take Pure Mathematics Part IV and Applied Mathematics Part IV, and must obtain honours in the final examination as a whole. They will also carry out, under direction, a study of a special topic in Pure or Applied Mathematics, or both, involving the reading and collation of the relevant mathematical literature, and will present a thesis embodying this work. The topic will be chosen, in consultation with the staff of the department, at or before the beginning of the first term, and the thesis will be presented no later than the beginning of the third term. The thesis will be into account in determining the class list for the final examination. The third examination paper in each of Pure Mathematics Part IV and Applied Mathematics Part IV may relate in part to the work covered in the second and third years.

371-401 PURE MATHEMATICS PART IV A course of about 100 lectures, arranged as a series of units of between 12 and 20 lectures each; some of these units are optional. Only one thesis, as described above, is required for Pure and Applied Mathematics Part IV jointly. SYLLABUS (i) Lebesgue Integration. Fourier analysis. Group theory. Functional analysis. (ii) Optional topics selected from: abstract algebra, topology, generalized functions, integral equations, algebraic geometry, tensor calculus, elliptic function, functions of a complex variable, Laplace transforms, theory of numbers, functional equations, graph theory, combinatorics, advanced matrix theory. BOOKS The following books relate to substantial portions of the course, and it is advisable to possess at least two of them, chosen in accordance with each student's interests and preferences. Other references will be given in lectures. Simmons G F Topology and Modern Analysis, McGraw-Hill Hall M Theory of Groups, Macmillan MacLane S & Birkhoff G Algebra, Macmillan

371-402 APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART IV A course of about 100 lectures, arranged as a series of units of between 14 arid 20 lectures each. Only one thesis, as described above, la required for Pure and Applied Mathematics Part IV jointly. 240 в.вс. ноиоинв

sУLІАВus (I) Partial differential equations. Elliptic and hyperbolic differential equations. Integral transforms. (ii) Variational methods. Calculus of variations. Direct methods. Applica- tions to optimal control theory (iii) Topics selected from: incompressible flow, water waves, compres- sible flow, magnetohydrodynamics, elasticity, relativity, non-linear differential equations, statistical mechanics. BOOKS References will be given in lectures.

371-410 COMBINED SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS AND PHYSICS The subjects of the first year of this course are Physics 120 or 140, Pure Mathematics Part I, Applied Mathematics Part I, and one other subject. A science language must be passed at some stage of the course. Candidates In their second year must obtain adequate honours in Pure Mathematics Part 11 H, and in 261 Mathematical Methods I1 H and sufficiently high marks in second year Physics units totalling not less than 16 points. They are strongly recommended to take 263 Classical Mechanics II H, or Physics 224. Candidates In their third year must obtain sufficiently high marks In third year Physics units totalling 24 points, and adequate honours in Pure Mathematics Part Ill H. They may be permitted to replace units 323 and 324 of the latter subject by unit 361 of Applied Mathematics part Ill H, but it should be noted that Physics 122 or 142 is prerequisite for Mathe- matics 361. Candidates in their fourth year will take about 180 lectures In ell. Of these, about 90 will be taken in the topics Variational Methods and Partial Differential Equations irom Applied Mathematics Part IV, and In other topics chosen from Pure and Applied Mathematics Part IV. The remaining lectures will be about 90 lectures in fourth year Physics, with Quantum Mechanics strongly recommended; see under School of Physics. In addition to written exercises and examinations in these topics, candidates will write a thesis on an approved topic in Mathematics or Physics. An Indication of the nature of a mathematical thesis may be seen under School of Mathematics (above). Сапдidates must obtain honours to the final examination. The thesis, and other work done during the year, will be taken into account In the award of honours. Candidates wishing to take this course should consult both the Depart- ment of Mathematics and the Department of Physics. 371-420 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) Approval to undertake the course will be granted only to those with a sufficiently good undergraduate record which Includes pure and applied mathematics to third year honours level. Candidates will be required to: (1) attend lectures on specified parts of the subject and undertake a course of directed reading; (ii) attend colloquia on selected topics, one of which they may be required to prepare and deliver; (III) undertake original work on a selected research problem, and submit a report on their work; (iv) sit for written examinations, which may be accompanied by an oral test.

241 FACULTY of SCIENCE

421-400 SCHOOL OF MEDICAL BIOLOGY The honours course in the Department of Medical Biology will consist of approved research work conducted under the close supervision of the Director and/or one of the senior associates in the Department of Medical Biology. In addition, candidates will be required to attend a lecture course in Experimental Immunology and Oncology held by the department in the first and second terms, and will also be required to participate in the weekly Walter and Eliza Hall Institute seminar series. At the end of the year, candidates will be required to submit, in triplicate, a research report embodying the main results of the year's investigations. They will also be required to take an oral examination dealing with the lecture course and their own research. 423-400 SCHOOL OF MEDICINE DEPARTMENT OF JAMES STEWART PROFESSOR, ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL Students are required to attend a weekly seminar in the department concerning their research work, and make interim reports on their research programme. At the end of the year students will be required to write up the results of their research in a form suitable for publication, and will also be called on to review the literature relating to their studies. 423-410 SCHOOL OF MEDICINE ST VINCENT'S HOSPITAL Students ordinarily work under the direction of a member of the department and are required to attend a weekly seminar in the department concerning their research work, and make interim reports on their research programme. At the end of the year students will be required to write up the results of their research in a form suitable for puЫication, and will also be called on to review the literature relating to their studies. 373-400 SCHOOL OF METALLURGY The work will Involve: (i) Attendance at a course of lectures in advanced aspects of chemical metallurgy and/or physical metallurgy. The candidate may be required to pass a test in this section of the work. (ii) Practical work appropriate to the field of metallurgy which the candidate has selected for his major study. The candidate will be required to carry out an experimental project on a special topic within this field and to submit a report thereon. 375-400 SCHOOL OF METEOROLOGY Students who have performed well in Meteorology and in their BSc finals may be admitted to the fourth (honours or MSc qualifying) year. Each student will be assigned a special aspect of meteorology or glaciology and will be expected to attend specified lecture units, practical classes, and seminars. Depending on the department's research programme and available specialist staff, survey lectures may be arranged on such topics as tropical meteorology, air pollution meteorology, satellite meteorology, radar meteorology, etc.

242 в.вс. ноиоиАв

Lectures will be concentrated as far as possible into the first and second terms. Students will undertake a research project and prepare a report on the results of the work, with a review of the relevant literature. 377-400 SCHOOL OF MICROBIOLOGY The course is designed to develop the research student's capacity to solve problems, to analyse data, to read and think critically, and to communicate articulately. Much of the time is devoted to research in close collaboration with a member of the academic staff. In addition, there are a number of intensive short courses of advanced instruction. The first such course provides the student with first-hand experience of the major equipment and advanced techniques available in the school, whereas the others consist of advanced courses in rapidly developing areas of microbiology, conducted by experts irom inside and outside the school, mainly as informal group discussions. Students may be required to undertake any of the unit courses, Microbiology 302, 303, 304, 305 or 308, that they did not complete in the third year. EXAMINATION A written report of 30-50 typed quarto pages describing the candidate's research. Also written examination and/or essays based on the lecture-reading course.

379-400 SCHOOL OF MINING Candidates are required: (i) To attend lectures and carry out appropriate laboratory work and calculations in advanced aspects of mineral processing or mining, and to pass a test in this course. (ii) To attend such other classes as the head of the department may specify. (iii) To prepare a critical review of the literature of a topic selected by the candidate and approved by the head of the department. (iv) To carry out an experimental project on a special topic, and to submit a report thereon. (v) If required, to attend colloquia on selected topics and to introduce a topic at such a meeting. 398-400 SCHOOL OF OTOLARYNGOLOGY Candidates will be required to: (I) attend lectures and seminars on specified subjects; (ii) prepare a written critical review of the literature on such topics as required by the head of the department; (iii) undertake research work under the supervision of a member of the department, and submit a report on their work; (iv) pass in such examinations as may be required by the head of the department. 422-400 SCHOOL OF PAEDIATRICS ROYAL CHILDREN'S HOSPITAL Students are required to attend a weekly seminar in the department concerning their research work, and make interim reports on their research programme. At the end of the year students will be required to write up the results of their research in a form suitable for publication, and will also be called on to review the literature relating to their studies.

243 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

381-400 SCHOOL OF PATHOLOGY (i) Candidates will be required to attend a course of lectures on theoretical and practical aspects of pathology. Attendance at specified practical classes will form part of the course. (ii) A supervised reading course will be prescribed for each candidate, and reports, reviews or seminars on selected topics will be required. (iii) A research programme will be assigned to each candidate, either as a project to be carried out by him under supervision, or as participation in one or more of the established programmes In the department. A research report must be submitted prior to the annual examination. It is recommended that the candidate begins the course during the long vacation. EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper on general and special pathology, and an oral examination. The year's record, and the marks allotted for reports and assignments will be taken into account.

383-400 SCHOOL OF PHARMACOLOGY The courses of study will be designed to meet the needs of each candidate. Students will work closely with members of staff and engage in the current research of the department, during which time they will receive training In research methods and special techniques in Pharmacology. The examination will take into account (a) seminars presented by the student during the year, (b) a written report on the research projects undertaken, (c) an oral examination, and (d) any further examination that is deemed necessary by the head of the department.

385-400 SCHOOL OF PHYSICS Approval to proceed with the fourth year will be granted only to those with a sufficiently good undergraduate record. Candidates may specialize in either Experimental Physics or Theoretical Physics. They should have passed in at least 24 points worth of third year Physics units including 320 or 340. They will be required to: (i) attend lecture courses and undertake directed reading; (ii) attend colloquia on selected topics, one of which they may be required to prepare and deliver; (iii) undertake original work on a selected research problem, and submit a report on their work; (iv) sit for a written examination, which may be accompanied by an oral test. Approximately 300 lectures are presented, from which candidates make a selection of between 120 and 140 depending on their specialty. The selection must be approved by the school. A lecture course on Quantum Mechanics is compulsory for all students as is one of Statistical Mechanics and Electrodynamics. Normally additional optional units will include three courses on Diffraction and Solid State Physics, three courses on Nuclear Physics, four courses on Theoretical Physics, and one course on High Energy Physics. From time to time lecture courses will be offered on other topics related to the research interests of the school; for example, courses have been offered recently on Collision Theory, Group Theory, and General Relativity. 244 в.вс. 1OIiOURs

FOURTH YEAR UNITS 401 Physics Quantum Mechanics: 40 lectures; first term. B. H. J. McKellar 402 Physics Nuclear Structure: 20 lectures; first term. B. M. Spicer 403 Physics Nuclear Reaction Theory: 20 lectures; second term. H. H. Bolotin 404 Physics Astrophysics: 20 lectures; second term. D. G. Sargood 405 Physics Diffraction: 20 lectures; first term. M. Fehlmann 408 Physics Solid State Physics: 20 lectures; second term. A. E. C. Spargo 407 Physics Excitations in Solids: 20 lectures; second term. N. E. Frankel 408 Physics Statistical Mechanics: 20 lectures; first term. N. E. Frankel 409 Physics Electrodynamics: 20 lectures; second term. G. I. Opat 410 Physics Many Body Theory: 30 lectures; second term. K. C. Hines 411 Physics Relativistic Quantum Mechanics: 30 lectures; second term. J. W. Wignall 412 Physics Elementary Particles: 20 lectures; first term. G. C. Josh' 413 Physics General Relativity: 30 lectures; first term. G. I. Opat 385-420 SCHOOL OF PHYSICS (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) Approval to proceed with the fourth year will be granted only to those with a sufficiently good undergraduate record. Candidates may specialize in either Experimental Physics or Theoretical Physics. They should have passed in Physics Pert lllA. They will be required to: (i) attend lectures on specified parta of the subject and undertake a course of directed reading; (1i) attend colloquia on selected topics, one of which they may be required to prepare and deliver; (iii) undertake original work on a selected research problem, and submit a report on their work; (iv) sit for a written examination, which may be accompanied by an orel test. 387-400 SCHOOL OF PHYSIOLOGY Candidates may specialize either in Systematic Physiology or in Bio- physics. They will be required to: (i) attend lectures on specified parta of the subject and undertake a course of directed reading; (li) carry out such Investigations as are required by the head of the department;

245 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

(iii) prepare a written critical review of the literature on such topics as are required by the head of the department; (iv) pass in such examinations as may be required by the head of the department.

425-400 SCHOOL OF PSYCHIATRY DEPARTMENT OF CATO PROFESSOR, ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL A supervised reading course will be prescribed for each candidate and reports, reviews or seminars on selected topics will be required. A research project will be assigned and at the end of the year a report describing the results, together with a critical review of the relevant literature, must be submitted.

389-400 SCHOOL OF PSYCHOLOGY Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours in Psychology: (a) must have been admitted as a Provisional Honours candidate (normally on the basis of Honours in Psychology 101); and (b) to be considered for admission to Final Honours at the beginning of third year should normally have obtained adequate Honours in Psychology 201 and in the additional Honours units at second year level; and (c) must qualify for the ordinary degree of BSc; and (d) must obtain Honours in Psychology 301 and in the additional units required for Final Honours. The work in Final honours is spread over the third and fourth years, and consists of a common core section of four units, an option group of six units, and a research thesis based on a substantial project extending from the middle of the third to the middle of the fourth year. COMPULSORY UNITS These each consist of not less than 24 hours class work, to be completed in either third or fourth year as arranged with the Department. 305 COGNITIVE PROCESSES Problem solving and decision making, the structure of intelligence, concept formation and attainment, creativity, language and thought. 342 or 343 QUANTITATIVE METHODS C or D C. Elements of multivariate analysis: a non-mathematical introduction. (Alternative to Unit 343, Quantitative Methods D, which covers much the same ground, but is more advanced and requires some formal competence in Mathematics.) D. A fairly advanced treatment of multivariate methods of research, particularly factor analysis; and an elementary course In Fortran programming. It is expected that students have at least Higher School Certificate level mathematics. 355 THEORY IN PSYCHOLOGY A Principal psychological concepts in their historical context. The development of psychology as a systematic enquiry. An analytical examination of some major theoretical systems, e.g. psychoanalytic theory, learning theory, and neurophysiological models of behaviour. The relationship be-

246 в.вc. ноиоиАв

tween the methods and epistemological foundations of these disciplines. Formalisation In psychology. Theories as deductive systems.

356 THEORY IN PSYCHOLOGY В The logic of scientific concept formation in the natural and in the social sciences in so far as they are relevant to psychological theory. The role of artificial and natural language in psychological theory construction. The systematic analysis of the differences between structural and epistemological characteristics in a variety of psychological theories. Choetsky's conception of mind and language. The role of value concepts in psychological theories. Mentalistic concepts In behaviour theory. Brain function and Verstehen.

OPTIONAL UNITS Six of the following are to be selected in consultation with the staff of the Department as an appropriate combination for the speciality group to which the student has been allocated on application. Those selected will be taken to either third or fourth year as arranged with the Department. 304 TOPICS IN THE PSYCHOLOGY OF LANGUAGE Areas covered In this seminar may Include sentence processing, developmental psycholinguistics, discourse analysis, and the relation between language and thought. 308 INFORMATION PROCESSING Perceptual processing; pattern recognition; memory processes, acquisi- tion, storage, retrieval. 308 COGNITIVE DEVELOPMENT The main focus of interest in the course will be on the following two developmental transitions: (i) preoperational to concrete operational thought (ii) concrete operational to formal operational thought. Conservation, classification and formal operational tasks will be studied in depth and, where appropriate, related to problems In language development, human learning and cross-cultural research. .

309 and 335 APPLIED PERSONALITY THEORY AND PSYCHOPATHOLOGY C By linking the two units, a more flexible syllabus is possible. Unit 309 concerns using personality theories to understand and explain the individual person (e.g., via case studies, biographies) and the small social unit (e.g., groups, families). Unit 335 concerns some theoretical aspects of therapy, counselling and other interventions in both two-person and group settings. It Is proposed to use a self-analytic group framework for both units, with roughly equal emphasis on experiential learning within the group. seminar-type discussions of case material, and didactic presentations of theory.

311 PERCEPTION В Models for pattern recognition and perceptual development, neurophysiological and behavioural evidence on contour and feature detection, computer simulation of pattern and recognition systems, binocular vision and pattern coding, visual adaptation, eye-movements.

247 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

312 NEUROPSYCHOLOGY В The clinical relationship between neurology and psychology. Psychological assessment of the neurological patient. Functional localization. Theories of frontal lobe function. Temporal lobe dysfunction and memory deficit. Apraxia, aphasia, agnosia. Cerebral dominance, lateralization, the minor hemisphere. Split-brain studies in man. The effects of head injury. Vas- cular disturbances. Differentiation of functional and organic disorders. Convulsive disorders. The unit will consist of lectures and demonstrations of the assessment of neurological patients with a wide variety of procedures.

313 HUMAN PERFORMANCE Structure and function of perceptual-motor systems; reaction time phenomena, complex motor behaviour; monitoring and tracking performance.

314 PSYCHOPHYSICS Theories of sensory discrimination, theory of signal detection, information theory, adaptation-level theory, integration theory. The course will cover basic quantitative methods and models for application in detection and recognition processes. The practicals will demonstrate applications of the models.

316 INTRODUCTION TO SIMULATION Technique and applications of simulation procedures related to problems in behavioural science will be introduced and discussed.

322 SOCIAL INTERACTION PROCESSES C Social research in organizations. Students will be required to present in class a critique of a recent research report. Subsequently this critique will be submitted formally for examination in this unit.

324 INTRODUCTION TO OCCUPATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY (a) Occupational Choice and Vocational Guidance. Theories of occupational choice and career development. Vocational guidance techniques and their evaluation; and (b) Occupational Behaviour. Studies of job satisfaction and job performance. Psychological aspects of personnel practices.

325 INTERPERSONAL PROCESSES An introduction to theory and method of interpersonal relationships, in an experiential group setting. The main aim of this unit is to promote in- creased self understanding and interpersonal skills by studying the Inter- actions between group members as they occur, afd to relate these to relevant theory and research. Limited to 12 persons.

342 QUANTITATIVE METHODS C Elements of multivariate analysis: a non-mathematical introduction. (Alternative to Unit 343, Quantitative Methods D, which covers much the same ground, but is more advanced and requires some formal compet- eпсe in Mathematics.) 248 в.Sc. ноноиRв

343 aUANTITATIVE METHODS D A fairly advanced treatment of multivariate methods of research, particularly factor analysis; and an elementary course in Fortran programming. It is expected that students have at least Higher School Certificate level Mathematics.

344 ASSESSMENT Problems of test construction, administration, scoring and interpretation. Concepts of reliability and validity in psychological measurement. Intro- duction to some measures of personality, attitudes, values and Interests. Response sets and other spurious factors. The ethical responsibilities of the tester. Note: practical work in the student's own time is required.

345 MODELS OF DATA IN SOCIAL SCIENCE Topics covered in this seminar may include fundamental measurement, uni- and multi-dimensional scaling, cluster analysis, as well as other models relating to the description of static and dynamic systems.

381 RESEARCH PROJECT This is commenced by all Final Honours candidates during the middle of third year and completed by the middle of fourth year. Six points will be credited on the basis of satisfactory progress by the end of third year. EXAMINATION The examination of five of the required ten units comprising the compulsory and optional sections of the Final Honours course will be completed by the end of third year. The examination of the other five units and of the Research Project thesis will be completed by the end of fourth year. NOTE Further details and lists of prescribed textbooks and recommended reading may be found In the Manual for Final Honours Course (1973), available from the Department of Psychology.

424-400 SCHOOL OF SURGERY DEPARTMENT OF JAMES STEWART PROFESSOR, ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL Students are required to attend the weekly research seminar in the department, to which they will submit Interim reports on their research programme. At the end of the year they will be called on to review the literature relating to their studies and also to prepare a formal report in a style suitable for publication.

393-400 SCHOOL OF ZOOLOGY The courses of study will be designed to meet the needs of each candidate. Students will work closely with members of staff end engage in the current research of the department, during which time they will receive training in research methods and special techniques. The examination will take Into account (a) seminars presented by the student during the year, (b) a written report on the research projects undertaken, (c) essays, and (d) any examinations deemed necessary by the head of the department.

249 CHAPTER 6 DEGREE OF MASTER OF SCIENCE

The detailed report and critical review referred to in Sections 7 and 10 of the Regulation should be submitted for examination to the Secretary, faculty of Science, within one year (if a full-time candidate) of the commencement of candidature. Under specific circumstances an exten- tion of time may be granted by the faculty. Applications should be addressed to the Registrar. Candidates are required to pass a test in one language as provided in Section 7(C) of the Regulation. Please note that a student can be accepted as a candidate for the MSc degree without actually being a graduate (that is without having had the degree conferred for which he has qualified). However, before a student can have the MSc degree conferred, he must be a graduate (BSc of two years standing, or BSc degree with Honours of one year standing) also note particularly that before being accepted as a candidate for the PhD degree one must have formally graduated.

351-500 SCHOOL OF ANATOMY Candidates are required to carry out original research In a branch of Anatomy to be approved by the professor of Anatomy; to prepare a thesis embodying the results of this work; and to prepare a critical review of the international literature on the subject. 353-500 SCHOOL OF BIOCHEMISTRY Candidates will be required to spend one year as full-time students in the Department of Biochemistry during which time they will be expected to undertake an original investigation on an approved subject and present a thesis containing a literature survey related to the investigation. It is also possible to study for the MSc degree as a part-time candidate or as a non-attending candidate. For full details see Regulation 3.24. 355-500 SCHOOL OF BOTANY Candidates are required to submit a thesis which embodies the results of research in some approved field of Botany and incorporate with this report (generally the Introduction) a critical survey of the relevant literature (including that in foreign languages). Candidates commencing MSc studies with BSc ordinary degree may be required to pass a qualifying examination at the end of the first year. This will be essentially similar to the BSc Ions. course (355-400). Internal candidates are required to participate in all official seminars of the Department. 418-500 SCHOOL OF CHEMICAL ENGINEERING Candidates will undertake original research on an approved topic and present a thesis thereon. Course work and written and/or oral examinations may fulfill part of the requirements if approved.

250 MASTER OF SCIENCE

357-500 SCHOOL OF CHEMISTRY Candidates will undertake original research in some approved field of Physical, Inorganic or Organic Chemistry, the choice being to some extent left to the student in consultation with the head of the school. Candidates will submit a report embodying the results of their research, together with a critical review of cognate literature, Including that In foreign languages. Written and/or oral examinations may also be given to test the candidate's general knowledge of Chemistry, with special reference to Its modern developments.

419-510 SCHOOL OF CIVIL ENGINEERING Candidates will undertake original research under the supervision of a member of the Civil Engineering staff. Advanced course work within the graduate school of civil engineering or course work provided by other departments may be required if it is considered relevant by the head of department. Candidates are encouraged to submit Interdisciplinary research projects which interface between science and engineering. A copy of the course details within the graduate school of civil engineering is available from the department.

417-500 SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING Candidates will be required to attend such advanced lecture courses as are offered each year in the department not exceeding 50 lectures total. Candidates will also be required to carry out an original research investigation, submitting this as a formal written report, and attend research seminars. Candidates may also be given selected topics in literature to review and present as written submissions.

361-500 SCHOOL OF GENETICS Candidates will be required to carry out end present a report upon some original research and to prepare a review of the literature of some wide branch of Genetics cognate to the subject of research. If a written examination is to be held, candidates will be so Informed before the end of the first term. Candidates will be expected to attend and take part in the seminars which are held periodically in the school.

363-500 SCHOOL OF GEOGRAPHY The research to be undertaken will be agreed on in discussion with the candidate's supervisor. It will normally involve both field and laboratory work and candidates are advised to commence field work in the summer vacation at the beginning of the year in which the research Is to be undertaken. The candidate will be required to attend special lectures and tutorials, and to undertake such reading as may be required by the supervisor. Candidates will submit a report on the research work carried out during the course. Written and/or oral examinations may also be held, and candidates will be Informed of the examination requirements for each Individual.

251 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

365-500 SCHOOL OF GEOLOGY Approval to enter this course will normally be given only to those with a sufficiently good record in the BSc Ions year. Candidates are required to carry out original research in an approved field within the Geological Sciences, to be determined in consultation with the head of the school; to commence field work connected with their research project during the preceding long vacation; to attend seminars on selected topics and to prepare and deliver at least one of these; and to submit a thesis which embodies the results of their research. An oral examination may also be required. 367-500 SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE Candidates who have completed the requirements for BSc Ions or equivalent, must undertake specified seminar work and submit a thesis on an approved subject. it is possible to study for the MSc degree as a part-time candidate. 420-500 SCHOOL OF INDUSTRIAL SCIENCE Candidates shall have completed a course for the degree of Bachelor of Science (degree with honours). Candidates will carry out study and research in some field of science pertinent to the work in the department. They will be required to submit a thesis embodying the results of their research together with a critical review of the literature. Candidates will be required to give such research colloquia as may be directed, from time to time. Written and/or oral examinations may also be given. 369-500 SCHOOL OF INFORMATION SCIENCE Candidates are required to undertake original research in an approved field of Computer Science. They will submit a report on the outcome of this research together with a critical survey of the relevant literature. 391-500 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS Candidates will, under supervision, prepare a thesis on an approved subject, in which they will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. Three copies of each thesis (quarto, typewritten, double spaced) should be submitted, one of which will be deposited in the University Library. Candidates may also be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. 371-500 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS Candidates must hold the degree of Bachelor of Science with Honours in Mathematics, or an equivalent qualification. They will carry out study and research in some approved field of Pure or Applied Mathematics, involving the reading of the relevant periodical and other literature. They will present a thesis embodying their reading and research. Candidates also may be examined orally on the subject of the thesis. Colloquia are held to assist students in their work. An entry form for examination for higher degrees must be submitted to the faculty office. Three copies of the thesis (typewritten, double spaced) should be submitted; one of them will, if approved, be deposited in the University Library.

252 MASTER 0F SCIENCE

371-520 SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) Approval to enter the course will be given only to those with a sufficiently good record in the BSc Ions year. Candidates are required to carry out original research in an approved field of Mathematics. They will submit a report which embodies the results of this research together with a critical survey of the relevant literature (including that in foreign languages). 421-500 SCHOOL OF MEDICAL BIOLOGY Candidates are required to undertake original research in an approved field of Medical Biology to be conducted under the supervision of the Director of the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute and/or one of the Senior Associates in the Department of Medical Biology. In addition, candidates will be required to attend a lecture course In Experimental Immunology and Oncology held by the department in the first afd second terms, and will also be required to participate in the weekly Walter and Eliza Hall Institute seminar series. At the end of the course, candidates will be required to submit, in triplicate, a thesis embodying a brief literature review relevant to the field of study, and the results of their research. Candidates may also be required to take an oral examination dealing with the lecture course and/or their own research. 423-500 SCHOOL OF MEDICINE DEPARTMENT OF JAMES STEWART PROFESSOR, ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL Students are required to attend a weekly seminar in the department concerning their research work, and make interim reports on their research programme. At the end of the year students will be required to write up the results of their research in a form suitable for publication, and will also be called on to review the literature relating to their stиdieн. 423-510 SCHOOL OF MEDICINE ST VINCENT'S HOSPITAL Students ordinarily work under the direction of a member of the department and are required to attend a weekly seminar In the department concerning their research work, and make Interim reports on their research programme. At the end of the year students will be required to write up the results of their research In a form suitable for publication, and will also be called on to review the literature relating to their studies. 373-500 SCHOOL OF METALLURGY Candidates shall have completed a course for the degree of Bachelor of Science In Physics, Chemistry or Metallurgy. A candidate whose major subject of study for the degree of Bachelor of Science has been in some other school, and also, in certain Instances, where his major study has been within the School of Metallurgy, may be required to attend lectures and practical work appropriate to the subject of his main research work. A report on this aspect of his studies will be required. A critical review of the literature pertaining to the subject of his research will be required. The major report will be a record of the research work carried out by the candidate.

253 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

375-500 SCHOOL OF METEOROLOGY Candidates are required to carry out original research on a meteorological or glaciological subject and to prepare a thesis from the results of their work, including a critical review of the international literature on the subject. They may also be required to attend special lectures and seminars and to take part in field work. 377-500 SCHOOL OF MICROBIOLOGY Candidates will undertake research in collaboration with a member of the academic staff and present a thesis describing this work. Research students are expected to participate in staff seminars, discussions and occasional advanced lecture courses. EXAMINATION By thesis. An oral examination is rarely required.

379-500 SCHOOL OF MINING Candidates shall have completed a course for the degree of Bachelor of Science In Physics, Chemistry, Metallurgy or Geology. Generally a candidate will be required to attend lectures and practical work and/or to make a special study of literature appropriate to the subject of his main research work, and to pass such examinations and submit such reports as are required by the head of the department. The subject of his research will be some aspect of science related to mining or mineral processing. A critical review of the literature pertaining to the subject of his research will be required. The major report will be a record of the research work carried out by the candidate. 398-500 SCHOOL OF OTOLARYNGOLOGY Candidates will be required to: (i) attend lectures and seminars on specified subjects; (ii) prepare a written critical review of the literature on such topics as required by the head of the department; (iii) undertake research work under the supervision of a member of the department, and submit a report on their work; (iv) pass in such examinations as may be required by the head of the department. 422-500 SCHOOL OF PAEDIATRICS ROYAL CHILDREN'S HOSPITAL Students are required to attend a weekly seminar in the department concerning their research work, and make interim reports on their research programme. At the end of the year students will be required to write up the results of their research in a form suitable for publication, and will also be called on to review the literature relating to their studies.

381-500 SCHOOL OF PATHOLOGY Candidates will be required to carry out original research, under supervision, and present a thesis describing this work. The thesis must include a critical survey of the literature relevant to the topic of the research.

254 MASTER OF SCIENCE

Candidates must also attend and participate In staff meetings and seminars, and prepare and submit such assignments and reports on pathological subjects as may be prescribed. EXAMINATION By thesis. An oral examination may also be required.

383-500 SCHOOL OF PHARMACOLOGY Research will be carried out under supervision on an originaI topic. Candidates will be expected to present seminars on their work and/or other prescribed topics, to attend scientific meetings and to participate In the general scientific activities of the department. Examination will be by thesis. This will consist of a report of the research carried out by the candidate and a critical review of the literature in a prescribed field which will not necessarily be the same as that in which the candidate has undertaken research. Candidates will also be required to support the thesis in an oral eкaminatioп.

385-500 SCHOOL OF PHYSICS Approval to enter this course will be given only to those with a sufficiently good record in the BSc Ions year. Candidates are required to carry out original research in an approved field of Physics. They will submit a report which embodies the results of this research together with a critical survey of the relevant literature (including that in foreign languages).

385-520 SCHOOL OF PHYSICS (R.A.A.F. ACADEMY) Approval to enter the course will be given only to those with a sufficiently good record in the BSc Ions year. Candidates are required to carry out original research in an approved field of Physics. They will submit a report which embodies the results of this research together with a critcal survey of the relevant literature (including that in foreign languages).

387-500 SCHOOL OF PHYSIOLOGY Candidates are required to conduct under supervision original research in some branch of Physiology, and to submit a report eтbодуing their results to the examiners. A critical review of literature (including French and German) on a selected subject must also be submitted. In addition, candidates may be required to attend lectures and practical work and to sit for examination in such subjects as may be prescribed by the head of the department.

425-500 SCHOOL OF PSYCHIATRY DEPARTMENT OF CATO PROFESSOR, ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL Candidates will be required to carry out original research, under supervision, and present a thesis describing this work. The thesis must Include a critical survey of the relevant literature. Candidates must also attend departmental seminars and submit such assignments on selected topics as may be prescribed.

255 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

389-500 SCHOOL OF PSYCHOLOGY 1. All candidates are required to take part in a programme of seminars, lectures and laboratory work, and to submit a thesis based on advanced research on an approved topic. 2. Candidates accepted for courses leading to the Master's degree in Clinical Psychology or Occupational Psychology are required to study for not less than two years, and must obtain professional experience under approved supervision. All other candidates for the Master's degree are required to study for not less than one year full-time.

424-500 SCHOOL OF SURGERY DEPARTMENT OF JAMES STEWART PROFESSOR, ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL Students are required to attend the weekly research seminar in the department, to which they will submit Interim reports on their research programme. Students may also be required to attend courses of Instruc- tion, conducted in the University, and relevant to their research Interest.

415-500 SCHOOL OF VETERINARY SCIENCE Candidates are required to undertake research in a field approved by the Head of the appropriate Department in the School of Veterinary Science. The research project undertaken will be conducted under supervision. Candidates may be required to provide progress reports and to attend courses of lectures and seminars related to their studies. At the end of their course, candidates will be required to submit a thesis for examination that conforms to the requirements approved by the faculty of Science.

393-500 SCHOOL OF ZOOLOGY Candidates will be required to carry out and present a report upon some original research and to prepare a review of the literature of some wide branch of Zoology cognate to the subject of research. If a written examination is to be held, candidates will be so informed before the end of the first term. Candidates will be expected to attend and take part in the seminars which are held periodically in the school, as directed by the professor.

256 CHAPTER 7 BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (EDUCATION) Regulation 3.26—Degree of Bachelor of Science (Education) 1. A candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Education) shell, after matriculating, pursue his studies for at least four years, and pass examinations in accordance with the conditions prescribed. 2. The subjects of the course for the degree and the conditions on which such subjects may be taken shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Science after consultation where relevant with the faculty of Education and published together with the details of subjects. 3. (1) During each Year a candidate shall attend classes and perform written, practical, laboratory, field and clinical work prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects unless he satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere. (2) A candidate who enrols for a second or subsequent time in any subject for which practical work is prescribed shall be required to repeat the whole of such practical work, save insofar as he is exempted by the head of the department responsible for such practical work. 4. (1) A candidate's progress in his course of study shall be by years. Such years shall be defined by a cumulative total of points to be scored as a credit for examinations passed. The points to be scored for each subject of examination passed shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published together with the details of subjects. (2) A candidate shall be— (a) in the first year of his course until such time as his cumulative points score shall equal or exceed twenty-eight points; (b) in the second year of his course until such time as his cumulative points score shall equal or exceed sixty points; (c) In the third year of his course until such time as his cumulative points score shall equal or exceed one hundred points; (d) in the fourth year of his course until such time as his cumulative points score shall equal or exceed one hundred and forty points. 5. (1) A candidate who does not pass in a subject may be credited by the faculty with the points to be scored for that subject, having regard to his performance in all subjects taken by him (whether taken at one annual examination or more), in accordance with the principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. (2) A candidate who has without passing in a subject been credited by the faculty with the points to be scored therefor shall not be permitted to proceed to a higher part of that subject, but shall be allowed to proceed with other subjects of a later year of the course for which a pass in that subject may be a prerequisite. 6. No candidate may pursue a course of study or receive credit for examinations passed unless his proposed selection of subjects and the years of his course in which they are to be taken have been approved by the faculty. Any subsequent alterations in the course of study must be approved by the faculty. 7. The faculty may allow a candidate to substitute for any subject of his course another subject of a university course which ia, in its opinion, of at least equal standard and relevant to the candidate's course of study.

257 J FACULTY OF SCIENCE

The points to be scored for passing the examination in any such substituted subject shall be prescribed by the faculty. 8. A candidate who, having completed or simultaneously being a candidate for any other degree, enrols In the course for the degree of Bachelor of Science (Education) may, with the approval of the faculty, be given credit for subjects the equivalent of which have been passed by him in the course for such other degree. The total number of points to be so scored by him in respect of such subjects shall not exceed forty. 9. A candidate who has complied with the prescribed conditions and obtained a cumulative points score equal to or exceeding one hundred and forty points may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Science (Education).

UNIT COURSES 1. Points Score The subjects (hereinafter described as units) for the degree and the points to be awarded for each are specified as follows. Examination re- suits will be expressed as letter grades, A (80 and above), B (70-79), C (60-69), D (50-59), E (40-49), and F (below 40) for all units. 2. Prerequisites and Special Conditions (i) Except where otherwise provided, or with the special permission of the Science Faculty, no candidates shall be admitted to examination In any unit of the course unless he has the specified prerequisite units, and satisfies any special conditions associated with that unit. (1i) A candidate who has, without passing a unit, been credited with the points for that unit, shall not proceed to higher level units in that course, but shall be allowed to proceed to higher levels of other courses for which a pass in that unit is a prerequisite. 3. For the Purposes of Regulation 3.20 (i) Each unit at first-year level shall be known as a 100-level unit, and shall be designated within the relevant department by numbers between 100 and 199. (ii) Each unit at second-year level shall be known as a 200-level unit, and shall be designated within the relevant department by numbers between 200 and 299. (iii) Each unit at third-year level shall be known as a 300-level unit, and shall be designated within the relevant department by numbers between 300 and 399. 4. Availability of Units The Science Faculty reserves the right to not offer a unit in a particular year if a minimum enrolment is not reached. The availability of some - units will also depend on staffing. 5. Additional Units Offered The following units from the Science course are available for selection by BSc (Ed) students. Other units may be available if requested. (Note: quotas apply in all units). For details of these courses consult Chapters 3 and 4. 100 level: General Mathematics; Meteorology; Geography; Geology; Information Science; Sta tistics. 200 level: Biochemistry; Genetics; History and Philosophy of Science; Information Science; Metallurgy; Microbiology; Mining (Science course); Statistics. 300 level: Physics.

258

Unit Course Lectures Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (These figures are all approx.)

355 BOTANY 121 Biology E 160 hrs theory and practice 8 Botany IIE (4 units) 75 200 131 121 Biology E 1} 121 Chemistry E Botany IIIE (2 units) 48 96 12 Consult Chapter 3 for prerequisites for Botany units Botany 111F (2 units) 48 96 12 301-307 223 Ecology 32 30 5 and excursions

357 CHEMISTRY 121 Chemistry E 78 100 8 281 Physical Chemistry I1 52 55 8 Chemistry 11 E: 290 Practical work 160 4 121 Chemistry E This includes 48 hours of seminars Structure: 270 Molecular spectroscopy 8 1 For all 200 level units: Students majoring in BSc 271 Quantum mechanics, valence theory, 121 Chemistry E (Ed) Chemistry are required N.M.R. and mass spectrometry 16 2 Physics 181, 182, 183, 190 to take units 270, 271, 272 Inorganic stereochemistry 8 1 102 Pure Mathematics IE 272, 273, 279, 285, 286, 273 Co-ordinate bond, crystal field or 181 General Maths 287, 288 (12 points) and theory, silicates and oxides 16 2 290 (4 points). Credit is not available for both the course outlined above (16 points) and Chemistry 281. Unit Course Lectures Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions о (These figures are ali approx.)

Thermodynamics and Kinetics: 279 Principles of thermodynamics 16 2 285 Principles of kinetics 8 1 286 Organic Mechanisms A 8 1 287 Thermodynamics and kinetics of co-ordination compounds 8 1

288 Heterocyclic and Aromatic Chemistry 8 1

Chemistry Ill E: For all 300 level units in This includes 40 hours of 389 Practical work 240 8 Chemistry 111E; Chemistry seminars/tutorials. IIE

Structure: 225 •Stereochemistry 8 1

300 level units: The unit comprises a group of 8 lectures, •Spectroscopic Methods A 8 tures, each 6 lectures con- 344 •Radiochemistry A 8 tributes 1 point to the 354 •Structural and Crystal score. Chemistry 8 Students majoring in BSc (Ed.) Chemistry (I1lE) are required to take 10 units (13 points) plus 389 Prac- tical work (8 points). Unit Course Lectures Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (These figures are all approx.)

370 Valency 8 Compulsory units: 225, 371 Spectroscopic Analysis 8 320. 342, 373, 374, 377, 378. 388 Spectroscopic Methods B 8 Elective units: One from 309, 317, 370, 376. One from 323, 330, 386. One from 343, 344, 354, 371. Thermodynamics: 317 •Kinetics and Thermodynamics in Biology 8 377 Nature of Liquids 8

Kinetics: 373 Organic Reaction Mechanisms B 8

Other units: 309 'Surface Chemistry 8 323 •Elementary Biological Chemistry 8 330 'Polymer and Free Radical Chemistry 8 342 • Non-Aqueous Systems 8 343 •Lanthanides and Actinides 8 374 Industrial Chemistry 8 378 Surface and Catalytic Chemistry 8 378 Literature Appreciation 1 Seminars and Tutorials Chemistry III F: Includes 20 hours of Semiп- 0) 390 Practical work 120 4 Chemistry 389 ars. * Normal Science units N

N Unit Course Lectures Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (These figures are all approx.)

325 'Biosynthesis 8 For all 300 level units in Students majoring in BSc Chemistry 111F: Chemistry (Ed.) Chemistry (111F) are IIIE required to take 6 units (8 346 •2nd and 3rd Row Transition points) and 390 Practical Metals 8 work (4 points) 387 (5 points) and 388 (3 points) 347 •Organometallic Chemistry 8 Compulsory units: 325, 349, 383, 384, 387, 349 •Descriptive Chemistry of Non- 388. metals 8 Elective units: One from 376, 385. 350 •Chemical Aspects of Metals of One from 346, 347, 350. Economic Importance to Australia 12 383 Chemistry of the Environment 8 384 Chemical Education Topics & Safety Practices in the Laboratory 12 385 Statistical Thermodynamics 8 387 Electronics in Chemistry 20 60 5 388 Introduction to Computers 15 20 3

367 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 311 History and Philosophy of 28 18 в Minimum of 14, points of First and second terms Science (Ed) Science/Maths. units or on only. recommendation of head of department 832 EDUCATION 201 Educational Psychology E 39 69 8 Includes 25 hrs of seminars 301 Educational Sociology E 52 6 Educ.Psych.E201 302 Philosophy of Education E 48 6 } Unit Course Lectures Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (These figures are all approx.)

401 Curriculum Development and 52 8 Methods of Teaching Educ. Psych. E201 402 School Practice 14 i

371 MATHEMATICS Credit may not be awarded 111 Pure Maths IE 72 48 8 If 181 General Maths is also taken. 151 Applied Maths IE 72 24 8 12 111 Credit may not be awarded 211 Pure Maths IIE 72 48 215 Pure Maths IIF 80 40 10 } for both 211 Pure Maths IIE and 215 Pure Maths 11F 251 Applied Maths IIE 72 48 12 111 151 or 141 216 Is not e sufficient prerequisite, except with fur- 318 Mathematical Structures (see page 170) 18 211 ther work and departmental permission. 380 Mathematics 111F consists of units selected from the following list, to 310 a total of between 18 and 20 points (inclusive). Mathematics Units: 381 Real function theory 18 в 5 Lectures in first term. 382 Math methods 27 9 Б 151 Lectures in first term. 303 Analysis 25 в в Lectures in first term. 309 Topology 15 5 4 Lectures in first term. 384 Complex function theory 27 o 8 Lectures in first term. 385 Tensors and fluid mecha 27 9 в 251 Lectures in first term. N Unit Course Lectures Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (These figures are all approx.)

245 Fluid Mechanics 15 5 3 151 -1- 382 Lectures in third term. 324 Differential Geometry 4 395 Development of Mathematics 25 в 8 Lectures in third term. Information Science Units: 369-201 Computers 27 9 4 151 Lectures In first term. 369-303 Numerical Analysis 18 12 5 Lectures In third term. Statistics Units: 391-301 Distribution Theory A 14 1 в 3 Stat. 201 Lectures in first term. 391-302 Distribution Theory B 12 16 3 Stat. 301 Lectures in first term. 391-303 Statistical Inference A 14 16 3 Stat. 202 Lectures in first term. 373 METALLURGY 201 Materials Processing 36 36 and 24 8 practice 121 Chemistry E classes Physics 181, 182, 183, 190 202 Material Science 36 36 and 24 111 Pure Mathematics IE practice classes 385 PHYSICS 181 Mechanics, Wave Motion 29 2 182 Electromagnetism 24 2 183 Modern Physics 21 2 190 Laboratory Work 80 2 261 Circuit Theory and Electronics 18 42 3 182 Physics 111 Pure Mathematics IE 262 Optics 16 2 181 Physics 111 Pure Mathematics IE 263 Quantum Mechanics 24 3 181 Physics This course will not be 111 Pure Mathematics IE offered in 1973. Students 265 Electromagnetism and should enrol In Physics Relativity 24 3 111 Pure Mathematics IE 243 Unit Course Lectures Practical Work Points Prerequisites Special Conditions (These figures are all approx.)

287 Classical Mechanics 16 2 241 Mathematical Methods Will not be offered for an or enrolment of less than six 281 Mixed Mathematics Il students. 290 Laboratory Work 72 3

387 PНYSIOLOОY 202 Physiology IE 62 65 8 121 Biology E 121 Chemistry IE Physics 180 course 304 & 305 Physiology (2 units) 54 108 11 202 Physiology This course consists of Physiology 304 and 305.

393 ZOOLOGY Biology E See under Botany Zoology IIE (3 units) 57 120 12 121 Biology Zoology IIIE (2 units) 48 72+ 9 See under regulations for Zoology 111F (2 units) 48 144 12 degree of Bachelor of Science

ю viф rrnv vw '.,vv гsaaa A candidate may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Science (Education) who has completed one of the courses set out below. Variations from these courses may be approved by faculty.

Points Points Points Points First Year Score Second Year Score Third Year Score Fourth Year Score

BIOLOGY COURSE 121 Biology E 8 Botany IIE 13 Botany IIIE 12 Any two of— 121 Chemistry E 8 Zoology IIE 12 or Botany 111F 12 181 Physics (or 2 201 Educational Zoology IIIE 9 or 182 Physics approved 2 Psychology E 8 201 Genetics 5 303 Physiology IIE or 12 183 Physics 100 level 2 223 Ecology 5 201 Microbiology or Zoology 111F 12 190 Physics units) 2 200 Biochemistry or 6-6 401 Curric Dev & в 202 Physiology IE Methods of Approved 100 level в-8 units 301 Educational Teaching Sociology E 402 School Practice 14 302 Philosophy of Education E or 311 Hist & Phil of Sc1 (Ed) Cumulative Points Score 30-32 68-70 101-107 145-151 CHEMISTRY COURSE 121 Chemistry E 8 200 level Chemistry 16 300 level Chemistry 22 300 level Chemistry 12 II Е IIIE IIIF 181 Physics 2 215 Pure Mathe- 9 Approved units 5-9 387 Electronics in 182 Physics 2 matics IIF 301 Educational в Chemistry 5 183 Physics 2 201 Educational 8 Sociology E 388 Intro. to 2 Psychology E 3 190 Physics 302 Philosophy of Computers 111 Pure Mathematics IE в Education E or 401 Curric. Dev. & в Approved 100 level 311 Hist & Phil of в Methods of units 6-8 Sci (Ed) Teaching 402 School Practice 14 Cumulative Points Score З0-32 63-65 102-108 142-148 MATHEMATICS COURSE All mathematics courses must include 318 Mathematical Structures, Applied Mathematics IE and at least 6 points of 100 or 200 level Statistics, together with the required Education studies. First Year Points Second Year Points Third Year Points Fourth Year Points Score Score Score Score

111 Pure Mathematics 8 211 Pure Mathe- 12 318 Mathematical 18 380 Mathematics 111F 16 IE matics IIE Structures 401 Curric lev & 6 Approved 100 level 22-24 Approved units 12-16 Approved units 8-16 Methods of units 201 Educational 8 301 Educational 6 Teaching Psychology E Sociology E 402 School Practice 14 302 Philosophy of Education E or 8 311 Hist & Phil of Sci (Ed)

Cumulative Points Score 30-32 62-68 104-114 140-152

PHYSICS COURSE 261 Physics 3 2 265 Physics 3 Approved units 20 181 Physics 262 Physics 2 182 Physics 2 263 Physics Approved units 27 З 183 Physics 2 290 Physics 3 301 Educational 6 401 Curric Div & 6 190 Physics 2 241 Mathematics Sociology E Methods of or 111 Pure Mathematics IE 8 4-6 302 Philosophy of Teaching 246 Physics and 402 School Practice 14 approved unit 1 Education E or в Approved 100 level 14-16 211 Pure Mathematics IIE 311 Hist & Phil of units or 12 Sci (Ed) 281 Mixed Mathematics I1 I 201 Educational Psychology 8 E Cumulative Points Score 30-32 65-69 107-111 Students must include a minimum of 24 points of 300 level Physics units in their selection of units for the third and fourth years. EARTH SCIENCES COURSE At present the approved courses in Earth Sciences are not available due to lack of finance. Students wishing to undertake Geology or Geophysics as their major study must at the end of first year apply to transfer to the Bachelor of Science degree and apply for selection in each of the units chosen. If approved. they may then complete a Bachelor of Science degree followed by a Diploma of Education in the fourth year. ю Details of units available can be found under the details of units for the Bachelor of Science degree. w COURSE APPROVAL Bachelor of Science (Education) courses based on those shown above will be approved under the same general conditions as apply to Bachelor of Science courses. (Ses rk Z ' in .'Union e fourth year student Is one who has earned 100 or more points but less than 140 points and the maximum total credit which may be attempted at one by a fourth year student ů 44 points, except where special permission is granted by the faculty for this to be exceeded. FACULTY OF SCIENCE

DETAILS OF COURSES Vacation Reading: Students are advised that they are expected to use a considerable part of the summer and spring vacations for reading purposes. In some cases specific references are made in the following details; in others, a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice boards; in all cases the lecturers concerned should be consulted.

355 BOTANY 100 LEVEL 121 BIOLOGY E A course of six hours of formal class work per week throughout the year, in which theoretical and practical work are interwoven, and emphasis placed on experimental investigation more than on exposition and demonstration. Higher School Certificate standard in Physics and Chemistry is assumed; a knowledge of Biology above that of junior secondary science is not assumed. (Drs Calders, Weste and others) SYLLABUS The nature of science. The living world: its nature and classification; the major groups of organisms and their characteristics. Communities and ecosystems: populations; interactions between organisms and between them and their environments. Adaptation: requirements of organisms; factors affecting survival; adaptations of organisms. • Evolution: evidence of evolution; Lamarckism; natural selection; speciation; theories of the origin of life. Cells and tissues: the cell theory; basic biochemistry and biophysics of cells; cell structure. Energy transformations in organisms: enzymes and coenzymes; energy in cells; photosynthesis and chemosynthesis; respiration; metabolism and metabolic rate. Morphology, anatomy, and physiology of organisms, especially of higher plants and animals: nutrient requirements, nutrient procurement and processing; gaseous exchange; water relations; internal transport; support and movement; regulation of body fluids; response to environment; chemical and nervous control. Reproduction and development: mitosis; sexual and asexual reproduction; development, differentiation, and elements of embryology, including ger- mination and metamorphosis; meiosis; life cycles and their evolution. Genetics: Mendelian genetics; the nature of the gene; gene action; elementary population genetics; genetics of speciation.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Keeton W T Biological Science, Norton 1967 LABORATORY WORK Instructions for laboratory work can be purchased at the Secondary Teachers' College at the beginning of the academic year. Each student must provide himself with slides and coverslips, and with certain approved dissecting instruments, a list of which will be made available at the start of the year.

268 в.Sс. (EDUCATION) Students are expected to attend at last one full-day field excursion during the year, and may be expected to do additional reading outside the set texts, and to participate in seminar work. EXAMINATION Three examinations, of two or three hours duration and covering both theoretical and practical work, two of which will be held during the year, and one during the final examination term. Practical work, assignments and reports of excursions are also used to assess a student's performance In this subject.

200 LEVEL BOTANY 1(E A course of about 75 lectures, 200 hours practical work and prescribed field excursions. Botany IIE consists of units equivalent to Botany 202, 203, 204 and Angiosperm Systematics 222 (part of the unit Botany 201) and is taken In conjunction with a combined course in botanical and zoological ecology 223. Genetics 201 is a compulsory subject of the BSc (Ed) Biology course, but is taken in the third year of the four-year course. At the discretion of the head of the Botany School, a student may omit the ecology course if he has passed Zoology 11E. Some units will be taught with BSc students on the University campus. Students must enrol In the five units below. SYLLABUS (i) Botany 202: Plent Physiology (i1) Botany 203: Introduction to non-flowering plants. (iii) Botany 204: Plant Anatomy (iv) Botany 222 (Part): Angiosperm Systematics

BOOКS See under Botany 200 Level EXAMINATION See under Botany 200 Level. SYLLABUS FOR SPECIAL UNIT (STC staff) (v) Ecology 223: An Inte- grated course of plant and aпiтаl ecology. Introductory biometrics; population sampling; population change; introductory biogeography; communities end ecosystems; form and change in communities; energetics and productivity; applied ecology.

BOOКS Prescribed textbook: kormondy E J Concepts of Ecology, Prentice-Hall 1969 Recommended for reference: Andrewartha H G Introduction to the Study of Animal Populations, Phoenix 1961 Kormondy E J Readings In Ecology, Prentice-Hall 1969 EXAMINATION One written peper of about 2% hours' duration, which is also part of the Zoology IIE examination. The laboratory and field work of each student is examined continually during each term and records of assessments kept. Marks obtained in this way are included In the final assessment of the student's performance in the subject.

269 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

300 LEVEL BOTANY IIIE A course of 48 lectures and 96 hours practical work, taken in third year of the course. . SYLLABUS Two units selected from the following alternatives. Selection may be restricted by quotas. Students must enrol in the two units selected. (i) Botany 301: (Plant Physiology) or Botany 302: (Whole Plant Physiology and Physiological Ecology). (ii) Botany 305: (General Botany) or Botany 307: (Marine Botany). BOOKS See under Botany 300 level

EXAMINATION See under Botany 300 level

BOTANY 111F A course of 48 lectures and 96 hours practical work, taken in the fourth year of the course. An excursion will be arranged before the beginning of first term. SYLLABUS Two units of which one is selected from two alternatives. Selection may be restricted by quotas. Students must enrol in the two units selected. (i) Botany 304: (Plant Ecology and Geography). (ii) Botany 303: (Mycology and Pathology) or Botany 306: (Plant Population Genetics). BOOKS See under Botany 300 level EXAMINATION See under Botany 300 level

357 CHEMISTRY 100 LEVEL 121 CHEMISTRY PART IE A course of three lectures and one tutorial per week together with laboratory work throughout the year. A knowledge of Higher School Certificate Chemistry will be assumed. SYLLABUS The chief topics are as follows: Chemical kinetics and Reaction Mechanisms: measurement of reaction rate; rate laws; effect of temperature, concentration, radiation, catalysts

270 B.Sc. (EDUCATION) on reaction rate. Simple collision theory model for reaction mechanisms; collision frequency, energy distribution; activation energy. Mechanisms of selected examples. Chemical Equilibrium: Homogeneous and heterogeneous equilibria in gases and solution. Free energy changes. Electrochemistry: Conductance of electrolytes. Redox potentials and electrochemical cells. Electrolysis. Atomic Structure and Chemical Bonding. Nature of light and of matter. Simple wave mechanical treatment of particle-in-a-box and of the electron. Energy levels in hydrogen-like and many-electron atoms. Electro- valent, covalent, hydrogen, metallic and van der Waal's bonding. Thermodynamics: A brief treatment of the first law, Internal energy, heat, work, enthalpy, Hess's Law, Kirchoff's Law, enthalpies of formation. Phase Equilibria: P-V and P-T diagrams for one-component systems. Polymorphism. Liquid-liquid and Liquid-vapor two-component systems. Ideal and non-ideal behaviour. Solid-liquid systems. Organic chemistry: the preparation, properties and reactions of simple aliphatic and aromatic compounds and the interpretation of these in terms of the principles of molecular structure and of reaction mechanisms. Nomenclature. Isomerism. Inorganic Chemistry and the Periodic Classification. The properties of selected elements and their compounds; the relationship of these properties to each other, and their interpretation in terms of underlying molecular structure. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week throughout the year. The practical classes are held in the Secondary Teachers' College Science Education Building.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: Styanks D R et al Chemistry: A Structural View, MUP 1965 Prescribed textbooks: Pimentai G C & Sprately R D Understanding Chemistry, Holden-Day 1971 or Mahan B H University Chemistry, Addison Wesley 1968 Catchpole A G Anderson R M& Webb D F Organic Chemistry, Harrap 1969 or Morrison R T & Boyd R N Organic Chemistry, Allyn & Bacon or Tedder J M & Nechvetal A Basic Organic Chemistry, Wiley 1966 Aylward G H & Findlay T J eds Chemical Data Book, S1 Wiley Further lists of specific references and duplicated copies of articles from journals will be provided during the year. EXAMINATION Assignment work will be continually assessed and, together with short tests during the year, will be taken into account in a final assessment. Candidates must have completed a satisfactory practical course before being permitted to sit for the final examination, which will consist of one 3-hour and two 2-hour papere.

271 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

200 LEVEL CHEMISTRY PART IIE Although the course given below is considered most suitable for Chemis- try IIE students, permission may be granted in certain cases for substitution of other 200 level units. LABORATORY WORK (290) (a) Experimental work occupies six hours per week for approximately 18 weeks. Experiments in physical, inorganic and organic chemistry are performed, these experiments supplementing the lecture course where practicable. (b) Seminars and tutorials comprise two hours per week throughout the academic year. Students' attendance and performance in both (a) and (b) will be assessed and, if satisfactory, will contribute a total of four points. The practical classes are taken in the Secondary Teachers' College Science Education Building. EXAMINATION Units may be examined at fixed times throughout the year and in the examination term at the end of the year. In general, satisfactory performance in at least two thirds of the second year units attempted will be required before a student will be accepted for Chemistry IIIE units.

DETAILS FOR 200 LEVEL UNITS (8 lectures have a value of 1 point.)

STRUCTURE: 270 MOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY (8 lectures) General principles and methods of spectroscopy. Pure rotational (microwave) and vibrational-rotational (Infrared) absorption spectroscopy and their application to determination of details of molecular structure of simple molecules. 271 QUANTUM MECHANICS, VALENCE THEORY, NMR AND MASS SPECTROMETRY (16 lectures) Schrödinger equation for hydrogen-like atoms. Atomic orbitals. Qualita- tive molecular orbital and valence bond theories for diatomic afd polyatomic molecules. Fundamentals of proton magnetic resonance. The theory of chemical shifts and coupling constants, and their applications in solving simple structural problems in organic chemistry. Ionization and fragmentation by electron Impact in the mass spectrometer. Application to simple organic systems. 272 INORGANIC STEREOCHEMISTRY (8 lectures) Stereochemistry of metal complexes, co-ordination number and geometry of complex compounds. Isomerism; geometrical, optical and other types

272 e.sc. (EDUCATION'

of isomerism. Methods of investigating structure of metal complexes: stoichiometry, conductance, spectroscopy, dipole moments, magnetic measurements. 273 CO-ORDINATE BOND AND CRYSTAL FIELD THEORY, SILICATES AND OXIDES (16 lectures) Nature of co-ordination compounds, the co-ordinate bond, effective atomic number rule, valence bond theory and co-ordination compounds. The crystal field theory. Crystal field splitting of octahedral, square pyramidal, square planar; and tetrahedral complexes. Consequences of crystal field splitting: magnetic properties, visible spectra, the spectrochemlcal series, relative stability of octahedral and tetrahedral configurations, structural effects of crystal field splitting. A study of the structural chemistry of the simple silicates and oxides.

THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS: 279 PRINCIPLES OF THERMODYNAMICS (18 lectures) Brief review of the first law, internal energy, enthalpy, Hess's Law, Kir- choff's Law, and enthalpies of formation. The second law, entropy, the Carnot cycle using an Ideal and non-ideal gas, dS for reversible and Irreversible changes, entropy changes in chemical reactions, the third law and absolute entropies. Free energy, free energy and maximum work, free energy and equilibrium, free energy and e.m.f. Variations of free energy with pressure, temperature and composition. Thermodynamics of electrochemical cells. Chemical potential, and equilibrium conditions, chemical and phase relationships. Thermodynamics of solutions—activities and activity coefficients, ideal and non-Ideal solutions. 286 PRINCIPLES OF KINETICS (8 lectures) Experimental techniques and treatment of experimental results. Collision and transition state theories. Reaction mechanisms Including steady state approximation. Homogeneous and heterogeneous catalysis.

288 ORGANIC REACTION MECHANISMS A (8 lectures) Reaction sequences and Intermediates In common chemical reactions are considered with reference to intra-molecular and Inter-molecular electronic and steric effects on reactivity.

287 THERMODYNAMICS AND KINETICS OF CO-ORDINATION COMPOUNDS (8 lectures) Staff lity constants, stepwise stability constants. Factors that influence complex ion stability constants. The enthalpy factor, the entropy factor. Inert and labile complexes. Possible mechanisms for Ilgand replacement reactions of octahedral complexes. Water exchange reactions. Influence

273 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

of size and charge. Taube's classification. Square planar complexes, trans effect. Electron transfer reactions. Preparative methods of co-ordination compounds. 288 HETEROCYCLIC AND AROMATIC CHEMISTRY (8 lectures) A study of aromaticity and the effect of heteroatoms in carbon ring systems. Important relevant naturally occurring molecules are considered. BOOКS Prescribed textbooks: Basolo F & Johnson R Co-ordination Chemistry, Benjamin 1964 (Units 272 274 283 287) Williams D H & Flemming I Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemis- try, McGraw-Hill (Unit 271). or Silverstein R M & Sassier G C Spectrometric Identification of Organic Compounds 2nd edition, Wiley (Unit 271) Denbigh k G Principles of Chemical Equilibrium, Cambridge UP (Unit 279) Hendrickson J B Cram D J & Hammond G S Organic Chemistry, 3rd ed McGraw-Hill 1970 (Units 286, 288) or Roberts J D & Caserio M J Principles of Organic Chemistry, Benjamin 1965 (Units 286, 288) Recommended for reference: kettle S F A Co-ordination Compounds, Nelson 1969 (Units 272 274 283 287) Cotton F A & Wilkinson G Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd ed Inter- science 1966 (Units 272 274 287) Heslop R B & Robinson P L Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd ed Elsevier 1967 (Units 272 273) Pimentel G C & Sprately R D Understanding Chemical Thermodynamics, Holden Day 1970 (Unit 279) kIotz I Introduction to Chemical Thermodynamics, Benjamin (Unit 279) Nash L К Elements of Chemical Thermodynamics, Addison-Wesley (Unit 279) Mahan B H University Chemistry, Addison-Wesley 1968 (Unit 285) Barrow G M Physical Chemistry, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill (Unit 285). Campbell J A Chemical Systems, Freeman 1970 (Unit 285) Frost A A & Pearson R G Kinetics and Mechanism, 2nd ed Wiley 1962 (Unit 285) Breslow R Organic Reaction Mechanisms, Benjamin (Unit 285) 281 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY PART II A course consisting of the Physical Chemistry component of Chemistry 11E, together with selected lectures in Inorganic Chemistry, totalling in all 52 lectures. In addition tutorial and seminar work amounting to 25 hours, and approximately 30 hours of practical work. For details of the syllabus, see the relevant sections of the Chemistry IIE syllabus. EXAMINATION Seminar work and the results of tests given during the year will be taken into account in the final assessment. The final examination will consist of one 3-hour paper.

274 B.Sc. (EDUCATION)

CHEMISTRY 111E The course Chemistry IIIE comprises compulsory and elective units, together with practical work (200 hours) and seminars (40 hours). Some of the units offered in this course are normal Science units'. Details of these units may be obtained from the appropriate section of the Hand- book. In certain cases, permission may be granted for substitution of other 300 level units as electives. Compulsory units: 225, 320•, 342•, 373, 374, 377, 378, 389. Elective units: One from 309•, 317•, 370, 376 One from 323, 330•, 386 One from 343',344, 354, 371. LABORATORY WORK will comprise experiments in physical, inorganic and organic chemistry. (a) Experimental work (200 hours) (b) Seminars and tutorials (40 hours). Attendance and performance in both (a) and (b) will be assessed, and if satisfactory, will contribute a total of 8 points. The practical classes are taken in the Secondary Teachers' College Science Education Building. EXAMINATIONS Some units will be examined terminally, some In the examination term of the end of the year, the distribution depending on the timetable arrangement. Satisfactory performance in at least two thirds of Chemistry 111E units will be required before students will be accepted for Chemistry IIIF units.

STRUCTURE: 225 STEREOCHEMISTRY• 320 SPECTROSCOPIC METHODS A• 344 RADIOCHEMISTRY A• 354 STRUCTURAL AND CRYSTAL CHEMISTRY

370 VALENCY (8 lectures) Hamiltonian operator, elgenfunctions, eigenvalues, average values. Simple calculations of energies for hydrogen and helium atoms, hydrogen molecule ion and hydrogen molecule. Wicket molecular orbital theory. Ruedenberg theory of covalent bonding. Valence formulae for diatomic and polyatomic molecules. 371 SPECTROSCOPIC ANALYSIS (8 lectures) The application of atomic absorption, flате photometry, x-ray, electron spin resonance, visible and ultraviolet, Infrared, nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy and mass spectrometry to the analysis of inorganic systems.

388 SPECTROSCOPIC METHODS В (8 lectures) Qualitative and quantitative aspects of the electronic absorption spectroscopy of organic molecules. A discussion of the relationship between structure and absorption for a wide range of molecules from a variety of small polyatomic molecules to large complex structures. A short intro-

275 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

duction to the fundamentals of optical rotatory dispersion (ORD) and (optical) circular dichroism (CD). An introduction to electron spin resonance spectroscopy in organic chemistry. THERMODYNAMICS: 317 KINETICS AND THERMODYNAMICS IN BIOLOGY 377 NATURE OF LIQUIDS (8 lectures) Interpretation of the thermodynamics of solution in terms of structure and bonding. Experimental methods for structure determination and Identifica- tion of species present. KINETICS: 373 ORGANIC REACTION MECHANISMS B A study of mechanism of fundamental organic reactions. The course will substantially extend the study of mechanisms made in Unit 286 (Organic Reaction Mechanisms A). Emphasis will be given to the study of mechanisms of those reactions which are of particular importance in organic synthesis. OTHER UNITS: 309 SURFACE CHEMISTRY 323 ELEMENTARY BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY 330 POLYMER AND FREE RADICAL CHEMISTRY 342 NON-AQUEOUS sYsTEMS 343 LANTHANIDES AND ACTINIDES

374 INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY—TECHNICAL, ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL ASPECTS (8 lectures) This unit will deal with the history and development of the Australian Chemical Industry and methods of manufacture of the basic chemicals made in Australia. The Interplay of technical and economic factors In determining the success of a chemical manufacturing process will be discussed with particular reference to the Australian scene. Matters such as competition, monopoly, profitability, dumping, tariff protection and pollution will be dealt with. The different kinds of role which the chemist may play in Industry will be outlined and the inter-relationship of Research, Development, Produc- tion, Quality Control, Engineering and Sales departments examined. Dif- ferences in attitude between industrial research chemists and those in more academic areas will be explored. 376 SURFACE AND CATALYTIC CHEMISTRY (8 lectures) Structure and Molecular Interactions in Monolayers on Aqueous Surfaces; applications. The nature of interactions in the wetting of solids by liquids, hydrogen bonding, hydrophobic bonding, adhesion of liquids and polymers to solids. Catalysis of hydrocarbon reactions on oxide surfaces, the role of the lone- pair electrons of oxygen. The surface chemistry of C.N.S. drug molecules, the structure of cell membranes, possible modes of drug Interaction with living cells. 276 B.Sc. (EDUCATION)

378 LITERATURE APPRECIATION The understanding and critical analysis of chemical literature, including research papers and other articles. A series of seminars and tutorials.

В OOKS Prescribed textbooks: Silverstein R M & Bassler G C Spectrometric Identification of Organic Compounds, 2nd ed Wiley (Unit 320) Brand J C & Eglington G Applications of Spectroscopy to Organic Chemistry, Olbourne Press 1965 (Unit 386) Hallas G Organic Stereochemistry, McGraw-Hill 1967 (Unit 225) Duncan J F & Cook G B Isotopes In Chemistry, OUP 1968 (Unit 344) Addison W E Structural Principles In Inorganic Compounds, Longmans (Unit 354) Waddington T C Non-Aqueous Solvents, Nelson (Unit 342) Recommended for reference: Wella A F Structural Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd ed OUP (Unit 354) Krebs H Fundamentals of Inorganic Crystal Chemistry, McGraw-Hill (Unit 354) Mahler H R & Cordes L H Biological Chemistry, Harper 1966 (Unit 323) Bu'Lock J D The Biosynthesis of Natural Products, McGraw-Hill 1965 (Unit 325) Coulson C A Valence, OUP (Unit 370) Murrell J N Kettle S F A & Tedder J M Valence Theory, Wiley (Unit 370) Shreve R N Chemical Process Industries, McGraw-Hill 1967 (Unit 374) Friedlander G Kennedy J W & Miller J M Nuclear and Radiochemistry, Wiley (Unit 344) Choppin G R Nuclei and Radioactivity, Benjamin (Unit 344) Duncan J F Journal of Inorganic Nuclear Chemistry 2, 161 1959 (Unit 344) Ingold C K Structure and Mechanism in Organic Chemistry, 2nd ed Bell & Sons 1969 (Unit 373) Norman R 0 C Principles of Organic Synthesis, Methuen 1968 (Unit 373) Gould E S Mechanism and Structure in Organic Chemistry, Holt 2nd ed 1989 (Unit 373) line J Physical Organic Chemistry, Int ed McGraw-Hill 1962 (Unit 373) Breslow R Organic Reaction Mechanisms, Benjamin 1969 (Unit 373) Jones D G Chemistry and Industry, Clarendon Press 1967 (Unit 374) EXAMINATION Some units will be examined terminally, some in the examination term at the end of the year.

300 LEVEL CHEMISTRY IIIF The course Chemistry 111F is sequential to Chemistry IIIE and comprises compulsory and elective units, together with practical work (110 hours) and seminars (20 hours). Some of the units offered In this course are normal Science units'. Details of these may be obtained from the appropriate section of the Handbook. In special circumstances, approval may be granted for variation of this course within the limits Imposed by timetable restrictions. Compulsory units: 325•, 349•, 383, 384, 387, 388, 390

277 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Elective units: one from 376, 385 one from 346, 347•, 350' Students' teaching commitment in second term precludes them from selection of units timetab ed for this term. LABORATORY WORK The practical work (approximately 110 hours) comprises a specific chemical education project in third term (80 hours) and a short course in laboratory and experimental techniques (30 hours). Satisfactory performance in this practical work and the seminars (20 hours) will result in a score of four points. The practical classes are taken in the Secondary Teachers' College Science Education Building.

325 BIOSYNTHESIS 346 2nd AND 3rd ROW TRANSITION METALS• 347 ORGANOMETALLIC CHEMISTRY 349 DESCRIPTIVE CHEMISTRY OF NON-METALS 350 CHEMICAL ASPECTS OF METALS OF ECONOMIC IMPORTANCE TO AUSTRALIA 383 CHEMISTRY OF THE ENVIRONMENT (8 lectures) The content of this unit is variable within the context of the title. It may include one or more of the following: Flavour Chemistry: The chemistry and physiology of taste and odour; theories of odour; methods of determination of volatile flavour components of foodstuffs; e.g. fruit, cheese, coffee etc. Pollution: General outline of pollutants of our environment; photochemistry of air pollution; pollution of water by agricultural chemicals (fertilizers and pesticides). Surface coatings: The chemistry involved in the formation of thin polymer films; autoxidation; alkyd resins, acrylics (thermoplastic and thermo- setting), phenol and urea formaldehyde resins, epoxy and polyester resins.

384 CHEMICAL EDUCATION TOPICS AND SAFETY PRACTICES IN THE LABORATORY CHEMICAL EDUCATION TOPICS (8 lectures) The content of this unit changes from year to year. Further Information may be available at the beginning of the academic year.

SAFETY PRACTICES IN THE LABORATORY (4 lectures) The aim of this course is to provide students with an understanding and knowledge of safety practices so that they will be adequately equipped to deal with situations encountered in their later professional careers. Directions for the safe handling and disposal of various groups of chemicals, for example, toxic and corrosive chemicals, organic liquids etc. Information on the routes of access of chemicals to the body, the physiological effects and first aid measures. Directions for the safe handling and care of general laboratory equipment.

278 в.вс. (EDUCATION)

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Denbigh K G The Principles of Chemical Equilibrium, CUP (Unit 385) Recommended for reference: Bu'Lock J D The Biosynthesis of Natural Products, McGraw-Hill (Unit 325) Hornstein I & Teranishi R The Chemistry of Flavour, Chem. Eng. News, April 3 p 92 1987 (Unit 383) Cleaning our Environment: The Chemical Basis for Action, American Chemical Society Publication 1970 (Unit 383) Solomon D H The Chemistry of Organic Film Formers, Wiley 1987 (Unit 383) EXAMINATION Some units will be examined terminally, some in the examination term at the end of the year. 385 STATISTICAL THERMODYNAMICS (8 lectures) Probability, Quantum States, Equilibrium States, Ensembles, Statistical analogues of thermodynamic functions, Partition functions for ideal gases. Chemical equilibria between gases. Applications in non gaseous systems. 387 ELECTRONICS IN CHEMISTRY A course consisting of twenty lectures and sixty hours integrated practical work in basic electronics. Fundamental OC and AC circuit theory, thermionic and semi-conducting devices and their applications. EXAMINATION Assignments during the course and one 2-hour examination at the end of the course. BOOK Lists will be posted on the notice board of the Chemistry school at the start of the year. 388 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS A course of fifteen lectures and twenty hours practical work In the function and use of computers. Basic design and organization of computers. Principles of programming. Use of computers; social implications. EXAMINATION Assignments during the course. BOOK Lists will be posted on the notice board of the Chemistry school at the start of the year.

832 EDUCATION 200 LEVEL 201 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY E A course of 39 lectures, 25 seminars and 44 hours of laboratory work throughout the year. SYLLABUS An Introduction to Psychology with special reference to the field of Education. The course will include such topics as: Statistical and experimental methods. Learning, motivation, cognition. Social factors In education, behaviour In groupe. Child and adolescent psychology. Individual differences.

279 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Books Prescribed textbooks: •Butcher H J Human Intelligence Its Nature and Assessment, Methuen 1970 •Gaudry E Ainley M D Leonard E C & Morrison S M Educational Psy- chology A Laboratory Manual, Wiley 1972 •Gaudry E & Spielberger C D Anxiety and Educational Achievement, Wiley 1971 •Lovell k An Introduction to Human Development 2nd ed, Macmillan 1969 EXAMINATION Laboratory reports will be required regularly throughout the year. There will be two progressive tests. One essay is to be submitted toward the end of third term. Recruits from these three sources will be combined to form the final assessment.

300 LEVEL 301 EDUCATIONAL SOCIOLOGY E A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS An introduction to educational sociology, with special reference to Australian education. The following topics will be studied: 1. Education and the social framework. (a) The family and education. (b) The economy and education. (c) Politics and education. (d) Religion and education. 2. The structure of the Australian education system. (a) Demographic patterns. (b) The organization of primary education. (c) The organization of secondary education. (d) The organization of tertiary education. (e) The control, administration and finance of education. 3. Social factors and school performance. (a) Socio-cultural environment and personality development. (b) Some social factors that affect school performance. (c) Equality of educational opportunity.

BOO кS •McLean D It's People That Matter, Angus and Robertson 1969 Katz F & Browne R Sociology of Education, Macmillan Australia 1970 •Dow G M Parent, Pupil and School, Cassell 1966 Musgrave P W A Sociology of Education, Methuen 1967 Halsey A et a1 Education, Economy and Society, Routledge & kegan Paul 1961 Davies A F & Encel S Australian Society, Ser ed Cheshire 1970 Partridge P H Society, Schools and Progress, Pergamon 1968 Cowan R W Education For Australians, Cheshire 1966 EXAMINATION One written assignment and one unit test in each of terms 1 and 2 and one 3-hour written paper at the end of term 3.

280 B.Sc. (EDUCATION)

302 PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCATION E A course of approximately 48 lecture-discussions during the year. SYLLABUS The course Is Intended as an introduction to educational philosophy, with special reference to the following topics: The role of theory in education. The concept of education. Curriculum theory. The concept of teaching. Respect for persons and the manner of education.

Books Prescribed textbooks: •Hirst P H & Peters R S The Logic of Education, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1970 Recommended for reference: Devlin P The Enforcement of Morals, OUP 1968 Gribble J H Introduction to Philosophy of Education, Allyn & Bacon 1969 Peters R $ Ethics and Education, Allen & Unwin 1968 Peters R S ed The Concept of Education, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1967 Reid I. A Philosophy and Education, Heinemann 1962 Тibblе J W ed The Study of Education, Routledge & Kegan Paul 1968 EXAMINATION The method of examining in this subject will be that of progressive assessment. Students will be required to submit six essays (each approximately 500 words in length). The final assessment for pass or honours will be made on the basis of the student's performance in the essays.

400 LEVEL 401 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT AND METHODS OF TEACHING

A course of two lecture-discussion sessiопs per week through term 1, twenty sessions In the first week of term 2, and two sessions per week through the remainder of term 2. Some of these sessions will be used for excursions and demonstrations. SYLLABUS The topics of the course are as follows: 1. Curriculum Development (Term 1). (a) Science teaching in Australian schools today. (b) The evolution of the secondary school curriculum; the emergence and development of science within it. Changing relations between primary, secondary and tertiary science courses. (C) Principles of curriculum design, exemplified by modern science curricula In Australia, the U.K. and the U.S.A. 'Junior' and 'advanced' programmes. (d) Evaluation and comparison of various recent courses in the subject area of the students' major study. (Each student selects one of Chemistry, Physics, Mathematics or Biology). 2. Methods of Teaching (Term 2). Method lecturers will give general Instruction In classroom and laboratory management and the role of the teacher in a school. In addition

281 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

there will be an emphasis on differing approaches and strategies in the teaching of specific topics within disciplines. Students will take as their teaching methods: 1. either Science or Mathematics and 2. one of Chemistry, Physics, Senior Mathematics, Biology. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: 'Lee Dow IC C Teaching Science in Australian Schools M UP 1971 Essential references: Anderson H 0 Readings in Science Education for the Secondary School, Macmillan 1969 Hedges W D Testing and Evaluation for the Sciences, Wadsworth 1966 Hurd P H New Curriculum Prospectives for Junior High School Science, Wadsworth 1970 Hurd P H New Directions in Teaching Secondary School Science, Rand McNally 1969 Jevons F R The Teaching of Science, Unwin 1969 Lee E C New Developments in Science Teaching, Wadsworth 1967 Romey W D Inquiry Techniques for Teaching Science, Prentice-Hall 1968 Enquiry into the Flow of Candidates in Science and Technology into Higher Education (The Dainton Report), HMSO London 1968 EXAMINATION One written assignment on the work of term 1 and written exercises in each Method during term 2. In addition, one 8-hour written paper may be required of students who do not reach an accept- abl e standard in assignment and written work.

402 SCHOOL PRACTICE Practice teaching in approved schools will be arranged for each student. Each student will be required to undertake four days of school practice per week throughout one term, and to attend review and evaluation sessions on one day of each week throughout that term. EXAMINATION Each student will be assessed (to pass only) on the basis of performance in teaching practice in approved schools.

367 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE 311 HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE (EDUCATION) A course of two lectures afd one tutorial per week in first term. One lecture and one tutorial per week in second term. No classes in third term. SYLLABUS An examination of some of man's attempts to understand the phenomenal world through explanatory systems of his own devising. What makes an explanation acceptable ('plausible', 'convincing', 'irresist- l e') 7 Logical and psychological features of explanations which have iь counted as satisfactory, especially In their historical setting. Simplicity, elegance, generality, appeals to analogy. In 1973 these considerations will be given substance by a detailed study of original sources in the

282 B.Sc. (EDUCATION)

history of science, probably Galileo Galilei (1564-1642), Dialogues Con- cerning Two New Sciences (1638), and Claude Bernard (1813-1878), An Introduction to the Study of Experimental Medicine (1865). BOOKS For preliminary reading: Students should read at least one of the following before first term lectures begin: Butterfield H The Origins of Modern Science, Collier 1962 koestler A The Sleepwalkers, Penguin 1964 Before second term students should have read: Gasking E B The Rise of Experimental Biology, Random House 1970 Reference books: Bernard C A п Introduction to the Study of Experimental Medicine, Dover 1967 Galilei Galileo Dialogues Concerning Two New Sciences, Dover EXAMINATION The method of examining in this subject will be that of progressive assessment. Students will be required to submit no more than three essays (each approximately 1,500 words in length). The final assessment for pass or honours will be made on the basis of student's performance in these essays.

210 HISTORY OF MATHEMATICS The course will be the same as History of Science for BSc students. 371 MATHEMATICS 100 LEVEL

111 PURE MATHEMATICS PART IE A course of three lectures per week, with tutorials, practice classes and exercises, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Numbers and Functions. Finite series. Induction. Rational and irrational numbers. Approximations. Sketching graphs of polynomials and rational functions. Exponential and logarithmic functions. Circular and hyperbolic functions and their Inverses. Complex exponentiels. Vectors and Linear Algebra. Sums and products of vectors. Scalar triple products. Applications to geometry. Determinants and linear equations. Linear transformations. Algebra of 3 X 3 matrices. Eigenvalues and applications to central conica. Differential Calculus. Applications of derivatives. Second derivatives and concavity. Partial derivatives. Chain rule. Directional derivative with applications. Integral Calculus. Limit sums. Areas. Relation to differentiation. Syste- matic integration. Applications to areas and volumes. Applications using polar co-ordinates and parametric specification. Differential Equations. First order separable, homogeneous and linear, with applications. Second order liпеаr constant coefficient equations. Standard power series expansions. Groups. Group postulates. Commutative and non-commutative groups. Sub-groups. Isomorphisms. Cyclic groups.

283 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Books Prescribed textbooks: Thomas G B Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Addison-Wesley Dinkines F Abstract Mathematical Systems, Appleton-Century-Crofts References to other texts will be made in lectures. Recommended for reference: Abrahamson B & Gray M C The Art of Algebra, Rigby Courant R & Robbins H E What is Mathematics?, OUP Mathematics in the Modern World, Readings from The Scientific Ameri- can, with an introduction by M Kline, Freeman EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken into account.

151 APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART IE A course of three lectures and two 1-hour tutorials throughout the year. SYLLABUS (i) Computer Programming. Brief introduction to computers and computer programming. Method of approach to programming: flow- charts. FORTRAN programming language: basics, loops and arrays, for- matted input/output. Errors in computing: numerical analysis. Brief survey of computing systems and programming languages. (ii) Dynamics. Fields of force. Celestial orbits. Aggregates of particles. Rigid bodies. Impulses. (iii) One-dimensional continuum mechanics. Characteristics. Waves on strings and rods. Equation of fluid flow. Sound waves. Flow in ducts. Tutorial classes are an integral part of the course. Specified programming projects (not exceeding three) must be completed satisfactorily and presented when required, and tutorial sheets must be submitted at regular intervals as required by the tutors. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Buien K E An Introduction to the Theory of Mechanics, Science Press or synge J L & Griffith B A Principles of Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Armit A P Advanced Level Vectors, Heinemann McCracken D A guide to FORTRAN IV Programming, Wiley Stuart F WATFOR/WAIF IV FORTRAN Programming, Wiley EXAMINATION A two-hour paper in section (1) of the syllabus and two 2-hour papers in sections (ii) and (iii). The papers are for pass and honours combined.

200 LEVEL 211 PURE MATHEMATICS PART IIE A course of three lectures per week, with two hours practice classes per week and exercises, throughout the year. This subject may be taken at pass level only. SYLLABUS Complex functions. Exponential and related functions of a complex variable. Mappings. Continuity and differentiability. Integrals. Infinite and improper integrals. Reduction formulae. Multiple integrals. Curvilinear and surface integrals.

284 a.Sc. (EDUCATION)

Functions of several variables. Analytical geometry in space. Directional derivatives, differentiable functions, tangent planes, stationary points, Lagrange multipliers. Change of variables. Mappings. Jacobians. Linear Algebra. Linear transformations. Matrix algebra; partitioned matrices and partitioned inverses. Eigenvalues and eigenvectora. Diagonaliza- tion and the identification of quadric surfaces. Application to simultaneous differential equations. Vector spaces. Convergence. Sequences and series. Comparison and ratio tests. Ab- solute and conditional convergence. Power series and their use in approximate calculations. Series solution of linear differential equations with variable coefficients. Algebraic structure. Groups, rings, Integral domains, fields. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Ayres F Calculus 2nd ed, Schaum References to other texte will be made in lectures. Supplementary Reading: Sawyer W W Prelude to Mathematics, Pelican Bell E T Men of Mathematics, 2 vols, Pelican See also supplementary reading for Pure Mathematics IE, EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. The examination will be for pass only. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken Into account. 215 PURE MATHEMATICS PART 11F SYLLABUS This course will be identical with Pure Mathematics IIE except that the lectures on series will be omitted, a reduction of about twelve lectures. BOOKS As for Pure Mathematics 11E. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papera. The examination will be for pass only. Class work and written work done during the year will be taken Into account. 251 APPLIED MATHEMATICS PART IIE A course of three lectures and one tutorial and one practice class per week throughout the year. This subject may be taken at pass level only. It will be assumed that students attending this course are studying Pure Mathematics IIE concurrently, or have previously passed that subject or Pure Mathematics II. SYLLABUS (1) Mathematical Methods. (a) Vector analysis. Differential operators. Stokes' theorem. Orthogonal curvilinear co-ordinates. (ь Ordinary differential equations. Linear second order. Variation of parameters. Power series solutions. (c) Fourier series. Trigonometric series. Application to heat conduction, Laplace's equation and the wave equation. (d) Special functions. Legendre polynomials. Bessel functions. Ortho- gonal series. Application, as for (c). (ii) Classical Mechanics. Lagrange's equations of motion. Small vibrations. Three dimensional motion of rigid bodies.

285 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

(iii) Fluid Mechanics. Euler's equations of motion. Elements of irrotational flow. BOOKS Recommended textbooks: Rutherford D E Classical Mechanics, Oliver & Boyd Rutherford D E Fluid Dynamics, Oliver & Boyd Spain B Vector Analysis, Van Nostrand Bland D R Solutions of Laplace's Equation, Routledge & Kegan Paul EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in section (i) of the course and two 1%-hour papers in sections (ii) and (iii). Class work and written work done during the year will be taken into account.

300 LEVEL PURE MATHEMATICS PART III-PASS Science (Education) students will normally take the unit 318, Mathe- matical Structures, a course of about 65 lectures with practice classes and reading, written and oral assignments. For details see page

380 MATHEMATICS 111F Students will select units from those listed below, aiming at a total score of sixteen to twenty points, the selection to be approved by the head of the department of Mathematics. Since some units have prerequisites, and since students may not receive credit for some combinations of units, the selection should be made in consultation with an appropriate member of the department of Mathematics. Students may not receive credit for more than one of 371-381 and 371- 303. In all units, students may be required to submit exercises which will carry weight in the examination. MATHEMATICS UNITS Points 371-381 REAL FUNCTIONS THEORY 5 Approximately 20 lectures in first term Mathematics 221 (Pure Mathematics Ill) 371-382 MATHEMATICAL METHODS II 5 Approximately 30 lectures in first term 251 Applied Mathe- matics 11E. 371-303 ANALYSIS 8 Approximately 25 lectures in first term 371-309 TOPOLOGY 4 Approximately 15 lectures 371-384 TOPOLOGY AND COMPLEX FUNCTION THEORY 8 Approximately 30 lectures in first term of Mathematics 321 Real and Complex Analysis (Part of Pure Mathematics lIli) 371-385 CARTESIAN TENSORS AND FLUID MECHANICS 8 Approximately 30 lectures in first term Mathematics 341 and 342

286 B.Sc. (EDUCATION)

371-245 FLUID MECHANICS 11 З Approximately 18 lectures In third term 251 Applied Mathe- matics IIE 371-324 DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY 4 371-395 DEVELOPMENT OF MATHEMATICS 8 A course of four lectures per week with practice classes and seminars in third term. SYLLABUS The development of mathematics—a study of some basic concepts and definitions. Topics will be selected from the following list: Trigonometric functions, extensions of number systems, conic sections, theory of equations, groups and their graphs, approaches to geometry, mathematical logic. 371-394 SUCH ADDITIONAL UNIT as may be approved by the head of the department of Mathematics. INFORMATION SCIENCE UNITS 389-201 COMPUTERS—LOGICAL DESIGN AND PROGRAMMING 4 Three lectures and a one-hour practice class per week during first term 369-303 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS FUNCTIONS 5 Three lectures and a two-hour practice class per week during third term STATISTICS UNITS 391-301 DISTRIBUTION THEORY A З Approximately 14 lectures, and 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours, in first term

391-302 DISTRIBUTION THEORY В З Approximately 12 lectures, and 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours, in first term 391-303 STATISTICAL INFERENCE A 3 Approximately 14 lectures, and 8 tutorial and 8 practice hours, in first term SUCH ADDITIONAL UNIT as may be approved by the head of the De- partment of Mathematics. READING COURSE UNITS No lectures will be given; reading and exercises will be prescribed. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Students should consult an appropriate member of staff for a list of material for long vacation reading. For textbooks and reference material, students should consult the details of the chosen units, as they appear In this Handbook under Mathematics, Statistics arid Information Science departments. EXAMINATION Not less than the equivalent of two three-hours' papers for students taking at least 18 points. Some of the units have terminal examinations. Class work and written work done during the year may be taken into account. 287 FACULTY OF SCIENCE 373 METALLURGY 200 LEVEL 201 MATERIALS PROCESSING A course of 36 lectures, 24 hours of practice classes or seminars, 36 hours of practical work, and one or two excursions. SYLLABUS (a) Introduction to systems for processing materials. Raw materials, their selection, assembly and characteristics in relation to preparations for subsequent processing. Size reduction and size separation. Liberation. Thermodynamic and kinetic factors affecting separation of chemical components by means of phase separations in non-reactive and reactive systems. Transfer of mass, heat and momentum. Mass and energy balances in relation to phase and component separations. (b) Separation of materials. Separations of: solid from solid, solid from liquid, solid from gas, liquid from liquid, liquid from gas, gas from gas. (c) Preparation of materials for utilization. Technological aspects of processing materials to make both metals and non-metals. Examples of integrated processes for producing metals. Mechanical processing of products, e.g. casting, compacting, rolling, etc. Preparation of products for transport and storage. PRACTICE CLASSES, SEMINARS, PRACTICAL WORK and EXCURSIONS. These relate to the lecture syllabus. BOOKS These are selected from the list under METALLURGY 200 EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year and one 3-hour paper. All work done in connection with practice classes, seminars, practical work and excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the annual examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the annual examination.

202 MATERIALS SCIENCE A course of 36 lectures, 24 hours of practice classes or seminars, 36 hours of practical work and one or two excursions. SYLLABUS (a) Structure of Materials (18 lectures). Crystalline solids, crystallography and crystallographic techniques, crystal structures in relation to types of bonding. Amorphous materials. Multi-phase structures and the use of phase diagrams in their interpretation. The structures of commercially important alloys. (b) Mechanical Behaviour (12 lectures). Mechanical tests and classification of behaviour. Elasticity and anelasticity. Viscosity. Geometry of plastic deformation. Dislocations and the theory of deformation. Fracture: the Griffith theory, mechanisms of crack initiation, brittle fracture, ductile rupture, the ductile-brittle transition, intercrystalline fracture, creep and fatigue failure. Non-metallic materials. (c) Theory of Metals (6 lectures). Atomic structure, bonding, cohesion of metallic crystals. Behaviour of electrons In a lattice, Brillouin zones, electrical conduction. Semi-conductors, magnetic properties. PRACTICE CLASSES, SEMINARS, PRACTICAL WORK and EXCURSIONS. These relate to the lecture syllabus.

288 B.Sc. (EDUCATION)

BOOkS These are selected from the list under METALLURGY 200. EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year and one 3-hour paper. All work done in connection with practice classes, seminars, practical work and excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the annual examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the annual examination.

PHYSICS FIRST YEAR UNITS 181 PHYSICS: MECHANICS, WAVE MOTION 29 lectures, weekly tutorials; 1st term; 2 points. 2-hour terminal examination. Classical mechanics of translation and rotation of rigid bodies and systems of particles including work-energy relations, force, torque, centre of mass, moment of inertia, linear and angular momentum and their conservation. Description of elastic waves in gases and strings. Inter- ference and diffraction. The Doppler effect.

BOOКS Prescribed textbook: •Resnick R & Halliday D Physics, Parts I & I1 Wiley Recommended for reference: Weidner R T & Sella R L Elementary Classical Physics, combined edition or Vol 1 & Il Allyn & Bacon Young H D fundamentals of Mechanics and Heat, McGraw-Hill Alonso M & Finn E J Fundamental University Physics, Vol I & I1 Addison-Wesley

182 PHYSICS: ELECTROMAGNETISM 24 lectures, weekly tutorials; 2nd term; 2 points. 2-hour terminal examination. Description of electric and magnetic fields leading to Maxwell's equations in Integral form. Applications In the fields of electrostatics and magnetostatics. Electromagnetic waves. Elementary circuit theory.

BOO КS Prescribed textbook: •Resnick R & Halliday D Physics, Parts 1 & I1 Wiley Recommended for reference: Weidner R T & Selle R L Elementary Classical Physics, combined edition or Vol 1 & I1 Allyn & Bacon kip A F Fundamentals of Electricity and Magnetism, McGraw-Hill 183 PHYSICS: MODERN PHYSICS 21 lectures, weekly tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points. 2-hour terminal examination.

289 к FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Bases of relativistic and quantum mechanics as applied to radiation and atomic systems. The electrical properties of solids, the junction diode and transistor. Nuclear forces, structure and stability. Nuclear reactions. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Beiser A Concepts in Modern Physics, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill Recommended for reference: Caro D E McDonell J A & Spicer B M Modern Physics, Arnold Weidner R T & Sells R L Elementary Modern Physics, 2nd ed Allyn & Bacon 190 PHYSICS: LABORATORY WORK 80 hours: all three terms; 2 points. Assessment will be based on work done in the laboratory and on supplementary practical tests.

SECOND YEAR UNITS 261 PHYSICS: CIRCUIT THEORY AND ELECTRONICS 18 lectures, 5 tutorials and 42 hours laboratory; 1st term; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. Circuit Theory: Analysis of circuits using complex impedances. Kirchoff's laws and theorems of Thevenin and Norton. Electronics: The Physics of Thermionic valves and transistors. Simple amplifiers—their design and analysis using equivalent circuits. Principles of feedback. PREREQUISITES 182 Physics, 111 Pure Mathematics 1E. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: • Brophy J J Basic Electronics for Scientists, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill Recommended for reference: Millman J & Halkias C Electronics Devices and Circuits, McGraw-Hill 262 PHYSICS: OPTICS 18 lectures; 4 tutorials; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. Nature and propagation of light, Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction, Inter- ference in thin films, coherence, image formation and optical instruments, modern applications of optical ideas. PREREQUISITES 181 Physics; 111 Pure Mathematics IE BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Upson S G & Lipson H Optical Physics, CUP Recommended for reference: Fowles G R Introduction to Modern Optics, Holt Rinehart & Winston Ditchburn R W Light, Blackie Jenkins F A & White H E Fundamentals of Optics, McGraw-Hill Klein M V Optics, Wiley 290 B.Sc. (EDUCATION)

263 PHYSICS: QUANTUM MECHANICS 24 lectures; 7 tutorials; 2nd and 3rd terms; 3 points; 2-hour terminal examination. Basic wave mechanics Including solution of the Schroadingsr equation for the simple harmonic oscillator and for the hydrogen atom, and the representation of physical variables by differential operators. PREREQUISITES 181 Physics, 183 Physics, 111 Pure Mathematics IE. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Scharff M Elementary Quantum Mechanics, Wiley Recommended for reference: Eisberg R M Fundamentals of Modern Physics, Wiley Park D Introduction to Quantum Theory, McGraw-Hill Ziock K Basic Quantum Mechanics, Wiley

290 PHYSICS: LABORATORY WORK 72 hours; 2nd and 3rd terms; 3 points. Examined continuously throughout the course.

THIRD AND FOURTH YEAR UNITS Students in the third and fourth years of this course will take an approved selection of third year Physics units for the BSc course. Third year students must include in their course the units 265 Physics and 246 Physics (if not taken previously). Students majoring in Physics must include a minimum of 24 points of 300 level Physics units In their selection of units for the third and fourth years. The 300 level Physics units fall into two groups: Core units and supplementary units. The core units are 320 or 340, 321 or 341, 322 or 342, 323 or 343, and 324 or 344. Students are required to Include core units and laboratory work according to the following table. Points taken Number of core units Laboratory Work Units required required <10 No restriction None allowed 11-17 No courses are allowable in this range 18-23 at least 2 391 or 392 24-29 at least 3 392 or 393 30-35 at least 4 393 or 394 38 or more all 6 394, 395 or 396 265 PHYSICS; ELECTROMAGNETISM AND RELATIVITY 24 lectures, plus tutorials; 1st term; 3 points; 2-hour examination. Electromagnetic Theory leading to Maxwell's equations in differential form, with applications. Special relativity. The Lorentz transformations, Spacetims, relativistic dynamics, General relativity. PREREQUISITES 181 Physics, 182 Physics, 111 Pure Mathematics IE. * This course will not be offered in 1973. Students wishing to take this unit should enrol in Physics 243.

291 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

Books Prescribed textbook: Lorrain P & Corson D R Electromagnetic Fields and Waves, 2nd ed Freeman 1970 Scott W T The Physics of Electricity and Magnetism, 2nd ed Wiley 1966 Helliweil T M Introduction to Special Relativity, Allyn & Bacon 1966 Taylor E F & Wheeler J A Spacetime Physics, Freeman 1966 267 PHYSICS: CLASSICAL MECHANICS 16 lectures; 3rd term; 2 points; 2-hour terminal examination. The course discusses the various formulations of Classical Mechanics, as an end in itself, and to provide some insight Into Quantum Mechanics. Topics will be chosen from the following: D'Alembertian mechanics; Lagrangian mechanics; Euler's equations; Canonical Transformations; Hamilton's Principle; Hamilton's equations; the Наmиltоn-.acоы equation. In addition relevant mathematical methods will be introduced where appropriate. PREREQUISITES 241 Mathematical Methods or 281 Mixed Mathematics Il or equivalent. BOOBS Recommended for reference: Goldstein H Classical Mechanics, Addison-Wesley Kibы e T W B Classical Mechanics, McGraw-Hill Sommerfeld A Mechanics, Academic Press Wangsness R Introduction to Theoretical Physics, Wiley Arfken G Mathematical Methods for Physicists, Academic Press Goertzel G & Trani N Soma Mathematical Methods of Physics, McGraw-Hill

387 PHYSIOLOGY 200 LEVEL 202 PHYSIOLOGY IE A course of two lectures and two and a half hours laboratory work per week, throughout the year. SYLLABUS An introduction to the physiology of the cell, with special reference to nerve and muscle, followed by an outline of mammalian systematic physiology and the principles of the regulation of the internal environment. PRACTICAL WORK Laboratory work on the cell, nerve and muscle. Examination of the blood. Experiments on the heart, circulation, respiration, metabolism and special senses in man and other animals. Students require a Centigrade clinical thermometer, a 100° C. thermometer and a set of dissecting instruments. In order that they may be allocated to a particular practical session, students must report to the Department of Physiology during the second last week of the long vacation, stating the other units they will be taking and, if desired, nominating partners. Students absent from Melbourne should communicate by letter.

292 в.вс. (EDuCATION) BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Vander A J Sherman J H & Luciano D S The Mechanism of Body Function, McGraw-Hill 1970. •Lippold O C J & Winton F R Human Physiology, 6th ed Churchill 1968 or Dayson H & Eggieton M G Principles of Human Physiology, 14th ed Churchill 1968 or Guyton A C A Textbook of Medical Physiology, 4th ed Saunders 1971 or Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics, 19th ed Saunders 1965 Practical Notes, Published by the department. EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper and, if required by the examiners, a viva voce examination.

300 LEVEL 300 PHYSIOLOGY (TWO UNITS) Three lectures per week and six hours practical work per week for two terms. This will comprise the unit 304 Biophysics and nervous system in term I, and the unit 305 Renal, alimentary and lipid transport systems in term Ill. SYLLABUS Principles of physiology, cellular physiology, nervous system (Including brain), alimentary system, renal system, liver, mechanisms of lipid transport, and function of the whole man. PRACTICAL WORK Six hours per week, covering experiments related to the lecture material. Apparatus Is provided by the Department of Physiology; in addition each student must provide himself with a set of sharp dissecting instruments.

BOO КЅ Preliminary reading: Kennedy D ed The Living Cell: readings from Scientific American, Free- man 1966 Prescribed textbooks: •Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics, 19th ed Saunders 1965 or •Dayson H & Eggleton M G Principles of Human Physiology, 14th ed Churchill 1968 •Katz B Nerve, Muscle end Synapse, McGraw-Hill 1966 Recommended for reference: Ganong W F Review of Medical Physiology, 3rd ed Lange 1967 Dayson H A Textbook of General Physiology, 2nd ed Churchill 1959 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper In Examination term I and one 3-hour written paper In Examination term Ill, and a vive voce examination if required by the examiners. Practical work and other assignments throughout the course will be assessed as part of the examination.

293 FACULTY OF SCIENCE 393 ZOOLOGY

100 LEVEL

121 BIOLOGY E A common course for students majoring in the biological sciences. For details see 355 Botany. 200 LEVEL ZOOLOGY IIE This subject comprises three units of 200 level ZOOLOGY, viz: 201 ZOOLOGY: INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 202 ZOOLOGY: VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 203 ZOOLOGY: CELL PHYSIOLOGY Students must enrol in the unit courses. For details of the units see Chapter 4, 393 Zoology.

300 LEVEL ZOOLOGY IIIE This subject comprises two unit courses from 300 level Zoology, viz., 303 COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY and 307 EVOLUTION Students must enrol in the unit courses. For details of the units see Chapter 4, 393 Zoology. 340 ZOOLOGY 111F This subject comprises two unit courses from 300 level Zoology, viz., 301 ADVANCED CELL PHYSIOLOGY or 302 ETHOLOGY and 305 EMBRYOLOGY AND МORPHOGENESIS or 306 ENTOMOLOGY Students must enrol in the unit courses. For details of the units see Chapter 4, 393 Zoology.

294 CHAPTER 8 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

Regulation 3.22—Degree of Bachelor of Science In Forestry 1. There shall be: (a) a degree of Bachelor of Science in Forestry and (b) a degree of Bachelor of Science in Forestry with honours.

THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN FORESTRY 2. (1) Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Science in Forestry must comply with conditions prescribed either in Part A or in Part B of this regulation. (2) In each part the word 'candidate means a candidate proceeding under that part. 3. (1) Those sections of this regulation referring to the School of Forestry at Creswick shall remain In force only so long as the Council on the advice of the faculty of Science recognizes for the purpose of this regulation the work performed at that institution. (2) When advising Council under this section the faculty shall make such arrangements as it may think fit for the inspection of the institution.

Part A 4. A candidate shall after matriculation pursue a course of study for at least four years and comply with the conditions hereunder prescribed. 5. The subjects of the course, and the years to which they pertain, shall be as prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty. 6. To pass a year of the course a candidate shall comply with one of the following conditions— (a) he shall pass at an annual examination in or obtain credit for each subject of that year; or (b) he shall be passed by the faculty in the year as a whole. In awarding such pass, the faculty shall take into account his performance in all subjects In accordance with principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. A candidate passed by the faculty in the year as a whole who has not passed at the annual examination In or obtained credit for any particular subject shall not be recorded as heving passed in that subject and shall not be permitted to proceed to a later part of that subject, but shall be allowed to proceed with subjects of a later year of the course for which a pass in such subject may be prerequisite. 7. Subject to the provisions of section 11 of Regulation 3.20 a candidate shall be eligible to compete for the exhibition and scholarships open for competition at the honour examinations of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Science.

295 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

8. During the long vacation succeeding the first, second and third years of the course each candidate shall perform an aggregate of not less than sixteen weeks practical work in Forestry with an organization approved for the purpose by the faculty. 9. During each Year a candidate shall attend classes and perform written, practical, laboratory, field and clinical work prescribed by the Pro- fessorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects unless he satisfies the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere. 10. Repealed. 11. Candidates who have fulfilled the conditions prescribed in this part may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Forestry.

Part B 12. A candidate shall— (a) have completed the three year course at the School of Forestry at Creswick or possess qualifications recognized by the faculty as equivalent thereto; (b) have matriculated and have been accepted by the faculty; and (c) pursue his studies for at least two further years and pass the examinations of the third and fourth years, in such subjects and in such order as prescribed by the Professorial Board. 13. To pass the third and fourth years of the course a candidate shall comply with one of the following conditions— (a) he shall pass at the annual examination in or obtain credit for each subject of the third and fourth years; or (b) he shall be passed by the faculty in the third year as a whole and in the fourth year as a whole. In awarding such passes, the faculty shall take into account his performance in all subjects in accordance with the principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. A candidate passed by the faculty in the year as a whole who has not passed at the annual examination in or obtained credit for any particular subject shall not be recorded as having passed in that subject and shall not be permitted to proceed to a later part of that subject, but, where appropriate, shall be allowed to proceed with subjects of the fourth year of the course for which a pass in such subject may be prerequisite. 14. During the long vacation succeeding the third year each candidate must perform such field or laboratory work as the faculty may determine. 15. No candidate may be admitted to examination in any subject in which laboratory or field work has been prescribed unless the faculty is satisfied that he has performed all the work so prescribed. 16. Repealed. 17. Candidates who have fulfilled the conditions prescribed In this part may be admitted to the degree of Bachelor of Science in Forestry.

DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN FORESTRY WITH HONOURS 18. (1) Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Science In Forestry with honours shall:

296 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

(a) complete the course as for the ordinary degree by complying with the conditions prescribed by this regulation, and (b) be admitted thereafter by the faculty to the final honour examination. (2) To be so admitted by the faculty to the final honour examination a candidate must obtain first or second class honours in 401 Forestry and In at least two other subjects selected from the subjects of the third or fourth year of Part A or Part В of the course, whichever may be appropriate. 19. A candidate who has been admitted to the final honour examination shall continue a programme of Investigation for not less than twelve weeks after the date of the last examination of the annual examinations of the final year (hereinafter called "the prescribed date") and shall submit for examination a dissertation on that Investigation not later than sixteen weeks after the рrевсriЬeд date. 20. The final honours examination shall be held not earlier than twelve weeks nor later than twenty weeks after the prescribed date and shall comprise: (a) an examination of the dissertation on the programme of investigation; (b) a written or oral examination in the branch of Forestry In which the investigation was undertaken; and (c) if the faculty so determines, a written or oral examination iп other prescribed topics in Forestry. 21. A candidate who satisfies the examiners in the final honour examination and who complies with the requirements of sections 18, 19 and 20 hereof, may be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Science in Forestry with honours. 22. The final assessment of candidates shall be for honours only and first, second and third class honours may be awarded. 23. A candidate who has fulfilled the conditions prescribed may be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Science in Forestry (degree with honours). TEMPORARY REGULATION 1. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Regulation 3.22 a candidate enrolled for the degree of bachelor of Science in Forestry on or before 31st December, 1964 may elect to complete the degree in accordance with Part В of the regulation in force at that date. 2. This temporary regulation shall expire on 31st December, 1975.

Regulation 3.23—Degree of Master of Science In Forestry 1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science in Forestry shall be either: (a) a bachelor of Science in Forestry with honours; or (b) a bachelor of Science in Forestry who has at a preliminary examination satisfied the head of the School of Forestry of his ability to pursue the advanced studies for the degree of master of Science in Forestry.

2. A candidate shall:

(a) If a bachelor of Science in Forestry with honours pursue a course of advanced studies for at least one year, or, if a bachelor of Science

297 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

in Forestry pursue a course of advanced studies for at least two years; (b) carry out experimental work involving training in research; and (c) pass an examination in a branch of Science applied to Forestry approved by the faculty for this purpose. З. The examination shall include— (a) the preparation during the year of a critical review of the literature on some subject or subjects; (b) a report by the candidate on his work, a copy of which report shall be deposited in the University Library before the candidate is granted the degree; (c) an examination which may be both written and practical on any part or parts of the subject as approved under section 1 of this regulation, and which shall be held in the first term of each year; (d) a test in one modern language—French. German or Russian— selected by the head of the Department of Forestry: Provided that if the report prescribed under sub-section (b) be considered by the examiners of sufficient merit, the candidate may be excused that portion of the examination prescribed under sub-section (c). 4. The examination shall be for pass and honours, which honours shall not be classified. 5. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding sections a Bachelor of Science in Forestry with honours or a Bachelor of Science in Forestry may be admitted as a candidate for the degree of Master of Science in Forestry who— (a) produces evidence satisfactory to the faculty that since graduating he has spent not less than three years in acquiring proficiency In some branch of Forestry; and (b) presents either a thesis based on his original research work or a dissertation on some subject or subjects germane to his practical experience. The thesis or dissertation submitted by the candidate shall be examined in the manner prescribed in regulation 4.6. 6. A candidate who has satisfied the conditions of either sections 1 and 2 or of section 5 and who, in either case, has been passed by the examiners shall be admitted to the degree of Master of Science In Forestry.

COURSES IN FORESTRY Bachelor of Science in Forestry Candidates may qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Science In Forestry In either of two ways: (1) By completing a four year course in the University of Melbourne. The subjects of the four years will be: FIRST YEAR-100 LEVEL 101 Biology 101 Chemistry 160 Physics and one of the following subjects 181 General Mathematics, or 298 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

101 Pure Mathematics, or 101 Geology, or such other subject as may be approved by the faculty in special cases. SECOND YEAR-200 LEVEL Botany: Forestry Course (units 201, 202, 230) 201 Forestry: Forestry 482. 201 Soil Science THIRD YEAR-300 LEVEL 101 Statistics: Descriptive Statistics, Probability, Distributions 102 Statistics: Estimation, Tests of Significance 103 Statistics: Design and Analysis of Experiments 101 Surveying (Forestry Course) 301 Forestry: Forestry 302 Forestry: Forest Products 303 Forestry: Forest Technology 305 Forestry: Aerial Photo-interpretation FOURTH YEAR-400 LEVEL 401 Forestry: Forestry Botany: Advanced Forest Botany (units 304, 330, 331) 403 Forestry: Natural Resource Inventory 101 Business Administration Practical work is prescribed to be done in the long vacations and written reports on the work must be submitted. Interstate study tours will be undertaken in the third and fourth years. (2) By completing the three year course of the School of Forestry, Creswick, or Its equivalent, and thereafter completing two further years of advanced Forestry studies at the University. Practical work is prescribed to be done In the long vacation succeeding the fourth year. Candidates should make enquiries as to the structure and content of the first three years of their course from the Principal of the School of Forestry, Creswick. The subjects taken at the University during the third and fourth year are: THIRD YEAR Botany: Forestry Course (units 201, 202, 230) 482. 201 Soil Science 304 Forestry: Forest Biology 101 Statistics: Descriptive Statistics, Probability Distributions 102 Statistics: Estimation, Tests of Significance 103 Statistics: Design and Analysis of Experiments FOURTH YEAR 401 Forestry: Forestry Botany: Advanced Forest Botany (units 304, 330, 331) 403 Forestry: Natural Resource Inventory 101 Business Administration NOTE: For full details of non-Forestry units and the schedule of all units see Chapters 3 and 4. Bachelor of Science in Forestry (Degree with Honours) This degree may be obtained after admission to the final honours examination and submission of a dissertation following a programme of

299 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

investigation of not less than twelve weeks after the examinations of the final year. Master of Science in Forestry A candidate may qualify for this degree in either of two ways: (i) By completing not less than two years advanced studies with experimental work, subsequent to the completion of the course for the degree of BScF, or, completing not less than one year's advanced studies with experimental work, subsequent to the completion of the course for the degree of BScF (Honours), and by passing an examination, lodging a report on his original work and preparing a critical review of the literature on a prescribed subject of study. (ii) By presenting, after not less than three years of acquiring proficiency in some branch of Forestry, a thesis based on his original research work or a dissertation on some subject(s) germane to his practical experience. Doctor of Philosophy This is a degree for full-time research workers. A candidate must be a graduate of this or some other University recognized for the purpose, must be of such standing as may be required by the Professorial Board for graduates in his faculty, and must be accepted as such by the Profes- sorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned. He must have had two years approved research experience and must pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and research under a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Board, and on its completion must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The only part-time candidates who are accepted by the Professorial Board are full-time members of staff. (See regulation 3.60, University Calendar.)

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS This chapter includes only specifically forestry subjects. Details of subjects which, although not specifically forestry subjects, are available to students taking the course for Bachelor of Science in Forestry are to be found in Chapter 4 of this handbook. Vacation Reading: Students are advised that they are expected to use a considerable part of the summer and spring vacations for reading purposes. In some cases specific references are made in the following details; in others, a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice boards; in all cases the lecturers concerned should be consulted. Honour Work: Except in the cases of subjects where special details are published, the syllabus for honours will be the same as that for pass, but the examination for honours will require candidates to attain a higher standard and to show more detailed knowledge.

232 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 101 BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 1 (ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR) (Note this is the same course as 232.1.) A course of one seminar a week with tutorial classes each fortnight throughout the year. 300 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

SYLLABUS The organization as a system for the division of labour, as a system of authority and as a communication system. The effect of position in the formal structure of the organization on the attitudes and behaviour of individuals. The elements of social structure with particular reference to small groups. Human problems in organizations; motivation and morale. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Lupton T Management and the Social Sciences, Penguin 1971 Prescribed textbooks: • Byrt W J Organizing for Results, Sun Books 1968 •Byrt W J People and Organizations, McGraw-Hill 1971 •Kast F E & Rosenzweig J E Organization & Management: A Systems Approach, McGraw-Hill, 1970 •Hicks H G The Management of Organizations. McGraw-Hill 1967 'Vroom V H & Deci E L Management and Motivation, Penguin 1970 Casebook: Craig H F Australian Case Studies in Business Administration, 3rd ed Law Book Co 1971 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and class assignments. 355 BOTANY 200 LEVEL Forestry Course: A course of 65 lectures, 100 hours practical work and prescribed field excursions. 201 BOTANY Angiosperm Systematics and Ecology, (For references and details see Science course Botany 201.) 202 BOTANY Plant Physiology. (For references and details see Science course 202.) 230 CYTOLOGY AND GENETICS BOOKS Cytology and Genetics, with en Introduction to plant breeding. Prescribed textbooks: •Begg C M M An Introduction to Genetics, EUP 1959 'Levine R P Genetics, 2nd ed Holt Rinehart & Winston 1968 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper. The laboratory work of each student is examined continually during each term and records of assessments kept. In addition, short practical examinations may be given. Marks obtained In this way are included In the final assessment of the student's performance In the subject. 300 LEVEL ADVANCED FOREST BOTANY This course consists of the following units and a one-week excursion which will be held before the beginning of first term: 304 Botany: Ecology and Plant Geography 330 Physiology 331 Pathology 301 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE 304 BOTANY: ECOLOGY AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY (For references and details see Science course 304) 330 PHYSIOLOGY The Environmental control of Plant Growth. A course of ten lectures. SYLLABUS The qualitative control of plant growth by light and temperature. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Leopold A C Plant Growth and Development. McGraw-HilI 1964 Salisbury F B & Ross C Plant Physiology, Wadsworth 1969 Evans L T ed The Environmental Control of Plant Growth, Academic Press 1963 EXAMINATION One 1-hour written paper. 331 PATHOLOGY Mycology and Plant Pathology with special reference to forestry. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Ingold C T The Biology of Fungi, Hutchinson 1967 Recommended for reference: Alexopoulos C J Introductory Mycology, 2nd ed Wiley 1982 Boyce J S Forest Pathology, 3rd ed McGraw-Hill 1981 Talbot P H B. .Principles of Fungal Taxonomy, Macmillan 1971 EXAMINATION One one-hour written paper. The laboratory work of each student is examined continually during the term and records of assessments kept. Marks obtained in this way are included in the final assessment of the student's performance in the subject.

399 FORESTRY

200 LEVEL 201 FORESTRY A course of 76 hours of lectures plus 100 hours of practical work throughout the year, with field excursions and exercises as prescribed. SYLLABUS An Introduction to Forestry: A course Introducing forestry as scientific management of forest land to achieve specified objectives, and outlining its position in the field of natural resource conservation. Dendrology: A detailed study of the taxonomy and identification of eucalypts, conifers and deciduous hardwoods. Forest Management: A course on planning, Implementation and control of harvesting activities in a forest. Silviculture: An Introductory course on the forest as a dynamic ecosystem presenting the practice of silviculture as manipulation of this ecosystem by man to achieve specified objectives.

302 SCIENCE OEGREEs IN FORESTRY

PRACTICAL WORK The practical work will be distributed between the laboratory and field as required. A field exercise of approximately one week's duration will be held before the beginning of first term. EXCURSIONS Approximately six whole day excursions will be held throughout the year. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Champion H G Forestry, OUP 1954 Rule A Forests of Australia, Angus & Robertson 1967 Shirley H L Forestry and its Career Opportunities, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1964 Prescribed textbooks: Brasnett N V Planned Management of Forests, Allen & Unwin 1953 Davis K P Forest Management Regulation and Valuation, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1968 Johnson D R Grayson A J & Bradley R T Forest Planning, Faber 1967 Osmaston F C The Management of Forests, Allen & Unwin 1968 Smith D M The Practice of Silviculture, 7th ed Wiley 1962 Forestry Terminology, 3rd ed Society of American Foresters 1958 Plus all textbooks prescribed for Forestry 202 and 203. Reference to other relevant texts and papers will be made during the course of lectures. EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper for pass and honours, and two 2-hours' practical tests in Dendrology. Not more than four essays distributed throughout the year will be marked as part of the annual examination. 202 FOREST CONSERVATION A course of 30 hours of lectures with a field exercise and excursions as prescribed, In term 1 and 2. SYLLABUS The forest is presented as a dynamic ecosystem in equilibrium with its environment: a balance of synthesis and breakdown, death and regeneration. The effects of man and domesticated animals In this ecosystem are discussed. It is shown how man is able to manipulate this ecosystem to achieve specified objectives and to menage scientifically forested lands both to utilize and to perpetuate the natural resources of the forest. FIELD EXERCISE An exercise involving two days in the field will be conducted. EXCURSIONS Approximately four whole day excursions will be held. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Dasmann R F Environmental Conservation 2nd ed, Wiley 1968 Webb L J Whitelock D & LeGay Brereton J The Last of Lands, Jacaranda 1969 Prescribed textbooks: Allen S W & Leonard J W Conserving Natural Resources, 3rd ed McGraw-Hill 1966 Costin A B & Frith H J Conservation, Pelican Books, 1971

303 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Frankenberg J Nature Conservation in Victoria, Vic. Nat. Parks Assn., 1971 Shirley H L Forestry and its Career Opportunities, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1964 Smith D M The Practice of Silviculture, 7th ed Wiley 1962 Spurr S H Forest Ecology, Ronald 1964 Reference to other relevant texts and papers will be made during the course of lectures. EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper for pass and honours. A prescribed essay and reports on the excursions and the field exercise will be marked as part of the annual examination.

203 DENDROLOGY A course of about 17 hours of lectures plus 34 hours of practical work in terms 1 and 2. SYLLABUS A detailed study of the taxonomy and Identification of eucalypts, conifers and deciduous hardwoods. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Baker R T & Smith H G Research on the Pines of Australia, NSW Govt Printer 1910 Blakely W F A Key to the Euсalypts 3rd ed, Forestry & Timber Bureau Canberra 1965 Chippendale G M ed Eucalypt Buds and Fruits, Forestry & Timber Bureau Canberra 1968 Costermans L F Trees of Victoria, Pub' by Author 1967 Dallimore W & Jackson A B. .Handbook of the Coniferae 3rd ed, Arnold 1948 Hall N Johnston R D & Chippendale G M Forest Trees of Australia 3rd ed, Aust Govt Pub Service 1970 Harlow W M & Harrar E S Textbook of Dendrology 4th ed, McGraw- Hill 1958 Penf old A R & Willis J L The Eucalypts, Interscience 1961 Reference to other relevant texts and papers will be made during the course of lectures. EXAMINATION One 1-hour written paper and two 2-hour practical tests for pass and honours.

300 LEVEL 301 FORESTRY A course of three hours of lectures and three hours of practical work per week throughout the year, with field excursions and exercises as prescribed. SYLLABUS Forest Mensuration: The scope of forest mensuration, the measurement of trees, stands and growth, including elementary sampling theory. Silviculture: Silvical characteristics of selected forest species and associations; silvicultural systems and techniques; stand dynamics and thinning regimes.

304 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

Economics: An introductory course in micro- and macro-economics with particular reference to the forestry and forest products sections of the economy. Recreation: The analysis, planning and administration of recreational activities in forests. Management: The objectives and techniques of management planning with particular reference to yield regulation. The organization, control and administration of forest operations. PRACTICAL WORK The three hours per week of practical work will be distributed between the laboratory and field as required. A field exercise of approximately one week's duration will be held before the beginning of first term. EXCURSIONS An interstate excursion of approximately one week's duration will be held in a terminal vacation.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Baker F $ Principles of Silviculture, McGraw-Hill 1950 Bruce D & Schumachег F X Forest Mensuration, McGraw-Hill 1950 Carron L T An Outline of Forest Mensuration, With Special Reference to Australia, ANU Press 1968 Davis K P Forest Management, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1966 Douglass R W Forest Recreation, Pergamon 1969 Husch B Forest Mensuration and Statistics, Ronald Press 1963 Jacobs M R Growth Habits of the Eucalypts, Government Printer Can- berra 1955 Samuelson P A Hancock K & Wallace R Economics: Australian Edition, McGraw-Hill Sydney 1970 Troup R S Silviculture' Systems, 2nd ed OUP 1952

Recommended for reference: Avery T E Forest Measurements, McGraw-Hill 1967 Busgen M & Munch E The Structure and Life of Forest Trees, Trans Thompson T, Chapman & Hall 1929 Chapman H I & Meyer W H Forest Mensuration, McGraw-Hill 1949 Forest Influences, FAO 1962 Griffith A L & Prasad J The Silvicultural Research Code Vol 3 The Tree and Crop Measurement Manual, Government of India 1949 Riley W E Economics of Plantations, Faber 1956 Johnston D R Grayson A J & Bradley R T Forest Planning, Faber 1967 Matthews D M Cost Control In the Logging Industry, McGraw-Hill 1942 Meyer H A Forest Mensuration, Penns Valley Pub 1953 Spurr S S Forest Inventory, Ronald Press 1952 Toumey J W & Korstian C F Foundations of Silviculture upon an Ecological Basis, 2nd ed Wiley 1947 Worrell A C Economics of American Forestry, Wiley 1959 Zaremba J Economics of the American Lumber Industry, Speller 1963 EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for pass and honours. Records of practical work, reports on field excursions and field exercises, and not more than three essays throughout the year will be taken Into consideration.

305 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

302 FOREST PRODUCTS A course of not less than 70 hours lectures and practical work throughout the year, covering the topics: wood anatomy and identification, wood chemistry, seasoning, preservation, mechanical properties, and utilization of wood including timber veneer and plywood and other sheet materials and pulp and paper. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Selected pamphlets to be prescribed by the lecturer. Recommended for reference: Boas I H The Commercial Timbers of Australia: Their Properties and Uses, Government Printer Melbourne 1947 Brown H P Panshin A J & Forsaith C C Textbook of Wood Technology, Vol. 2 1st ed, McGraw-Hill 1952 Brown N C & Bethel J S Lumber 2nd ed, Wiley 1958 Brown N C Logging; The Principles and Methods of Harvesting Timber in the United States and Canada, Wiley 1949 Browning B L ed The Chemistry of Wood, Interscience 1963 Casey J P Pulp and Paper: Chemistry and Chemical Technology, 3 Vola 2nd ed Interscience 1960-61 Desch H E Timber, Its Structure and Properties, 4th ed Macmillan 1958 Hunt G M & Garrett G A Wood Preservation, 3rd ed McGraw-Hill 1967 Jane F W The Structure of Wood 2nd ed rev by Wilson K & White D J B. Black 1970 Knight R A G Adhesives for Wood, Chapman & Hall 1952 Panshin A J De Zeeuw C & Brown H P Textbook of Wood Technology, Vol 1 3rd ed McGraw-Hill 1970 der Borntraeger Berlin 1959 Roelofsen P A The Plant Cell Wall, Gebrű Stamm A J Wood and Cellulose Science, Ronald 1964 Tiemann H D Wood Technology, Constitution, Properties and Uses, 3rd ed Pitman 1951 Wallis N K Australian Timber Handbook, 3rd ed Angus & Robertson 1970 Wise L E & Jahn E C eds Wood Chemistry, 2 Vols Reinhold 1952 Wood A D Plywoods of the World; Their Development, Manufacture and Application, 3rd ed Johnston & Bacon 1963 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for pass and honours.

303 FOREST TECHNOLOGY A course of two hours of lectures and three hours of practical work, field exercises and excursions per week for three terms, covering sawmilling, logging, forest engineering and forest protection. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for pass and honours. Records of practical work, reports on field excursions end field exercises and not more than three essays throughout the year will be taken Into consideration.

304 FOREST BIOLOGY A course of two lectures per week throughout the year and three hours of practical work and field exercises per week during second term on aspects of forest biology.

зов SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

SУLLАВUS A study of factors influencing the maintenance and productivity of forests, including site quality, nutrient cycles, use of fertilizers, fire and "ashbed" effect, litter fall, root systems, flowering and seedfall. The influence of forests on the physical factors of the environment, and the Influence of environmental factors on tree growth. Micrometeorology. Variation in stand density and its measurement and effect. A study of the natural variation and genetics of forest trees. The improvement of forest crops by breeding. EXCURSION A 5-days' interstate excursion will be held in a terminal vacation for students enrolled for BScF. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Forest lnluences, FAO 1962 Jacobs M R Growth Habits of the Eucalypts, Government Printer Can- berra 1955 Spurr S H Forest Ecology, Ronald 1964 Wright J W Genetics of Forest Tree Improvement, FAO 1982 References to relevant papers will be made during the course of lectures. Recommended for reference: Cunningham T M The Natural Regeneration of Eucalyptus Regnans, University of Melbourne. School of Forestry Bulletin 1, 1960 Daubenmire R F Plants and Environment, 2nd ed Wiley 1959 Geiger R The Climate Near the Ground, Harvard 1965 Grose R J The Silviculture of Eucalyptus Delegatensis, Part 1 University of Melbourne, School of Forestry Bulletin 2, 1963 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for pass and honoura. In addition, ВScF students will be examined on a report of their interstate excursion, and students not enrolled for BScF will be examined on a written assignment.

305 AERIAL PHOTO-INTERPRETATION An introductory course of approximately ten lectures in the appreciation of aerial photography and aerial photo-interpretation. Reading assignments and an essay will be required. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Avery T E Interpretation of Aerial Photographs, Burgess 1968 EXAMINATION The work covered in this course will normally be ex- aтiпед in Forestry 403: Natural Resource Inventory. 306 FOREST RECREATION A course of 9 lectures, 27 hours practical work and prescribed field work. SYLLABUS The analysis of the demand for and the supply of recreation. Planning the development of recreational attractions and facilities in forested regions.

307 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Books Prescribed textbook: Douglass R W Forest Recreation, Pergamon 1969 Recommended for reference: Clawson M & Knetsch J L The Economics of Outdoor Recreation, Johns Hopkins 1966 EXAMINATION Terminal written examination. Records of practical work and a report on field exercises will be taken into consideration.

400 LEVEL 401 FORESTRY A course of approximately 165 hours of lectures during the year, three hours per week devoted to an approved programme of investigation and three hours per week of practical work. SYLLABUS Systems Analysis. The principles of prod em-solving techniques, their application to natural resource systems. The theory of systems; objectives, models, feedback and control. Production economics; marginal analysis, break-even analysis, investment analysis. Risk and uncertainty; analysis using decision theory, game theory. Work study; introduction to method study and work measurement. Demand analysis; introduction to econometric methods for estimating and predicting demand. Management planning; yield regulation by model-building, normal forest, linear programming, dynamic programming, simulation and heuristic models, critical path analysis. Computer Programming: An introduction to computer programming and automatic data processing. Silviculture: The theory and practice of silviculture, with particular reference to Australian forest types. Land Utilization and Forest Policy: Principles of land classification and utilization; forest land classification; principles of forest policy and comparative study of their application in Australia and other countries. Wildlife Management: An introduction to wildlife management. Programme of Investigation: Approximately 80 hours per year will be available for work on an approved programme of investigation. FIELD EXCURSION One 7-day interstate excursion will be held in a terminal vacation. Two 3-day excursions will be held during term. PRACTICAL WORK Three hours per week including field exercises.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Baumol W J Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1965 Cunningham T M The Natural Regeneration of Eucalyptus Regnens, University of Melbourne, School of Forestry, Bulletin 11960 Currie R M Work Study, Pitman 1960

308 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

Federal Electric Corp A Programmed Introduction to PERT, Wiley 1967 Jacobs M R Growth Habits of the Eucalypts, Government Printer Can- berra 1955 Kaufmann A The Science of Decision-Making, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1968 McKean R N Efficiency in Government through Systems Analysis, Wiley 1958 Triup R S Silviculture! Systems, 2nd ed OUP 1952 Watt K E F Ecology and Resource Management, McGraw-Hill 1968 Recommended for reference: Baker F S Theory end Practice of Silviculture, 2nd ed McGraw-Hill 1934 Barnes R M Motion end Time Study Design end Measurement of Work. Wiley 1955 Clawson M & Knetsch J L The Economics of Outdoor Recreation, Johns Hopkins 1966 Dowdle B Investment Theory and Forest Management Planning, Yale School of Forestry Bulletin No 67 1962 Duerr W A The Fundamentals of Forestry Economics, McGraw-Hill 1960 Fedkiw T et a1 Financial Management of Large Forest Ownerships, Yale School of Forestry Bulletin No 66 1960 Goetz B Quantitative Methods—A Survey for Managers. McGraw-Hill 1965 Greeley W B Forest Policy, McGraw-Hill 1953 Introduction to Work Study, International Labour Office Geneva 1959 Jacks G V Lend Classification, Imp. Bureau of Soil Science, Tech. Comm. No 43 1946 Johnston D R Grayson A J & Bradley R T Forest Planning, Faber 1967 Lipsey R G An Introduction to Positive Economics, 2nd ed Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1966 Samuelson P A Hancock K & Wallace R Economics: Australian Edition, McGraw-Hill 1970 Schleifer R Analysis of Decisions Under Uncertainty, McGraw-Hill 1969 Smith D M The Practice of Silviculture, 7th ed Wiley 1962 Wadham S M Wilson R R & Wood J Lend Utilization In Australia, 4th ed MUP 1957 EXAMINATION Three 3-hour papers for pass and honours. A report on the programme of Investigation, records of practical work, reports on field excursions and field exercises and not more than three essays throughout the year will be taken into consideration.

403 NATURAL RESOURCE INVENTORY A course of 37 hours of lectures, and 78 hours of laboratory work. SYLLABUS General consideration of the factors influencing remote sensing in natural resource studies. An Introduction to the principles of aerial photogrammetry as applied In natural resource studies. The principles, objectives and application of integrated photo-Interpreta- tion, with particular reference to forest Inventory, photo-ecology and land use.

309 FACULTY 0F SCIENCE

FIELD WORK Not less than four days field work. An introductory course of approximately ten lectures in the appreciation of aerial photography and aerial photo-interpretation is given in the previous year. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Howard J A Aerial Photo-Ecology, Faber & Faber 1970 Loetsch F & Haller K E Forest Inventory Vol 1 trans. Вrйnig E F, BLV 1964 National Academy of Sciences Remote Sensing With Special Reference to Agriculture and Forestry 1970 Recommended for reference: American Society of Photogrammetry Manual of Photographic Interpre- tation, George Banta 1960 American Society of Photogrammetry Manuel of Photogrammetry, George Banta 1966 Hills G A Developing a Better Environment, Ontario Economic Council 1970 Lueder D R Aerial Photographic Interpretation, McGraw-Hill 1959 Scientific American The Biosphere, Freemont 1971 Trorey L G Handbook of Aerial Mapping and Photogrammetry, CUP 1952 University Press of Georgia Remote Sensing in Ecology, 1969 Watts K E F Ecology & Resource Management, McGraw-Hill 1968 Wolfe W L Handbook of Military Infrared Technology, USN Research Depart 1965 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for pass and honours. Records of field work and papers required to be submitted by students during the year will be taken into consideration. 404 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS A course of 75 lectures and 40 hours practical work and exercises. SYLLABUS The principles of problem-solving techniques and their application to natural resource systems. The theory of systems; objectives, models, feedback and control. Production economics; marginal analysis, break-even analysis, Investment analysis. Risk and uncertainty; analysis using decision theory, game theory. Work study; introduction to method study and work measurement. Demand analysis; introduction to econometric methods for estimating and predicting demand. Management planning; yield regulation by model-building, normal forest, linear programming, dynamic programming, simulation and heuristic models, critical path analysis. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Baumoi W J Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, 2nd ed Prentice-Hall 1965 Currie R M Work Study, Pitman 1960 310 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

Federal Electric Corp A Programmed Introduction to PERT, Wiley 1967 Kaufmann A The Science of Decision-Making, Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1968 Ickean R N Efficiency in Government through Systems Analysis, Wiley 1958 Watt K E F Ecology and Resource Management, McGraw-Hill 1988 Recommended for reference: Barnes R M Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work, Wiley 1955 Clawson M & Knetsch J L The Economics of Outdoor Recreation, Johns Hopkins 1966 Dowdle B Investment Theory and Forest Management Planning, Yale School of Forestry Bulletin No 68 1982 Duerr W A The Fundamentals of Forestry Economics, McGraw-Hill 1960 Fedkiw J et al Financial Management of Large Forest Ownerships, Yale School of Forestry Bulletin No 66 1960 Goetz B Quantitative Methods—A Survey for Managers, McGraw-Hill 1965 Introduction to Work Study, International Labour Office Geneva 1959 Johnston D R Grayson A J & Bradley R T Forest Planning, Faber 1987 Lipsey R G An Introduction to Positive Economics, 2nd ed Weidenfeld & Nicolson 1966 R Economics: Australian Edition, Samuelson P A Hancock К & Wallace McGraw-Hill 1970 Schleifer R Analysis of Decisions under Uncertainty, McGraw-Hill 1969 EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for pass and honours.

405 REMOTE SENSING OF THE NATURAL ENVIRONMENT A course of 12 lectures, 27 hours practical work and field exercises.

SYLLABUS The principles, objectives and application of aerial remote sensing, as applied In natural resource studies. An introductory course of approximately nine lectures in the appreciation of the physical factors influencing aerial photography and aerial photo- interpretation Is given in the previous year. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: National Academy of Sciences Remote Sensing with Special Reference to Agriculture and Forestry, National Academy of Sciences 1970 Recommended for reference: American Society of Photogrammetry Manual of Photographic Interpre- tation, George Banta 1960 American Society of Photogrammetry Manual of Photogrammetry, George Banta 1966 Wolfe W L Handbook of Military Infrared Technology, USN Research Dept 1965 EXAMINATION One one-hour examination for pass and honours.

311 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

406 FOREST RESOURCE INVENTORY A course of 14 lectures, 21 hours laboratory work and field exercises. SYLLABUS The principles, objectives and application of integrated photo- Interpretation, with particular reference to forest inventory, photo-ecology and land use. FIELD WORK Two days field work. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Howard J A Aerial Photo-Ecology, Faber & Faber 1970 Recommended for reference: Hills G A Developing a Better Environment, Ontario Economic Council 1970 Loetsch F & Hailer K E Forest Inventory Vol 1 trans Brйnig E F. BLV 1964 EXAMINATION One one-hour examination for pass and honours.

407 ELEMENTS OF AERIAL PHOTOGRAMMETRY A course of 11 lectures, 30 hours practical work and field exercises. SYLLABUS An introduction to the principles of aerial photogrammetry as applied in natural resource studies. FIELD WORK Two days field work. BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Howard J A Aerial Photo-Ecology, Faber & Faber 1970 (b) Recommended for reference: American Society of Photogrammetry Manual of Photographic Interpreta- tion, George Banta Co 1960 American Society of Photogrammetry Manual of Photogrammetry, George Banta Co 1968 Spurr S H Photogrammetry and Photo-interpretation, Ronald Press 1960 CUP Tгorеу L G Handbook of Aerial Mapping and Photogrammetry, 1952 EXAMINATION One one-hour paper for pass and honours. 482 AGRICULTURE 201 SOIL SCIENCE Two lectures per week. SYLLABUS Soil genesis, principles of soil classification afd soil mapping. Soil erosion and conservation. Physics of soil in relation to plant growth: the importance of, and Inter- relationship between texture, structure, density, moisture, temperature and aeration of the soil. Chemistry of soil in relation to plant growth--clay mineralogy and soil colloids, ion exchange capacity and pH of soil. Chemistry of N, P and S

312 SCIENCE DEGREES IN FORESTRY

compounds in soll and their transformations mediated by microbial and other soil agents. Availability of K. Na, Ca and other metals in the soil. Soil trace elements and plant nutrition. Application and fate of soil aд- ditives--fertilizers, pesticides, etc. PRACTICAL WORK Approximately three hours per week. Exercises and demonstrations In soil classification, measurement of soil parameters—density, pH, texture etc. Soil analysis—the determination of major elements and selected trace elements in soil. Apparatus for practical soil science Is supplied by the School of Agriculture. Excursions will be arranged from time to time. BOOKS Prescribed textbook: Leeper G W. .Introduction to Soil Science 4th ed, MUP 1964 Recommended for reference: Alexander M Introduction to Soil Microbiology, Wiley 1967 Black C A Soil Plant Relationships 2nd ed, Wiley 1968 Black C A Methods of Soil Analysis, parts 1 & II, American Society of Agronomy 1965 Grim R E Clay Mineralogy, McGraw-Hill 1953 Hillei D Soil and Water, Academic 1971 Kohnke H Soil Physics, McGraw-Hill 1968 Leeper G W Six Trace Elements in Soils Their Chemistry as Micro- nutrients, MUP 1970 ‚darei A D & Peterson G H Soil Biochemistry, Marcel Dekker 1967 Russell E W R Soil Conditions and Plant Growth 9th ed, Longmans 1961 Stace H CT et al. A Handbook of Australian Soils, Rellim 1968 Stephens C G A Manual of Australian Soils, CSIRO 1956 Tisdale S L & Nelson W L Soil Fertility and Fertilizers 2nd ed, Mас- millan 1956 EXAMINATION In addition to a written examination in the fourth term, written and practical tests may be given throughout the year. Marks may also be given for assignments, projects and practical work. The timetable and the weighting given to each part of the examination will be published at the beginning of first term.

582 SURVEYING 205 SURVEYING As for 205 Surveying In BSc degree details. See page 223.

313 CHAPTER 9 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY The instruction in these courses is given partly in the University and partly in the Victorian College of Optometry, 374 Cardigan St., Carlton, Vic. 3053, which is an affiliated College of the University. The practice of optometry in Victoria is governed by an Act of Parliament which provides that only those whose names appear on the register shall be allowed to practise. The candidates who complete this course are eligible to have their names placed on the register. Regulation 3.76—Degree of Bachelor of Science in Optometry 1. Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Science in Optometry shall after matriculating pursue a course of study for four years and fulfil the conditions hereunder prescribed. 2. The course for this degree, the subjects of the course and the years to which they pertain, shall be as prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Science (hereinafter called 'the faculty'). 3. During each year of the course and between years of the course, a candidate shall perform laboratory work, attend demonstrations and undergo experience of such an extent and in such a manner as is prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty. Subject to dispensation by the faculty in special cases no candidate shall be admitted to examination In a subject In which he has not conformed with the preceding requirements unless he satisfy the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere. 4. The faculty may allow a candidate to substitute for any subject of his course another subject or subjects of a university course which in its opinion is of at least equal standard. Subject to the approval of the appropriate faculty, a candidate may compete for the exhibition, scholarship or prize in any subject which he is allowed so to substitute. Approval of any such change must be obtained from the faculty before entering for the subject concerned. 5. (1) To pass a year of a course a candidate shall comply with one of the following conditions— (a) he shall pass at an annual examination In or obtain credit for each subject of that year; or (b) he shall have been passed by the faculty in the year of the course as a whole. In awarding such pass the faculty shall take into account his performance in all subjects whether passed at one examination or more, and may take into account his performance in any work done during the year, in accordance with the principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. A candidate passed by the faculty in the year as a whole who has not passed at the annual examination in or obtained credit for any particular subject shall not be recorded as having passed in that subject, but shall be allowed to proceed with subjects of a later year of the course for which a pass In each subject may be prerequisite.

314 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY

(2) Where a candidate's course has been varied in accordance with the provisions of section 4, the faculty shall define the content of the candidate's year for the purpose of this section. 8. Except where permission Is given by the faculty a candidate shall pass one year of the course In accordance with the preceding section before being allowed to proceed to any subject of a succeeding year of the course. 7. A candidate may be awarded honours in any subject of a year except those designated in the details of course as of pass standard only. A candidate who obtains honours In any subject of a year may be placed In the class lists and be awarded a prize, exhibition or scholarship in accordance with the conditions prescribed in the regulations relating to that particular subject. Subject to such condition a candidate may be awarded a prize, exhibition or scholarship only if he has passed or obtained honours in not less than three subjects (including the particular subject In question) at the annual examination of the year concerned. 8. For the purpose of completing a qualification for the degree a candidate shall not except by special permission of the faculty retain credit for any subject for more than seven years. 9. A candidate who has passed in or obtained credit for each year of the course and has fulfilled the requirements of section 3 may be admitted to the degree.

Regulation 3.77—Degree of Master of Science in Optometry 1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science in Optometry shall after completing the course for the degree of Bachelor of Science in Optometry or after obtaining an equivalent qualification accepted by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Science pursue advanced studies or research for not less than one year as hereinafter provided. 2. A candidate for the degree of Master of Science in Optometry shall obtain the approval of the faculty for the subject or subjects of the work referred to In section 3 hereof. 3. (1) A candidate may proceed to the degree of Master of Science in Optometry by: (i) either (a) engaging in research (and, if required by the faculty, completing such studies and passing such examinations as the faculty may determine) and submitting a thesis satisfactory to the examiners embodying the results of such work; or (b) pursuing advanced studies and carrying out advanced work on a specific project approved by the faculty, and passing such examinations and submitting such reports thereon as may be determined by the faculty: (ii) passing the examination in one of the following: Science French or Science German or Science Russian or any other language approved by the faculty of Science as appropriate to the candidate's research or advanced studies; provided that a candidate who satisfies the faculty of his competence in French or German or Russian or In any other language approved by the faculty may be excused examination in the corresponding Science language subject.

315 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

(2) Any thesis submitted in accordance with paragraph (a) of sub- section 1 of this section shall be submitted within eighteen months of the date of commencement of work as a candidate: provided that the faculty may extend this period in any particular case. 4. The work undertaken pursuant to section 3 of the regulation shall be carried out in the departments of the University or the Victorian College of Optometry provided that with the approval of the faculty part of such work may be carried out in some other place in which case the work shall be supervised by a member of the teaching staff appointed by the faculty. 5. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the preceding sections a candidate may proceed to the degree of Master of Science in Optometry by (a) producing evidence satisfactory to the faculty that since graduating he has spent not less than three years acquiring proficiency in the practice of optometry; and (b) submitting a thesis satisfactory to the examiners, the subject or subjects of which has or have been approved by the faculty and which thesis is based on his original research work or an investigation of a topic related to optometry. Except with the permission of the faculty a candidate proceeding in accordance with the provisions of this section shall submit his thesis for examination within five years after obtaining the approval of the faculty to the subject or subjects thereof. 6. Should the work submitted by a candidate in accordance with the provisions of section 5 hereof have been undertaken in collaboration with others the candidate will be required to submit a signed statement as to the extent of his own share— (a) in planning the work, (b) in carrying out the work, and (c) in writing an account of the work. 7. For the examination of a thesis the faculty shall nominate two examiners, one of whom shall be chairman. The result may be pass, fail, or deferred. In the case of a deferred result the examiners shall indicate in what respects the material of the thesis should be modified before re-submission. In the case of a disagreement between the two examiners the faculty shall nominate a third examiner and in such case the decision of the majority shall be final. 8. A candidate who has fulfilled the requirements of this regulation and who has been passed by the examiners may be admitted to the degree of Master of Science in Optometry. OPTOMETRY COURSE FIRST YEAR-100 LEVEL 101 Biology 101 Chemistry 120 Physics or 140 Physics or 160 Physics 101 Pure Mathematics or 181 General Mathematics Vacation Work—Four weeks experience SECOND YEAR-200 LEVEL 210 Applied Optics 203 Ocular Anatomy 240 Physiological Optics

316 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY

201 Physiology 201 and 202 Biochemistry 201 Histology 220 Dispensing Practice—Two weeks: vacation course THIRD YEAR-300 LEVEL 310 Applied Optics 320 Optometry 203 Microbiology (Optometry) 308 Ocular Pharmacology 330 Principles of Ocular Disease 340 Physiological Optics 304 Biophysics and Nervous System 350 Scientific Method 307 General Pathology Vacation Work—Five weeks experience FOURTH YEAR-400 LEVEL 410 Optometry 420 Public Health Optometry DATES IN 1973 Lecture dates for optometry students are those for the Science faculty, but fourth year students are required to attend the clinic in the following clinical terms: 1 st term: Monday, February 12, to Friday, May 18. 2nd term: Monday, lay 28, to Friday, August 3. 3rd term: Monday, August 20, to Friday, October 19. FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE See chapter 2 for details for science students generally. The following awards are specifically for optometry students. Entrance Awards—Optometry Australian Optometrical Association Scholarship (š1,750 payable In an initial Instalment of $250 and three further annual instalments of 4500). Travel and living allowance Is payable without means test if the holder lives outside the metropolitan area. Awarded on Higher School Certificate results. Secretary, Victorian College of Optometry. Australian Optometrical Association (Victorian Division) Scholarship ($800 payable in three equal annual Instalments). Awarded on Higher School Certificate results. Secretary, Victorian College of Optometry. Martin Wella Bursary (4800 payable In three equal annual Instalments). Awarded on Higher School Certificate results. Secretary, Victorian College of Optometry. International Optical Corporation Bursary ($200 payable In one Instal- ment). Awarded on Higher School Certificate results. Secretary, Victorian College of Optometry. Australian Optometrical Association Interstate Scholarships (3) (each 01,750 payable in an Initial Instalment of 4250 and three further annual instalments of 4500). Travel and living allowance Is payable without means test If the holder lives away from home. Awarded on Higher School Certificate results, and personal assessment at an Interview. Federal Secretary, Australian Optometrical Association, suite 4, 609 St Kilda Rd, Melbourne 3004.

317

FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Undergraduate Awards Second year: 240 Physiological Optics: W. Wood & Co. Exhibition ($32). Secretary, Optometry School. Third Year: 320 Optometry: Lewis R. Slade Prize ($21). Secretary, Optometry School. 330 Principles of Ocular Disease: Anon Exhibition ($30). Secretary, Optometry School. Optometry (all third year subjects): A. B. Colechin Exhibition ($30). Secretary, Optometry School. Fourth Year: 410 Optometry: Arthur Cocks & Co. Exhibition ($30). Secretary, Optometry School. Howard S. Bell Prize (Essay) ($30). Secre- tary, Optometry School. VACATION WORK—MINIMUM FACULTY REQUIREMENTS Students are required to undertake vacation work appropriate to their course as summarized below. Courses of instruction provided by faculty are shown in brackets. Where vacation work other than these formal courses must be undertaken it is the student's responsibility to ensure that a 'Vacation Work Certificate' signed by the employer is lodged with the faculty secretary before the end of first term following the long vacation in each year. Blank 'Vacation Work Certificates' for presentation to the employer should be obtained from the secretary.

Between Between Between 1st and 2nd Year 2nd and 3rd Year 3rd and 4th Year BSc (Optometry) 4 weeks (220 Dispensing 5 weeks approved course employment Practice) employment

Note: 'Approved employment' means experience satisfactory to the faculty in an industry, institution or practice approved by faculty.

SPECIAL ENTRY CONDITIONS Subject Other requirements 240 Physiological It is assumed that 201 Physiology, 201 Bio- Optics chemistry and 201 Histology are being studied concurrently or have been studied previously. 320 Optometry Passes in 203 Ocular Anatomy, 240 Physio- logical Optics. It is assumed that 330 Prin- ciples of Ocular Disease is being studied concurrently (or has been passed previously). 330 Principles of It is assumed that 320 Optometry is being Ocular Disease studied concurrently and that 307 General Pathology and 203 Microbiology are being studied concurrently or have been studied previously.

318 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS Details of first year units and later year units provided by other departments (i.e. 201 Physiology, 201 and 202 Biochemistry, 201 Histology, 203 Microbiology (Optometry), 203 Ocular Anatomy, 307 General Patho- logy, 304 Biophysics and Nervous System and 306 Ocular Pharmacology are given in Chapter 4.

401 OPTOMETRY

200 LEVEL 210 APPLIED OPTICS A course of two lectures and three hours laboratory work and one tutorial per week during first and second terms. APPLIED OPTICS LECTURE COURSE 36 lectures. 18 tutorials. SYLLABUS

Geometrical Optics. Definitions and liмitations of Gaussian optics. R.- vision of thin lens theory, surface power and lens power, effectivity and prismatic effect. Toric lens notation, simple transposition, calculation of image parameters. Thick lens theory, cardinal points, equivalent and vertex powers, the Lagrange Invariant, accurate transposition of toric lenses. Apertures and stopa. Magnification of optical systems. The aberration polynomial, description of the primary expansion terms. Optical materials. Optical instruments. Physical Optics. Image quality assessment by ray and wave tests. Fourier analysis and the optical transfer function. Interference and Inter- ferometers, diffraction. Thin film optics. Crystal optics and elliptical polarization, the Poincaré sphere. Physics of light sources, spectral broadening. Lasers, Population inversion, rate equations, mode structure. Holography. Fibre optics. The nature of light. APPLIED OPTICS: LABORATORY COURSE 64 hours. Examined continuously throughout the course. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Tolansky S Revolution in Optics, Penguin 1968 Prescribed textbook: 'Longhurst R S Geometrical and Physical Optics, 2nd ed Longmans 1967 Recommended for reference: Bennett A G Emsley and Swain's Opthalmic Lenses, Vol I Hatton 1968 Born M & Wolf E Principles of Optics, 3rd ed Pergamon 1965 Fincham F WA Optics, 7th ed letton Press 1965 Morgan J Introduction to Geometric end Physical Optics, Mclraw-liIg EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers, one In the June and one in the August examination period.

319 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

220 DISPENSING PRACTICE An intensive two week course in optical dispensing held immediately following the second year November examination period. The course will comprise two lectures and four and a half hours practical work each day. SYLLABUS Frame description and measurement. Practical aspects of neutralization and transposition. Lens marking, cutting, edging and fitting. Grooving and drilling lenses. Prescription verification, the vertometer, strain testing. Lens manufacture, surfacing. Facial measurements, frame selection and fitting, frame adjustment, positioning of multifocal lenses. PRACTICAL WORK Practical experience in lens neutralization, marking, cutting, edging and fitting, prescription verification for both single vision and multifocal lenses. Demonstrations and practice in frame adjustment. Visits to supply house laboratories and a spectacle frame factory. BOOKS Bennett A G Emsley & Swain's Ophthalmic Lenses, Hatton 1968 Kozol F Ophthalmic Fitting and Adjusting, Chilton 1958 Bennett A G Ophthalmic Prescription Work, Hatton Press 1963 Measurement of Spectacles, British Standard 3199: 1960 'Spectacle Lenses, Australian Standard Т41-1969 EXAMINATION There will be no formal examination. Progress will be assessed on the basis of performance during the course and completed dispensing.

240 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS A course of three lectures and four hours of practical work per week throughout the year.

VISUAL FUNCTIONS OF MAN 28 lectures during first term. Specification of the stimulus; the radiometric and photometric quantities. The light sense: spectral luminous efficiency; absolute threshold and quantum effects; light and dark adaptation: increment thresholds. Temporal resolution: flicker and transient stimulation; after images. The form sense: visual acuity. The colour sense: the trivariance of vision and the systems for specifying chromaticity; colour discriminations; theories of colour vision. Perception of visual space: projection, retinal correspondence, the horopter, fusion and stereopsis.

PHYSIOLOGY OF THE VISUAL PROCESSES 16 lectures during second and third term. The functional architecture of the retina. Directional sensitivity of rods and cones. The chemical structure and photochemistry of visual pigments. Photochemical and neural events underlying stimulus detection and the perception of contour and colour. Adaptation. Neurophyslology of binocular vision.

320 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY

MUSCULAR MECHANISMS OF THE EYE 17 lectures during second term. Extra-ocular musculature; the mechanics of translatory, saccadic and slow pursuit eye movements, centre of rotation, Listings Law. Control theory. Binocular eye movements. Herings Law. Physiological characteristics of extraocular muscle. Accommodation, accommodative-convergence synkinesis. Pupillary reactions. Control system for fixation, positions of ocular rest, fixation disparity. VEGETATIVE PHYSIOLOGY OF THE EYE 7 lectures during third term. The cornea; the anatomy and physical properties of the cornea; the chemistry and metabolism of the cornea, corneal permeability, turgescence and maintenance of transparency. The sclera. Formation and circulation of aqueous humour, Intraocular pressure. The vascular supply of the eye. The physical properties, chemistry and metabolism of the lens and vitreous. The lacrimal apparatus. OPTICS OF THE EYE 7 lectures during third term. The optical system of the visual organs of vertebrates and invertebrates. Gaussian optics of the human eye, schematic eyes, first order aberrations, transfer functions of the eye and visual system, effect of pupil size and accommodation. Resolution and visual acuity. The eye and optical instruments. PRACTICAL WORK One 4-hour practical class per week. The aim of the practical classes is to familiarise students with experi• mental technique and to explore characteristics of visual function. BOOKS Preliminary reading: Conrad G & Rudolph M eds Light and Vision, Life Science Library 1987 Pirenne M H Vision and the Eye, Science Paperbacks 1987 Tansley K Vision in Vertebrates, Science Paperbacks 1965 Prescribed textbooks: Dayson H The Eye, Vole 1-IV Academic Press 1962-9 'Graham C H Vision and Visual Perception, Wiley 1965 Le Grand Y Light Colour and Vision, 2nd ed Chapman & Hall 1968 Recommended for reference: Duke-Elder S ed System of Ophthalmology, Vol IV Klmpton 1988 Emsley H H Visual Optics, 5th ed Hatton Press 1953 Hogan M J Alvarado J A & Weddell J E Histology of the Human Eye, Saunders 1971 Le Grand Y Form and Space Vision, Indiana UP 1967 Ogle K N Researches In Binocular Vision, Haffner 1984 Pinse A & Van Heyningen R Biochemistry of the Eye, Blackwell Polyak S The Vertebrate Visual System, Chicago UP 1957 Walls G L The Vertebrate Eye and Its Adaptive Radiation, Haffner 1983 Wright W D Researches on Normal and Defective Colour Vision, Mosby 1947

321 L FACULTY OF SCIENCE

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers. Examinations will be held in the November examination period. Practical work will be assessed continuously throughout the year.

300 LEVEL 310 APPLIED OРТICS A course of two lectures and two hours practical work each week throughout the year. APPLIED OPTICS: OPTICAL DESIGN 18 lectures and 36 hours of practical work during first and second term. Meridional and paraxial ray tracing. Spherical aberration of single surfaces, thin lenses and systems of lenses. Optical tolerances. Chromatic aberration. Extra-axial aberrations. Skew ray tracing, spot diagrams. As- sessment of optical performance.

PRACTICAL WORK Exercises in programming optical calculations using a digital computer.

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: McCracken D D A Guide to Fortran IV Programming, Wiley Conrad" A E Applied Optics and Optical Design, Dover Publications Inc EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper in the August examination period and assessment of practical work during the course.

APPLIED OPTICS: PHOTOMETRY AND COLORIMETRY 9 lectures during first term. Basic radiometric and photometric concepts and units. Thermal radiators. Methods of measurement. Colorimetry; basic colorimetric concepts, the CIE colorimetric system. Uniform colour scales. Metamerism. Colour rendering. PRACTICAL WORK Computational exercises and demonstrations In the photometry laboratory. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Wyszecki G & Stiles W S Colour Science, Wiley 1967 Recommended for reference: Le Grand Y Light Colour and Vision, 2nd ed Chapman & Hall 1968 Walsh J W T Photometry, Constable 1958 CIE International Lighting Vocabulary, 3rd ed CIE Publication No 17 1970 EXAMINATION One 1-hour written paper in the June examination period.

APPLIED OPTICS: OPHTHALMIC APPLICATIONS 23 lectures and 14 hours practical work during second and third terms. Ophthalmic materials. Absorptive Lenses. Aberrations of ophthalmic lenses. Design of ophthalmic lenses, aspheric lenses. Obliquely crossed

322 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY

cylinders, prismatic effect of decentred toric lenses. Multifocal lens design, prism jump and prism control. Optical problems of high power corrections and in the correction of an1sometropie. Optics of contact lenses. Design of lenses for correction of sub-normal vision. PRACTICAL WORK Computational exercises with ophthalmic lenses and ophthalmic corrections. Books • Bennett A G Emsley & Swain's Ophthalmic Lenses, Vol I Hatton Press 1968 •Bennett A G Optics of contact lenses, Association of Dispensing Op- ticians 1966 Emaley I I The Aberrations ot Thin Lenses, Hatton Press Morgan M & Peters I B The Optics of Ophthalmic Lenses, University of California 1948 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper in the November examination period. 320 OPTOMETRY A course of 72 lectures and 107 hours of practical and clinical work throughout the year.

OPTOMETRY Refractive Anomalies of the eye. Emmetropia and ametropia: character, Incidence and distribution; alterations of refractive state with age. Theories for the genesis of refractive state; genetic, embryological and environmental factors. Optical components of the eye and their change during growth and ageing; in vivo component metrology. Anieometropia and aniseikonia. Anomalies of accommodation and presbyopia. Diagnostic and therapeutic techniques, surgical procedures for Influencing refractive error. Refraction: keratometry, retinoscopy, ophthalmoscopy, objective op- tometers, subjective methods. Anomalies of Binocular Vision. Classification, aetiology, symptomatology, signs, and prognosis of disorders of binocular fixation. The clinical techniques for detailed investigation and measurement, In- cluding graphical analysis. Orthoptics. Treatment of binocuiar disorders including the principles of surgical treatment. Case History Taking end Case Assessment. Method of history taking. Symptomatology of ocular and visual disorders. Assessment of examination findings and clinical decision making. EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper in the November examination period.

CLINICAL METHODS Two 2-hour classes per week throughout first and second term involving demonstration and practice of clinical methods for the determination of refraction, assessment and treatment of disorders of ocular motility afd binocular co-ordination, and the detection of ocular disease. EXAMINATION A clinical and oral examination held in the August examination period. Students who obtain a grade D in this examination may be admitted to a special examination in the November examination period.

323 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

CLINICAL PRACTICE One 3-hour session each week during third term examining patients attending the general clinic one 2-hour session each week devoted to an introduction to contact lens practice. In order to proceed to this unit students must obtain at least a grade D at the terminal examination for the unit Clinical Methods. EXAMINATION Progressive assessment throughout the term

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Emsley H H Visual Optics, 5th ed Hatton Press 1953 Cashel) G T W & Durran I M Handbook of Orthoptic Principles 2nd ed. Livingstone 1971 Lyle T K & Wybar K C Practical Orthoptics in the Treatment of Squint, 5th ed Lewis 1967 Recommended for reference: Allen J H ed Strabismus Ophthalmic Symposia Il and Ill, Mosby Borlsh I M Clinical Refraction, Professional Press 1970. Duke-Elder $ System of Ophthalmology, Vol V Kimpton 1970 Giles G H The Principles and Practice of Refraction, 2nd ed Hammond 1965 Note: Students must provide themselves with the following: hand ophthalmoscope, hand slit lamp or X10 monocular loupe, pre- focussed torch, retinoscope, set of Traquair targets, inter-pupillary dis- set of pliers, optical tance rule, red-green goggles, Schiоtz tonometer, screwdriver and 2 white coats. All equipment must be approved by a member of staff before purchasing.

330 PRINCIPLES OF OCULAR DISEASE A course of two lectures, one tutorial per week and clinical work throughout the year. SYLLABUS Pathology and Clinical Manifestations of Ocular Disease. A study of the pathology and the clinical manifestations of the diseases of the following structures: conjunctiva, sclera, cornea, iris, ciliary body, aqueous humour, crystalline lens, vitreous humour, choroid, retina, visual pathways, related nervous structures, lacrimal apparatus and orbit. Glaucoma. Symp- tomatic disturbances of vision, headache. Nystagmus. Eye signs of general disease. Clinical Techniques for Eliciting Signs of Ocular Disease. An introduction to clinical techniques for the recognition of ocular disease resulting in structural and functional changes in the eye, visual and motor pathways and the ocular adnexa. CLINICAL WORK Two hours per week during the second and third terms on the clinical examination and study of patients presenting signs of ocular disease. Students are also required to attend the practical classes and clinical training of 322 Clinical Methods and 323 Clinical Practice.

324 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY

В OO КS Prescribed textbooks: Ballantyne A J & Michaelson I C Textbook of the Fundus of the Eye, 2nd ed, Livingstone 1970 •The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, Merck Sharp & Dohrne Research Laboratories Doggart J H Ocular Signs in Slit-lamp Microscopy, Kimpton 1949 •Duke-Elder S Parsons' Diseases of the Eye, 15th ed Churchill 1970 Hogan M J & Zimmerman L E Ophthalmic Pathology, 2nd ed 1962 Recommended for reference: Abrahamson I A Color Atlas of Anterior Segment Eye Diseases, McGraw- Hill 1964 Arruga H ed Retinal Detachment, Amer Acad Opthal & Otolaryng 1955 Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology, Vols 7 8 9 10 11 and 12 Kimpton 1965-1971 Goar E L Slit-Lamp Biomicroscopy, Amer Aced Ophthal & Otolaryng 1954 Greer C H Ocular Pathology, Blackwell 1963 Harrington D O The Visual Fields, 3rd ed Mosby 1971 Kolker A E & Hetherington J Jr Becker & Shaffer's Diagnosis and Therapy of the Glaucomas, 3rd ed Mosby 1970 Perkins E S & Hansel' P An Atlas of Diseases of the Eye, Churchill 1957 Rucker C W The Interpretation of Visuel Fields, Amer Aced Ophthal & Otolaryng 1957 Scott G I Traquairs Clinical Perimetry, 7th ed Kimpton 1957 Supar H S The Glaucomas, 2nd ed Mosby 1957 Theodore F H & Schlossman A Ocular Allergy, Williams & Wilkins 1958 Thiel R Atlas of Diseases of the Eye, Vols I & I1 1st Eng ed Elsevier 1963 Walsh F B Clinical Neuro-Ophthalmology, Williams & Wilkins 1957 Wolff E A Pathology of the Eye, Lewis 1951 EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper, one oral/practical examination and a slide test. 340 PHYSIOLOGICAL OPTICS: NEUROPHYSIOLOGY OF VISION A course of one lecture and one 2-hour seminar each week during second term. The study of neurological activity related to the visual process. PRESCRIBED READING Selected papers from the current literature. EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper in the August examination period and progressive assessment In seminars. 350 SCIENTIFIC METHOD A course of 18 lectures in first and second terms with computation exercises. Principles and methods of drawing conclusions from Investigations. Sampling methods. The design of clinical experiments, trials and surveys. Methods of presenting data. Probability. Significance tests. BOlKS 'Langley R Practical Statistics, 2nd ed Pan 1970

325 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Siegel S Non Parametric Statistics, McGraw-Hill 1956 Wonnacott R J & Wonnacott T Introductory Statistics, Wiley 1969 EXAMINATION One 2-hour written paper in the August examination period and assessment of exercises completed during the course.

304 400 LEVEL 410 OPTOMETRY A course of clinical training together with lectures, tutorials and practical work. SYLLABUS Management of Special Cases (1 lecture per week). Anisei- konia: analytic discussion of distortion in stereoscopic perception in space, the induced effect, asymmetric convergence; experimental and theoretical basis for aniseikonia; theory of correction of aniseikonia; design of eikonic and isogonal lenses. Management of patients with subnormal vision. Aphakia; optical solution to high power corrections. Refrac- tion in special cases. Abnormal colour vision; characteristics and diagnosis of abnormal colour vision; theories of abnormal colour vision; ac- quired defects. Contact lens practice (1 lecture per week). Contact lens design related to physical and physiological variables' materials and manufacture; selection of patients; measuring instruments; physical fitting of corneal and haptic lenses; assessment of lenses; pathological changes associated with the wearing of contact lenses. Special Topics in the Recognition of Ocular Disease (1 lecture per week). Systemic disease with ocular manifestations. A detailed study of selected aspects of ocular disease and techniques for recognition of ocular disease. Neurogenic disorders; aphasia and alexia. Diseases of the ocular adnexa. Behavioural disorders; psychiatric disturbances of vision; problems of perception and motivation in abnormal cases; ocular pros- thetics. Practice Management (1 lecture per week). History of optometry. Pro- fessional conduct. Ethics. Legal status of optometry, the Registration Act of 1935. Practice management: establishment of practice, assessment of fees, accounting, taxation, Insurance. TUTORIALS (One hour per week) Tutorials will be devoted to relating the studies of second and third years to clinical decision making and will also take selected topics from the current literature. CLINICAL OBSERVATION (Two hours per week) Examination and study of patients exhibiting unusual clinical features. CLINICAL TRAINING (16 hours per week) Students are required to attend the routine, orhoptic and contact lens clinics of the College of Optometry for 33 weeks of the year. PRACTICAL WORK Each student dispenses the prescriptions he writes during his attendance at clinics. ASSIGNMENTS An essay of approximately 4,000 words on a prescribed subject is to be submitted by the last day of first term.

326 SCIENCE DEGREES IN OPTOMETRY

Students will spend three days visiting private practices. BOOKS Prescribed textbooks: Ogle K N Researches in Binocular Vision, Hafner 1964 Bannon R E Clinical Manual on Aniseikonia, American Optical Co, Buffalo, 1965 Mandell R B Contact Lens Practice. Basic and Advanced, Thomas 1965 'Bennett A G Optics of Contact Lenses, 4th ed Association of Dis- pensing Opticians 1966 Recommended for reference: Girard L J et al Corneal Contact Lenses, Mosby 1987 Girard L J ed Corneal end Sclera/ Contact Lenses, Mosby 1987 Grosvenor T P Contact Lens Theory and Practice, Professional Press 1963 Hirsch M J & Wick R E eds Vision of Children, Chilton 1963 Hirsch M J & Wick R E eds Vision of the Ageing Patient, Chilton 1960 Bier N Correction of Sub-normal Vision, Butterworth 1980 Fonda G Management of the Patient with Subnormal Vision, Mosby 1965 Elmstrom G P Optometric Practice Management, Chilton 1963 Wright W D Researches In Normal and Defective Colour Vision, Mosby 1947 EXAMINATION Two 3-hour and one 2-hour clinical examinations covering the whole field of the practice of optometry. Three 3-hour written papers. Two oral examinations. The student's work throughout the year will be taken into consideration at the annual examinations. 420 PUBLIC HEALTH OPTOMETRY A course of two lectures per week during first and second terms. SYLLABUS Public Health. Concepts and methodology of public health. Organization of health services in Australia, health planning and administration. Socio- logical patterns influencing demands for health services, health manpower requirements. The delivery of health care; role of government, statutory and voluntary agencies; nature of comprehensive health services. Role of optometry in the team approach to health care: optometric needs of particular groups, especially the indigent, Institutionalized, geriatric and pediatric populations. Preventive and occupational optometry Alteration of the task and environment to improve visual performance. The principles of human factors engineering and examples of their application to visual problems in land transport, aviation and in industry. The elements of illuminating engineering, Including an advanced treatment of photometric concepts and computational methods; operating principles and practical uses of various types of lamp. Prevention of eye Injury. Principles of Industrial safety, incidence of eye Injuries, ophthalmic protective materials, methods of providing eye protection. Occupational eye diseases and ocular first aid. Vision in relation to the demands of the task. The evidence relating vision and performance in iпдивtгу, commerce and schools. Methods of determining visual standards. Visual job analysis and visual screening.

327 FACULTY OF SCIENCE

Books Prescribed textbooks: Burton L E & Smith H H Public Health and Community Medicine, Wil- liams & Wilkins 1970 Kuhn H S Eyes and Industry, Chilton 1950 • Artificial Lighting of Buildings. ASCA 30-1965 Standards Assoc of Aust •Information Sheet No. 11 Artificial Lighting in Factory and Office, CIS 1965 Fitts P M & Posner M I Human Performance, Bookes-Cole 1967 Industrial Eye Protection CZ7 Z7 & Z45-1967 Standards Assoc of Aust Recommended for reference: Second Workshop Conference on Public Health & Optometric Care, Amer Optometric Assoc 1968 First Aid for Industrial Eye Injuries, Department of Labour and National Service 1954 Keeney A H Lens Materials in the Prevention of Eye Injuries, Thomas 1957 Tiffin J & McCormick E J Industrial Psychology, 4th ed Prentice-Hall 1949 Keeney A H Industrial and Traumatic Ophthalmology, Mosby 1964 McCormick E J Human Engineering, McGraw-Hill 1957 Williams J L Accidents and Ill-Health at Work, Staples Press 1960 •General Principles for Safe Working in Industry, Standards Assoc of Aust •Recording of Industrial Accidents, Standards Assoc of Aust •Eye Protection in Industry, Data Sheet 006 Not Safety Council Cotton H Principles of Illumination, Chapman & Hall 1960 Keitz H A E Lighting Calculations and Measurements, Philips 1955 Hewitt H & Vause A S Lamps and Lighting, Arnold 1966 Accident Prevention—International Labour Office, ILO Geneva 1961 Industrial Accident Statistics, Commonwealth Bureau Census & Statistics Victorian Office. EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper in the November examination period.

328 SUMMARY OF FEES Where possibI e, fees should be paid into a branch of the National Bank of Australasia. There is a branch of this bank in the University grounds. A special pay-in slip is issued by the bank and this should accompany enrolment or entry form. Fees for University courses may be paid either terminally or for the whole year. Fees for the whole year or for first term are paid when enrolments are lodged (i.e. in January). Fees for second term are paid when re-enrolments for second term are lodged (i.e. by the end of first term). Fees for third term are paid by the week before the end of second term. In addition to the comprehensive fees given below, students are required to pay the following general service fees and Library fee: (a) An annual Sports Fee of $16.50, which is reduced to $8.40 for part-time students. (b) An annual Union Fee of $36.00. which is reduced to $18.00 for part-time students. (c) An annual Students' Representative Council Fee of $6.00 paid by all students except those enrolled for external studies. (d) An annual Library Fee of $9.00, which is reduced to $4.50 for part-time students.

DIPLOMA COURSES

Diploma in Music Town and Concert Diploma Physical Education Social Studies Regional Planning in Musje

Firat Year .. $456.00 $456.00 $456.00 $456.00 Second Year 456.00 456.00 456.00 456.00 Third Year 456.00 456.00

Total $1.368.00 $912.00 $1,368.00 $912.00 DEGREE COURSES

Agricul- Science Engin- Applied Architec- Com- Dental - Town and Veteг- Year tural Arts Building Едисв eering. Science ture merce Science tion (Educa- Law Medicine Music science Regional 1Пану Science tion) Surveying Planning Science

1 , / / е 8 • 8 • 8 First 626.00 528.00 458.00 458.00 45.600 468.00 528.00 458.00 628.00 628.00 468.00 528.00 456.00 628.00 458.00 528.00 Second 528.001 628.00 456.00 456.00 456.00 458.00 528.00 458.00 528.00 528.00 466.00 628.00 468.00 528.00 456.00 628.00 Third 628.00 628.00 458.00 458.00 450.00 458.00 528.00 628,00 628.00 456.00 591.00 J 468.00 628.00 456.00 628.00 Fourth 628.00 528.00 458.00 456.002 458.00 458.002 528.00 528.00 528.00 458.00 628.00 458.00 628.002 456.00 528.006 Fifth 456.00 528.00 649.004 628.006 Sixth 548.00

e е / s 1 t / / е 8 1 8 / е 2112.00 2112.00 2280.00 1368.00 1824.00 1368.00 2540.00 912.00 2112.00 2112.00 1824.00 3372.00 1824.00 1584.00 1824.00 2540.00 1824.002 1824.002 2112.002

1 Also accommodation fees while in residence et Mt. Derdmut Field Station, $600- 2 Honours Degree. includes Hospital Entrance fee of 883 which Is paid to the hospital concerned 4 Includes residence (8100) and caution money (821) paid to Royal Women's Hospital 5 Include' residence (820) paid to Royal Women's Hospital 8 Also accommodation fees while in residence at WerdЬes Clinical Centre, $525

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s: The University of Melbourne

Title: Handbook: Faculty of Science 1973

Date: 1973

Persistent Link: http://hdl.handle.net/11343/128812